HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553, M554, M555

HP Color LaserJet Managed E55040

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M577, MFP M578
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E57540
Service Manual

www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet www.hp.com/colorljM577mfp
www.hp.com/support/colorlj552 www.hp.com/colorljM578mfp
www.hp.com/support/colorlj553 www.hp.com/colorljE55040
www.hp.com/support/colorlj554 www.hp.com/colorljE57540mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552,
M553, M544, M555, MFP M577, MFP M578,
Managed E55040, and Managed MFP
E57540 - Service Manual

SUMMARY

Learn about printer theory of operation, how to diagnose and solve printer problems, and how to remove and
replace supported printer service parts.
Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2021 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 4, 12/2024
Revision history

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision history

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

4 12/2024 Corrected part number for ISA whole

Unit and updated steps for Remove and
replace.

Removal and replacement: Image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540) on page
589

3 10/2024 Corrected Part number for Cable and

HDMI 4.3

The part is corrected to:

RK2-6064-000CN Cable, HDMI control
panel for 4.3 in control panel (M553x/
E55040)

2 9/2024 Added part not previously in manual:

Cable, HDMI control panel for 4.3
in control panel (M553x/E55040) -
B5L24-67903

1.12 6/2024 Correct typos M557 to correctly read

M577 throughout manual in 28 places.

1.11 10/2023 Updated Image scanner part number to

"B5L46-67912". See the following topics:

Removal and replacement: Image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540) on page
589

Scanner tests on page 208

Document feeder and image scanner

(M577/M578/E57540) on page 1984

iii
 Table Revision history (continued)

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

1.10 3/2022 Updated procedure note for ITB

with: "For late production M552/M553/
E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/
M555/M578 printers, this ITB spring is
not installed. " See and Remove the ITB
on page 563. and Install the ITB on page
567

1.9 9/2021 Updated DC controller (DCC) part

numbers for M552, M553, M577,
E55040, and E57540. See Removal and
replacement: DC controller (DCC) on
page 912 and Parts and diagrams:
Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on page 2000.

1.8 9/2020 Migration into SDL Tridion Docs.

RRP/TTS structure changed to combined

service manual (CSRM) format.

Updated content to include the M554,

M555, and MFP M578 printers.

Added M554 control panel removal. See

Removal and replacement: Control panel
(M552dn/M553n/dn/M554) on page 800.

Added M555 control panel removal. See

Removal and replacement: Control panel
(M553x/M555/E55040) on page 489.

Added M554/M555/M578 toner

cartridges part numbers. See Removal
and replacement: Toner cartridges on
page 412.

Minor edits and inclusions per HP Tech

Marketing Engineer comments.

iv Revision history
Table Revision history (continued)

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

1.6 6/2020 Updated the error codes and control

panel message troubleshooting topic.
See Control panel messages document
(CPMD) on page 309.

Updated the firmware upgrades topic.

See Firmware upgrades on page 154.

Changes in part numbers/descriptions

in the following list are reflected globally
throughout the service manual.

● Hard-disk drive (HDD) kit part,

see Removal and replacement:
Hard-disk drive (HDD) (M552/M553/
M554/M555/E55040) on page 430.

● Dual in-line memory module part,

see Removal and replacement:
Dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
(M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040)
on page 448.

● ADF kit (Workflow/Enterprise),

see Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (M577/M578/
E57540) on page 573.

● Document feeder rollers,

seeRemoval and replacement:
Document feeder rollers (M577/
M578/E57540) on page 532.

● Tray 2-X paper pickup roller and

separation rollers, see Removal
and replacement: Tray 2-X paper
pickup roller and separation roller
assemblies on page 547.

● ITB, see Removal and replacement:

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on
page 562.

● Scanner control board, see

Removal and replacement:
Scanner control board (SCB) (M577/
M578/E57540) on page 583.

Accessories tables updated. See

Supplies and accessories on page 1978.

1.5 1/2020 Updated Document feeder rollers

firmware reset instructions. See
Removal and replacement: Document
feeder (M577/M578/E57540) on page
573

Updated the ITB (part number) removal

topic, see Removal and replacement:
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page
562

v
 Table Revision history (continued)

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

1.4 7/2019 Updated content to include the

managed E55040 and E57540 printers.

Updated additional service and support

pages, see HP service and support on
page viii.

Updated the upper cover (part numbers)

removal topic. See Removal and
replacement: Upper cover (M553/M555/
E55040) on page 727.

Updated the formatter (M552/

M553/ E55040) (part numbers)
removal topic. See Removal and
replacement: Formatter (M552/M553/
M554/M555/E55040) on page 964.

Updated the fuser power supply (part

numbers) removal topic. See Removal
and replacement: Fuser power supply
(FPS) on page 998.

Updated the low-voltage power supply

(part numbers) removal topic. See
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage
power supply (LVPS) on page 1009.

Added the fixed tray guide install topic.

See Removal and replacement: Fixed
tray guide kit on page 541.

Updated the document feeder and

scanner whole units part numbers
topic. See Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540) on page
1984.

vi Revision history
Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vii
 HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

viii HP service and support

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

ix
 Table of contents

1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 1

Information (document feeder and scanner)........................................................................................................................................................... 2
Document feeder and scanner front view...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Specifications (document feeder and scanner).................................................................................................................................................... 3
Technical specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Information (base printer)....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Printer front view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)............................................................................................. 6
Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)..............................................................................................7
Printer front view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)................................................................................................................................7
Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)............................................................................................................................... 8
Configuration (base printer) ...............................................................................................................................................................................................10
Configuration (base printer M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040).......................................................................................10
Configuration (base printer M577, M578, and E57540).......................................................................................................................... 11
Specifications (base printer).............................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Technical specifications (M552/M553)............................................................................................................................................................ 13
Technical specifications (M554/M555)............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Technical specifications (E55040) ......................................................................................................................................................................16
Technical specifications (M577).............................................................................................................................................................................17
Technical specifications (M578)............................................................................................................................................................................19
Technical specifications (E57540)...................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Printer dimensions (SFP) ............................................................................................................................................................................................24
Printer dimensions (MFP) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................27
Printer space requirements.................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .............................................................................. 29
Operating-environment range ..............................................................................................................................................................................30
Information (input devices).................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
550-sheet paper feeder front view..................................................................................................................................................................... 31

2 Printer installation and maintenance................................................................................................................................................................................ 32

Document feeder / scanner .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP) ..................................................................... 33
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges....................................................................................................................................... 34
Base printer ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
Formatter accessories ...............................................................................................................................................................................................37
Supplies..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................37

x
 Security setup................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Advanced security configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................ 41
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).................................................................................................... 41
Security tab .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence......................................................................................................................................................... 43
Dynamic security................................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Printer security features................................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Security statements .............................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Assign an administrator password............................................................................................................................................. 45
IP Security......................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks.............................................................................46
Lock the formatter...................................................................................................................................................................................46
Cleaning.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Print a cleaning page .........................................................................................................................................................................................47
Automatic cleaning page ...............................................................................................................................................................................47
Clean the Tray 1 rollers.....................................................................................................................................................................................48
Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller...................................................................................................................................................... 49
Remove the Tray 1 separation roller............................................................................................................................................. 51
Clean the Tray 1 rollers.......................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Clean the Tray 2-X rollers................................................................................................................................................................................ 54
Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly......................................................................................................... 55
Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller.......................................................................................................................................60
Clean the Tray 2 rollers......................................................................................................................................................................... 62
Input devices.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................63
Clean the Tray 2-X rollers...........................................................................................................................................................................................63
Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly....................................................................................................................63
Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller..................................................................................................................................................69
Clean the Tray 2 rollers.....................................................................................................................................................................................70

3 Theory of operation.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................72
Document feeder / scanner ...............................................................................................................................................................................................73
Document feed system...............................................................................................................................................................................................73
Sensors in the document feeder..............................................................................................................................................................73
Document feeder paper path .....................................................................................................................................................................74
Document feeder simplex operation.....................................................................................................................................................75
Document feeder e-duplex operation...................................................................................................................................................76
Deskew operation ................................................................................................................................................................................................76
Document feeder hinges................................................................................................................................................................................77
Scanning and image capture system...............................................................................................................................................................78
Base printer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................80
Basic operation................................................................................................................................................................................................................80
Sequence of operation ....................................................................................................................................................................................81
Formatter-control system.........................................................................................................................................................................................83
Power management ..........................................................................................................................................................................................84
Power management M552/M553/M554/M555/M577/M578/E55040/E57540 ...........................................84
Power management M577/M578/E55040/E57540..........................................................................................................85
Power management E55040/E57540 .......................................................................................................................................86

xi
 Power management M552/M553/M554/M555/M577....................................................................................................87
Printer job language (PJL)...............................................................................................................................................................................87
Printer management language (PML)....................................................................................................................................................87
Control panel ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................88
Walk-up USB ............................................................................................................................................................................................................88
Wireless......................................................................................................................................................................................................................89
Near field communication (NFC)..............................................................................................................................................................89
Low end data model (LEDM) overview..................................................................................................................................................89
CPU ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................89
Input/output (I/O) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................89
Memory.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................90
Engine-control system ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
DC controller....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Motors.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Fans...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Solenoids...................................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Clutches .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Switches.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Low-voltage power supply........................................................................................................................................................................................96
Low-voltage power supply voltages description ...........................................................................................................................97
Over-current/over-voltage protection...................................................................................................................................................98
Low-voltage power supply failure detection ....................................................................................................................................98
Low-voltage power supply functions.....................................................................................................................................................99
High-voltage power supply ......................................................................................................................................................................................99
High-voltage power supply circuits......................................................................................................................................................100
Fuser bias.................................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Fuser control.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Fuser circuits.........................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Fuser control functions.................................................................................................................................................................................103
Fuser temperature control .........................................................................................................................................................................103
Fuser heater protection................................................................................................................................................................................105
Fuser unit life detection ................................................................................................................................................................................105
Fuser identification..........................................................................................................................................................................................105
Engine laser/scanner system ..............................................................................................................................................................................105
Laser/scanner failure detection..............................................................................................................................................................106
Safety..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................107
Image-formation process ............................................................................................................................................................................107
Step 1: Pre-exposure............................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Step 2: Primary charging..................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure......................................................................................................................................................... 112
Step 4: Development............................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Step 5: Primary transfer ..................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Step 6: Secondary transfer.............................................................................................................................................................. 113
Step 7: Separation................................................................................................................................................................................... 114
Step 8: Fusing............................................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Step 10: Drum cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Step 10: Drum cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Toner cartridges..................................................................................................................................................................................................116

xii
 Design..............................................................................................................................................................................................................116
Toner cartridge seal ...............................................................................................................................................................................117
Memory chip ................................................................................................................................................................................................117
Toner level and cartridge life detection...................................................................................................................................118
HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence ............................................................................................................................................118
Dynamic security ....................................................................................................................................................................................119
Developing unit engagement and disengagement control .....................................................................................119
Intermediate transfer belt assembly ..................................................................................................................................................120
Primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement control ..................................................................... 121
ITB unit detection.................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
ITB cleaning mechanism................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Secondary transfer roller functions..........................................................................................................................................124
Color self calibration ............................................................................................................................................................................124
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................................................................................................................... 125
Photo sensors and switches..................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Motors, clutches, and solenoids............................................................................................................................................................. 128
Tray 1 (multipurpose)/Tray 2 (base printer)......................................................................................................................................130
Duplexing unit (duplex models)...........................................................................................................................................................................136
Duplexing reverse and duplex feed control....................................................................................................................................136
Jam detection/prevention.......................................................................................................................................................................................137
Fuser wrapping jam detection .................................................................................................................................................................139
Input devices............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 142
Tray 3-5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 142
Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 142
Tray 3-5 paper feeder controller.............................................................................................................................................................143
Tray 3-5 motor control ....................................................................................................................................................................................144
Electrical components, pickup and feed..........................................................................................................................................144
Tray 3-5 multiple feed prevention........................................................................................................................................................... 145
Tray 3-5 tray presence detection ........................................................................................................................................................... 145
Tray 3-5 tray lift operation............................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Tray 3-5 jam detection....................................................................................................................................................................................146

4 Solve problems................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 149

HP service and support ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Determine the problem source ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Pre-troubleshooting checklist .............................................................................................................................................................................. 151
Troubleshooting flowchart..................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Firmware upgrades .....................................................................................................................................................................................................154
Determine the installed revision of firmware................................................................................................................................ 155
HP Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................................................................................156
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (SFP) ........................................................................................................................156
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (MFP)........................................................................................................................157
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (SFP) .............................................................................................................158
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (MFP) ............................................................................................................158
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools......................................................................................................................................................160
Engine test .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................160
Pre-boot menu options .............................................................................................................................................................................................160
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel ............................................................................................. 161

xiii
 Open the Pre-Boot menu from an LCD control panel.............................................................................................................. 162
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel .................................................................. 162
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel....................................................................................163
Remote Admin ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Required software and network connection........................................................................................................................171
Connect a remote connection.......................................................................................................................................................172
Disconnect a remote connection................................................................................................................................................176
Advanced configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ......................................................................................178
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................................178
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).............................................................................................................178
HP Embedded Web Server features ................................................................................................................................................... 179
Information tab ........................................................................................................................................................................................180
General tab ..................................................................................................................................................................................................181
Other Links list.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Copy/Print tab ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Scan/Digital Send tab.........................................................................................................................................................................183
Fax tab............................................................................................................................................................................................................184
Supplies tab................................................................................................................................................................................................185
Troubleshooting tab..............................................................................................................................................................................185
Security tab ................................................................................................................................................................................................186
HP Web Services tab............................................................................................................................................................................187
Networking tab.........................................................................................................................................................................................188
Print menu..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................189
Defeating interlocks ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201
LED Diagnostics (formatter)................................................................................................................................................................................203
Scanner tests (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................208
Disable cartridge check .........................................................................................................................................................................................209
Print/stop test..................................................................................................................................................................................................................210
Individual component diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Paper path test..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Print/stop test....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
Paper path sensors test............................................................................................................................................................................... 213
Manual sensors test........................................................................................................................................................................................ 215
Tray/bin manual sensors test ................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Component test.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 218
Diagrams ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Diagrams: Block diagrams......................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Sensors and switches ....................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Cross section diagrams................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations ...................................................................................................224
Diagrams: External plug and port locations..................................................................................................................................230
Diagrams: Major component locations............................................................................................................................................. 231
Diagrams: General timing chart............................................................................................................................................................. 235
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams................................................................................................................................................... 236
Internal test and information pages .............................................................................................................................................................. 240
Reports menu..................................................................................................................................................................................................................244
Settings menu.................................................................................................................................................................................................................245
General menu...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 246
Print menu............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 251

xiv
 Manage Supplies menu............................................................................................................................................................................... 263
Networking menu ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 265
Supplies menu ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269
Trays menu ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................270
Support Tools menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................270
Maintenance menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................................270
Backup/Restore menu........................................................................................................................................................................270
Calibration/Cleaning menu..............................................................................................................................................................271
USB Firmware Upgrade menu.......................................................................................................................................................273
Service menu ............................................................................................................................................................................................273
Troubleshooting menu ...................................................................................................................................................................................273
Printer resets ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................275
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ....................................................................................................................................................277
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems ................................................................................................................... 281
Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer............................................................................................................................................................. 282
Engine diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 285
Engine test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 285
Defeating interlocks .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 285
Control panel troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................................................................288
Control panel system diagnostics (MFP)....................................................................................................................................................288
Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540)...............................................................288
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540)................................................... 291
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)...................................................................................................................... 291
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ............................................................................................................................. 292
No control panel sound..................................................................................................................................................................... 293
Home button is unresponsive...................................................................................................................................................... 294
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).................................... 295
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests ......................................................................................................................296
Screen test............................................................................................................................................................................................................299
Touch test...............................................................................................................................................................................................................303
SoftKey test ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................304
Backlight test.......................................................................................................................................................................................................305
Sound test..............................................................................................................................................................................................................306
Version...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ......................................................................................................................................................309
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................................................................309
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation ................................................................................309
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).....................................................................................................................315
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal).........................................................................................316
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview ........................................................................................318
Error codes (types and structure).........................................................................................................................................................318
Solve paper handling problems .................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Clear paper jams (SFP)............................................................................................................................................................................................. 321
Jam locations....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams......................................................................................................................................... 321
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?...................................................................................................................... 322
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)........................................................................................................................................................... 322

xv
 Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) ..........................................................................................................................................................324
Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5)......................................................................................327
Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B)..................................................................................................... 329
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) .......................................................................................................................................334
Change jam recovery (non-touchscreen).......................................................................................................................................334
Clear paper jams (MFP)...........................................................................................................................................................................................335
Jam locations......................................................................................................................................................................................................335
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams........................................................................................................................................336
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?......................................................................................................................336
Clear paper jams in the document feeder (31.13.yz)................................................................................................................336
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)...........................................................................................................................................................339
Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) .......................................................................................................................................................... 341
Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5).....................................................................................345
Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B).....................................................................................................348
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) .......................................................................................................................................353
Change jam recovery (touchscreen)..................................................................................................................................................353
Printer feeds incorrect page size ....................................................................................................................................................................354
Printer pulls from incorrect tray........................................................................................................................................................................354
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models).................................................................................................355
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X ..................................................................................................................................................................355
Output is curled or wrinkled.................................................................................................................................................................................355
The printer does not pick up paper.................................................................................................................................................................356
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper.........................................................................................................................................357
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP)............................................................357
Paper does not feed automatically ................................................................................................................................................................358
Image-quality troubleshooting......................................................................................................................................................................................359
Print-quality troubleshooting...............................................................................................................................................................................360
Repetitive image defect ruler ..................................................................................................................................................................360
Print-quality troubleshooting pages ....................................................................................................................................................361
Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages....................................................................................................................361
Print the print-quality assessment page..............................................................................................................................364
Calibrate the printer ........................................................................................................................................................................................367
Calibrate the printer ........................................................................................................................................................................................367
Use manual print modes .............................................................................................................................................................................368
Print from a different software program ..........................................................................................................................................370
Check the paper-type setting for the print job.............................................................................................................................370
Check the paper type setting on the control panel.......................................................................................................370
Check the paper type setting (Windows)...............................................................................................................................371
Check the paper type setting (macOS) ..................................................................................................................................371
Check toner-cartridge status....................................................................................................................................................................371
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page..............................................................................................................................371
Step two: Check supplies status.................................................................................................................................................372
Print a cleaning page ......................................................................................................................................................................................372
Check paper and the printing environment...................................................................................................................................373
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications......................................................................................................373
Step two: Check the environment..............................................................................................................................................373
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment.....................................................................................................................373
Try a different print driver............................................................................................................................................................................374

xvi
 Troubleshoot image defects......................................................................................................................................................................374
Copy-quality troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................................. 382
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges ........................................................................................................................ 382
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks .............................................................................................................................................................384
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality.....................................................................................................388
Light or faint copies (color models).....................................................................................................................................................389
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................. 392
Solve fax or email problems ................................................................................................................................................................................ 392
Solve performance problems ............................................................................................................................................................................393
Factors affecting print performance.................................................................................................................................................393
Print speeds .........................................................................................................................................................................................................394
The printer does not print...........................................................................................................................................................................395
The printer prints slowly ..............................................................................................................................................................................395
Solve connectivity problems...............................................................................................................................................................................396
Solve USB connection problems ..........................................................................................................................................................396
Solve wired network problems ...............................................................................................................................................................396
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................................................................396
Poor physical connection................................................................................................................................................................396
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer...........................................................................397
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer.......................................................................................397
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network..........................................................397
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems.................................................................397
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly.......................................................................................397
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.........................................................................397
Solve fax or email problems............................................................................................................................................................................................398

5 Removal and replacement.....................................................................................................................................................................................................399

HP service and support .....................................................................................................................................................................................................399
Order parts, accessories, and supplies..................................................................................................................................................................401
Ordering...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................401
Orderable parts .............................................................................................................................................................................................................401
Supplies and accessories......................................................................................................................................................................................401
Customer self-repair parts...................................................................................................................................................................................405
HP service and support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................406
Assembly locations...............................................................................................................................................................................................................408
Printer front view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models).......................................................................................408
Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models).......................................................................................409
Printer front view (M577, M578, and E57540 models).........................................................................................................................409
Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)..........................................................................................................................410
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories .................................................................................................................................. 412
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges........................................................................................................................................... 412
Remove the toner cartridges.................................................................................................................................................................... 414
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 414
Install the toner cartridges......................................................................................................................................................................... 415
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) .....................................................................................................................417
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................. 418
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................420

xvii
 Install the TCU ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 421
Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models).................................................. 422
Remove the staple cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 423
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................424
Install the staple cartridge......................................................................................................................................................................... 425
Removal and replacement: Fuser.................................................................................................................................................................... 426
1 Remove the fuser..........................................................................................................................................................................................427
2 Unpack the replacement assembly............................................................................................................................................... 428
3 Install the fuser ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 429
4 Reset the supplies counter..................................................................................................................................................................430
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040) .........................................430
1 Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................431
2 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).................................................................................................................................................. 432
3 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................435
4 Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................435
5 Install the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................438
6 Reinstall the product firmware..........................................................................................................................................................439
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) (M577/M578/E57540)...........................................................................439
1 Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................440
2 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)................................................................................................................................................... 441
3 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................444
4 Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................444
5 Install the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................447
6 Reinstall the product firmware..........................................................................................................................................................448
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040)........448
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................449
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................450
Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)....................................................................................................................... 451
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 452
Install the DIMM ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 453
Install the HDD.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 455
Install the formatter cover .........................................................................................................................................................................456
Remove the formatter cover.........................................................................................................................................................456
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (M577/M578/E57540) ..........................................457
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................458
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................459
Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)......................................................................................................................460
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 462
Install the DIMM .................................................................................................................................................................................................463
Install the HDD....................................................................................................................................................................................................464
Install the formatter cover .........................................................................................................................................................................465
Remove the formatter cover.........................................................................................................................................................466
Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040).......467
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................468
Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)...................................................................................................................468
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................469
Install the eMMC ................................................................................................................................................................................................470
Install the formatter cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................471
Remove the formatter cover...........................................................................................................................................................471

xviii
 Reinstall the product firmware ................................................................................................................................................................472
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller......................................................................................................................473
Remove the secondary transfer roller...............................................................................................................................................474
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................475
Install the secondary transfer roller....................................................................................................................................................476
Removal and replacement: Universal Serial Bus (USB) cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040) ................477
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................478
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................479
Remove the USB cover.................................................................................................................................................................................480
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/
E55040) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................481
Remove the HIP cover....................................................................................................................................................................................481
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................483
Install the HIP cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................484
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M577/M578/E57540)...............................485
Remove the HIP cover...................................................................................................................................................................................486
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................487
Install the HIP cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................488
Removal and replacement: Control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).........................................................................................489
1 Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)..............................................................................................................490
2 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................494
3 Install the control-panel assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 495
Removal and replacement: Control panel (M577/M578/E57540)...............................................................................................497
1 Remove the control-panel cover (MFP) ........................................................................................................................................498
2 Remove the control panel (MFP).......................................................................................................................................................499
3 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................502
4 Install the control panel (MFP)............................................................................................................................................................503
5 Install the control-panel cover (MFP).............................................................................................................................................508
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow models).........................................................................509
Remove the control-panel cover (MFP).............................................................................................................................................. 510
Remove the keyboard (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 511
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 513
Install the control panel (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 514
Install the control-panel cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................... 516
Removal and replacement: White backing (M577/M578/E57540) ..............................................................................................517
Remove the white backing (MFP) ........................................................................................................................................................... 518
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 521
Install the white backing (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................ 522
Removal and replacement: Retention clips (M577/M578/E57540)............................................................................................524
Remove the retention clips (MFP) ......................................................................................................................................................... 525
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 528
Install the retention clips (MFP)............................................................................................................................................................... 529
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (M577/M578/E57540) ................................................................... 532
Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly .............................................................................................................................533
Remove the separation roller ..................................................................................................................................................................534
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................536
Install the separation roller ........................................................................................................................................................................537
Install the pickup and feed roller assembly...................................................................................................................................538
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories .................................................................................................................................. 541

xix
 Removal and replacement: Fixed tray guide kit...................................................................................................................................... 541
Remove Tray 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 541
Install the fixed tray guide .......................................................................................................................................................................... 542
Removal and replacement: Tray 2-X paper pickup roller and separation roller assemblies..................................547
Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly.................................................................................................................548
Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller...............................................................................................................................................553
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................555
Install the Tray 2-X separation roller....................................................................................................................................................556
Install the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly .......................................................................................................................557
Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ........................................................................................................ 562
1 Remove the ITB..............................................................................................................................................................................................563
2 Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................567
3 Install the ITB ...................................................................................................................................................................................................567
Document feeder / scanner ............................................................................................................................................................................................573
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (M577/M578/E57540).....................................................................................573
1 Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................573
2 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)...............................................................................................................................................574
3 Remove the left upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................576
4 Remove the document feeder (MFP) .............................................................................................................................................577
5 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................580
6 Install the white backing (MFP) ...........................................................................................................................................................581
7 Reset the firmware counter ................................................................................................................................................................. 582
Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (M577/M578/E57540)..........................................................583
1 Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................584
2 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)..............................................................................................................................................584
3 Remove the scanner control board (SCB)................................................................................................................................586
4 Unpack the replacement assembly...............................................................................................................................................588
Removal and replacement: Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)..........................................................................................589
1 Remove the control-panel cover (MFP) ........................................................................................................................................590
2 Remove the keyboard (flow models) .............................................................................................................................................. 591
3 Remove the control panel (MFP).......................................................................................................................................................593
4 Remove the formatter cover...............................................................................................................................................................595
5 Remove the fax PCA (fax models) ...................................................................................................................................................596
6 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)..............................................................................................................................................598
7 Remove the left upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................600
8 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models).................................................................................601
9 Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models).................................................................................................................602
10 Remove the document feeder (MFP) ..........................................................................................................................................604
11 Remove the scanner control board (SCB) (MFP) ................................................................................................................. 607
12 Remove the image scanner assembly (MFP)........................................................................................................................609
13 Unpack the replacement assembly............................................................................................................................................... 611
Removal and replacement: External panels, covers, and doors (base printer)..........................................................................613
Removal and replacement: Tray 2.....................................................................................................................................................................613
Remove Tray 2......................................................................................................................................................................................................614
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................615
Removal and replacement: Stapler cover assembly (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models).................................616
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ........................................................................................................................617
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................618

xx
Removal and replacement: Right front upper cover (M577/M578/E57540 non-stapler models)........................619
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................620
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 621
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (M577/M578/E57540)..................................................................................... 622
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 623
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................... 624
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................626
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (M577/M578/E57540).......................................................................................626
Remove the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................627
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................628
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) .....................................................................................................................................................630
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................631
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (M577/M578/E57540).................................................................................... 632
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 632
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................633
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................635
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................636
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................638
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 641
Removal and replacement: Top rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)............................................................................................ 642
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................643
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................644
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) .....................................................................................................................................................646
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ......................................................................................647
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................648
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).........................................................................................................650
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................654
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)..........................................................................................................................................................656
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................657
Removal and replacement: Paper feed cover (M577/M578/E57540).....................................................................................658
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................659
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................660
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) .....................................................................................................................................................662
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................663
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................664
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).........................................................................................................666
Remove the right upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................. 670
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)...........................................................................................................................................................672
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................673
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................674
Removal and replacement: Top cover (M577/M578/E57540) ........................................................................................................675
Remove the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................676
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................677
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................... 679
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................680
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .......................................................................................................................681
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).........................................................................................................683
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)........................................................................................................................... 687
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................688

xxi
 Remove the top rear cover (MFP)..........................................................................................................................................................690
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................691
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................ 692
Remove the top cover (MFP).....................................................................................................................................................................694
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................696
Removal and replacement: Right door..........................................................................................................................................................697
Remove the Right Door ................................................................................................................................................................................698
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................702
Removal and replacement: Front door......................................................................................................................................................... 703
Remove Tray 2..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 703
Remove the front door.................................................................................................................................................................................. 704
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 707
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover .......................................................................................................................................... 708
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 708
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 709
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040).................................................................... 710
Remove the formatter cover.......................................................................................................................................................................711
Remove the rear cover (SFP)......................................................................................................................................................................712
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 713
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)..................................................................................................... 714
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................... 714
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................... 715
Remove the rear cover (MFP).....................................................................................................................................................................717
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 718
Removal and replacement: Left cover........................................................................................................................................................... 719
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................. 719
Remove the formatter cover......................................................................................................................................................................721
Remove the rear cover (SFP).....................................................................................................................................................................722
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................723
Remove the rear cover (MFP)....................................................................................................................................................................725
Remove the left cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................725
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 727
Removal and replacement: Upper cover (M553/M555/E55040) ............................................................................................... 727
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................728
Remove the HIP cover....................................................................................................................................................................................729
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)....................................................................................................................731
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................................................................735
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 736
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................... 737
Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................................................... 738
Remove the upper cover (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................740
Unpack the replacement assembly......................................................................................................................................................741
Removal and replacement: Output bin .........................................................................................................................................................742
Remove the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................743
Remove the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................744
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................745
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)...................................................................................................................746
Remove the rear cover (SFP).....................................................................................................................................................................749
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................... 750

xxii
 Remove the rear cover (MFP)....................................................................................................................................................................752
Remove the left cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................753
Remove the upper cover (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................755
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................... 756
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ..................................................................................... 758
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .......................................................................................................................759
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)...........................................................................................................761
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)............................................................................................................................764
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)...................................................................................................................................................765
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................... 767
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................. 769
Remove the top cover (MFP)......................................................................................................................................................................770
Remove the output bin...................................................................................................................................................................................772
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................773
Removal and replacement: Right rear cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040) ....................................................... 774
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................... 774
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)...................................................................................................................775
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................................................................779
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 780
Remove the rear cover (SFP)......................................................................................................................................................................781
Remove the left cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................782
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................ 784
Remove the right rear cover......................................................................................................................................................................785
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 786
Removal and replacement: Right rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)......................................................................................... 787
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 788
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................... 789
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ...................................................................................... 791
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .......................................................................................................................792
Remove the right upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................. 794
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................... 797
Remove the right rear cover..................................................................................................................................................................... 798
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 799
Removal and replacement: Control panel (M552dn/M553n/dn/M554)................................................................................800
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................801
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................................................................801
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................803
Remove the rear cover (SFP)....................................................................................................................................................................804
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................805
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................806
Remove the control panel ..........................................................................................................................................................................808
Unpack the replacement assembly......................................................................................................................................................811
Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer).....................................................................................813
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers ..............................................................................................813
Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller ...............................................................................................................................................................813
Remove the Tray 1 separation roller.....................................................................................................................................................816
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................818
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly...........................................................................................................819

xxiii
 Remove the secondary transfer assembly...................................................................................................................................820
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 822
Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M553x/E55040) ................................................ 823
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 824
Remove the control panel (M553x/E55040).................................................................................................................................. 825
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................828
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................830
Remove the rear cover (SFP).....................................................................................................................................................................831
Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................................................... 832
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................833
Remove the NFC PCA....................................................................................................................................................................................835
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................836
Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M577z)...................................................................... 837
Remove the NFC ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 837
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................840
Removal and replacement: Wireless PCA (M553x/M555/M577z/M578/E55040dw).................................................. 841
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 842
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................843
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................844
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)..................................................................................................................845
Remove the rear cover (SFP)....................................................................................................................................................................849
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................850
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................. 851
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................853
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) .....................................................................................................................................................855
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................856
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................858
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).........................................................................................................859
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)...........................................................................................................................863
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................864
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)..........................................................................................................................................................866
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................. 867
Remove the top cover (MFP).....................................................................................................................................................................868
Remove the output bin.................................................................................................................................................................................. 870
Remove the wireless PCA ............................................................................................................................................................................871
Unpack the replacement assembly.....................................................................................................................................................872
Removal and replacement: Switch (SW4) PCA........................................................................................................................................873
Remove the formatter cover.....................................................................................................................................................................873
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................................................................874
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................876
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)...................................................................................................................877
Remove the rear cover (SFP).....................................................................................................................................................................881
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................882
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................883
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................885
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................... 887
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................888
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................890
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)..........................................................................................................891

xxiv
 Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)...........................................................................................................................895
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................896
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)..........................................................................................................................................................898
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................899
Remove the top cover (MFP).....................................................................................................................................................................900
Remove the switch (SW4) PCA................................................................................................................................................................902
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................905
Removal and replacement: Stapler unit (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models).............................................................906
Remove the staple cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 907
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................908
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)............................................................................................................................910
Unpack the replacement assembly......................................................................................................................................................911
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC) ................................................................................................................................... 912
1 Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................913
2 Remove the rear cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................913
3 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)...............................................................................................................................................914
4 Remove the rear cover (MFP) ..............................................................................................................................................................916
5 Remove the DC controller...................................................................................................................................................................... 917
6 Unpack the replacement assembly ...............................................................................................................................................919
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly .....................................................................................................................................920
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................920
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................. 921
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 923
Remove the fuser ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 924
Remove the ITB .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 925
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)..................................................................................................................929
Remove the rear cover (SFP)....................................................................................................................................................................933
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................934
Remove the upper cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................935
Remove the control panel ...........................................................................................................................................................................937
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................940
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................... 942
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .....................................................................................943
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ......................................................................................................................944
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).........................................................................................................946
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)...........................................................................................................................950
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................... 951
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)..........................................................................................................................................................953
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................954
Remove the top cover (MFP).....................................................................................................................................................................955
Remove the top bracket (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................957
Remove the output bin..................................................................................................................................................................................959
Remove the delivery assembly ..............................................................................................................................................................960
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................963
Removal and replacement: Formatter (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040) ....................................................................964
1 Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................965
2 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)..................................................................................................................................................966
3 Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC).............................................................................................................. 967
4 Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) ................................................................................................................968

xxv
 5 Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) ...........................................................................................................................969
6 Remove the formatter (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................970
7 Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................971
Removal and replacement: Formatter (M577/M578/E57540).......................................................................................................972
1 Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................974
2 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)...................................................................................................................................................974
3 Remove the fax PCA (fax models) ....................................................................................................................................................975
4 Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) .................................................................................................................977
5 Remove the formatter (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................978
6 Unpack the replacement assembly ..............................................................................................................................................980
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly ....................................................................................................................981
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................................................................981
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................983
Remove the formatter (SFP) .....................................................................................................................................................................984
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................985
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).........................................................................................................................................................986
Remove the formatter (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................988
Remove the rear cover (SFP)....................................................................................................................................................................990
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................991
Remove the rear cover (MFP)...................................................................................................................................................................992
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................993
Remove the formatter case......................................................................................................................................................................995
Removal and replacement: Fuser power supply (FPS).....................................................................................................................998
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................999
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................. 1000
Remove the rear cover (SFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1001
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1002
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................1004
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1004
Remove the fuser power supply..........................................................................................................................................................1006
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1008
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)..................................................................................................1009
1 Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).......................................................................................................................................1010
2 Remove the formatter cover...............................................................................................................................................................1011
3 Remove the formatter (SFP) ...............................................................................................................................................................1012
4 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................1013
5 Remove the fax PCA (fax models) ..................................................................................................................................................1014
6 Remove the formatter (MFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1016
7 Remove the rear cover (SFP) ..............................................................................................................................................................1018
8 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP).............................................................................................................................................1019
9 Remove the rear cover (MFP) ...........................................................................................................................................................1020
10 Remove the left cover...........................................................................................................................................................................1021
11 Remove the formatter case .............................................................................................................................................................1023
12 Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)....................................................................................................................1026
13 Unpack the replacement assembly...........................................................................................................................................1028
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) .....................................................................................1029
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1029
Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1031
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1032

xxvi
 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1033
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1034
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1036
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1038
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1039
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................1040
Remove the left cover ..................................................................................................................................................................................1041
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1043
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ...........................................................................................................................1046
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)...............................................................................................................1048
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1049
Removal and replacement: Drum motor 1 (M1).....................................................................................................................................1050
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)........................................................................................................................................... 1051
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1052
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1053
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1055
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1055
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1057
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1059
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1060
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1061
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1062
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1064
Remove drum motor 1 (M1)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1067
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 1067
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan (FM1) .........................................................................................................................1068
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1069
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................ 1070
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)...........................................................................................................................................1073
Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1075
Remove the rear cover (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................. 1076
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1077
Remove the rear cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................. 1079
Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1079
Remove the upper cover (SFP)...............................................................................................................................................................1081
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ...................................................................................1082
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1084
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1085
Remove the right rear cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1087
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1088
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1090
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1091
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1093
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1094
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ........................................................................................................................... 1097
Remove the power supply fan (FM1)..................................................................................................................................................1099
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................1101
Removal and replacement: Developing disengagement motor (M6)....................................................................................1101
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)...........................................................................................................................................1102

xxvii
 Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1103
Remove the formatter (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................1104
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................................................................1106
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1106
Remove the formatter (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1108
Remove the rear cover (SFP)....................................................................................................................................................................1110
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................... 1111
Remove the rear cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................... 1112
Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1113
Remove the formatter case...................................................................................................................................................................... 1115
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) .............................................................................................................................1118
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)................................................................................................................1120
Remove the developing disengagement motor (M6) ............................................................................................................. 1121
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1122
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly .............................................................................................................................. 1123
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)........................................................................................................................................... 1123
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1125
Remove the formatter (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................... 1126
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .......................................................................................................................................................1127
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................ 1128
Remove the formatter (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1130
Remove the rear cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................... 1132
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1133
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1134
Remove the left cover ..................................................................................................................................................................................1135
Remove the formatter case......................................................................................................................................................................1137
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ............................................................................................................................1140
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)................................................................................................................ 1142
Remove the auto close assembly .......................................................................................................................................................1143
Unpack the replacement assembly...................................................................................................................................................1144
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly .............................................................................................................................. 1145
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)........................................................................................................................................... 1145
Remove the formatter cover....................................................................................................................................................................1147
Remove the formatter (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................1148
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................................................................1149
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1150
Remove the formatter (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1152
Remove the rear cover (SFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1154
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1155
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1156
Remove the left cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................1157
Remove the formatter case.....................................................................................................................................................................1159
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ............................................................................................................................ 1162
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)................................................................................................................1164
Remove the auto close assembly .......................................................................................................................................................1165
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................1167
Removal and replacement: Laser/scanner assembly .....................................................................................................................1168
1 Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).......................................................................................................................................1169
2 Remove the toner cartridges ............................................................................................................................................................ 1170

xxviii
 3 Remove the formatter cover............................................................................................................................................................... 1171
4 Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................1172
5 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)..................................................................................................................................................1174
6 Remove the fax PCA (fax models) ...................................................................................................................................................1174
7 Remove the formatter (MFP) ...............................................................................................................................................................1176
8 Remove the rear cover (SFP).............................................................................................................................................................. 1178
9 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)............................................................................................................................................. 1179
10 Remove the rear cover (MFP) ..........................................................................................................................................................1180
11 Remove the left cover.............................................................................................................................................................................1181
12 Remove the formatter case .............................................................................................................................................................1183
13 Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).....................................................................................................................1186
14 Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) ........................................................................................................1188
15 Remove the laser/scanner assembly........................................................................................................................................1189
16 Unpack the replacement assembly ...........................................................................................................................................1193
Removal and replacement: Delivery fan (FM3)......................................................................................................................................1194
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1194
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1195
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1199
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1200
Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1201
Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1202
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1204
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1204
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1206
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1208
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1209
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1210
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1211
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .................................................................................... 1213
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ..................................................................................................................... 1214
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)........................................................................................................1216
Remove the right upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................1219
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)......................................................................................................................................................... 1221
Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1223
Remove the upper cover (SFP)...............................................................................................................................................................1224
Remove the formatter case.................................................................................................................................................................... 1226
Remove the delivery fan (FM3).............................................................................................................................................................. 1229
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1231
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply T (HVPST)....................................................................................... 1232
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................. 1232
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................ 1233
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1237
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1238
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 1239
Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1240
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................................................................1242
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1242
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1244
Remove the rear cover (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................. 1246

xxix
 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................. 1247
Remove the rear cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................. 1248
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................1249
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) .................................................................................... 1251
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .................................................................................................................... 1252
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)....................................................................................................... 1254
Remove the right upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................1257
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................ 1259
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1261
Remove the upper cover (SFP).............................................................................................................................................................. 1262
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1264
Remove the right rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................1267
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1268
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) ................................................................................................................1269
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................1271
Removal and replacement: Drum motor 2 (M2) ....................................................................................................................................1272
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1273
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1274
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1277
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)...........................................................................................................................................1278
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1280
Remove the formatter (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................... 1281
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1282
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1283
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1285
Remove the rear cover (SFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1287
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1288
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................1289
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................1290
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ................................................................................... 1292
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1293
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)....................................................................................................... 1295
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1298
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................1300
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1302
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1303
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1305
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1308
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1309
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) .................................................................................................................1310
Remove drum motor 2 (M2) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1312
Unpack the replacement assembly...................................................................................................................................................1313
Removal and replacement: Drum motor 3 (M3)....................................................................................................................................1314
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1314
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1315
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1319
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1320
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1321
Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1322

xxx
 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1324
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)....................................................................................................................................................... 1324
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1326
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1328
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1329
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................1330
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................1331
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ...................................................................................1333
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1334
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).......................................................................................................1336
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1339
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)......................................................................................................................................................... 1341
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1343
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1344
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1346
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1349
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1350
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) ................................................................................................................. 1351
Remove drum motor 3 (M3).....................................................................................................................................................................1353
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1354
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor 3 (M4)...................................................................................................................................1355
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1355
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................1356
Remove Tray 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................1360
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)...........................................................................................................................................1361
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1362
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1363
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1365
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1365
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1367
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1369
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1370
Remove the rear cover (MFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1371
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................1372
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ....................................................................................1374
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .....................................................................................................................1375
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)........................................................................................................1377
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1380
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................1382
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1384
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1385
Remove the formatter case.................................................................................................................................................................... 1387
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1390
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket..............................................................................................1391
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) ................................................................................................................ 1392
Remove fuser motor (M4) .........................................................................................................................................................................1394
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1395
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor printed circuit assembly (PCA) .................................................1396
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1396

xxxi
 Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1398
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1399
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1401
Remove the environmental sensor PCA........................................................................................................................................1402
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1403
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly............................................................................................................................1404
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1404
Remove the fuser ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1405
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................ 1407
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1410
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................ 1411
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1412
Remove the formatter (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................... 1413
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ...................................................................................................................................................... 1415
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................ 1415
Remove the formatter (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................1417
Remove the rear cover (SFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1419
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1420
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................. 1421
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................... 1422
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ................................................................................... 1424
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .................................................................................................................... 1425
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)........................................................................................................1427
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models).........................................................................................................................1430
Remove the right upper cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................1431
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................1433
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................1435
Remove the top cover (MFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1436
Remove the top bracket (MFP) ..............................................................................................................................................................1438
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1439
Remove the upper cover (SFP)............................................................................................................................................................... 1441
Remove the formatter case.................................................................................................................................................................... 1442
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1445
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1446
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) .................................................................................................................1447
Remove the fuser drive assembly .....................................................................................................................................................1449
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1453
Removal and replacement: Duplex drive assembly and motor ...............................................................................................1454
Remove the fuser ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1454
Remove the ITB ................................................................................................................................................................................................1455
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1460
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1461
Remove Tray 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................1464
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1465
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 1467
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1468
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1469
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1470
Remove the formatter (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1472

xxxii
 Remove the rear cover (SFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1474
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1475
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1476
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................1477
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ....................................................................................1479
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1480
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).......................................................................................................1482
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models).........................................................................................................................1485
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1486
Remove the top rear cover (MFP)........................................................................................................................................................1488
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................1490
Remove the top cover (MFP)....................................................................................................................................................................1491
Remove the top bracket (MFP) ..............................................................................................................................................................1493
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1494
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1496
Remove the control panel .........................................................................................................................................................................1497
Remove the output bin................................................................................................................................................................................1500
Remove the formatter case.....................................................................................................................................................................1501
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1504
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1505
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) ................................................................................................................1506
Remove the fuser drive assembly .....................................................................................................................................................1508
Remove the delivery assembly ............................................................................................................................................................. 1512
Remove duplex drive assembly and motor .................................................................................................................................. 1515
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1516
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) ......................................................................................1517
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)............................................................................................................................................1517
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1519
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1520
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................. 1521
Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1524
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1526
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)....................................................................................................................................................... 1526
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1528
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1530
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1531
Remove the rear cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................. 1532
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................1533
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ...................................................................................1535
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1536
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).......................................................................................................1538
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................. 1541
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1543
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1545
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1546
Remove the formatter case.....................................................................................................................................................................1547
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ...........................................................................................................................1550
Remove the power supply fan (FM1).................................................................................................................................................. 1552
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)...............................................................................................................1554

xxxiii
 Remove the auto close assembly ......................................................................................................................................................1555
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1556
Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)..............................................................................................................1557
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1559
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly..........................................................................................................................1560
Remove the secondary transfer assembly..................................................................................................................................1561
Remove the ITB ................................................................................................................................................................................................1563
Remove Tray 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................1568
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1569
Remove the formatter cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 1570
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1571
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1572
Remove the formatter (SFP) ....................................................................................................................................................................1576
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................................................................1577
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1578
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1580
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1582
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1583
Remove the rear cover (MFP).................................................................................................................................................................1584
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................1585
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ................................................................................... 1587
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1588
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP).......................................................................................................1590
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1593
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1595
Remove the upper cover (SFP)...............................................................................................................................................................1597
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1598
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1599
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ...........................................................................................................................1602
Remove the power supply fan (FM1)..................................................................................................................................................1604
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)...............................................................................................................1606
Remove the auto close assembly ...................................................................................................................................................... 1607
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1608
Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5).............................................................................................................1609
Remove the registration assembly .....................................................................................................................................................1611
Unpack the replacement assembly...................................................................................................................................................1616
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly......................................................................................................................... 1617
Remove the secondary transfer assembly..................................................................................................................................1618
Remove the ITB ................................................................................................................................................................................................1620
Remove Tray 2................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1625
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1626
Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1627
Remove the USB cover (SFP) .................................................................................................................................................................1628
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................1629
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1633
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1634
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1635
Remove the formatter (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1637
Remove the rear cover (SFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1639

xxxiv
 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1640
Remove the rear cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................................1641
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ...................................................................................................................................................1642
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ...................................................................................1644
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) ....................................................................................................................1645
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)....................................................................................................... 1647
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................1650
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1652
Remove the upper cover (SFP)..............................................................................................................................................................1654
Remove the right rear cover...................................................................................................................................................................1655
Remove the formatter case....................................................................................................................................................................1656
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ...........................................................................................................................1659
Remove the power supply fan (FM1)...................................................................................................................................................1661
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)...............................................................................................................1663
Remove the auto close assembly ......................................................................................................................................................1664
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................1665
Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5).............................................................................................................1666
Remove the registration assembly ...................................................................................................................................................1668
Remove the paper pickup assembly.................................................................................................................................................1673
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 1679
Removal and replacement: Density-detect assembly ...................................................................................................................1680
Remove the secondary transfer assembly.................................................................................................................................1680
Remove the ITB ................................................................................................................................................................................................1683
Remove Tray 2................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1687
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)..........................................................................................................................................1688
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1690
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1691
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)................................................................................................................1692
Remove the formatter (SFP) ...................................................................................................................................................................1695
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1697
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)....................................................................................................................................................... 1697
Remove the formatter (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................................1699
Remove the rear cover (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................... 1701
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ..................................................................................................................................................1702
Remove the rear cover (MFP)................................................................................................................................................................. 1703
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................... 1704
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ................................................................................... 1706
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .....................................................................................................................1707
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)....................................................................................................... 1709
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................1712
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1714
Remove the upper cover (SFP)............................................................................................................................................................... 1716
Remove the right rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................................1717
Remove the formatter case..................................................................................................................................................................... 1718
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) .............................................................................................................................1721
Remove the power supply fan (FM1)...................................................................................................................................................1723
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)................................................................................................................1725
Remove the auto close assembly .......................................................................................................................................................1726
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket.............................................................................................. 1727

xxxv
 Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)..............................................................................................................1728
Remove the registration assembly ................................................................................................................................................... 1730
Remove the paper density-detect assembly..............................................................................................................................1735
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1737
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly.............................................................................................................................. 1738
Remove the USB cover (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................. 1739
Remove the fuser ............................................................................................................................................................................................1740
Remove the ITB ..................................................................................................................................................................................................1741
Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040).................................................................................................................1746
Remove Tray 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................1749
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).......................................................................................................................................... 1750
Remove the formatter cover...................................................................................................................................................................1752
Remove the formatter (SFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1753
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1754
Remove the fax PCA (fax models)........................................................................................................................................................1755
Remove the formatter (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................................... 1757
Remove the rear cover (SFP).................................................................................................................................................................. 1759
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................. 1760
Remove the rear cover (MFP)...................................................................................................................................................................1761
Remove the left upper cover (MFP) ....................................................................................................................................................1762
Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) ................................................................................... 1764
Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) .................................................................................................................... 1765
Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)........................................................................................................ 1767
Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)..........................................................................................................................1770
Remove the right upper cover (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................1771
Remove the top rear cover (MFP).........................................................................................................................................................1773
Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) .................................................................................................................................................1775
Remove the top cover (MFP)....................................................................................................................................................................1776
Remove the top bracket (MFP) ...............................................................................................................................................................1778
Remove the left cover ..................................................................................................................................................................................1779
Remove the upper cover (SFP)............................................................................................................................................................... 1781
Remove the formatter case.....................................................................................................................................................................1782
Remove the right rear cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1785
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ........................................................................................................................... 1786
Remove the power supply fan (FM1).................................................................................................................................................. 1788
Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)............................................................................................................... 1789
Remove the auto close assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 1791
Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket..............................................................................................1792
Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) ................................................................................................................ 1793
Remove the fuser drive assembly ..................................................................................................................................................... 1795
Remove the main-drive assembly...................................................................................................................................................... 1799
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1805
Install the main-drive assembly ...........................................................................................................................................................1806
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder...................................................................................................................................................................1816
Removal and replacement: Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5............................................................................................................................1816
Remove the tray................................................................................................................................................................................................1816
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1817
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ....................................................................................1818

xxxvi
 Remove the rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................................1819
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1820
Removal and replacement: Right door (1x550-sheet paper feeder)......................................................................................1821
Remove the rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................................1821
Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1822
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 1824
Removal and replacement: Right door hinge bracket (1x550-sheet paper feeder)................................................... 1825
Remove the rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................................1826
Remove the right door .................................................................................................................................................................................1827
Remove the right door hinge bracket ..............................................................................................................................................1829
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1829
Removal and replacement: Right-lower cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)....................................................................1830
Remove the rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................................1831
Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................................................1832
Remove the right-lower cover ...............................................................................................................................................................1834
Remove the right-door link.......................................................................................................................................................................1835
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1836
Removal and replacement: Right-door link (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................... 1837
Remove the rear cover ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1837
Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................................................1838
Remove the right-lower cover ...............................................................................................................................................................1840
Remove the right-door link........................................................................................................................................................................1841
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1842
Removal and replacement: Left cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)......................................................................................1843
Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................................................1843
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1844
Removal and replacement: OP drawer holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder)....................................................................1845
Remove the rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................................1846
Remove the OP drawer holder.............................................................................................................................................................. 1847
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1848
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)............................................................1849
Remove the tray...............................................................................................................................................................................................1849
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................1850
Remove the rear cover..................................................................................................................................................................... 1851
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................... 1852
Remove the auto close assembly ......................................................................................................................................................1853
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1855
Removal and replacement: Switch button (SW12) (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ...........................................................1855
Remove the tray...............................................................................................................................................................................................1856
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................ 1857
Remove the rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................1858
Unpack the replacement assembly.......................................................................................................................................1859
Remove the switch button (SW12) ......................................................................................................................................................1860
Unpack the replacement assembly...................................................................................................................................................1861
Removal and replacement: Drawer connector holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder) .................................................1862
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................1862
Remove the rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................1863
Unpack the replacement assembly.......................................................................................................................................1864
Remove the drawer connector holder ............................................................................................................................................1865

xxxvii
 Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1866
Removal and replacement: Paper-feeder drive PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ..................................................... 1867
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................1868
Remove the rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................1869
Unpack the replacement assembly.......................................................................................................................................1869
Remove the paper-feeder drive PCA................................................................................................................................................ 1870
Unpack the replacement assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1871
Removal and replacement: Paper-feed assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)............................................................1872
Remove the tray................................................................................................................................................................................................1873
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) .........................................................................1874
Remove the rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................................1875
Unpack the replacement assembly........................................................................................................................................1876
Remove the right door .................................................................................................................................................................................1877
Remove the drawer connector holder ............................................................................................................................................ 1878
Remove the paper feed assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 1879
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1884
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)......................................................1885
Remove the tray...............................................................................................................................................................................................1886
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................1886
Remove the rear cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 1887
Unpack the replacement assembly.......................................................................................................................................1888
Remove the drawer connector holder ............................................................................................................................................1889
Remove the paper feed assembly.....................................................................................................................................................1890
Remove the paper pickup assembly................................................................................................................................................1895
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 1897
Removal and replacement: Feeder drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).......................................................1898
Remove the tray...............................................................................................................................................................................................1899
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................1900
Remove the rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................................1901
Unpack the replacement assembly.......................................................................................................................................1902
Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................................................1903
Remove the right-lower cover ...............................................................................................................................................................1904
Remove the drawer connector holder ............................................................................................................................................1905
Remove the feeder drive assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 1907
Unpack the replacement assembly...................................................................................................................................................1910
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder) .............................................................1911
Remove the tray................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1912
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) .........................................................................1913
Remove the rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................................1914
Unpack the replacement assembly........................................................................................................................................1915
Remove the right door .................................................................................................................................................................................1916
Remove the right-lower cover ................................................................................................................................................................ 1917
Remove the drawer connector holder .............................................................................................................................................1918
Remove the feeder drive assembly ..................................................................................................................................................1920
Remove the lifter drive assembly....................................................................................................................................................... 1923
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1926
Remove and replacement: Accessories..............................................................................................................................................................1928
Removal and replacement: Fixed tray guide kit...................................................................................................................................1928

xxxviii
 Remove Tray 2...................................................................................................................................................................................................1928
Install the fixed tray guide ........................................................................................................................................................................1929
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module (M552/M553) ...................................................................................1934
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1935
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1936
Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)...............................................................................................................................1936
Unpack the replacement assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 1937
Install the trusted platform module (TPM)....................................................................................................................................1938
Install the HDD..................................................................................................................................................................................................1939
Install the formatter cover .......................................................................................................................................................................1940
Remove the formatter cover........................................................................................................................................................1941
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module (M577/E57540) ................................................................................1942
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1943
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) .....................................................................................................................................................1943
Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)...............................................................................................................................1944
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1945
Install the trusted platform module (TPM)....................................................................................................................................1946
Install the HDD.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1947
Install the formatter cover .......................................................................................................................................................................1948
Remove the formatter cover.......................................................................................................................................................1949
Removal and replacement: Internal USB ports (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)...............................................1950
Remove the formatter cover................................................................................................................................................................... 1951
Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)................................................................................................................................ 1951
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1954
Install the internal USB ports module..............................................................................................................................................1955
Install the formatter cover .......................................................................................................................................................................1958
Remove the formatter cover.......................................................................................................................................................1958
Removal and replacement: Internal USB ports (M577/M578/E57540) ................................................................................1959
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1960
Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)................................................................................................................................1961
Unpack the replacement assembly..................................................................................................................................................1962
Install the internal USB ports module..............................................................................................................................................1963
Install the formatter cover .......................................................................................................................................................................1966
Remove the formatter cover.......................................................................................................................................................1966
Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540) ........................................................................................................ 1967
Remove the formatter cover..................................................................................................................................................................1968
Remove the fax PCA (fax models).......................................................................................................................................................1969
Unpack the replacement assembly....................................................................................................................................................1971
Install the fax PCA (fax models)..............................................................................................................................................................1971
Install the formatter cover ........................................................................................................................................................................1973
Remove the formatter cover........................................................................................................................................................1973

6 Parts and diagrams....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1976

HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1976
Order parts by authorized service providers....................................................................................................................................................1978
Ordering.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Orderable parts ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Supplies and accessories....................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Customer self-repair parts.................................................................................................................................................................................1982

xxxix
 How to use parts lists and diagrams......................................................................................................................................................................1983
Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)...............................................................................................................1984
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040).....................................................................................................1986
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540)......................................................................................................................................1989
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 5)............................................................................................................................................1992
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 5)...........................................................................................................................................1995
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5) .......................................................................................................................................... 1997
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5)..........................................................................................................................................2000
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 5) .........................................................................................................................................2004
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers...............................................................................................................................2006
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body...................................................................................................................... 2007
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................2009
HP service and support .........................................................................................................................................................................................1976
Order parts by authorized service providers ........................................................................................................................................1978
Ordering .................................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Orderable parts ................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Supplies and accessories ........................................................................................................................................................................1978
Customer self-repair parts......................................................................................................................................................................1982
How to use parts lists and diagrams...........................................................................................................................................................1983
Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) ...................................................................................................1984
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040) .........................................................................................1986
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540)...........................................................................................................................1989
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 5) ................................................................................................................................1992
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 5) ...............................................................................................................................1995
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5) ............................................................................................................................... 1997
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5) ..............................................................................................................................2000
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 5) ..............................................................................................................................2004
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers ...................................................................................................................2006
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body........................................................................................................... 2007
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2017
HP service and support .........................................................................................................................................................................................1976
Order parts by authorized service providers ........................................................................................................................................1978
Ordering .................................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Orderable parts ................................................................................................................................................................................................1978
Supplies and accessories ........................................................................................................................................................................1978
Customer self-repair parts......................................................................................................................................................................1982
How to use parts lists and diagrams...........................................................................................................................................................1983
Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) ...................................................................................................1984
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040) .........................................................................................1986

xl
 Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540)...........................................................................................................................1989
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 5) ................................................................................................................................1992
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 5) ...............................................................................................................................1995
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5) ............................................................................................................................... 1997
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5) ..............................................................................................................................2000
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 5) ..............................................................................................................................2004
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers ...................................................................................................................2006
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body........................................................................................................... 2007

Appendix A ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2025

Certificate of Volatility ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2025

Glossary of terms ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2042

Index.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2052

xli
1 Printer information, configurations, and
specifications

Learn about printer configuration and specifications.

Printer information, configurations, and specifications 1

 Information (document feeder and scanner)
Learn about the document feeder and scanner.

Document feeder and scanner front view

Learn about the document feeder and scanner components.

Figure 1-1 Document feeder and scanner front view

1 2

7
6 3
5 4

Item Description

1 Document-feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Document-feeder input tray

3 Document-feeder output bin

4 Control panel with color touchscreen display

5 Physical keyboard (flow models only)

6 Easy-access USB port (on the side of the control panel)

7 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory

and third-party devices)

2 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Specifications (document feeder and scanner)
Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.

Technical specifications
Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.

Review the technical specifications for the document feeder and scanner.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp for current information.

Table 1-1 Copy and scan specifications (M577)

Copy and scan M577dn M577f M577c (flow) M577z (flow)

features
B5L46A B5L47A B5L54A B5L48A

Copies 38 pages per Yes Yes Yes Yes

minute (ppm) on A4 and
40 ppm on letter-size
paper

100-page document Yes Yes Yes Yes

feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning

HP EveryPage No No Yes Yes

Technologies including
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection

Embedded optical No No Yes Yes

character recognition
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited
or searched using a
computer

SMART Label No No Yes Yes

feature provides
paper-edge detection
for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page No No Yes Yes

orientation for pages
that have at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone No No Yes Yes

adjustment sets
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page

Send documents to E- Yes Yes Yes Yes

mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network

Specifications (document feeder and scanner) 3

 Table 1-1 Copy and scan specifications (M577) (continued)

Copy and scan M577dn M577f M577c (flow) M577z (flow)

features
B5L46A B5L47A B5L54A B5L48A

Send documents to No No Yes Yes

SharePoint®

Table 1-2 Copy and scan specifications (M578)

Copy and scan M578dn M578f M578c (flow) M578z (flow)

features
7ZU85A 7ZU86A 7ZU87A 7ZU88A

Copies 38 pages per Yes Yes Yes Yes

minute (ppm) on A4 and
40 ppm on letter-size
paper

100-page document Yes Yes Yes Yes

feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning

HP EveryPage Yes Yes Yes Yes

Technologies including
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection

Embedded optical Yes Yes Yes Yes

character recognition
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited
or searched using a
computer

SMART Label Yes Yes Yes Yes

feature provides
paper-edge detection
for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page Yes Yes Yes Yes

orientation for pages
that have at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone Yes Yes Yes Yes

adjustment sets
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page

Send documents to E- Yes Yes Yes Yes

mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network

Send documents to Yes Yes Yes Yes

SharePoint®

4 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-3 Copy and scan specifications (E57540)

Copy and scan features E57540dn E57540c (flow)

3GY25A 3GY26A

Copies 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 Yes Yes

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

100-page document feeder with dual- Yes Yes

head scanning for single-pass duplex
copying and scanning

HP EveryPage Technologies including No Yes

ultrasonic multi-feed detection

Embedded optical character recognition No Yes

(OCR) provides the ability to convert
printed pages into text that can be
edited or searched using a computer

SMART Label feature provides paper- No Yes

edge detection for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page orientation for pages No Yes

that have at least 100 characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment sets No Yes

contrast, brightness, and background
removal for each page

Send documents to E-mail, USB, and Yes Yes

shared folders on a network

Send documents to SharePoint® No Yes

Technical specifications 5
 Information (base printer)
Learn about the base printer.

Printer front view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)
Identify the parts on the front of the printer (SFP).

Figure 1-2 Printer front view (SFP)

2 11
1 3

4
10
5
9
6

8 13 12
7

Number Description

1 Standard output bin

2 4-line LCD control panel with keypad (n and dn models only)

3 Hardware integration pocket for connecting accessory and third-party devices (dn and x models only)

4 Easy-access USB port

5 Right door (access to the fuser and for clearing jams)

6 Tray 1

7 Model name

8 Tray 2

9 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

10 On/off button

11 Control panel with color touchscreen display (M553x/M555/E55040)

12 Lower-right door for the 550-sheet paper feeder (access for clearing jams)

13 550-sheet paper feeder, Tray 3 (included with the x model, optional for the other models)

NOTE: The M552 model accepts one 550-sheet paper feeder. All other models accept up to three 550-
sheet paper feeders.

6 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)
Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).

Figure 1-3 Printer rear view (SFP)

1
5
2

4
3

Number Description

1 Toner-collection-unit door

2 Formatter (contains the interface ports)

3 Power connection

4 Serial number and product number label

5 Formatter cover

Printer front view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (MFP).

Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models) 7
 Figure 1-4 Printer front view (MFP)
1 2

15
14 3
13 4
12 5
6
11
7
10

9 8

Number Description

1 Document-feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Document-feeder input tray

3 Document-feeder output bin

4 Control panel with color touchscreen display

5 Convenience stapler (c/f/z models only)

6 Right door (access to the fuser and for clearing jams)

7 Tray 1

8 On/off button

9 Model name

10 Tray 2

11 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

12 Standard output bin

13 Physical keyboard (c/z models only)

14 Easy-access USB port (on the side of the control panel)

15 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).

8 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-5 Printer rear view (MFP)

1
6
5 2
4

Number Description

1 Toner-collection-unit door

2 Formatter (contains the interface ports)

3 Power connection

4 Serial number and product number label

5 Slot for a cable-type security lock (on the rear cover of the printer)

6 Formatter cover

Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models) 9

 Configuration (base printer)
Learn about the base printer configurations.

Configuration (base printer M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040)

Learn about the base printer SFP configurations.

Figure 1-6 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 printer (touchscreen
model shown)

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040

● 33/35 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M552)

37/40 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M553/E55040)

56/35 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M554)

56/40 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M555)

● FutureSmart 3 firmware (M552/M553)

FutureSmart 4 firmware or FutureSmart 5 firmware (M554/M555/E55040)

● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)

NOTE: Standard for the M554/M555 printers. Optional for all other printers.

● Automatic duplex printing

NOTE: Not available for the M553n. Standard for all other printers.

● Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

● Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

● 4-line graphical display with 10-key keypad (M552/M553n/dn)

● 68.58 mm (2.7 in) color graphical display with 10-key keypad (M554)

● 109.22 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen display (M553x/M555/E55040)

10 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 ● 1.0 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2 GB (M553/M554/M555/E55040). The M552 printer does not support

memory expansion.

● HP Secure High-Performance Hard Disk

NOTE: Not available for the M552. Optional for all other printers.

● 4GB eMMC mass storage (M554/M555/E55040)

● 550-sheet paper feeder

NOTE: Standard for the M553x/M555x. Optional for all other printers.

HP Color LaserJet Managed E55040 only

● Managed contractual toner cartridges with lowest possible cost per page

Configuration (base printer M577, M578, and E57540)

Learn about the base printer MFP configurations.

Figure 1-7 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M577, M578, and E57540 printer

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M577, M578, and E57540

● 38/40 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M577/E57540)

56/40 pages per minute (A4/letter) (M578)

● FutureSmart 4 firmware or FutureSmart 5 firmware

● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)

NOTE: Standard for the M578 printer. Optional for all other printers.

● Automatic duplex printing

● Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

● Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Configuration (base printer M577, M578, and E57540) 11

 ● Color touchscreen control panel

● 1.75 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2.5 GB (M577/E57540). The M578 printer supports a 3.8 GB memory
expansion.

● 320 GB Hard Disk Drive (M577/E57540)

500 GB Hard Disk Drive (M578)

● 550-sheet paper feeder (optional accessory)

NOTE: Up to three 550-sheet paper feeders are supported.

HP Color LaserJet Managed E57540 only

● Managed contractual toner cartridges with lowest possible cost per page

12 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Specifications (base printer)
Learn about the base printer specifications.

Technical specifications (M552/M553)

Review the technical specifications for the M552/M553 printers.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M552dn - B5L23A

● M553n - B5L24A

● M553dn - B5L25A

● M553x - B5L26A

Table 1-4 Paper handling specifications (M552/M553)

Paper handling features M552dn M553n M553dn M553x

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder) Optional Optional Optional

NOTE: The M552 model accepts one

optional feeder. All other models support
up to three optional feeders.

Printer stand Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing Not supported

Table 1-5 Connectivity specifications (M552/M553)

Connectivity features M552dn M553n M553dn M553x

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection

with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for Not supported

connecting accessory and third-party
devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/wireless Optional Optional Optional Not supported

accessory for printing from mobile
devices

Integrated HP near-field communication Not supported Not supported Not supported

(NFC) and Wi-Fi Direct functionality for
printing from mobile devices

Specifications (base printer) 13

 Table 1-5 Connectivity specifications (M552/M553) (continued)

Connectivity features M552dn M553n M553dn M553x

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory for wireless connectivity

Table 1-6 Print specifications (M552/M553)

Print features M552dn M553n M553dn M553x

Prints 33 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 Not supported Not supported Not supported
and 36 ppm on letter-size paper

Prints 37 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 Not supported

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer Not supported

required)

Table 1-7 Other specifications (M552/M553)

Other features M552dn M553n M553dn M553x

1.0 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2 GB (M553). The

M552 printer does not support memory
expansion.

HP Secure High-performance Hard Disk Not supported Optional Optional Optional

109.22 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen Not supported Not supported Not supported
control panel

4-line graphical display with 10-key Not supported

keypad

HP Trusted Platform Module for Optional Optional Optional Optional

encrypting all data that passes through
the printer

Technical specifications (M554/M555)

Review the technical specifications for the M554/M555 printers.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M554dn - 7ZU81A

● M555dn - 7ZU78A

● M555x - 7ZU79A

14 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-8 Paper handling specifications (M554/M555)

Paper handling features M554dn M555dn M555x

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder) Optional Optional

NOTE: Up to three optional feeders are

supported.

Printer stand Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Table 1-9 Connectivity specifications (M554/M555)

Connectivity features M554dn M555dn M555x

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4

and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for connecting

accessory and third-party devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accessory Optional Optional Optional

for printing from mobile devices

NOTE: For use in the Hardware Integration

Pocket (HIP) or the rear host USB port. The HP
Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accessory
requires the HP Internal USB ports accessory.

Table 1-10 Print specifications (M554/M555)

Print features M554dn M555dn M555x

Prints 56 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 35 Not supported Not supported
ppm on letter-size paper

Prints 56 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 Not supported

ppm on letter-size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)

Store jobs in the printer memory to print later or

print privately

Technical specifications (M554/M555) 15

 Table 1-11 Other specifications (M552/M553)

Other features M554dn M555dn M555x

1.0 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2 GB.

HP Secure High Performance Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Optional

FIPS Drive

4 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC)

109.22 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen control Not supported Not supported
panel

68.58 mm (2.7 in) color graphics display with 10- Not supported
key

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all

data that passes through the printer

Technical specifications (E55040)

Review the technical specifications for the E55040 printer.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● E55040 - 3GX98A

Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (E55040)

Paper handling features E55040dw

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder)

NOTE: Up to three optional feeders are supported.

Printer stand Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Table 1-13 Connectivity specifications (E55040)

Connectivity features E55040dw

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory and third-party devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional

16 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-13 Connectivity specifications (E55040) (continued)

Connectivity features E55040dw

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from mobile devices Optional

NOTE: For use in the Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) or the rear host USB port.
The HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory requires the HP Internal USB
ports accessory. If the J8030A is connected using the rear host USB, the HIP is not
used.

Integrated HP near-field communication (NFC) and Wi-Fi Direct functionality for

printing from mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for wireless connectivity Optional

Table 1-14 Print specifications (E55040)

Print features E55040dw

Prints 37 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)

Store jobs in the printer memory to print later or print privately

Table 1-15 Other specifications (E55040)

Other features E55040dw

1.0 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2 GB.

109.22 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen control panel

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that passes through the printer Optional

Technical specifications (M577)

Review the technical specifications for the M577 printer.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M577dn - B5L46A

● M577f - B5L47A

● M577c flow - B5L54A

● M577z flow - B5L48A

Table 1-16 Paper handling specifications (M577)

Paper handling features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Technical specifications (M577) 17

 Table 1-16 Paper handling specifications (M577) (continued)

Paper handling features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder) Optional Optional Optional Optional

NOTE: Up to three optional feeders are

supported.

Printer stand Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Convenience stapler Not supported

Table 1-17 Connectivity specifications (M577)

Connectivity features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection

with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for

connecting accessory and third-party
devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/wireless Optional Optional Optional Not supported

accessory for printing from mobile
devices

Integrated HP near-field communication Not supported Not supported Not supported

(NFC) and Wi-Fi Direct functionality for
printing from mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory for wireless connectivity

Table 1-18 Print specifications (M577)

Print features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer

required)

Store jobs in the printer memory to print

later or print privately

18 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-19 Copy and scan specifications (M577)

Print features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

Copies 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

100-page document feeder with dual-

head scanning for single-pass duplex
copying and scanning

HP EveryPage Technologies including Not supported Not supported

ultrasonic multi-feed detection

Embedded optical character recognition Not supported Not supported

(OCR) provides the ability to convert
printed pages into text that can be
edited or searched using a computer

SMART Label feature provides paper- Not supported Not supported

edge detection for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page orientation for pages Not supported Not supported

that have at least 100 characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment sets Not supported Not supported

contrast, brightness, and background
removal for each page

Table 1-20 Digital Send specifications (M577)

Print features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

Send documents to E-mail, USB, and

shared folders on a network

Send documents to SharePoint® Not supported Not supported

Table 1-21 Other specifications (M577)

Other features M577dn M577f M577c flow M577z flow

1.75 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2.5 GB.

320 GB Hard Disk Drive

Color touchscreen control panel

Physical keyboard Not supported Not supported

HP Trusted Platform Module for Optional Optional Optional Optional

encrypting all data that passes through
the printer

Fax Optional

Technical specifications (M578)

Review the technical specifications for the M578 printer.

Technical specifications (M578) 19

 See www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M578dn - 7ZU85A

● M578f - 7ZU86A

● M578c - 7ZU87A

● M578z - 7ZU88A

Table 1-22 Paper handling specifications (M578)

Paper handling features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder) Optional Optional Optional Optional

NOTE: Up to three optional feeders are

supported.

Printer stand Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Convenience stapler Not supported

Table 1-23 Connectivity specifications (M578)

Connectivity features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection

with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for

connecting accessory and third-party
devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory Optional Optional Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Optional Optional Optional Optional

Accessory for printing from mobile
devices

NOTE: For use in the Hardware

Integration Pocket (HIP) or the rear host
USB port. The HP Jetdirect 3100w NFC/
Wireless Accessory requires the HP
Internal USB ports accessory. If the
J8030A is connected using the rear host
USB, the HIP is not used.

20 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-24 Print specifications (M578)

Print features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

Prints 56 pages per minute (ppm) on A4

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer

required)

Store jobs in the printer memory to print

later or print privately

Table 1-25 Copy and scan specifications (M578)

Print features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

Copies 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4

and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

100-page document feeder with dual-

head scanning for single-pass duplex
copying and scanning

HP EveryPage Technologies including

ultrasonic multi-feed detection

Embedded optical character recognition

(OCR) provides the ability to convert
printed pages into text that can be
edited or searched using a computer

SMART Label feature provides paper-

edge detection for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page orientation for pages

that have at least 100 characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment sets

contrast, brightness, and background
removal for each page

Table 1-26 Digital Send specifications (M578)

Print features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

Send documents to E-mail, USB, and

shared folders on a network

Send documents to SharePoint® Not supported Not supported

Table 1-27 Other specifications (M578)

Other features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

1.75 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 3.8 GB.

500 GB Hard Disk Drive

Color touchscreen control panel

Technical specifications (M578) 21

 Table 1-27 Other specifications (M578) (continued)

Other features M578dn M578f M578c M578z

Physical keyboard Not supported Not supported

HP Trusted Platform Module for Optional Optional Optional Optional

encrypting all data that passes through
the printer

Fax Optional

Technical specifications (E57540)

Review the technical specifications for the E57540 printer.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● E57540dn - 3GY25A

● E57540c - 3GY26A

Table 1-28 Paper handling specifications (E57540)

Paper handling features E57540dn E57540c

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)

Tray 3 (1 x 550-sheet paper feeder) Optional Optional

NOTE: Up to three optional feeders are supported.

Printer stand Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Convenience stapler Not supported

Table 1-29 Connectivity specifications (E57540)

Connectivity features E57540dn E57540c

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory

and third-party devices

HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from Optional Optional

mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for wireless Optional Optional

connectivity

22 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-30 Print specifications (E57540)

Print features E57540dn E57540c

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-

size paper

Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)

Store jobs in the printer memory to print later or print privately

Table 1-31 Copy and scan specifications (E57540)

Print features E57540dn E57540c

Copies 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on

letter-size paper

100-page document feeder with dual-head scanning for single-

pass duplex copying and scanning

HP EveryPage Technologies including ultrasonic multi-feed Not supported

detection

Embedded optical character recognition (OCR) provides the Not supported

ability to convert printed pages into text that can be edited or
searched using a computer

SMART Label feature provides paper-edge detection for Not supported

automatic page cropping

Automatic page orientation for pages that have at least 100 Not supported
characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment sets contrast, brightness, and Not supported

background removal for each page

Table 1-32 Digital Send specifications (E57540)

Print features E57540dn E57540c

Send documents to E-mail, USB, and shared folders on a

network

Send documents to SharePoint® Not supported

Table 1-33 Other specifications (E57540)

Other features E57540dn E57540c

1.75 GB base memory

NOTE: Expandable to 2.5 GB.

320 GB Hard Disk Drive

Color touchscreen control panel

Physical keyboard Not supported

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that Optional Optional
passes through the printer

Technical specifications (E57540) 23

 Table 1-33 Other specifications (E57540) (continued)

Other features E57540dn E57540c

Fax Optional

Printer dimensions (SFP)

Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.

NOTE: Values subject to change. For the most current information, go to www.hp.com/support/
colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or
http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp

Figure 1-8 Dimensions for the M552/M553n/dn/M554/M555dn printers

1
M

1
C

3 2

3 2

Table 1-34 Dimensions for the M552/M553n/dn/M554/M555dn printers

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 399 mm (15.7 in) 399 mm (15.7 in)

2. Depth 479 mm (18.9 in) 771 mm (30.4 in)

3.Width 458 mm (18.0 in) 826 mm (32.5 in)

Weight 27 kg (59.5 lb) (n models) 18.9 kg (41.67 lb)

27.5 kg (60.6 lb) (dn models)

24 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-9 Dimensions for the M553x/M555x/E55040 printers

1 K

3 2

3 2

Table 1-35 Dimensions for the M553x/M555x/E55040 printers

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 581 mm (22.9 in) 581 mm (22.9 in)

2. Depth 479 mm (18.9 in) 771 mm (30.4 in)

3.Width 458 mm (18.0 in) 853 mm (33.6 in)

Weight 33.4 kg (73.6 lb) 33.4 kg (73.6 lb)

Figure 1-10 Dimensions for the M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040 printers with one 550-sheet tray and
stand

1
1

3 2
3 2

Printer dimensions (SFP) 25

 Table 1-36 Dimensions for the M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040 printers with one 550-sheet tray and stand

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 876 mm (34.5 in) 876 mm (34.5 in)

2. Depth 479 mm (18.9 in) 900 mm (35.4 in)

3.Width 458 mm (18.0 in) 853 mm (33.6 in)

Weight 51.1 kg (112.7 lb) 51.1 kg (112.7 lb)

Figure 1-11 Dimensions for the 550-sheet tray

1
3 2

3 2

Table 1-37 Dimensions for the 550-sheet tray

Measurement Tray fully closed Tray fully opened

1. Height 130 mm (5.1 in) 130 mm (5.1 in)

2. Depth 465 mm (18.3 in) 768 mm (30.2 in)

3. Width 458 mm (18.0 in) (lower-right door open) 853 mm (33.6 in) (lower-right door closed)

Weight 5.8 kg (12.8 lb) 5.8 kg (12.8 lb)

Figure 1-12 Dimensions for the printer stand

1 1

3 2
2
3

Table 1-38 Dimensions for the printer stand

Measurement Stand fully closed Stand fully opened

1. Height 295 mm (11.6 in) 295 mm (11.6 in)

26 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-38 Dimensions for the printer stand (continued)

Measurement Stand fully closed Stand fully opened

2. Depth 869 mm (34.2 in) 1113 mm (43.8 in)

3. Width 884 mm (34.8 in) 884 mm (34.8 in)

Weight 17.7 kg (39 lb) 17.7 kg (39 lb)

Printer dimensions (MFP)

Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.

NOTE: Values subject to change. For the most current information, go to www.hp.com/support/
colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or
http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp

Figure 1-13 Dimensions for the M577/M578/E57540 printers

1 1
Y

3 2
3 2

Table 1-39 Dimensions for the M577/M578/E57540 printers

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 583 mm (23.0 in) 837 mm (33.0 in)

2. Depth 504 mm (19.8 in) 853 mm (33.6 in)

3.Width 482 mm (19.0 in) 803 mm (31.6 in)

Weight 38.1 kg (84.0 lb) (dn models) 38.1 kg (84.0 lb) (dn models)

38.3 kg (84.5 lb) (f models) 38.3 kg (84.5 lb) (f models)

38.6 kg (85.0 lb) (c/z models) 38.6 kg (85.0 lb) (c/z models)

Printer dimensions (MFP) 27

 Figure 1-14 Dimensions for the M577/M578/E57540 printers with one 550-sheet tray and stand

1
1

3 2 3 2

Table 1-40 Dimensions for the M577/M578/E57540 printers with one 550-sheet tray and stand

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 1268 mm (49.9 in) 1522 mm (59.9 in)

2. Depth 869 mm (34.2 in) 1113 mm (43.8 in)

3.Width 884 mm (34.8 in) 853 mm (33.6 in)

Weight 73.2 kg (161.4 lb) (dn models) 73.2 kg (161.4 lb) (dn models)

73.4 kg (161.8 lb) (f models) 73.4 kg (161.8 lb) (f models)

73.7 kg (162.5 lb) (c/z models) 73.7 kg (162.5 lb) (c/z models)

Figure 1-15 Dimensions for the 550-sheet tray

1
3 2

3 2

28 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-41 Dimensions for the 550-sheet tray

Measurement Tray fully closed Tray fully opened

1. Height 130 mm (5.1 in) 130 mm (5.1 in)

2. Depth 465 mm (18.3 in) 768 mm (30.2 in)

3. Width 458 mm (18.0 in) (lower-right door open) 853 mm (33.6 in) (lower-right door closed)

Weight 5.8 kg (12.8 lb) 5.8 kg (12.8 lb)

Figure 1-16 Dimensions for the printer stand

1 1

3 2
2
3

Table 1-42 Dimensions for the printer stand

Measurement Stand fully closed Stand fully opened

1. Height 295 mm (11.6 in) 295 mm (11.6 in)

2. Depth 869 mm (34.2 in) 1113 mm (43.8 in)

3. Width 884 mm (34.8 in) 884 mm (34.8 in)

Weight 17.7 kg (39 lb) 17.7 kg (39 lb)

Printer space requirements

Learn about the printer space requirements

HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions to make sure there is sufficient
space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See Printer dimensions (SFP) on page
24 and/or Printer dimensions (MFP) on page 27.

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specifications.

See www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or
www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Printer space requirements 29

 Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-43 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH

30 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Information (input devices)
Learn about the printer input devices.

550-sheet paper feeder front view

Identify the pars on the 550-sheet paper feeder.

Figure 1-17 550-sheet paper feeder front view

3
1

Number Description

1 550-sheet paper feeder (whole unit)

2 Tray 3/4/5 (cassette)

3 Drawer connector

Information (input devices) 31

 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Learn about printer installation and maintenance.

32 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner installation and maintenance.

Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP)
Learn about cleaning the document feeder rollers and pads.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the document feeder rollers and pads which can affect
performance.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a typical MFP printer. However, the procedure is correct for all
MFP printers.

1. . Lift the document-feeder latch.

2. . Open the document-feeder cover.

Document feeder / scanner 33

 3. . Remove any visible lint or dust from each
of the feed rollers and the separation pad
using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water.

NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly to access

and clean the second roller.

4. . Close the document-feeder cover.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.

View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.

1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.

34 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

2. Open the scanner lid.

3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly
on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the printer.

NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).

4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 35

 5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.

36 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Base printer
Learn about the base printer installation and maintenance.

Formatter accessories
Learn about the printer formatter accessories.

Table 2-1 Formatter accessories

Item Description Part number

1GB DDR3 Slim DIMM (SFP) Memory G6W84A (new)

NOTE: M553/M554/M555/E55040 only. 5851-6422 (service)

1GB DDR3 x32 144-Pin 800MHz SODIMM Memory E5K48A (new)

(MFP)
E5K48-67902 (service)

HP Foreign Interface Harness Optional port for connecting third-party B5L31A (new)
devices
B5L31-67902 (service)

HP internal USB ports Two optional USB ports for connecting B5L28A (new)
third-party devices
B5L28-67902 (service)

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server USB wireless print server accessory J8031A

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Wi-Fi direct accessory for “touch” J8030A

Accessory printing from mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Wi-Fi direct accessory for “touch” 3JN69A

Accessory printing from mobile devices

NOTE: M578 only.

HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory Optional fax accessory for the MFP dn B5L53A (new)
600 models
B5L53-67901 (service)

HP secure 500 GB high-performance Hard-disk drive (HDD) B5L29A (new)

hard disk drive
B5L29-67903 (service)
NOTE: Not supported for the M552dn.

HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Automatically encrypts all data that F5S62A (new)
passes through the product
F5S62-61001 (service)

Supplies
Learn about the printer supplies.

Table 2-2 Supplies

Item Description Part number

HP 508A Black Original LaserJet Toner Standard-capacity replacement black CF360A (new)
Cartridge (M552/M553/M577) toner cartridge
CF360-67901 (service)

Base printer 37
 Table 2-2 Supplies (continued)

Item Description Part number

HP 508X High Yield Black Original High-capacity replacement black toner CF360X (new)
LaserJet Toner Cartridge (M552/M553/ cartridge
M577) CF360-67902 (service)

HP 508A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Standard-capacity replacement cyan CF361A (new)
Cartridge (M552/M553/M577) cartridge
CF361-67901 (service)

HP 508X High Yield Cyan Original High-capacity replacement cyan toner CF361X (new)
LaserJet Toner Cartridge (M552/M553/ cartridge
M577) CF361-67902 (service)

HP 508A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner Standard-capacity replacement yellow CF362A (new)
Cartridge (M552/M553/M577) toner cartridge
CF362-67901 (service)

HP 508X High Yield Yellow Original High-capacity replacement yellow toner CF362X (new)
LaserJet Toner Cartridge (M552/M553/ cartridge
M577) CF362-67902 (service)

HP 508A Magenta Original LaserJet Standard-capacity replacement CF363A (new)

Toner Cartridge (M552/M553/M577) magenta toner cartridge
CF363-67901 (service)

HP 508X High Yield Magenta Original High-capacity replacement magenta CF363X (new)
LaserJet Toner Cartridge (M552/M553/ toner cartridge
M577) CF363-67902 (service)

SVC Cartridge LJ Black Managed Toner Managed black toner cartridge W9060–67901
(E55040/E57540)

SVC Cartridge LJ Cyan Managed Toner Managed cyan toner cartridge W9061–67901
(E55040/E57540)

SVC Cartridge LJ Yellow Managed Toner Managed yellow toner cartridge W9062–67901
(E55040/E57540)

SVC Cartridge LJ Magenta Managed Managed magenta toner cartridge W9063–67901

Toner (E55040/E57540)

SVC Cartridge-212A Black LaserJet Standard-capacity replacement black 7ZU81-67905

Toner (M554/M555/M578) toner cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212X Black LaserJet High-capacity replacement black toner 7ZU81-67909

Toner (M554/M555/M578) cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212A Cyan LaserJet Standard-capacity replacement cyan 7ZU81-67906

Toner (M554/M555/M578) toner cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212X Cyan LaserJet High-capacity replacement cyan toner 7ZU81-67910

Toner (M554/M555/M578) cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212A Yellow LaserJet Standard-capacity replacement yellow 7ZU81-67907

Toner (M554/M555/M578) toner cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212X Yellow LaserJet High-capacity replacement yellow toner 7ZU81-67911

Toner (M554/M555/M578) cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212A Magenta LaserJet Standard-capacity replacement 7ZU81-67908

Toner (M554/M555/M578) magenta toner cartridge

SVC Cartridge-212X Magenta LaserJet High-capacity replacement magenta 7ZU81-67912

Toner (M554/M555/M578) toner cartridge

38 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Table 2-2 Supplies (continued)

Item Description Part number

HP toner-collection unit Replacement toner-collection unit with B5L37A (new)

attached door
B5L37-67901 (service)

HP LaserJet 200 ADF Roller Replacement feed rollers for the B5L52A (new)
Replacement Kit (M577/M578/E57540) document feeder
W5U23–67901 (service)

Fuser kit (110V) Replacement fuser B5L35A (new)

B5L35-67902 (service)

Fuser kit (220V) Replacement fuser B5L36A (new)

B5L36-67902 (service)

HP Staple Cartridge Pack (stapler Replacement staple cartridges (two Q7432A

models only) staple cartridges - 1500 staples each)

Security setup
Learn about the base printer security.

Security settings on the information pages

Print and find printer security information on the configuration and HP embedded Jetdirect information
pages.

NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In
addition to the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless
pages print.

Print a configuration page from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Reports,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Print a configuration page from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

Security setup 39
 Figure 2-1 Configuration page printer security information

HP LaserJet M

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

40 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Figure 2-2 HP embedded Jetdirect page printer security information

HP LaserJet M

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

Advanced security configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printer security.

How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the following steps to open the Embedded Web Server.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch
the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.

Advanced security configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 41

 2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS web page
opens.

NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.

To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:

Windows® 7

● Internet Explorer (version 8.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Windows® 8 or greater

● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Windows 10 or greater

● Microsoft Edge (version 93 or greater)

● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

macOS

● Safari (version 5.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

Linux

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Security tab
Settings available on the Security tab of the EWS.

Table 2-3 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab

Menu Description

Access Control Configure access to printer functions for specific individuals or groups, and select
the method individuals use to sign in to the printer.

42 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Table 2-3 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)

Menu Description

Account Policy Configure for local administrator and remote configuration the password lockout
and password complexity settings.

Certificate Management Install, manage, and validate security certificates for access to the printer and the
network.

Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to
which the printer can send messages.

General Security Settings for general security, including the following options:

● Configure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on

the printer.

● Set a custom device Service Access Code.

● Set the Remote Configuration Password.

● Set Embedded Web Server Options.

● Enable WebScan Auto Capture Jobs.

● Set PJL password and enable access commands.

● Enable PostScript operations.

● Set file system access and firmware upgrade security.

● Enable Bluetooth Low Energy settings.

● Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB
connectivity port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.

● Set enabled SMB versions for the printer.

● View the status of all security settings.

Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certificates that allow
devices to use this product.

Protect Stored Data Configure and manage the internal storage for the printer.

Configure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer internal storage.

Security Log Retrieve security event log data, and export security event log data to a file that can
be used for detailed problem analysis.

Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system
parameters.

Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from different
domains. If no sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.

HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence

Learn about toner cartridge JetIntelligence.

HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence support two features for managing toner cartridges.

● The HP Cartridge Policy feature allows customers to specify the use of only genuine HP toner
cartridges in the printer.

● The anti-theft feature enables locking a cartridge to a specific printer or fleet of printers.

HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence 43

 HP Cartridge Policy
The genuine HP Cartridge Policy feature allows a customer to specify that only genuine HP supplies can
be used in a printer. If anything but a genuine HP supply is installed, the printer will not print. This feature
is disabled by default, and can be enabled or disabled from the control panel, the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS), or HP Web Jetadmin.

If a genuine HP cartridge has passed the low state and is installed in a printer that has this feature
enabled, the printer will display an Unauthorized Cartridge message on the control panel and will not
print.

If a non-HP toner cartridge is used in a printer with this feature enabled, the message Unauthorized
Cartridge appears on the control-panel display and the printer will not print.

NOTE: If a customer suspects they have a counterfeit cartridge, they should report it by going to
www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit and selecting Report now.

Anti-theft or cartridge protection

The toner cartridge anti-theft feature allows a customer to configure the printer to automatically
lock toner cartridges to a specific printer or fleet of printers when they are installed. A locked toner
cartridge will work only in the specified printer or fleet of printers. This feature prevents toner cartridges
from being stolen and used in another printer, or from being moved from an authorized printer to an
unauthorized printer. This feature is disabled by default. Cartridge protection to a single printer can be
enabled or disabled from the control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). Cartridge protection
for a printer fleet can be enabled only by using HP Web Jetadmin.

When the anti-theft feature is enabled, the toner cartridge in a printer will only work in the specified
printer or fleet of printers. If a locked toner cartridge is moved to another printer, the cartridge will not
print and the message Protected Cartridge appears on the control-panel display.

NOTE: When a toner cartridge is locked to a specific printer or fleet of printers, it cannot be unlocked.
This is a permanent operation.

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

NOTE: All printer models might not support the Dynamic security feature.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experiences, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you
are using non-original HP cartridges, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

44 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Printer security features
Restrict who has access to configuration settings, secure data, and prevent access to valuable
hardware components.

Introduction
The printer includes several security features to restrict who has access to configuration settings, to
secure data, and to prevent access to valuable hardware components.

Security statements
Review this important security statement.

The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the printer
secure, protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the
printer.

Assign an administrator password

Assign an administrator password for access to the printer and the HP Embedded Web Server so that
unauthorized users cannot change the printer settings.

Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password

Use the following steps to set a password for the printer.

1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.

b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as
it displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The
EWS opens.

NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might
not be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm
the computer.

2. Click the Security tab.

3. Open the General Security menu.

4. In the area labeled Set the Local Administrator Password, enter the name to associate with the
password in the Username field.

5. Enter the password in the New Password field, and then enter it again in the Verify Password field.

NOTE: To change an existing password, first enter the existing password in the Old Password field.

Printer security features 45

 6. Click the Apply button.

IMPORTANT: Make note of the password and store it in a safe place. The administrator password
cannot be recovered. If the administrator password is lost or forgotten, contact HP Support for the
assistance required to completely reset the printer.

Click here to contact HP Support about resetting the printer password.

Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel

Use the following steps to sign into the control panel.

Some features on the printer control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use
them. When a feature is secured, the printer prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also
sign in without waiting for a prompt by selecting Sign In from the printer control panel.

Typically, the credentials for signing in to the printer are the same as for signing in to the network.
Consult the network administrator for this printer if you have questions about which credentials to use.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Sign In.

2. Follow the prompts to enter the credentials.

NOTE: To maintain security for the printer, select Sign Out when you have finished using the printer.

IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traffic to and from the printer. IPsec
provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.

For printers that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure
IPsec by using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.

Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks

The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive data without
impacting printer performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and
has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality.

Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk.

Lock the formatter

The formatter has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.

Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.

Cleaning
Learn about the base printer cleaning functions and procedures.

Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the printer. This can cause print-quality
problems during printing. Cleaning the paper path eliminates or reduces these problems.

Clean the paper path and toner-cartridge areas every time that the toner cartridge is changed or
whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the printer free from dust and debris.
To clean the printer paper path at regularly scheduled intervals, go to Automatic cleaning page on page
47.

46 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Printer rollers might require cleaning if the printer is experiencing pickup and feed problems or frequent
paper jams that involve the rollers.

Print a cleaning page

Learn how to print a cleaning page.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Print a cleaning page from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Print a cleaning page from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

Automatic cleaning page

Learn how to set up automatic cleaning page intervals.

Enable and configure auto cleaning from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

Print a cleaning page 47

 3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the desired automatic cleaning page interval, and then press the
OK button to print the cleaning page.

6. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Done (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button.

Enable and configure auto cleaning from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Cleaning Page

3. Touch the desired automatic cleaning page interval, and then touch the Done button.

Clean the Tray 1 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 1 rollers.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-4 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L24-67905 Multipurpose/tray 1 pick-up roller and separation assembly

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

48 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup roller.

■ Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller.

a. Open Tray 1.

Figure 2-3 Open Tray 1

b. Pull on the center of the cover to open it.

Figure 2-4 Open the roller cover

Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller 49

 c. Pull the cover straight off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-5 Remove the cover

d. Release two tabs (callout 1) between the roller collar and roller, and then rotate the top of the
roller (callout 2) out and away from the printer.

TIP: Pushing down on the top of the roller might make it easier to release the tabs.

Figure 2-6 Release two tabs

2
1

50 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 e. Remove the roller.

Figure 2-7 Remove the roller

Remove the Tray 1 separation roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 separation roller.

■ Remove the Tray 1 separation roller.

a. Carefully flex the right- and left-side tray retainers to release them.

TIP: Raise the tray to the halfway closed position to make it is easier to release the retainers.

Figure 2-8 Release the tray retainers

Remove the Tray 1 separation roller 51

 b. Carefully raise Tray 1 up into the printer.

Figure 2-9 Raise Tray 1 up

c. Firmly grasp the corners of the separation roller cover, and then rotate it down and away from
the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-10 Open the roller cover

d. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the end of the roller out and away from the holder
(callout 2).

TIP: It might be necessary to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to complete this step.

52 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 Figure 2-11 Release one tab

e. Slide the roller out of the holder to remove it.

Figure 2-12 Remove the roller

Clean the Tray 1 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 1 rollers.

■ Clean the Tray 1 rollers, and then reverse the removal steps to reinstall them.

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the roller and pad.

CAUTION: When handling the roller and/or pad, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils
and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems.

Clean the Tray 1 rollers 53

 Figure 2-13 Clean the rollers

Clean the Tray 2-X rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: The procedure in this section shows Tray 2 in the figures. However, this procedure is also
correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-5 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6577-000CN Kit-Tray 2-X roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

54 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 2-14 Pull the tray out

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 55

 2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-15 Remove the tray

3. Open the right door.

Figure 2-16 Open the right door

56 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

4. Carefully raise the transfer roller assembly up and into the printer.

Figure 2-17 Raise the transfer roller assembly

5. Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-18 Lower the paper guide

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 57

 6. Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-19 Locate the tray pickup roller

7. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the latch (callout 1), and then open the right door (callout 2).

Figure 2-20 Open the Tray 3, 4, or 5 right door

2 1

58 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

8. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-21 Lower the Tray 3, 4, or 5 paper guide

9. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-22 Locate the Tray 3, 4, or 5 pickup roller assembly

10. Slide the assembly to the left to compress the spring loaded shaft (callout 1), and then rotate the
right end of the assembly down and away from the printer (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to access the roller through the tray cavity, while viewing it through the right
door opening.

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 59

 Figure 2-23 Slide the assembly to the left

2
1

11. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 2-24 Remove the roller assembly

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X separation roller.

60 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

1. Locate the tray separation roller.

Figure 2-25 Locate the roller assembly

2. Push up on the blue label to release the roller assembly.

Figure 2-26 Push up on the blue label

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller 61

 3. Slide the roller assembly straight up to remove it.

Figure 2-27 Remove the roller assembly

Clean the Tray 2 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.

■ Clean the Tray 2 rollers.

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-
handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves or thoroughly
washing your hands before handling the assembly.

NOTE: The number of rollers depends on the number input accessories installed.

Figure 2-28 Clean the rollers

62 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Input devices
Learn about input device installation and maintenance.

Clean the Tray 2-X rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: The procedure in this section shows Tray 2 in the figures. However, this procedure is also
correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-6 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6577-000CN Kit-Tray 2-X roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

Input devices 63
 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 2-29 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-30 Remove the tray

64 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

3. Open the right door.

Figure 2-31 Open the right door

4. Carefully raise the transfer roller assembly up and into the printer.

Figure 2-32 Raise the transfer roller assembly

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 65

 5. Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-33 Lower the paper guide

6. Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-34 Locate the tray pickup roller

66 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

7. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the latch (callout 1), and then open the right door (callout 2).

Figure 2-35 Open the Tray 3, 4, or 5 right door

2 1

8. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-36 Lower the Tray 3, 4, or 5 paper guide

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 67

 9. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-37 Locate the Tray 3, 4, or 5 pickup roller assembly

10. Slide the assembly to the left to compress the spring loaded shaft (callout 1), and then rotate the
right end of the assembly down and away from the printer (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to access the roller through the tray cavity, while viewing it through the right
door opening.

Figure 2-38 Slide the assembly to the left

2
1

68 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 11. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 2-39 Remove the roller assembly

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X separation roller.

1. Locate the tray separation roller.

Figure 2-40 Locate the roller assembly

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller 69

 2. Push up on the blue label to release the roller assembly.

Figure 2-41 Push up on the blue label

3. Slide the roller assembly straight up to remove it.

Figure 2-42 Remove the roller assembly

Clean the Tray 2 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.

■ Clean the Tray 2 rollers.

70 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-
handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves or thoroughly
washing your hands before handling the assembly.

NOTE: The number of rollers depends on the number input accessories installed.

Figure 2-43 Clean the rollers

Clean the Tray 2 rollers 71

 3 Theory of operation

Learn about the printer theory of operation.

72 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner components.

NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.

Document feed system

Learn about the various components of the document feed system.

This section describes the following:

● Sensors in the document feeder

● Document feeder paper path

● Simplex single-pass scanning

● Electronic duplexing (e-duplex) single-pass scanning

● Deskew operation

● Document feeder hinges

The printer supports single-pass electronic duplexing (e-duplex) copy jobs. Two separate scan modules
scan the front-side and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document
feeder.

For some printer bundles, this ADF supports a smart background feature which auto-crops and adjusts
the image extents (see printer specifications for more information).

Sensors in the document feeder

Learn about the document feeder sensor locations and functions.

The document feeder contains the following sensors:

● ADF paper present sensor: Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder. If paper
is present in the document feeder when copies are made, the printer scans the document using
the document feeder. If no paper is present when copies are made, the printer scans the document
using the scanner glass.

● ADF Y (length) sensor: Detects whether a legal-size original is present in the document feeder.

● ADF jam cover sensor: Detects whether the document feeder cover is open or closed.

● ADF paper path deskew sensor: Detects the top of the page as it enters the deskew rollers.

● ADF paper path pick success sensor: Detects a successful one page feed from the document
feeder tray.

NOTE: This sensor uses ultrasonic sound to detect a multi-page paper feed.

● Paper path sensor 1: Detects the top of the page as it approaches the front-side scan module
(document feeder glass).

Document feeder / scanner 73

 Figure 3-1 Document feeder sensors

2 5 1
3

Table 3-1 Document feeder sensors

Item Description

1 ADF Y (length) sensor

2 ADF paper present sensor

3 ADF deskew sensor

4 Paper path sensor 1

NOTE: For an e-duplex copy job, this sensor is used to

activate the front-side scan module (in the scanner base) and
the front-side background selector (in the document feeder), if
needed.

5 ADF jam cover sensor (open the jam access cover and insert a
folded piece of paper to activate the flag)

Document feeder paper path

Review the following information about the document feeder paper path.

Figure 3-2 Document feeder paper path

74 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-2 Document feeder paper path

Item Description Item Description

1 Input tray 7 Front-side scan module location

NOTE: This scan module (document feeder glass)

is located in the scanner base and is not pictured.

2 Pre-pick roller 8 Back-side scan module

3 Pick roller 9 ADF pick success transmitter

4 ADF pick success receiver 10 Separator roller

5 Deskew drive roller 11 Exit drive roller

6 Prescan drive roller 12 Lift plate

Document feeder simplex operation

Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job.

1. The ADF jam cover sensor detects when the cover door is in the closed position.

2. The ADF paper present sensor activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray.

3. The feed motor rotates to raise the lift plate and starts to pick the loaded paper.

4. The ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor activates when the leading edge of the media is driven past
the sensor. The printer firmware registers a successful pick operation.

5. The ADF paper path deskew activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it. The printer
firmware registers the leading edge of the paper position.

6. The leading edge of the paper drives into the nip point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew
pinch rollers. This creates a buckle of paper by the nip point for pick-skew correction.

7. The deskew motor rotates the deskew drive roller to pull the paper into the prescan drive roller.

8. The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick and feed roller to turn freely while the paper is
pulled in by the deskew drive roller.

9. The feed motor rotates to drive the paper into the prescan front-side sensor. The firmware registers
the leading edge position of the paper as the multi-pick sensor activates.

10. The feed motor continues to rotate and drive the leading edge of the paper through the preset
distance from the multi-pick sensor to the front-side scan zone. The scanner begins the scanning
and data retrieval process.

11. The ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor deactivates when the trailing edge of the paper passes the
sensor. The firmware registers the trailing edge of the paper position.

12. The feed motor continues to rotate and drive the trailing edge of the paper through the preset
distance from the ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor to the front-side scan zone. The scanner ends
the scanning and data retrieval process.

13. The feed motor continues to rotate and ejects the trailing edge of the paper into the output bin.

14. One of the following occurs:

Document feeder simplex operation 75

 ● If the copy job is complete, the ADF paper present sensor deactivates. The feed motor reverses
rotation to raise the pick roller.

● If the copy job is not complete, the ADF paper present sensor is active. The printer firmware
detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.

Document feeder e-duplex operation

Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job.

NOTE: For an e-duplex copy job, the background scan operation begins immediately after the simplex
sequence of operation ends.

1. The feed motor continues to drive the paper until the leading edge activates the prescan back-side
sensor. The printer firmware registers the position of the leading edge of the paper.

2. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the leading edge of the paper through the preset
distance from prescan back-side sensor to the back-side background selector scan zone. The
back-side background scan module begins scanning and retrieval of the data.

3. The prescan back-side sensor deactivates when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The printer
firmware registers the trailing edge of the paper position.

4. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the trailing edge of the paper edge past the back-side
background selector scan zone.

5. The feed motor continues to rotate and ejects the trailing edge of the paper into the output bin.

6. One of the following occurs:

● If the copy job is complete, the ADF paper present sensor deactivates. The feed motor reverses
rotation to raise the pick roller.

● If the copy job is not complete, the ADF paper present sensor is active. The printer firmware
detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.

Deskew operation
Learn about the document feeder deskew features.

NOTE: For printer deskew specifications, go the HP Web-based interactive Search Engine (WISE) and
search for HP LaserJet Enterprise, Managed, HP PageWide Pro, Enterprise, Managed - Skew Guide
(C06363769).

Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of
the input tray when paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel with
the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.

The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to improper loading of paper in the input tray by
buckling the paper to create a paper buffer.

76 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The document feeder aligns the leading edge of the paper parallel with the deskew drive rollers before
the paper is driven further into the document feeder paper path.

NOTE: If the page to be copied is smaller than the minimal sliding guide setting, do not use the
document feeder for the copy job. Attempting to copy too small of a page using the document feeder
might result in document feeder jams and/or damage to the original page. Instead, use the flatbed
glass to copy the page.

Figure 3-3 Document feeder side guides

Document feeder hinges

Review the following information about the document feeder hinges.

The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner
glass. The document feeder still closes (the bottom of the ADF is kept parallel to the scanner glass) and
allows the printer to operate.

The document feeder will withstand a downward force of about 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front edge
center of the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on the
scanner glass and parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing
performance degradation.

The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document
feeder from suddenly closing and causing damage or a loud noise.

The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured
at the front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document
feeder.

The hinges allow the document feeder to open to an angle of between 60º and 80º from the horizontal
position (this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Document feeder hinges 77

 Figure 3-4 Document feeder open (book mode)

Figure 3-5 Document feeder open (60º to 80º)

Scanning and image capture system

Learn about the scanning and image capture system.

78 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, scan module, and a scan
control board (SCB). The scanner has a sensor to detect legal-sized media and a switch to indicate when
the document feeder is opened.

The document feeder and control panel are attached to the scanner. If the scanner fails, it can be
replaced as a whole unit. The scanner replacement part does not include the document feeder, control
panel, or SCB.

Scanning and image capture system 79

 Base printer
Learn about the base printer components.

Basic operation
Learn about the basic operation of the printer.

The printer routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information,
processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer.

The basic printer operation comprises the following systems:

● The engine-control system, which includes the power supply and the DC controller printed circuit
assembly (PCA)

● The laser scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum

● The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper

● The pickup, feed, and delivery system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the
paper through the printer

● Accessory (optional paper feeder)

● Integrated scanner assembly (document feeder and sub-scanner assembly)

Figure 3-6 Relationship between the main printer systems

Laser scanner system

Image-formation system

Engine-control system Pickup, feed, and delivery system

Accessory

Image Scanner (MFP)

80 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-7 System block diagram

Easy-access Control
USB Panel

LAN

Formatter USBD
DC controller

USBH

5V

Image scanner (MFP)

5V

Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Scanner control board (MFP)

Sequence of operation
Learn how the DC controller PCA controls the printer operating sequence.

The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the following table.

Sequence of operation 81
 Table 3-3 Sequence of operation

Period Duration Description

Waiting From the time the power is turned on, the door is ● Detects the fuser
closed, or when the printer exits Sleep mode until
the printer is ready for printing. ● Heats the fuser sleeve in the fuser

● Pressurizes the pressure roller in the fuser

● Detects the toner cartridges

● Separates all of the developer rollers from the

photosensitive drums

● Separates all of the transfer rollers from the

photosensitive drums

● Rotates and stops each motor

● Rotates and stops each fan

● Detects the ITB

● Cleans the ITB

● Cleans the ITB secondary transfer roller

Standby From the end of the waiting sequence or the ● Is in the Ready state
last rotation, until the formatter receives a print
command, or until the printer is turned off. ● Enters Sleep mode if the formatter sends the
sleep command

● Rotates and stops each fan

● Calibrates the printer if the calibration

command is sent

Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a print ● Rotates each motor
command until the paper enters the paper path.
● Rotates each fan

● Activates the high-voltage power supply (high-

voltage bias)

● Prepares the laser/scanner unit

● Warms the fuser to the correct temperature

Printing From the time the first sheet of paper enters the ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
paper path until the last sheet has passed through
the fuser. ● Picks paper from the tray.

● Transfers the toner to the paper

● Fuses the toner image onto the paper

82 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-3 Sequence of operation (continued)

Period Duration Description

Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser ● Moves the last printed sheet into the output
until the motors stop rotating. bin

● Stops each motor

● Stops each fan

● Stops the high-voltage power supply (high-

voltage bias)

● Stops the laser/scanner unit

● Turns the fuser heater off

● If another print command is received, the

printer enters the initial rotation period when
the last rotation is complete.

Formatter-control system
Learn about how the formatter operates.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.
IMPORTANT: When a formatter PCA or DC controller is replaced a pairing operation must be
completed to make the printer functional.

The formatter performs the following functions:

● Controls the sleep delay function

● Receives and processes print data from the various printer inputs

● Monitors control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel
and the network or bi-directional interface

● Develops and coordinates data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA

● Stores customer configuration settings and paper types.

● Stores font information

● Communicates with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface

Formatter-control system 83
 The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image
information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the
image formation system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals the formatter to
send the print image data.

Power management
Learn about printer power management.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Power management conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time.
When the printer is in sleep mode, the control-panel back-light is turned off, but the printer retains all
printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The setting can be modified or turned off from the
control-panel menus.

The printer exits sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs.

● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port.

● A print job or fax (fax models) is received.

● The control panel is touched (button press or touchscreen touch depending on model).

● A document is loaded in the document feeder (MFP only).

● Opening the scanner lid (model dependent).

● The power button is pressed for 3 seconds or less.

● Connecting an operational live network Ethernet cable or fax line (fax models).

● Inserting a USB drive in either the front USB port or the USB port on the back of the device.

● Connecting a USB cable to an operating computer.

● Opening the cartridge, front, or rear door (model dependent).

NOTE: Opening a paper tray does not wake up the printer.

TIP: Error messages override the sleep delay message. The printer enters sleep mode at the
selected time, but the error message continues to appear.

Power management M552/M553/M554/M555/M577/M578/E55040/E57540

Learn about printer power management (all models).

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

This topic includes power management features shared by the M552/M553/M554/M555/M577/M578/

E55040/E57540 printers.

84 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings affect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time, how quickly the printer
enters sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up from sleep mode.

To configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter times for both the Sleep
after Inactivity and Auto Off after sleep settings.

NOTE: HP does not recommend using deep sleep settings if you have Security Solutions installed. In
some situations, the printer does not wake from deep sleep. For additional information, contact your
HP representative.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.

2. Open the following menus:

a. General

b. Energy Settings

c. Sleep Settings

3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is inactive before it enters
sleep mode. Enter the appropriate time period.

4. Select Auto Off after sleep to put the printer into a deeper power save mode after a period of sleep.
Enter the appropriate time period.

NOTE: By default, the printer will wake from Auto Off in response to any activity other than USB or
Wi-Fi. For greater energy settings, you can set it to wake only to the power button by selecting Shut
down (wake on power button only).

5. Select Done to save the settings.

Power management M577/M578/E55040/E57540

Learn about printer power management (M577/M578/E55040/E57540).

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

This topic includes power management features shared by the M577/M578/E55040/E57540 printers.

Set the sleep schedule

Use the Sleep Schedule feature to configure the printer to automatically wake or go into Sleep mode at
specific times on specific days of the week.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.

2. Open the following menus:

a. General

b. Energy Settings

Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power 85
 c. Sleep Schedule

3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Event or Sleep
Event.

4. For a wake or sleep event, configure the time and the days of the week for the event. Select Save to
save the setting.

Power management E55040/E57540

Learn about printer power management (E55040/E57540).

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

This topic includes power management features shared by the E55040/E57540 printers.

Set the Sleep/Auto Off After Inactivity setting

Use the control panel menus to set the amount of idle time before the printer enters sleep mode.

Complete the following procedure to change the Sleep/Auto Off After setting:

1. On the printer control panel, open the Setup menu.

2. Open the following menus:

a. System Setup

b. Energy Settings

c. Sleep/Auto Off After

3. Use the arrow keys to select the time for the Sleep/Auto Off After delay, and then press the OK
button.

Set the Delay Shut Down setting

Use the control panel menus to select whether or not the printer delays shutting down after the power
button is pressed.

Complete the following procedure to change the Delay Shut Down setting:

1. On the printer control panel, open the Setup menu.

2. Open the following menus:

a. System Setup

b. Energy Settings

c. Delay Shut Down

3. Select one of the delay options:

● No Delay: The printer shuts down after a period of inactivity determined by the Delay Shut
Down setting.

86 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● When Ports Are Active: When this option is selected the printer will not shut down unless all
ports are inactive. An active network link or fax connection will prevent the printer from shutting
down.

Power management M552/M553/M554/M555/M577

Learn about printer power management (M552/M553/M554/M555/M577).

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

This topic includes power management features shared by the M552/M553/M554/M555/M577 printers.

TIP: For firmware versions prior to FustureSmart 4, the Idle Settings feature described in this section
is termed Optimum Speed/Energy Usage (Administration > General Settings > Energy Settings >
Optimum Speed/Energy Usage)

Set the idle settings

This setting affects energy use while the product is idle, not while in Sleep Mode. Start faster results in
a quicker first-page-out time, but uses more power. Save energy conserves power, but could result in a
slower first-page-out time.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Settings menu.

2. Open the following menus:

a. General

b. Energy Settings

c. Idle Settings

3. Adjust the slider, and then select Done to save the setting.

Printer job language (PJL)

Learn about printer job language (PJL).

PJL is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL and PostScript (PS). With
standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions.

● Dynamic I/O switching: The printer can be configured with a host on each I/O by using dynamic
I/O switching. Even when the printer is offline, it can receive data from more than one I/O
simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.

● Context-sensitive switching: The printer can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of
each job and configure itself to serve that personality.

● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next: For example, if a print job is
sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are
formatted for landscape printing.

Printer management language (PML)

Learn about printer management language (PML)

Power management M552/M553/M554/M555/M577 87

 PML allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back from the printer through the I/O
ports.

Control panel
Learn about the control panel.

The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from the control panel.

NOTE: The 10.9 cm (4.37 in) and 20.3 cm (8.0 in) control panels have a diagnostic mode to allow testing
of the touchscreen, Home button, and speaker. The control panels do not require calibration.

SFP printers

● M552/M553

6.85 cm (2.7 in) four-line color display with numeric keypad and additional buttons for navigating
control-panel menus.

● M554

6.9 cm (2.7 in) QVGA LCD color control panel with numeric keypad.

● M553X/M555/E55040

10.9 cm (4.37 in) full-color SVGA with infrared touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle.

MFP printers

● M577/M578/E57540

20.3 cm (8.0 in) full-color SVGA with infrared touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle.

Walk-up USB
Learn about the walk-up USB function.

NOTE: Touchscreen models only.

This printer features printing from a USB flash drive. This printer supports printing the following types of
files from the USB flash drive.

● .pdf

● .jpg

● .prn and .PRN

● .pcl and .PCL

● ps and .PS

● doc and .docx

● .ppt and .pptx

88 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 When a USB flash drive is inserted into the front of the printer, the control panel will display the USB
Flash Drive menu. The files present on the USB flash drive can be accessed from the control panel.

NOTE: The USB flash drive must be formatted using the FAT32 format. Drives formatted with NTFS
will not work.

Any files in a supported format on the USB flash drive can be printed directly from the printer control
panel. Pages also can be scanned and saved to the USB flash drive from the control panel.

Wireless
Learn about the wireless feature.

The M553x, M555x, M577z, M578z, and E55040 models contain a wireless card to enable wireless direct
printing over a 802.11b/g/n wireless connection.

Near field communication (NFC)

Learn about the NFC feature.

The M553x, M577z, and E55040dw models support NFC capabilities. NFC enables a connection between
the printer and a mobile device, such as a smart phone or tablet, by touching the device to the NFC icon
on the bottom of the control panel. Documents and images from the mobile device can then be printed
through the wireless card on the printer.

Low end data model (LEDM) overview

Learn about the low-end data model (LEDM).

The low-end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

CPU
Learn about the printer microprocessor.

The formatter incorporates a 1.2 GHz processor.

Input/output (I/O)
Learn about printer I/O functionality.

NOTE: Some of the following printer I/O functions are model specific. For example, not all printer
models have a fax function.

Universal serial bus (USB)

The printer includes a USB 2.0 connection.

Universal serial bus (USB) hosts

The printer includes USB hosts for USB flash drive and job storage.

10/100/1000 networking
The printer includes a 10/100/1000 network (Ethernet) connection.

Wireless 89
 Fax
The printer includes a fax phone line connection.

NOTE: For some fax model printers, the telephone extension port is plugged and not operational.

Walk-up USB
The port is located on or near the control panel.

NOTE: Model specific feature.

Wireless
Wireless products contain a wireless card to enable 802.11b/g/n wireless communication with dual band
support for 2.4Ghz and 5 Ghz.

NOTE: Wireless models only.

Memory
Learn about printer memory functionality.

NOTE: Some of the following printer memory functions are model specific. For example, not all printer
models have Flash memory.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade
the firmware.

NOTE: For more information about a specific printer model, see the Printer information,
configurations, and specifications section in the service manual.

Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)

The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment
configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.

Flash memory
NAND: Stores fax memory.

Random access memory

The printer uses the following RAM:

● SFP: 1.0 GB

● MFP: 1.75 GB

90 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a
variety of font- and data-compression methods.

NOTE: MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode.

Engine-control system
Learn about the engine control system.

The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other
main systems to coordinate all printer functions. The engine-control system consists of the following
components:

● DC controller

● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS; one unit)

● High-voltage power supplies (HVPS; two units)

● Fuser power supply (FPS; one unit)

Figure 3-8 Engine-control system

Engine-control system
Laser scanner system

DC controller

Image-formation system

Low-voltage power supply

Formatter Pickup, feed, and delivery

system

High-voltage power supplies

Accessory

Fuser power supply

Image Scanner (MFP)

DC controller
Learn about the DC controller.

The DC controller controls the operation of the printer and its components. The DC controller starts the
printer operation when the printer power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the

Engine-control system 91
 DC controller. After the printer enters the standby period, the DC controller sends out various signals to
operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data
that the host computer sends.

Figure 3-9 DC controller block diagram

Sole
Solenoid

Motor Fan

Fan
Motor

Clutch
Photointerrupter
High-voltage
power supply D
Fan Solenoid

LED Switch

Sensor Photointerrupter

Sensor
ITB ass’y

DC controller LED
T2 roller
High-voltage
power supply T Accessory
Cartridge
(Y/M/C/K)

Fuser HIP
Control panel

Sensor
Fuser
power supply
Fan Formatter

Fan

Low-voltage
Motor power supply Laser scanner ass’y

AC input

Motors
Learn about the printer motors.

92 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The printer has eight motors. The motors drive the components in the paper-feed and image-formation
systems.

The DC controller monitors the fuser motor; the scanner motor, and drum motors 1, 2, and 3 to determine
if a motor has failed. It notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions:

● Start-up failure: the motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified time from when the
motor starts.

● Rotational failure: the rotational speed of the motor is not in the specified range for a specified time
after the motor reaches a specified speed.

Table 3-4 Motors

Abbreviation Name Purpose Failure detection Part number

M1 Drum motor 1 Drives the yellow Yes Drum motor

photosensitive drum, (RM2-0078-000CN)
yellow developing
roller, and magenta
developing roller

M2 Drum motor 2 Drives the magenta Yes Drum motor

photosensitive drum, (RM2-0078-000CN)
cyan photosensitive
drum, and cyan
developing roller

M3 Drum motor 3 Drives the black Yes Drum motor

photosensitive drum, (RM2-0078-000CN)
black developing roller,
and ITB

M4 Fuser motor Drives the Yes Fuser drive assembly

pressure roller and (RM2-0009-010CN;
delivery roller; the M552dn, M553dn,
pressurization and M553x, E55040,
release of the M577, E57540)
pressure roller; and (RM2-0091-010CN;
the engagement and M553n)
disengagement of the
primary and secondary
transfer rollers

M5 Pickup motor Drives the registration No Paper pickup

roller, Tray 1 pickup drive assembly
roller, Tray 2 pickup (RM2-0008-000CN)
roller, and Tray 2 feed
roller

M6 Developer Drives the No Stepping motor

disengagement motor engagement and (RK2-6027-000CN)
disengagement of the
developing rollers

M7 Scanner motor Drives the scanner Yes Laser scanner

mirror assembly
(RM2-6545-010CN)

M8 Duplex reverse motor Drives the duplex No Duplex drive assembly

(duplex models only) reverse roller (RM2-0006-000CN)

Fans
Learn about the printer fans.

Fans 93
 The printer has four fans for preventing the temperature from rising in the printer and for cooling the
printed pages.

The DC controller determines if there is a fan failure and notifies the formatter if the fan locks for a
specified time from when the fan starts.

Table 3-5 Fans

Abbreviation Name Cooling area Type Speed Part number

FM1 Power supply fan LVPS Intake Full/half Fan

(RK2-2416-010CN)

FM2 Cartridge fan Toner cartridges Intake Full Fan

(RK2-6124-000CN)

FM3 Delivery fan Output tray and Exhaust Full/half Fan

fuser area (RK2-2728-000CN)

FM4 Fuser fan Fuser Exhaust Full/half Fan

(RK2-2418-000CN)

Solenoids
Learn about the printer solenoids.

Table 3-6 Solenoids

Abbreviation Name

SL1 Primary transfer roller disengagement solenoid

SL2 Tray 1 pickup solenoid

SL3 Duplex reverse solenoid (duplex models only)

Clutches
Learn about the printer clutches.

Table 3-7 Clutches

Abbreviation Name

CL1 Tray 2 pickup clutch

CL2 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models only)

Switches
Learn about the printer switches.

Table 3-8 Switches

Abbreviation Name Part number

SW1 24V interlock switch Interlock switch cable assembly

(RM2-7206-000CN; not available)

SW3 Right door switch Switch button (WC2-5806-000CN)

94 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-8 Switches (continued)

Abbreviation Name Part number

SW4 Power supply switch Lever, switch (RC4-0131-000CN; not

available)

SW5 Tray 2 detection switch Switch button (WC2-5806-000CN)

SW1001 Test print switch Not available

Sensors
Learn about the printer sensors.

Table 3-9 Sensors

Abbreviation Name Part number

PS1 Loop sensor Not available

SE1 Media sensor Registration assembly

● RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

● RM2-0018-000CN (M552, M553dn,

M553x, M554, M555, M577, M558,
E55040, E57540)

SR1 Drum home position sensor 1 Not available

SR2 Drum home position sensor 2 Not available

SR3 Drum home position sensor 3 Not available

SR4 Developing home position sensor Not available

SR5 Primary transfer roller disengagement Estrangement detect PCA assembly

sensor (RM2-7157-000CN)

SR6 Top-of-page (TOP) sensor (M552, Not available

M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, M577,
M558, E55040, E57540)

SR6N Top-of-page (TOP) sensor (M553n) Not available

SR8 Tray 1 media-out sensor Not available

SR9 Fuser delivery sensor Not available

SR10 Output bin media-full sensor Not available

SR11 Fuser pressure release sensor Photointerrupter (WG8-5953-000CN; not

available)

SR12 Tray 2 media-out sensor Not available

SR13 Media width sensor, front (M552, Not available

M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, M577,
M558, E55040, E57540)

SR13N Media width sensor, front (M553n) Not available

SR14 Media width sensor, rear (M552, M553dn, Not available

M553x, M554, M555, M577, M558,
E55040, E57540)

SR14N Media width sensor, rear (M553n) Not available

Sensors 95
 Table 3-9 Sensors (continued)

Abbreviation Name Part number

Registration density sensor Density detect assembly

(RM2-7160-000CN)

Environment sensor (temperature and Environment sensor PCA

humidity) (RM2-7154-000CN)

Yellow toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Magenta toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Cyan toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Black toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Residual toner collection unit full sensor Waste toner detect PCA
(RM2-7130-000CN)

Pre-exposure LED 1-3 Pre-exposure PCA (RM2-7168-000CN)

Pre-exposure LED 4 Pre-exposure PCA (RM2-7169-000CN)

Low-voltage power supply

Learn about the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

The low-voltage power-supply (LVPS) circuit converts the AC power from the wall receptacle into the DC
voltages used by the printer components.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to plug the printer into the correct power source (110/220V).

96 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 AC input

Low-voltage power supply

Fuser power supply DC controller

Fuse
FU100

Fuser

Fuse
FU101

Zerocross ZEROX
circuit
+3.3VB2
24VRMT

+24V +24VA +3.3VB FET

Rectifying generation +24VB
circuit circuit

FET
Protection
Interlock switch
circuit
SW1
+3.3VC
+3.3VD
+3.3VC

+3.3VA
FET
+3.3V +3.3VA
generation
circuit
POWER_SW

Rectifying +5VA
circuit
+5VA
Power switch
SW4
+5V +5VB
Switching
generation Formatter
circuit
circuit +5VC

VC5VOFF
PWRSAVE FET

Protection
circuit

Low-voltage power supply voltages description

Learn about LVPS voltages.

The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into three DC voltages, which it then subdivides, as
described in the following table.

Low-voltage power supply voltages description 97

 Table 3-10 Converted DC voltages

Main DC voltage Sub-voltage Behavior

+24 V +24 VA Constantly supplied

Stopped during active OFF or inactive

OFF

+24 V +24 VB Interrupted when the right door is open

(SW1)

+24 V +24 VC Interrupted when the right door is open

(SW1)

+5 V +5 VA Constantly supplied

+5 V +5 VB Constantly supplied

+5 V +5 VC Constantly supplied

Stopped during active OFF or inactive

OFF

+3.3 V +3.3 VA Constantly supplied

+3.3 V +3.3 VB Constantly supplied

Stopped during inactive OFF

+3.3 V +3.3 VC Constantly supplied

Stopped during active OFF or inactive

OFF

+3.3 V +3.3 VD Constantly supplied

Stopped during active OFF or inactive

OFF

Over-current/over-voltage protection
Learn about LVPS protections.

The low-voltage power supply automatically stops supplying the DC voltage to the printer components
whenever it detects excessive current or abnormal voltage. The low-voltage power supply has a
protective circuit against over-current and over-voltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit.

CAUTION: If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective
function might be running. In this case, turn the power switch off and unplug the power cord.

Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found and corrected.

If the protective function is active, the DC controller notifies the formatter of a low-voltage power
supply failure. In addition, the low-voltage power supply has two fuses to protect against over-current. If
over-current flows into the AC line, the fuse stops the AC power.

Low-voltage power supply failure detection

Learn about LVPS failure detection.

The DC controller determines a low-voltage power supply failure and notifies the formatter when the
low-voltage power supply does not supply +24 V.

98 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Low-voltage power supply functions
Learn about LVPS functions.

The printer has the following low-voltage power supply functions.

Table 3-11 Low-voltage power supply functions

Function Supported feature

Sleep mode Yes

Power supply voltage detection Yes

Automatic power OFF Yes

Automatic power ON/OFF Yes

Active OFF Yes

Inactive OFF Yes

Network mode No

Power switch illumination Yes

Low-voltage power supply failure detection Yes

Power save mode No

High-voltage power supply

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) to generate biases. The high-voltage
power supply delivers the high-voltage biases to the following components used to transfer toner during
the image-formation process:

● Primary charging roller (in the toner cartridges)

● Developing roller (in the toner cartridges)

● Primary transfer roller

● Secondary transfer roller

● Pressure roller

● ITB cleaning brush

Low-voltage power supply functions 99

 High-voltage power supply T

Primary transfer bias circuit Fusing bias circuit

ITB cleaning
brush

Pressure roller

Y Primary transfer roller

Secondary transfer roller

C

Primary charging bias Secondary transfer

Developing bias circuit
circuit bias circuit

High-voltage power supply D

DC controller

High-voltage power supply circuits

Learn about HVPS circuits.

The high-voltage power supply contains the following separate circuits.

● Primary-charging-bias generation

The primary charging bias negatively charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to prepare for
image formation.

● Developing-bias generation

100 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The developing bias adheres toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive
drums.

● Primary-transfer-bias generation

The primary transfer bias transfers the toner from each photosensitive drum onto the ITB.

● Secondary-transfer-bias generation

The positive secondary transfer bias transfers the toner image from the ITB onto the paper. The
negative bias transfers residual toner on the secondary transfer roller back to the ITB. The residual
toner on the ITB is deposited in the toner collection unit.

Fuser bias
Learn about HVPS fuser bias.

The printer uses instant-on fusing. The fuser bias is DC positive for improved print quality. The fuser bias
circuit is located in the high-voltage power supply, HVPS (T).

Fuser control
Learn about fuser control operation.

The DC controller and components in the fuser perform the following functions related to fuser
operation:

● Control fuser temperature

● Detect fuser failures

● Prevent excessive temperature rise

● Detect remaining life in the fuser

● Determine if the correct fuser is installed

Fuser circuits
Learn about fuser circuits.

The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature
according to commands from the DC controller. The fuser consists of the following major components:

Fuser bias 101

 Figure 3-10 Fuser components

TH3
H1, H2 Fuser film

TH1

TP1

Pressure roller

TH2
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal

FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal

Fuser heater control Fuser heater safety

circuit circuit

Fuser power supply

DC controller

Table 3-12 Fuser components

Component Abbreviation Name Function

Heater H1 Fuser main heater Heats the center of the fuser

sleeve

Heater H2 Fuser sub-heater Heats the edge of the fuser

sleeve

Thermistor (captive type) TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center

temperature of the fuser
heater

Thermistor (captive type) TH2 Sub-thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at

one end of the fuser heater

102 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-12 Fuser components (continued)

Component Abbreviation Name Function

Thermistor (captive type) TH3 Sub-thermistor 2 Detects the temperature at

one end of the fuser heater

Thermoswitch (non-captive TP1 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal

type) temperature rise in the fuser
heater

Fuser control functions

Learn about fuser control functions.

The printer has the following fuser control functions.

Table 3-13 Fuser control functions

Function Supported feature

Fuser temperature control Yes

Fuser failure detection Yes

Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes

Fuser pressure release mechanism failure detection Yes

Fuser type discrepancy detection Yes

Fuser type identification detection Yes

Fuser presence detection Yes

Fuser life detection Yes

Relay failure detection No

Pressure roller cleaning Yes

Fuser temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.

The temperatures of the two rollers in the fuser fluctuate according to the stage of the printing process.
The DC controller sends commands to the fuser-control circuit to adjust temperatures.

Fuser control functions 103

 Figure 3-11 Fuser temperature-control circuit

AC input

DC controller
Low-voltage
power supply
Zerocross /ZEROX
circuit

Fuser
power supply
+24VC

/RLD2
RL6002 Relay control
circuit
Fuser heater RLD1
safety circuit
Relay control FSR_TH_MAIN
RL6001
circuit

FSRD_MAIN

Fuser heater FSRD_SUB

control circuit
FSR_TH_SUB_R

Fuser

FSR_TH_SUB_R
TH3
FSR_TH_MAIN
TH1
FSR_TH_SUB_F
TH2
+24VC
+24VB
TP

H1, H2
Fuser sleeve ass’y

FSR_TYPE100
Pressure roller
FSR_SNS

104 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Fuser heater protection
Learn about fuser heater protection.

Fuser heater protection is a feature that detects excessive temperatures in the fuser and interrupts the
power supply to the fuser heater.

The following three protective components prevent the fuser heater from excessive rising temperature:

● DC controller

When a thermistor or sub-thermistor detects a temperature above a certain threshold, the DC

controller interrupts power to the specific heater.

● Fuser-heater safety circuit

The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the sub-thermistors.

● Thermoswitch

If the temperature in the heaters is abnormally high, and the temperature in the thermoswitch
exceeds a specified value, the contact to the thermoswitch breaks.

Fuser unit life detection

Learn about fuser unit life detection.

Fuser life is tracked by fuser rotations, and not by the number of pages printed. This is the most accurate
tracking method since the fuser rotates for every print job.

Variations in fuser life depend on customer usage. Customers who are running one- and two-page
intermittent jobs with long pauses between each job might reach the fuser low message sooner due to
the fuser rotating more times per page than it would for larger print jobs.

NOTE: For more information, see HP LaserJet Enterprise - How to obtain the status of the
maintenance kit.

Fuser identification
Learn about fuser unit life detection.

The printer detects the type and presence of the fuser. The DC controller notifies the formatter when it
fails to detect the type or presence of the fuser.

NOTE: This printer detects if a fuser of the correct voltage for the printer is installed. If a fuser of the
incorrect voltage is installed, the DC controller notifies the formatter and an error message is
displayed on the control panel.

Engine laser/scanner system

Learn about the engine laser/scanner system.

The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums inside the
toner cartridges.

The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be
printed. The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses
and onto the scanner mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the

Fuser heater protection 105

 photosensitive drum in the pattern required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can
receive toner.

The main components of the laser/scanner system are the laser assembly and the scanner motor
assembly.

NOTE: The printer has one laser/scanner assembly for yellow, magenta, cyan and black which are
controlled by signals sent from the DC controller.

Figure 3-12 Laser/scanner system

Photosensitive drum

BD sensor

Photosensitive drum

Laser assembly
Y

Scanner motor assembly

Scanner mirror

DC controller

Laser/scanner failure detection

Learn about laser/scanner failure detection.

The DC controller determines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter of the error status when
any of the following occurs:

Laser scanner failure detection

106 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● Laser/scanner motor startup failure

The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation frequency within a specified period of time
from when the laser/scanner starts up.

● Laser/scanner motor abnormal rotation

The laser/scanner motor does not reach a specified rotational frequency within a specified period
of time during a print operation.

Safety
Learn about laser/scanner safety.

The laser/scanner assembly has a mechanical laser shutter. For the safety of users and service
technicians, the laser shutter interrupts the optical path of the laser/scanner assembly when the top
door is opened (SW101).

Image-formation process
Learn about the image-formation process.

The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. The system consists of the
following components:

● Toner cartridges

● Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

● Primary transfer roller

● Secondary transfer (T2) roller

● Fuser

● Laser/scanner assembly

● High-voltage power supply D

● High-voltage power supply T

The DC Controller controls the internal components of the image formation system (according to
commands received from the formatter) to form the toner images on the photosensitive drum surfaces.
The toner images are then transferred to the print media and fused.

Safety 107
 Figure 3-13 Image-formation system

High-voltage power supply T

Cartridge Primary transfer roller

ITB
Fuser

M
Secondary
C transfer
roller
K
Laser/scanner

High-voltage power supply D

DC controller

Image-formation system motors

The following figure shows the motors for the image-formation system.

108 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-14 Image-formation system motors

M2 M1 M6 M3 M4

DC controller

Table 3-14 Image-formation system motors

Abbreviation Component Par number

M1 Drum motor 1 Drum motor assembly

(RM2-0078-000CN)

M2 Drum motor 2 Drum motor assembly

(RM2-0078-000CN)

M3 Drum motor 3 Drum motor assembly

(RM2-0078-000CN)

M4 Fuser motor Fuser motor assembly

(RM2-0077-000CN)

M6 Developer disengagement motor Stepping motor (RK2-6027-000CN)

Image-formation system sensors

The following figure shows the sensors for the image-formation system.

Image-formation process 109

 Figure 3-15 Image-formation system sensors

Toner collection unit full sensor

SR5
Y

Registration
C density sensor
SR1
Y toner level K SE1
sensor
SR2
M toner level
Environmental
sensor
SR4 sensor
C toner level
sensor
SR3
K toner level
sensor

DC controller

Table 3-15 Image-formation system sensors

Abbreviation Name Part number

SR1 Drum home position sensor 1 Not available

SR2 Drum home position sensor 2 Not available

SR3 Drum home position sensor 3 Not available

SR4 Developing home position sensor Not available

SR5 Primary transfer roller Estrangement detect PCA assembly

disengagement sensor (RM2-7157-000CN)

SE1 Media sensor Registration assembly

● RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

● RM2-0018-000CN (M552,
M553dn, M553x, M554, M555,
M577, M558, E55040, E57540)

Yellow toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Magenta toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Cyan toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

Black toner-level sensor Cartridge lift-up rail assembly

(RM2-0025-000CN; not available)

110 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-15 Image-formation system sensors (continued)

Abbreviation Name Part number

Registration density sensor Density detect assembly

(RM2-7160-000CN)

Environment sensor (temperature Environment sensor PCA

and humidity) (RM2-7154-000CN)

Residual toner collection unit full Waste toner detect PCA

sensor (RM2-7130-000CN)

Pre-exposure LED 1-3 Pre-exposure PCA (RM2-7168-000CN)

Pre-exposure LED 4 Pre-exposure PCA (RM2-7169-000CN)

Step 1: Pre-exposure
Learn about the image formation pre-exposure step.

Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove any residual
electrical charges from the drum surface.

Figure 3-16 Pre-exposure

LED

Photosensitive drum

Step 2: Primary charging

Learn about the image formation primary charging step.

To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform
negative charge. The primary charging roller receives the primary charging bias, and then the roller
charges the drum by direct contact.

Step 1: Pre-exposure 111

 Figure 3-17 Primary charging

Primary charging roller

Primary charging bias

Photosensitive drum

Step 3: Laser-beam exposure

Learn about the image formation laser-beam exposure step.

The laser beam strikes the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on the portions of the
drum surface where the image will form. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge
was neutralized. The neutralized areas on the drum are ready to accept toner.

Figure 3-18 Laser-beam exposure

Step 4: Development
Learn about the image formation development step.

A developing bias is applied to the developing roller. The toner acquires a negative charge as a result
of the friction from the developing roller rotating against the developing blade. Because the negatively
charged surface of the photosensitive drums were neutralized where they have been struck by the laser
beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface
of the drum.

112 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-19 Development

Developer roller
Developer blade

Developing bias

Photosensitive drum

Step 5: Primary transfer

Learn about the image formation primary transfer step.

The positively charged primary-transfer brushes contact the ITB, giving the ITB a positive charge. The
ITB attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum, and the
complete toner image transfers onto the ITB.

Figure 3-20 Primary transfer

Photosensitive
drum

T1 brush ITB

T1 bias

Step 6: Secondary transfer

Learn about the image formation secondary transfer step.

The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary-transfer roller, and attracts the negatively
charged toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image transfers onto the paper.

Step 5: Primary transfer 113

 Figure 3-21 Secondary transfer

ITB

Paper
T2 roller

T2 bias

Step 7: Separation
Learn about the image formation separation step.

The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static-charge
eliminator removes excess charge from the paper for stable paper feeding and print quality.

Figure 3-22 Separation

ITB

Paper
Static charge eliminator
T2 roller

Static charge eliminator bias

Step 8: Fusing
Learn about the image formation fusing step.

The printer uses an on-demand fusing method to adhere the toner image onto the page. As the page
passes through the heated and pressurized rollers in the fuser the toner melts onto the page. The toner
image is now permanently fused to the page. A fusing bias applied to the pressure roller improves image
quality.

114 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-23 Fusing
Fuser heater

Fuser film

Paper

Pressure roller

Step 10: Drum cleaning

Learn about the image formation ITB cleaning step.

The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the ITB. The residual toner feed screw
deposits residual toner in the toner collection unit. The residual toner which cannot be removed by the
cleaning blade is charged by the ITB cleaning brush, and then transferred from the ITB surface to the
photosensitive drum by the primary transfer (T1) roller.

Figure 3-24 ITB cleaning

Step 10: Drum cleaning

Learn about the image formation drum cleaning step.

The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and deposits
it in the toner collection portion of the cartridge or in an external toner collection unit (TCU). The drum is
now clear and ready for the next image-formation process.

Step 10: Drum cleaning 115

 Figure 3-25 Drum cleaning
Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Residual toner collection box

Toner cartridges
Learn about the toner cartridges.

The following sections discuss the printer toner cartridges. The printer has four toner cartridges, one for
each color: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

Design
Learn about toner cartridge design.

Each toner cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following components:

● Photosensitive drum

● Developer

● Primary-charging roller

● Memory chip

The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the photosensitive drum, developer roller, and the
primary-charging roller.

116 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-26 Toner cartridge block diagram

DC controller

M6
Developer
disengagement SR4
motor Developing home position
sensor

Memory Photosensitive drum

chip SR1/SR2/SR3
Drum home position
sensor
M
Developer
M1/M2/M3
Drum motor

Primary charging
roller

Developer roller

Cartridge

Toner cartridge seal

Learn about the toner cartridge seal.

The toner cartridge seal is opened automatically when the toner cartridge is installed into the printer.

Memory chip
Learn about the toner cartridge memory chip.

The memory chip is non-volatile memory that stores information about the usage of the toner cartridge
and helps protect the customer from counterfeit cartridges. This chip is also used to detect the
presence of a cartridge within the printer or when a cartridge is installed in the wrong slot. The printer
reads and writes the data in the memory chip.

Toner cartridge seal 117

 Toner level and cartridge life detection
Learn about the toner level and cartridge life detection.

Toner level detection: The DC controller detects the remaining toner in the cartridge by the optical
detection method and then notifies the formatter of the remaining toner level.

Cartridge life detection: Cartridge life detection is measured in two ways.

● Toner level

For the first 75% of cartridge life, toner level is measure through pixel counting by the DC controller.
Once the level reaches 25%, the toner level sensor utilizes electrical properties to determine the
amount of toner remaining.

● Rotations of internal components (OPC and developer roller)

The DC controller monitors these two life parameters and reports them to the formatter as percent
life remaining. End of cartridge life is determined by the lower value of the two.

HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence

Learn about toner cartridge JetIntelligence.

HP Cartridges with JetIntelligence support two features for managing toner cartridges.

● The HP Cartridge Policy feature allows customers to specify the use of only genuine HP toner
cartridges in the printer.

● The anti-theft feature enables locking a cartridge to a specific printer or fleet of printers.

HP Cartridge Policy
The genuine HP Cartridge Policy feature allows a customer to specify that only genuine HP supplies can
be used in a printer. If anything but a genuine HP supply is installed, the printer will not print. This feature
is disabled by default, and can be enabled or disabled from the control panel, the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS), or HP Web Jetadmin.

If a genuine HP cartridge has passed the low state and is installed in a printer that has this feature
enabled, the printer will display an Unauthorized Cartridge message on the control panel and will not
print.

If a non-HP toner cartridge is used in a printer with this feature enabled, the message Unauthorized
Cartridge appears on the control-panel display and the printer will not print.

NOTE: If a customer suspects they have a counterfeit cartridge, they should report it by going to
www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit and selecting Report now.

Anti-theft or cartridge protection

The toner cartridge anti-theft feature allows a customer to configure the printer to automatically
lock toner cartridges to a specific printer or fleet of printers when they are installed. A locked toner
cartridge will work only in the specified printer or fleet of printers. This feature prevents toner cartridges
from being stolen and used in another printer, or from being moved from an authorized printer to an
unauthorized printer. This feature is disabled by default. Cartridge protection to a single printer can be
enabled or disabled from the control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). Cartridge protection
for a printer fleet can be enabled only by using HP Web Jetadmin.

118 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 When the anti-theft feature is enabled, the toner cartridge in a printer will only work in the specified
printer or fleet of printers. If a locked toner cartridge is moved to another printer, the cartridge will not
print and the message Protected Cartridge appears on the control-panel display.

NOTE: When a toner cartridge is locked to a specific printer or fleet of printers, it cannot be unlocked.
This is a permanent operation.

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

NOTE: All printer models might not support the Dynamic security feature.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experiences, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you
are using non-original HP cartridges, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

Developing unit engagement and disengagement control

Learn about developer unit operation.

The printer can print in full-color mode or in black-only mode. To print in black-only mode, the printer
disengages the developing rollers in the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges, which maximizes
the life of the cartridges.

When the printer is turned on and when each print job is completed, all four of the developing units
are disengaged from the photosensitive drums. When development is not needed, a special cam
mechanism on the developer roller stops the rotation separate from the developer disengagement cam,
providing even more life for the cartridge.

● The drive of the developer disengagement motor rotates the developer disengagement cam.

● As the cam rotates, the developing unit engages with or separates from the photosensitive drum.

When the print mode is full color, the developing units engage with the drums. When the print mode is
black-only, only the black developing unit engages with the drum.

The DC controller determines a developer disengagement motor failure and notifies the formatter when
it does not detect a specified signal from the developer disengagement sensor during the developing
unit engagement and disengagement operation.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. The toner cartridge configuration varies by printer
design.

Dynamic security 119

 Figure 3-27 Toner cartridge block diagram

DC controller

Developing
M disengagement
motor SR
Developing home position sensor
Developing unit Photosensitive drum

Developing disengagement cam

Developing unit is disengaged Developing unit is engaged

Intermediate transfer belt assembly

Learn about the Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly.

The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed
image to the paper. The ITB unit has the following main components:

● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

● ITB-drive roller

● Primary-transfer roller

● ITB cleaner

Drum motor 3 drives the ITB drive roller, which rotates the ITB. The motion of the ITB causes the primary
transfer rollers to rotate. The ITB cleaner cleans the ITB surface.

120 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-28 ITB unit

DC controller

Toner collection unit full

sensor

ITB cleaner
Primary transfer roller
disengagement solenoid SL1 M4 Fuser motor

SR5 ITB

Toner collection unit

M3
Drum motor 3

Primary transfer roller ITB drive roller

Primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement control

Learn about ITB primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement control.

Depending on the requirements of the print job, the primary-transfer rollers engage with the ITB so it
can receive toner from the photosensitive drums. The primary-transfer rollers have three engagement
states.

Primary-transfer roller engagement states

● All rollers disengaged

The ITB is disengaged from all the four photosensitive drums. This state is the home position for the
ITB unit.

● All rollers engaged

The ITB is engaged with all four photosensitive drums. This is the state for full-color printing.

● Black roller engaged

The ITB is engaged with only the black photosensitive drum. This is the state for black-only printing.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. The ITB configuration varies by printer design.

Primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement control 121

 Figure 3-29 Three states of primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement

FUSER MOTOR CONTROL

M Fuser motor
Four colors are disengaged

Y
SR

Y M

M C

C K

Four colors are engaged

K

Y
M

M
C

C
K
Only black is engaged
K

Y M

M C

C
K

The primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor rotates or reverses to place the primary-transfer-roller

disengagement cam into one of three positions. The cam causes the transfer-roller slide plate to move
to the right or left. This movement causes the primary-transfer rollers to move up to engage the ITB with
the photosensitive drum or down to disengage it.

The DC controller expects to receive a signal from the ITB home-position sensor when the primary-
transfer roller engages or disengages. If the DC controller does not receive this signal, but detects
that the primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor is rotating, the DC controller determines that the
primary-transfer-disengagement mechanism has failed, and notifies the formatter.

ITB unit detection

Learn about ITB unit detection.

The DC controller monitors several signals from the ITB unit to detect status.

122 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-16 ITB unit detection

Item Description

ITB unit life detection The DC controller detects whether the ITB unit is new by monitoring the new ITB unit
sensor. The DC controller determines the ITB unit is at end of life and notifies the
formatter when a specified number of pages are printed after the ITB unit is

If swapping ITB units between two printers for troubleshooting purposes, be sure to
return the ITB units to their original printers to maintain the correct life count.

ITB unit presence The DC controller detects the presence of an ITB unit by monitoring the primary-
detection transfer roller disengagement sensor. The DC controller turns on the primary-transfer
disengagement solenoid for specified times during an initial rotation period when the
following events occur:

● The printer is turned on

● The printer exits sleep mode

● The door is closed

The DC controller determines the absences of an ITB unit and notifies the formatter
when it does not detect a specified signal from the new primary-transfer roller
disengagement sensor.

ITB cleaning mechanism

Learn about ITB cleaning.

The cleaning blade in the ITB cleaner scrapes the residual toner off the ITB surface and deposits the
residual toner into the toner collection unit. The residual toner feed screw deposits the residual toner to
the residual toner feed unit. The ITB motor and the residual toner feed motor drive the screw.

The residual toner that cannot be removed by the cleaning blade is charged by the ITB cleaning brush,
and then transferred from the ITB surface to the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer (T1) roller.
The DC controller detects whether the toner collection unit is full by using the toner collection unit full
sensor, and then notifies the formatter.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. The ITB configuration varies by printer design.

ITB cleaning mechanism 123

 Figure 3-30 ITB cleaning process

Secondary transfer roller functions

Learn about secondary transfer roller functions.

The secondary transfer roller transfers the image from the ITB onto the paper.

The printer has the following secondary transfer roller functions.

Table 3-17 Secondary transfer roller functions

Function Supported feature

Secondary transfer roller cleaning mechanism Yes

Secondary transfer roller presence detection No

Secondary transfer roller life detection No

Secondary transfer roller alienation control Yes

Color self calibration

Learn about printer color self calibration.

The printer calibrates itself to maintain proper print-quality. The calibration corrects color-
misregistration and color-density variation due to environmental changes or internal variation in the
printer.

The printer has the following calibration functions.

124 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-18 Calibration functions

Function Supported feature

Color-plane registration correction control Yes

Environment correction control Yes

Image density control (DMAX) Yes

Image halftone control (DHALF) Yes

Registration density sensor failure detection Yes

Color sensor control No

Gray axis control (GAS) No

Environment sensor failure detection Yes

Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system

Learn about the printer pickup, feed and delivery system.

The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the
formatter. The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the
printer.

The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of the following three functional blocks.

● Pickup-and-feed-block: Controls the movement of the paper from each pickup source to the fuser
inlet

● Fuser-and-delivery-block: Controls the movement of the paper from the fuser to the delivery
destination

● Duplex block: Controls the movement of the paper from the duplex switchback unit to the duplex
re-pickup unit (duplex models only)

Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system 125

 Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path Fuser-and-delivery block

Pickup-and-feed block

Duplex block

Photo sensors and switches

Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery sensors and switches.

The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the engine pickup, feed, and delivery system.

126 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-31 Photo sensors and switches (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system)

SR10

SR9

PS1

SE1

SR13 (SR13N)
SR14 (SR14N)

SR6 (SR6N)

SR8

SR12

SW5

Table 3-19 Photo sensors and switches (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system)

Abbreviation Component Part number

PS1 Loop sensor Fuser

● B5L35-67902 (110V)

● B5L36-67902 (220V)

SE1 Media sensor Registration assembly

● RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

● RM2-0018-000CN (M552, M553dn,

M553x, M554, M555, M577. M578,
E55040, E57540)

SR6 Top-of-page (TOP) sensor (M552, Registration assembly

M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, M577. (RM2-0018-000CN)
M578, E55040, E57540)

SR6N Top-of-page (TOP) sensor (M553n) Registration assembly

(RM2-0093-000CN)

SR8 Tray 1 media-out sensor Right door assembly (RM2-0019-000CN)

SR9 Fuser delivery sensor Fuser

● B5L35-67902 (110V)

● B5L36-67902 (220V)

Photo sensors and switches 127

 Table 3-19 Photo sensors and switches (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system) (continued)

Abbreviation Component Part number

SR10 Output bin media-full sensor Paper delivery assembly

● RM2-0092-000CN (M553n)

● RM2-0016-000CN (M552, M553dn,

M553x, M554, M555, M577. M578,
E55040, E57540)

SR11 Fuser pressure release sensor Not available

SR12 Tray 2 media-out sensor Paper pickup assembly

(RM2-6556-000CN)

SR13 Media width sensor, front (M552, Registration assembly

M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, M577. (RM2-0018-000CN)
M578, E55040, E57540)

SR13N Media width sensor, front (M553n) Registration assembly

(RM2-0093-000CN)

SR14 Media width sensor, rear (M552, M553dn, Registration assembly

M553x, M554, M555, M577. M578, (RM2-0018-000CN)
E55040, E57540)

SR14N Media width sensor, rear (M553n) Registration assembly

(RM2-0093-000CN)

SW5 Tray 2 detection switch Not available

Motors, clutches, and solenoids

Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery motors, clutches, and solenoids.

The following figure shows the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the engine pickup, feed, and delivery
system.

128 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-32 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system)

M4 M8

SL3

M3

CL1 CL2 SL2

M5

Table 3-20 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system)

Abbreviation Component Part number

M3 Drum motor 3 Drum motor assembly

(RM2-0078-000CN)

M4 Fuser motor Fuser motor assembly

(RM2-0077-000CN)

M5 Pickup motor Paper pickup drive assembly

(RM2-0008-000CN)

M6 Developer disengagement motor Stepping motor (RK2-6027-000CN)

M7 Scanner motor Laser scanner assembly

(RM2-0100-000CN; not orderable)

M8 Duplex reverse motor (duplex models) Duplex drive assembly

(RM2-0006-000CN)

Motors, clutches, and solenoids 129

 Table 3-20 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (engine pickup, feed, and delivery system) (continued)

Abbreviation Component Part number

CL1 Tray 2 pickup clutch Lifter drive assembly (RM2-0010-000CN)

CL2 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models) Duplex drive assembly

(RM2-0006-000CN)

SL1 Primary transfer roller alienation Fuser drive assembly

solenoid
● RM2-0091-010CN (M553n)

● RM2-0009-010CN (M552, M553dn,

M553x, M554, M555, M577, M578,
E55040, E57540)

SL2 Tray 1 pickup solenoid Right door assembly (RM2-0019-000CN)

SL3 Duplex reverse solenoid (duplex models) Duplex drive assembly

(RM2-0006-000CN)

Tray 1 (multipurpose)/Tray 2 (base printer)

Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery for Tray 1 (multipurpose) and Tray 2 (base printer).

Moving paper from Tray 1 and Tray 2 involves the interaction of multiple components within the printer.
The following sections describe these processes.

Tray 1 paper pickup and feed

The printer picks up one sheet of paper from Tray 1. The Tray 1 media-out sensor (SR8) detects whether
paper is present in Tray 1.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20
lb plain paper. For Tray 1, the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which
increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of
a mis-pick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20 lb plain paper.

Following are the sequence of steps for the Tray 1 pickup operation.

1. The pickup motor reverses when a print command is received from the formatter.

2. When the DC controller turns on the Tray 1 pickup solenoid, the Tray 1 pickup roller rotates and the
lifting plate lifts.

3. As the lifting plate rises, the paper is picked up.

4. The Tray 1 separation pad removes any multiply-fed sheets, and one sheet is fed into the printer.

130 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-33 Tray 1 pickup mechanism

M5

SL2
Tray 1 pickup solenoid

SR8

Tray 1 pickup roller Tray 1 separation pad

Tray 2 paper presence detection

The Tray 2 media-out sensor (SR12) detects the presence of paper in Tray 2.

The DC controller notifies the formatter when the Tray 2 media-out sensor detects that paper is absent.

Tray 2 lift operation

The printer keeps the paper stack surface at the correct pickup position. The Tray 2 lift-up operation is
performed under the following conditions.

● The printer is turned on

● Tray 2 is installed

● The paper stack surface in Tray 2 lowers

The operational sequence of the Tray 2 lift operation is as follows.

1. The pickup motor (M5) rotates and the lifter moves up. Note that this printer uses the pickup motor
rather than a dedicated lifter motor.

2. When the Tray 2 media stack surface sensor 2 detects the stack surface of media, the lifter motor
stops.

Tray 1 (multipurpose)/Tray 2 (base printer) 131

 3. The lifter motor rotates again to lift the lifter when the Tray 2 media stack surface sensor 1 detects
the stack surface and then lowers during printing.

When a Tray 2 media stack surface sensors does not detect the stack surface within a specified time
period after the lifter motor starts rotating, the DC controller determines a lifter motor failure and
notifies the formatter.

Tray 2 paper pickup

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20
lb plain paper. For Tray 1, the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which
increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of
a mis-pick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20 lb plain paper.

Following are the sequence of steps for the Tray 2 pickup operation.

1. The printer is turned on or Tray 2 is inserted.

2. The tray lift-up operation raises the lifting plate so paper can be picked up.

3. The pickup motor rotates when a print command is received from the formatter.

4. The Tray 2 pickup roller and Tray 2 feed roller rotate.

5. The Tray 2 pickup solenoid turns on at a specified time.

6. The Tray 2 pickup cam rotates.

7. As the pickup arm lowers, the Tray 2 pickup roller touches the surface of the paper stack.

8. One sheet of paper feeds into the printer.

Tray 2 multiple-feed prevention

The printer uses a separation roller method to prevent multiple sheets of print media from entering the
paper path.

The separation roller overruns if just one sheet of paper is picked. If two or more sheets are picked, only
the top sheet will be fed to registration and the multiply-fed sheets will be held at the pickup location by
the separation roller. This printer does not have an actively-driven separation roller.

132 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-34 Tray 2 multiple-feed prevention

Tray 1 feed roller

Tray 2 pickup roller

Tray 2 separation roller

follows the Tray 2 feed roller

Driving force from

Paper the pickup motor
Tray 2 separation roller

Normal feed

Multiple feed

Tray 2 presence detection

The Tray 2 presence sensor is in the lifter drive unit. The sensor detects the tray-presence sensor flag
and determines whether the cassette is installed correctly.

Tray 2 skew feed prevention

The printer can straighten the paper without slowing the feed operation.

1. The leading edge of paper strikes the registration shutter, and the leading edge is aligned with the
shutter.

2. As the feed rollers keep pushing the paper, the paper warps.

3. When the force is great enough, the registration shutter rotates, and the paper passes through
straightened.

Tray 1 (multipurpose)/Tray 2 (base printer) 133

 Figure 3-35 Skew-feed prevention

Registration shutter

Registration shutter

Pa Paper
pe
r

Tray 2 media type detection

The printer selects the optimal print mode based upon the media type detected by the media sensor.
The media sensor consists of an optical sensor, which detects the surface texture of the paper, and an
ultrasonic sensor, which measures the thickness of the paper.

Following are the print modes detected by the printer.

● Normal

● Heavy media 1

● Heavy media 2

● Heavy media 3

134 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

● Light media

● Glossy media 1

● Glossy media 2

● Glossy media 3

● LBP_OHT

The DC controller determines a media sensor error and reports it to the formatter when the value
detected by the media sensor is out of a specified range of values.

Figure 3-36 Media sensors

Ultrasonic sensor

Optical sensor

Registration unit

Feed speed control

The DC controller adjusts the feed speed to improve the print quality depending on the paper type. The
paper is fed at a specified speed according to the print mode designated by the formatter.

Speed for both full color and black and white pages

● 1/1 speed = 210 mm/s

● Pro speed = 174 mm/s

● 1/2 speed = 105 mm/s

● 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s

Table 3-21 Print mode and fan speed

Print mode Fan speed Media sensor detection

Normal 1/1 speed = 210 mm/s Yes

Heavy media 1 Pro speed = 174 mm/s No

Tray 1 (multipurpose)/Tray 2 (base printer) 135

 Table 3-21 Print mode and fan speed (continued)

Print mode Fan speed Media sensor detection

Heavy media 2 1/2 speed = 105 mm/s Yes

Heavy media 3 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Light media 1 1/1 speed = 210 mm/s Yes

Light media 2 1/1 speed = 210 mm/s Yes

Light media 3 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Glossy media 1 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Glossy media 2 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Glossy media 3 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Glossy film 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Envelope 1 1/2 speed = 105 mm/s No

OHT 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s Yes

Label 1/2 speed = 105 mm/s No

Designated media 1 1/2 speed = 105 mm/s No

Designated media 2 1/3 speed = 70 mm/s No

Designated media 3 Pro speed = 174 mm/s No

Duplexing unit (duplex models)

Learn about the duplexing unit.

NOTE: To identify duplex printer models, see the Printer information, configurations, and
specifications section of the service manual.

The duplexing unit reverses the paper and feeds it through the paper path to print the second side.

Duplexing reverse and duplex feed control

Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery duplexing reverse and duplex feed control.

The duplex reverse control reverses the paper after the first side is printed and feeds it to the duplex
re-pickup position to print the second side of the page.

1. At a specified time after the first side of a page is printed, the duplex reverse motor rotates, and the
duplex reverse solenoid is turned on.

2. The duplex flapper moves, and the paper feeds to the duplex reverse unit.

3. After a specified period of time, the duplex reverse motor reverses, and the paper feeds to the
duplex feed unit.

4. The duplex reverse motor and the pickup motor move the paper to the duplex re-pickup position.

5. The duplex reverse motor and the duplex feed clutch stop, and the paper feed operation pauses.

136 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 6. After a specified period of time, the duplex reverse motor rotates, and the duplex feed clutch is
turned on. The paper is then picked up again.

Jam detection/prevention
Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery jam detection/prevention.

The printer uses the following sensors to detect the paper as it moves through the paper path and to
report to the DC controller if the paper has jammed.

● Top of page (TOP) sensor (SR6/SR6N)

● Media width sensor (front, SR13/SR13N)

● Media width sensor (rear, SR14/SR14N)

● Loop sensor (PS1)

● Fuser delivery sensor (SR9)

● Output bin media-full sensor (SR10)

● 1x550 sheet paper feeder media feed sensor (SR21)

Jam detection/prevention 137

 Figure 3-37 Jam detection sensors

SR10
SR9

PS1

SR13(SR13N)
SR14(SR14N)

SR6(SR6N)

SR21

The printer determines that a jam has occurred if one of these sensors detects paper at an
inappropriate time. The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter.

Table 3-22 Detected jam types

Jam Description

Media input delay jam 1 Media did not reach the registration sensor in time.

Media input delay jam 2 Media did not reach the source tray feed sensor in time.

Media input delay jam 3 Media did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time.

Duplex re-feed jam 1 Media did not reach the registration sensor in time.

Media input stay jam 1 Media remained at the registration sensor longer than
legal-sized media should remain.

Fuser delivery delay jam 1 Media did not reach the fuser output sensor in time.

Fuser delivery stay jam 1 Media stayed at fuser output sensor longer than it
should stay. Media is in duplex path.

138 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-22 Detected jam types (continued)

Jam Description

Fuser delivery stay jam 2 Media stayed at fuser output sensor longer than it
should stay. Media is in simplex path.

Wrap jam 1 Media is first detected at fuser output sensor and then
disappeared from the sensor before it should have
disappeared.

Door open jam A door is open while paper is moving through the printer.

Residual Media in paper path jam 1 Media detected in the paper path.

Fuser wrapping jam detection

Learn about the engine pickup, feed, and delivery fuser wrapping jam detection.

The printer includes controls for detecting when a jam occurs causing the paper to wrap around the
fuser roller.

Loop control
The loop control stabilizes the paper feed operation before the paper enters the fuser.

● If the pressure roller rotates slower than the secondary transfer roller, the paper loop increases and
an image defect or paper crease occurs.

● If the pressure roller rotates faster than the secondary transfer roller, the paper loop decreases and
a vertical scanning magnification failure occurs because the pressure roller pulls the paper.

To prevent these problems, the loop sensor detects the paper loop before the paper enters the fuser.
The DC controller adjusts the rotational speed of the fuser motor according to the output signals from
the loop sensor and maintains the paper loop. The DC controller slows the fuser motor when the sensor
is off and speeds up the motor when the sensor is on.

Fuser wrapping jam detection 139

 Figure 3-38 Fuser loop control mechanism

Pressure roller
Loop sensor

Sensor flag
ITB

Secondary transfer roller

r

The pressure roller rotates faster The pressure roller rotates slower
than the secondary transfer roller than the secondary transfer roller

Loop sensor: OFF Loop sensor: ON

Pressure roller pressurization and depressurization control

To prevent excessive wear on the pressure roller and help with jam-clearing procedures, the pressure
roller pressurizes only during printing and standby. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor. The fuser
motor rotates the fuser pressure-release cam.

Figure 3-39 Pressure roller pressurization control

DC controller

M4 Fuser motor

SR11 SR11

Fuser pressure release cam

Pressure roller

Fuser sleeve

Pressurized Depressurized

The pressure roller depressurizes under the following conditions.

● The printer is turned off

140 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

● Any failure occurs

● During power-save mode

● A paper jam is detected

If the DC controller does not sense the fuser pressure-release sensor for a specified period after it
reverses the fuser motor, it notifies the formatter that a fuser pressure-release mechanism failure has
occurred.

Fuser wrapping jam detection 141

 Input devices
Learn about the input devices.

Tray 3-5
Learn about the optional 550-sheet paper feeder (optional Tray 3-5).

The 550-sheet paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the print media and
feeds it to the printer. The paper DC controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
The printer supports up to three of these paper feeders at a time.

Paper path
Learn about the Tray 3-5 paper path.

The 550-sheet paper feeder is installed under the printer. It picks up paper and feeds it into the printer.
The figure below shows the optional Tray 3-5 paper path.

NOTE: If more than one paper feeder is installed (Trays 4/5), the paper feeds up through each paper
feeders to the print engine.

142 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-40 550-sheet paper feeder

Tray 3-5 paper feeder controller

Learn about the paper feeder controller.

The figure below shows the paper feeder controller block diagram. The table in this topic describes the
paper feeder electrical components. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of
the paper feeder.

Tray 3-5 paper feeder controller 143

 Figure 3-41 Paper feeder controller

550-sheet paper feeder

Motor
+3.3V

+24V
Clutch
DC controller Paper feeder controller

Photointerruptor

Switch

Tray 3-5 motor control

The 550-sheet paper feeder has one motor for lifting the tray and feeding paper.

The 550-sheet paper feeder has one motor for lifting the tray and feeding paper.

Table 3-23 Tray 3-5 motor control

Abbreviation Component Drives Failure

detection

M20 Feed motor (550-sheet paper Tray pickup roller (B5L24-67904) No

feeder)
Tray feed roller (B5L24-67904)

Paper feed assembly (RM2-5145-000CN)

Lifter drive assembly (RM2-5149-000CN)

Electrical components, pickup and feed

Learn about the Tray 3-5 electrical components.

The paper feeder contains several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches, as described in the
following table.

144 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-42 Electrical components (Tray 3-5)

M20

CL20

SR21

SR20

SW21

Table 3-24 Electrical components (Tray 3-5)

Component type Abbreviation Component name Part number

Motor M20 Feed motor Paper feed assembly

(RM2-5145-000CN)

Clutch CL20 Tray pick up clutch Lifter drive assembly

(RM2-5149-000CN)

Switch SW20 Right door switch Right door (RM2-5146-000CN)

Switch SW21 Tray detection switch Switch button

(WC2-5806-000CN)

Sensor SR20 Tray media-out sensor Paper pickup assembly

(RM2-5154-000CN)

Sensor SR21 Feed sensor Paper feed assembly

(RM2-5145-000CN)

Tray 3-5 multiple feed prevention

Learn about the Tray 3-5 multiple feed prevention.

The multiple-feed prevention for the 550-sheet paper feeder is operated in the same way as that of the
printer base.

Tray 3-5 tray presence detection

Learn about the Tray 3-5 tray presence detection.

The presence detection for the 550-sheet paper feeder is the same way as that of the printer base.

Tray 3-5 tray lift operation

Learn about the Tray 3-5 tray lift operation.

The 550-sheet paper feeder keeps the paper stack surface at the correct pickup position. The tray lift
operation occurs under the following conditions.

Tray 3-5 multiple feed prevention 145

 ● The printer is turned on

● The tray is inserted

● The paper stack surface of the tray lowers

Tray lift sequence

1. The feeder tray-lifting motor rotates and the lifter moves up.

2. When the paper-feeder media-stack-surface sensor detects the stack surface of the paper, the
lifting motor stops.

3. The lifting motor rotates again to lift the lifter when the paper-feeder media-stack-surface sensor
detects the stack surface, and then lowers during printing.

If a tray media-stack-surface sensor does not detect a stack surface within a specified period after
the lifting motor starts rotating, the paper feeder driver determines that the lifting motor has failed and
notifies the formatter through the DC controller.

The paper-feeder driver notifies the formatter if either of the paper-feeder media-stack-surface sensors
fails to detect the stack surface within a specified period from when a lift-up operation starts.

Tray 3-5 jam detection

Learn about Tray 3-5 jam detection.

The 550-sheet paper feeder uses the feed sensor (SR21) and right door switch (SW20) to detect the
presence of paper and to check whether paper has jammed

146 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-43 Jam detection (Tray 3-5)

SR21

SW20

The 550-sheet paper feeder detects the following jams.

● Media input delay jam 1

Paper did not reach the registration sensor in time.

● Media input delay jam 2

Paper did not reach the source tray feed sensor in time.

● Media input delay jam 3

Paper did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time.

● Pickup stationary jam

The feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified time after the sensor
detects the leading edge.

● Residual paper jam

Tray 3-5 jam detection 147

 The feed sensor detects the presence of paper for a specified time during an automatic delivery
operation.

● Right door open jam

The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.

148 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

4 Solve problems

Learn about solving printer problems.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

Solve problems 149

 3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

150 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
the user to the situation.

This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow chart to filter out many
possible causes of the problem.

● Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the problem from the customer.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: To print a configuration page using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine
original HP toner cartridges installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP
Plus account (for more information, go to hp.com/plus).

NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good
condition.

Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s).

Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist

General topic Questions

Environment ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?

● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?

● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall outlet (not a surge
protector)?

● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?

● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers
or office cleaning materials?

NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the copying processes.
Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse
effect on some printer components (for example, the toner cartridge or
cartridges OPC).

● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?

● Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent that can cause
temperature fluctuations?

Media ● Does the customer use only supported media?

● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?

● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

Determine the problem source 151

 Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)

General topic Questions

Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?

● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?

● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the stack or excessive
pressure causing the stack to bow)?

● Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?

Toner cartridge ● Is the toner cartridge (or cartridges) installed correctly?

NOTE: If country/region specific toner cartridges are available for the printer, make
sure the correct cartridge is installed.

Transfer unit and fuser ● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?

NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB), is the ITB installed
correctly and fully seated. If a replacement ITB was installed, was all of the
packing materials removed?

Covers ● Is the toner cartridge door closed?

Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in

winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer
on for 10 to 20 minutes.

● Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after being moved from a
cold to a warm room? If so, allow the toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at
room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.

Miscellaneous ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner cartridges, memory
modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.

● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated
with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.

● For any color print-quality issues (color printers only), calibrate the printer, and
then print a diagnostics page to verify print quality.

Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware
problems.

Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a question to proceed to the
next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in
this chapter and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major
step in this troubleshooting flowchart.

NOTE: For solutions that require printing a page, see the following.

To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges installed,
must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more information, go to
hp.com/plus).

152 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart

Step Question Action

1 Is the printer on and

does a readable message
Power on display?

Yes No Basic printer functions should start up when the printer

is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position.

During normal operation cooling fans and/or motors

should be operating. Place a hand over fan intake
or exhaust vents to determine if the fan or fans are
spinning. Lean close to the printer to hear motors
rotating.

If fans and/or motors are operating, the dc side of the

power supply is functioning.

Always make sure that the printer is plugged into

a known-functioning wall receptacle. Remove power
strips and plug the printer directly into a wall
receptacle.

After the control panel display is functional, see step 2.

2 Does the message Ready

display on the control
Control panel?
panel
messages

Yes No After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.

Use the control panel message document (CPMD)

section in this manual to correct any displayed error
messages.

3 Open the Troubleshooting

menu and print an event
Event log log to see the history of
errors with this printer.

Does the event log print?

Yes No If the event log does not print, check for error
messages.

If paper jams inside the printer, see the jams section of

the printer service manual.

If error messages display on the control panel when

trying to print an event log, see the control panel
message document (CPMD) section of this manual.

After successfully printing and evaluating the event

log, see step 4.

4 Open the Reports

menu and print the
Information configuration pages to
pages verify that all the
accessories are installed.

Are all the accessories

installed?

Troubleshooting flowchart 153

 Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)

Step Question Action

Yes No If accessories that are installed are not listed on the

configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall
it.

Make sure that the most recent firmware is installed.

See the firmware upgrade section of this manual for
more information.

After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.

5 Does the print quality

meet the customer's
Print quality requirements?

Yes No Compare the images with the sample defects in the

Image-quality troubleshooting section of this manual.

Solve print-quality and copy-quality issues as needed.

After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.

6 Can the customer print

successfully from the
Interface host computer?

Yes. This is the end of the No Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and
troubleshooting process. that a valid IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.

If error messages display on the control panel or

appear in the event log, see the control-panel message
document (CPMD) section of this manual.

When the customer can print from the host computer,

this is the end of the troubleshooting process.

Firmware upgrades
Learn about printer firmware upgrades.

To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer, go to:

● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553

or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or
www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp.

a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

b. Select the driver language and operating system.

c. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.

● Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.

– Select your country/region.

154 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 – Select Drivers & Downloads.

– Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.

TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on
identifying the printer's name and number.

– Select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

– Select the driver language and operating system.

– Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.

Determine the installed revision of firmware

Learn about how to determine the version of installed printer firmware.

Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Print the configuration page from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and
then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Determine the installed revision of firmware 155

 Figure 4-1 Configuration page firmware version

Firmware Revision
Rev
HP LaserJet M

Sep\13\2019 6:56:00 AM

HP Embedded Web Server

Learn how to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server.

NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state.

The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output (I/O) transfer rates and
the time it takes for the printer to reinitialize.

1. Open an Internet browser window.

2. Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.

3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the Troubleshooting tab.

4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the
firmware file. The file has a .bdl file extension. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.

NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.

5. After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and verify that the latest firmware version
has been installed.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (SFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update using a SFP control panel.

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

156 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then press the OK button.

4. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display,
try using a different portable storage device.

5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then press the OK button.

6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then press the OK button.

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

7. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, turn the printer power off, and
then on again.

8. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (MFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from an MFP control panel.

1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-2 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then touch the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then touch the OK button.

5. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display,
try using a different portable storage device.

6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (MFP) 157

 7. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

8. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, touch the down arrow button
several times until the message Continue displays.

9. Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to
the Ready state.

10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (SFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a SFP control panel
(FutureSmart 4 firmware or later).

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to scroll to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● USB Firmware Upgrade

3. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the appropriate .bdl file, and then press the OK button.

5. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (MFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a n MFP control
panel.

1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2. Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.

3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

4. Open the Maintenance menu.

5. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.

6. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

7. Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

158 Chapter 4 Solve problems

8. Select one of the following options:

● Upgrade

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

● Re-install

● Downgrade

9. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state.

10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (MFP) 159

 Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools
Learn about the printer troubleshooting tools.

Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.

When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.

NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or
both simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.

Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location varies depending on the
printer model). An engine test page prints. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so
make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.

Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)

● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.

● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.

Figure 4-3 Engine test button

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action unless it is specified as a solution in the CPMD.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu is also remotely accessible by using a telnet network protocol (Remote
Admin) to establish an administration connection to the printer.

160 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-4 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 4-5 Pre-boot menu

Button Description

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 161

 Button Description

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

5. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Open the Pre-Boot menu from an LCD control panel

Use the following procedure to open the Pre-Boot menu from an LCD control panel.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to navigate the Pre-Boot menu.

4. Press the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control
panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

162 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-6 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK
button.

4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to
select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK
button.

4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button to
select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 163
 Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Administrator Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Administrator Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Administrator Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Administrator Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

164 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

Table 4-4 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
(continued) normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Administrator Manage Disk Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Administrator Manage Disk Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Administrator Manage Disk Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 165
 Table 4-4 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
available.

Table 4-5 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Device Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Device Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
Device available.

Administrator Manage Disk External Select the External Device item to erase the
Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Administrator Manage Disk External Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Device Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

166 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-5 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk External Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Device Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk External Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
Device available.

Table 4-6 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network
[STATIC] addresses.
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Default Use this item to manually enter the default
[STATIC] Gateway gateway.
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 167
 Table 4-7 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
(continued) turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

Administrator Startup Options Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision
item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Administrator Startup Options Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Administrator Startup Options Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Administrator Startup Options Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Administrator Startup Options Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock
the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Administrator Startup Options Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/
ScanVolume during startup.

Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the
printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Administrator Startup Options Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable
Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that HP

Jetdirect is always enabled.

Administrator Startup Options WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the
wireless accessory.

168 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-8 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose hardware

components and their interface connections. Use
(continued) these items to troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between them and
other components.

Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Memory
diagnostic when executing multiple diagnostics.

Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory test.

NOTE: This test requires about four minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended memory
test.

NOTE: This test requires about twenty minutes

to execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk
diagnostic when executing multiple diagnostics.

Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware self-
test.

NOTE: This test requires about two or three

minutes to execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test requires about sixty minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that
checks the active sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about thirty minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that checks
every sector on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about fifty minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief test
that checks the drive self-monitoring analysis and
reporting technology (SMART) status—the drive
detects and reports reliability indicators to help
anticipate disk failures (SMART status).

Administrator Diagnostics CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of the
copy processor board (CPB) and the formatter
PCA connections.

Administrator Diagnostics Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the integrity of
the interconnect PCA (ICB) and its connections.

Administrator Diagnostics Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a
selected test.

NOTE: If more than one test is selected, they are

executed in sequence.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 169
 Table 4-9 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see "Remote Admin (M506/
M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645)" in the
Troubleshooting Manual.

Administrator Remote Admin Stop Telnet

Administrator Remote Admin Refresh IP

Administrator System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Administrator Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Administrator Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number
(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Service Tools Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these
values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
Learn about the printer Remote Admin function.

The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

170 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed and
enabled on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows-based system; however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Enable the Windows telnet client

All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 10® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Windows Settings dialog box, and then search for Turn Windows
features on or off. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item.

Figure 4-7 Open Windows Settings

2. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Required software and network connection 171

 Figure 4-8 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer.

The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access
network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Use the following procedures to connect a remote connection.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a 1/8 with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

172 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-9 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-10 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-11 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to 7.

Figure 4-12 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Start the telnet server function at the printer 173

 Figure 4-13 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

– The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

– The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 4-14 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1. From the Start menu open the Command Prompt desktop application.

TIP: Type cmd in the application search dialogue box to find the application.

174 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-15 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 of the "Start the
telnet server function at the printer" topic.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer.

Figure 4-16 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 of then "Start the telnet server function at the printer"
topic at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See the "Start the telnet server function at the printer" topic.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 175

 Figure 4-17 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered. and the Remote Admin connection
is successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see "Pre-boot menu options" in
the printer Service Manual.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecured telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Figure 4-18 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

176 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-19 Access the administrator menu

2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 4-20 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Disconnect a remote connection 177

 Figure 4-21 Terminate the telnet connection

Advanced configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage advanced printing functions.

Introduction
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from a computer instead of the printer
control panel.

● View printer status information

● Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones

● View and change tray configurations

● View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration

● View and print internal pages

● Receive notification of printer and supplies events

● View and change network configuration

The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The
HP Embedded Web Server does not support IPX-based printer connections. Internet access is not
needed to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server.

When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.

NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network firewall.

How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the following steps to open the Embedded Web Server.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch
the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.

178 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS web page
opens.

NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.

To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:

Windows® 7

● Internet Explorer (version 8.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Windows® 8 or greater

● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Windows 10 or greater

● Microsoft Edge (version 93 or greater)

● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

macOS

● Safari (version 5.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

Linux

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

HP Embedded Web Server features

Learn about the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features available on each tab.

HP Embedded Web Server features 179

 Figure 4-22 EWS Tabs

NOTE: Copy/Print, Scan/Digital Send, and Fax tabs only appear for multi-function printers (MFPs). A
Print tab appears for single-function printers (SFPs).

Information tab
Settings available on the Information tab of the EWS.

Table 4-10 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab

Menu Description

Configuration Page Shows the information found on the configuration page.

Control Panel Snapshot Shows an image of the current screen on the control panel display.

Device Information Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To customize
these entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.

Device Status Shows the printer status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The
page also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default
settings, click the Change Settings link.

Event Log Page Shows a list of all printer events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the
Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of
dynamic web pages that help solve problems. These pages also show additional
services available for the printer.

Event Schedule Summary The Event Schedule Summary page is used to view a table of all scheduled events.

Job Log Provides a list of the jobs that have been processed.

Open Source Licenses Shows a summary of the licenses for open source software programs that can be
used with the printer.

Print Allows the user to send a print-ready file to the printer to be printed.

Printable Reports and Pages Lists the internal reports and pages for the printer. Select one or more items to print.

Remote Control-Panel Provides a way to troubleshoot or manage the printer from a browser window on a
desktop or laptop.

180 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-10 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab (continued)

Menu Description

Supplies Status Page Shows the status of the supplies for the printer.

Usage Page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size,
type, and paper print path.

General tab
Settings available on the General tab of the EWS.

Table 4-11 HP Embedded Web Server General tab

Menu Description

Alerts Set up email alerts for various printer and supplies events.

AutoSend Configure the printer to send automated emails regarding printer configuration and
supplies to specific email addresses.

Back up and Restore Create a backup file that contains printer and user data. If necessary, use this file to
restore data to the printer.

Control Panel Customization Reorder, show, or hide features on the control-panel display.

Change the default display language and keyboard layouts.

Control Panel Settings App Shows the Settings app options that are available on the printer control panel.

Date/Time Settings Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.

Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary
contact who will receive information about the printer.

Edit Other Links Add or customize a link to another website. This link displays in the footer area on all
HP Embedded Web Server pages.

Energy Settings Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the printer. Set a different
schedule for each day of the week and for holidays.

Set which interactions with the printer cause it to wake from sleep mode.

Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer firmware upgrade files.

General Settings Configure how the printer recovers from jams and other general printer settings.

Import/Export Use this feature to export files that can be used to configure other devices. Select
which settings, contacts, or user accounts to include in the export. The files can be
imported to other devices including those with different capabilities. Any imported
settings that are not available on the target device will be ignored.

Job Statistics Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-statistics services, or enables
local serverless device job accounting.

Language Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.

Ordering Information Enter information about ordering replacement toner cartridges. This information
displays on the supplies status page.

Quick Sets Configure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on the
printer control panel.

Quota Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-quota services, or enables
local device quota service.

License Management Use this menu to configure the engine speed with the LPD license.

General tab 181

 Table 4-11 HP Embedded Web Server General tab (continued)

Menu Description

Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to the factory defaults.

Solution Installer Install or remove third-party software packages that extend or modify the
functionality of the printer.

Other Links list

Configure which links display in the footer of the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) by using the Edit
Other Links menu on the General tab.

NOTE: The following list includes the default links in the EWS.

Table 4-12 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list

Menu Description

HP Instant Support Connect to the HP website to find solutions to printer problems.

Product Support Connect to the support site for the printer to search for help on various topics.

Shop for Supplies Connect to the HP website for information on purchasing original HP supplies, such
as cartridges and paper.

Copy/Print tab
Settings available on the Copy/Print tab of the EWS.

Table 4-13 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab

Menu Description

Copy Settings Configure the default options and Quick Sets for copy jobs.

NOTE: If job-specific copy setting options are not set from the control panel at the
start of a job, the default settings will be used for the job.

Default Print Options Configure the default options for print jobs.

Expert Copy Enable or disable Expert Copy and set the initial copy view.

The Expert Copy feature is available only on some HP MFPs with larger control
panels, and is available in FutureSmart 4 firmware 24.7.3 release or later.

Manage Stored Jobs Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the printer memory.

Configure job-storage options.

Manage Stapler/Stacker Configure settings for the stapler/stacker for printers that have this feature.

Manage Trays Configure settings for paper trays.

PCL and PostScript Settings Adjust the PCL and PostScript settings for all print jobs, including copy jobs and
received faxes.

Print from USB Drive Settings Enable or disable the Print from USB Drive menu on the control panel.

Print Quality Configure the print quality settings, including color adjustment, image registration,
and allowed paper types.

182 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-13 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab (continued)

Menu Description

Restrict Color Permit or restrict color printing and copying.

(Color printers only) Specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specific
software programs.

Scan/Digital Send tab

Settings available on the Scan/Digital Send tab of the EWS.

Table 4-14 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab

Menu Description

Contacts Manage contacts including the following options:

● Add email addresses into the printer one at a time.

● Import a large list of frequently-used email addresses on to the printer all at

once, rather than adding them one at a time.

● Export contacts from the printer into a .CSV file on the computer to use as a
data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.

● Edit email addresses that have already been saved in the printer.

Digital Sending Software Setup Configure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.

Email Setup Configure the default email settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server

● Settings for Email Quick Sets jobs

● Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line

● Settings for digital signatures and encryption

● Settings for email notifications

● Default scan settings for email jobs

● Default file settings for email jobs

Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Configure the printer to send scanned images as email attachments.
Setup Wizards
Configure the printer to save scanned images to network-folder Quick Sets. Quick
Sets provide easy access to files saved on the network.

Preferences Manage general scanning settings.

Scan+ Setup Scan+ is a unified scan app that offers scanning to multiple destinations in a
single job. Scan+ provides access to favorites, recently used destinations, Auto
Sense features, PDF Quality and File Size presets, and scan shortcuts to increase
productivity.

Scan/Digital Send tab 183

 Table 4-14 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab (continued)

Menu Description

Scan to Network Folder Configure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder

● Settings for notifications

● Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder

● Default file settings for jobs saved in a network folder

Scan to SharePoint® Configure the SharePoint settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site

● Default settings for jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site

Scan to USB Drive Configure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB flash drive

● Settings for notifications

● Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

● Default file settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

Stamp Select and configure content to be applied in up to six positions on the copy page.

Watermarks Use this feature to add a watermark to the document.

Fax tab
Settings available on the Fax tab of the EWS.

Table 4-15 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab

Menu Description

Fax Activity Log Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.

Fax Receive Setup Configure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing
schedule.

Fax Send Setup Configure settings for sending faxes, including the following:

● Default settings for outgoing faxes

● Settings for fax Quick Sets jobs

● Settings for notifications

● Default setting for sending faxes using the internal fax modem

● Settings for using a LAN fax service

● Settings for using an Internet fax service

Fax Speed Dials Manage speed dials, including the following:

● Import .CSV files containing email addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so
that they can be accessed on this printer.

● Export email, fax, or user records from the printer into a file on the computer to
use as a data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.

184 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-15 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab (continued)

Menu Description

Fax Archive and Forwarding Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and configure basic settings for
each:

● Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to
an email address, a network folder, or an FTP server.

● Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a different fax device.

Stamp Select and configure content to be applied in up to six positions on the copy page.

Watermarks Use this feature to add a watermark to the document.

Supplies tab
Settings available on the Supplies tab of the EWS.

Table 4-16 HP Embedded Web Server Supplies tab

Menu Description

Consumables Access Control Use this feature to lock toner cartridges into the product to help prevent
early replacement. Each cartridge will automatically unlock when it reaches the
replacement threshold or encounters an error. Signing in with Admin or Service
credentials will also unlock all cartridges for the duration of the session.

Manage Supplies Configure how the printer reacts when supplies reach a Very Low state.

Troubleshooting tab
Settings available on the Troubleshooting tab of the EWS.

Table 4-17 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab

Menu Description

Calibration/Cleaning Enable the automatic cleaning feature, create and print the cleaning page, and
select an option to calibrate the printer immediately.
(Color LaserJet printers only)

Diagnostic Data Export printer information to a file that can be useful for HP technical support to use
for detailed problem analysis.
NOTE: This option is available only if an
administrator password is set from the
Security tab.

Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer firmware upgrade files.

Supplies tab 185

 Table 4-17 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab (continued)

Menu Description

Calibration/Cleaning Enable the automatic cleaning feature, create and print the cleaning page, and
select an option to calibrate the printer immediately.
(Color LaserJet printers only)

General Troubleshooting Use the following options as appropriate:

● Reports and Tests area: Select and print several types of reports and tests.
Some reports can be viewed in the Embedded Web Server by clicking the View
button.

● Fax Tools area: Configure settings for fax troubleshooting. (MFP and Digital
Sender products with HP analog fax accessory only)

● OXPd Troubleshooting area: Enable or disable the Allow a Non-Secure

Connection for Web Services option

● Auto Recovery area: Enable or disable the Enable Auto Recovery option, which
allows the printer to auto recover from errors that might require the power to
be turned off and on (for example, a 49 error).

Online Help Link to HP cloud-based online help to assist in troubleshooting printing issues.

Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to factory defaults.

Schedule Restart Scheduled Restart allows users to set a time and frequency for when to restart the
product.

Security tab
Settings available on the Security tab of the EWS.

Table 4-18 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab

Menu Description

Access Control Configure access to printer functions for specific individuals or groups, and select
the method individuals use to sign in to the printer.

Account Policy Configure for local administrator and remote configuration the password lockout
and password complexity settings.

Certificate Management Install, manage, and validate security certificates for access to the printer and the
network.

Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to
which the printer can send messages.

186 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-18 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)

Menu Description

General Security Settings for general security, including the following options:

● Configure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on

the printer.

● Set a custom device Service Access Code.

● Set the Remote Configuration Password.

● Set Embedded Web Server Options.

● Enable WebScan Auto Capture Jobs.

● Set PJL password and enable access commands.

● Enable PostScript operations.

● Set file system access and firmware upgrade security.

● Enable Bluetooth Low Energy settings.

● Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB
connectivity port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.

● Set enabled SMB versions for the printer.

● View the status of all security settings.

Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certificates that allow
devices to use this product.

Protect Stored Data Configure and manage the internal storage for the printer.

Configure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer internal storage.

Security Log Retrieve security event log data, and export security event log data to a file that can
be used for detailed problem analysis.

Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system
parameters.

Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from different
domains. If no sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.

HP Web Services tab

Settings available on the HP Web Services tab of the EWS.

Use the HP Web Services tab to configure and enable HP Web Services for this printer. HP Web Services
must be enabled to use the HP ePrint feature.

Table 4-19 HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab

Menu Description

HP JetAdvantage Access solutions that extend the capabilities of the printer

Smart Cloud Print Enable Smart Cloud Print, which allows access to web-based apps that extend the
capabilities of the printer.

Web Proxy Configure a proxy server if there are issues enabling HP Web Services or
connecting the printer to the Internet.

HP Web Services tab 187

 Table 4-19 HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab (continued)

Menu Description

Web Services Setup Connect this printer to HP Connected on the web by enabling HP Web Services.

Networking tab
Settings available on the Networking tab of the EWS.

Use the Networking tab to configure and secure network settings for the printer when it is connected to
an IP-based network.

NOTE: This tab does not display if the printer is connected to other types of networks.

Table 4-20 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Configuration settings

Menu Description

AirPrint Enable, set up, or disable network printing from Apple-supported printers.

Network Settings Configure IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC, and SNMP settings, depending on the print
server model.

Other Settings Configure general printing protocols and services supported by the print server.
The available options depend on the print server model, but can include firmware
update, LPD queues, USB settings, support information, and refresh rate.

Select Language Change the language displayed by the HP Embedded Web Server. This page
displays if the web pages support multiple languages. Optionally, select supported
languages through language-preference settings in the browser.

Select Location Select a country/region for the printer.

TCP/IP Settings Configure TCP/IP settings for IPv4 and IPv6 networks.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

Wi-Fi Direct Configure Wi-Fi Direct settings for printers that include embedded Wi-Fi Direct Print
and NFC printing or that have a wireless accessory installed.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

Wireless Station Configure the initial wireless settings.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

Table 4-21 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Diagnostics settings

Menu Description

Configuration Page View the HP Jetdirect configuration page, which contains status and configuration
information.

Network Statistics Display network statistics that are collected and stored on the HP Jetdirect print
server.

Protocol Info View a list of network-configuration settings on the HP Jetdirect print server for each
protocol.

188 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-22 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings

Menu Description

802.1X Authentication Configure 802.1X authentication settings on the Jetdirect print server as required for
client authentication on the network, and reset the 802.1X authentication settings to
factory-default values.

CAUTION: When changing the 802.1X authentication settings; the printer might
lose its connection. To reconnect, it might be necessary to reset the print server to a
factory-default state and reinstall the printer.

Announcement Agent Enable or disable the HP Device Announcement Agent, set the configuration server,
and configure mutual authentication using certificates.

Authorization Control configuration management and use of this printer, including limiting host
access to this printer through an Access Control List (ACL) (for selected print
servers on IPv4 networks only).

IPsec/Firewall Enable, configure, and view an IPsec/Firewall policy.

Mgmt. Protocols Configure and manage security protocols for this printer, including the following:

● Set the security management level for the HP Embedded Web Server, and
control traffic over HTTP and HTTPS.

● Configure the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) operation. Enable

or disable the SNMP v1/v2c or SNMP v3 agents on the print server.

● Control access through protocols that may not be secure, such as printing
protocols, print services, discovery protocols, name resolution services, and
configuration-management protocols.

Secure Communication Configure Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol, select encryption, enable
FIPS-140, and enable logging of connectivity for troubleshooting.

Settings View and restore current security settings to factory-default values.

Configure security settings using the Security Configuration Wizard.

NOTE: Do not use the Security Configuration Wizard to configure security settings
if using network-management applications, such as HP Web Jetadmin.

Print menu
Review the following information about the Print menu in the Settings menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Settings, and then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK
button.

Table 4-23 Print menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Enable Print from Enabled Enables the printer

USB Drive to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.

Managed Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Jobs allows you list
Date* the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Print menu 189

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Managed Stored Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs Jobs temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Managed Stored Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Jobs Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Managed Stored Standard Stored Off Configure global

Jobs Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Standard

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
1 week amount of time
jobs can be stored
4 weeks on the printer.

Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy
job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Default Print Paper Selection Select from a list of Configures the

Options sizes that the printer default paper size
supports. used for print jobs.

Default Print Default Custom X Dimension Range: 2.52-12.60 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 12.60 inches the user selects
Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Default Print Default Custom Y Dimension Range: 5-18 inches

Options Paper Size
Default = 18 inches

190 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Default Print Default Custom Use Inches Enabled*

Options Paper Size
Disabled

Default Print Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

Options whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one or
both sides.

Default Print Quality Level Normal* Use to select the

Options level of desired
Enhanced print quality.

Fine Lines

Default Print Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

Options (recommended)* shadows that
can appear along
Edge-to-Edge output the edges of
copies when the
original document
is printed close to
the edges.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* This option is for

Postscript Pages users who are
Settings On generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
On option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.

PCL and Courier Font Regular Select which

Postscript version of the
Settings Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

PCL and Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

Postscript printable area of
Settings Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on
a single line of A4
paper.

Print menu 191

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

Postscript to select whether
Settings Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

PCL and Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

Postscript PDF error page is
Settings Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

PCL and Personality Auto* Configures the

Postscript default print
Settings PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL and PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font
Postscript source for the
Settings Disk resident* user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

PCL and PCL Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
Postscript number for the
Settings Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.

192 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
Postscript option and the Font
Settings Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL
Postscript print-command
Settings Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user soft
-default vertical
form length.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait Select the

Postscript orientation that is
Settings Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
Postscript symbol sets. several available
Settings symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

Print menu 193

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Media Source Standard* Use to select
Postscript Mapping and maintain input
Settings Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer HP
LaserJet models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on HP
LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights Select the tonal
range to adjust.
Midtones

Shadows

Print Quality Adjust Color Cyan Use the arrow keys to

adjust the sliding bar
Magenta for each color.

Yellow

Black

Print Quality Image Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

Registration adjusted
Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Depends upon the

number of trays
installed

194 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Registration Horizontal Shift alignment to
center the image
Front-side on the page from
Vertical Shift top to bottom
and from left to
Back-side right. You can also
Horizontal Shift align the image on
the front with the
Back-side image printed on
Vertical Shift the back.

The direction that

is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through
the printer is
referred to as
X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.

The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as
Y. Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.

Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for
each tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides
in the X and
Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print menu 195

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Print Test Page Use the Print Test
Registration Page option to
print a page to
test the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X
and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.

Print Quality Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page

Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Auto Sense All Other Trays Sense first page
Behavior
Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from a list of

types paper types

Reset Paper Types

Print Quality Optimize Normal Paper Standard Set to Smooth

when printing on
Smooth smooth paper of
normal weight.

Print Quality Optimize Heavy paper Standard Set to Smooth

when printing on
Smooth smooth, heavy
media types.

Print Quality Optimize Envelope control Normal Set to Reduced

Temp if envelopes
Reduced Temp are sticking due
to moisture in the
envelop adhesive.

Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal Set the mode to

Alternate if marks
Alternate appear on the back
side of the paper
when printing from
Tray 1. This sets the
printer to initiate
a clean sequence
every time a job
finishes when the
printer is set for
Any Size and Any
Type for Tray 1.

Print Quality Optimize Background Normal Set to Alternate

when a
Alternate background occurs
all over the page.

196 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Normal Set to Alternate

Control 1 to improve
Alternate 1 uniformity on any
paper type.
Alternate 2

Alternate 3

Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off Set to On if printing

with media that
On contains a high
calcium carbonate
content. Engine
print speed is
slowed so that
less paper dust is
produced.

Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off Set to On to try

and improve print
On quality.

Print Quality Optimize Tracking Control Off Improves color

stability by
On adjusting the bias
voltage. Make sure
this mode is set to
On.

Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal Set to Alternate

when color
Alternate misregistration
occurs.

Print Quality Optimize Transfer Control Normal Set to Alternate

to reduce primary
Alternate 1 transfer bias and
to resolve low
density or blotchy
images.

Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal Set to Alternate

if the printer
Alternate is installed in
a high-humidity
environment.

Print Quality Optimize Reset Optimize Reset Use Reset to reset

the menu defaults.

Print Quality Edge Control Off

Light

Normal*

Maximum

Print menu 197

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
When available jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

When available:
The printer pulls
from another tray
if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the specific
tray was indicated
for the job.

Manage Trays Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Prompt on mismatch appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Prompt on
mismatch: A
prompt displays
only if the size
or type do not
match or the tray is
empty.

198 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Manage Trays Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Allow: When this

option is selected
the user is
prompted to either
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray. This is the
factory default.

Do not allow: When

this option is
selected, the user
is not given the
option of selecting
a different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Print menu 199

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Alternative Disabled* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

Manage Trays Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Automatic: Choose
this option to
skip printing blank
sides during a two-
sided print job. The
printer can print
jobs faster when
blank sides are
skipped.

Always: Choose
this option to print
all sides of a two-
sided job, even
if one side is
blank. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

200 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-23 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Override A4/ Yes* Prints on letter-size

Letter paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.

Manage Trays Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature
Behavior automatically* to identify the
desired behavior
Prompt for user when printing a
response document on a
paper size that the
printer does not
support.

Manage Trays Rotate Offset Automatic* Allows printing of

multiple copies
Off of a print
job in alternate
orientations. For
example, the first
copy outputs
in landscape
orientation, the
second outputs in
portrait orientation,
the third in
landscape, and so
on. This feature
works only with
Letter or A4-sized
paper and requires
the use of at
least two paper
trays. One tray
is loaded to feed
paper in the long-
edge orientation
and the other is
loaded to feed
paper in the short-
edge orientation.

Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or rear door is open.

Defeating interlocks 201

 To operate the printer with the doors open, the interlock switch levers must be depressed to simulate a
closed-cover position.

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in) strip,
and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock

1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in)
strip, and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

Figure 4-23 Defeat the front door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in)
strip, and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

202 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-24 Defeat the right door interlock (right side)

Figure 4-25 Defeat the right door interlock (left side)

LED Diagnostics (formatter)

Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.

Understand lights on the formatter

Two LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

LED Diagnostics (formatter) 203

 Figure 4-26 LEDs (formatter)

2
1

Table 4-24 LEDs (formatter)

Item Description

Heartbeat LED Indicates that the formatter is functioning.

HP Jetdirect LEDs Indicates network activity and link status.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.

For more information, see HP LaserJet Enterprise, HP LaserJet Managed, HP PageWide Enterprise, HP
PageWide Managed - 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter.

This part contains components that are electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive. To reduce the
possibility of ESD damage, always touch the sheet-metal chassis to ground yourself before touching an
ESD sensitive part.

204 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing
after it is turned on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the
initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.

The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the product is executing the firmware
boot process.

NOTE: If after initialization, the heartbeat LED is not solid green, see Table 4-26 Heartbeat LED,
product operational on page 207.

Table 4-25 Heartbeat LED, product initialization

Initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state

No power (power cable Off Not applicable

disconnected or power switch off)

Power on (immediately after the Red, solid Red, solid

power switch pressed)
● Duration should be 1 second or ● Firmware error; problem finding
less hardware and booting the
serial peripheral interface flash
memory (boot process halted)

Replace the formatter.

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash Green, solid Red, solid

memory boot
● Firmware error; problem finding
hardware and booting the
serial peripheral interface flash
memory (boot process halted)

Replace the formatter.

HW checks on board DRAM Green, solid Red, solid

● Firmware error; problem finding

hardware and booting the
serial peripheral interface flash
memory (boot process halted)

Replace the formatter.

Control panel connection initializes Green, solid Yellow, fast flash

NOTE: Control panel ● Formatter to control panel

communication successful. If an connection failed (boot process
error occurs, a message should halted)
appear on the control-panel display.
Check the cables between the
formatter and control panel for
damage. Make sure that the cables
are fully seated.

Pre-boot menu available (including Green, solid Red, solid

diagnostics)
● Diagnostic failure (Follow
diagnostic instructions)

Turn the power off, and then on again

to restart the initialization process.

LED Diagnostics (formatter) 205

 Table 4-25 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued)

Initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state

Accessing disk for firmware image Green, solid Yellow, fast flash

NOTE: If applicable, disk error ● Control panel not connected

messages appear on the control-
panel display.

Firmware boot Green, solid Yellow, fast flash

NOTE: If applicable, disk error ● Control panel not connected

messages appear on the control-
panel display.

Product operational Green, heartbeat blink Yellow, fast flash

NOTE: If applicable, disk error ● Control panel not connected

messages appear on the control-
panel display.

49.XX.YY error or initialization Not applicable LED off

freezes
NOTE: An error message (for
example, 49.XX.YY) might appear on
the control-panel display.

Eventually a formatter connection

missing message appears.

Turn the power off, and then on again

to restart the initialization process.

If the error persists, perform a

firmware upgrade.

Control panel connection interrupted Not applicable Yellow, fast flash

after the product is operational
● Control panel not connected

Flat flexible cable (FFC) between the Not applicable Yellow, solid
formatter and DC controller is not
connected or damaged ● Formatter to DC controller
connection failed

Check the cable between the

formatter and DC controller for
damage. Make sure that the cable is
fully seated.

Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable

Approaching Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable

Wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression

Approaching wake up from Sleep Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression
Mode

The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation when the product completes the firmware
boot process and is in the Ready state.

206 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-26 Heartbeat LED, product operational

Green ● Normal operation

– Formatter is operating normally

– Firmware is operating normally

– Control panel is connected

Yellow ● Formatter cannot connect to the control panel

– Check control panel connections

– Verify control panel functionality

Red ● Formatter error or failure

– Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory

boot error

– Power on self test (formatter) failed

– Diagnostic (formatter) failed

Off TIP: The heartbeat LED is off if the power cable is

disconnected, the product power switch is in the off
position, or the product is in Sleep Mode.

● Firmware or system freeze

– Check control panel for an error message

– Control panel failure

NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a

formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If
the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.

HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Network Settings

● Embedded Jetdirect Menu

● Link Speed

LED Diagnostics (formatter) 207

 3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then touch the OK button.

Scanner tests (MFP)

Learn about troubleshooting the MFP scanner tests.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Document feeder and image scanner replacement parts

If a document feeder or image scanner sensor fails, replace the following assemblies:

● Document feeder sensors

NOTE: All include a replacement white backing kit.

– Kit - ADF whole unit Enterprise; B5L47-67906

– Kit - ADF whole unit Workflow; B5L47-67907

– Image scanner whole unit; B5L46-67912

Scanner tests
Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors.

Scanner test sensors

● ADF paper present

● ADF Y (length)

● ADF jam cover

● ADF paper path deskew

● ADF paper path pick success

● Paper path sensor 1(unreachable)

● Paper path sensor 2 (unreachable)

● Flatbed Y (length)

● Flatbed cover

1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and select the Support Tools item.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Manual scanner sensor test

208 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 3. Select the sensor name on the screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control-panel
display.

4. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).

● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.

● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the
sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).

For example, opening the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover Toggle item count two
times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

5. Select the Reset sensors item to reset the Toggle count item.

-or-

Touch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen, and then touch the Cancel button again to
return the Diagnostic Tests menu.

Disable cartridge check

Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when the toner
cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.

When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print
quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to
isolate print-quality problems that are related to the toner cartridge.

NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning the disable cartridge
check diagnostic.

Disable cartridge check from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance Mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Disable Cartridge Check, and then press the OK button.

Disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

Disable cartridge check 209

 2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Disable Cartridge Check

Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams
within the engine.

During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to
stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test
can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the
job-print time, the printer can recover in one of two ways.

Printer recovery (print/stop test)

● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before
the timer times out.

● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and
return it to a normal state.

Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops

● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the
fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause
might be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.

● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone
through the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then
the fuser it is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or
labels stuck to the fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the
fuser with the customer.

Print/stop test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

210 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Print/stop test from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Print/Stop Test

3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about printer individual component diagnostics.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Paper path test

Learn about the paper path test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to isolate the cause of jams.

To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, and specify the number of copies to print. Print
multiple copies to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after
beginning the diagnostic feature:

● Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy.
To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll back up and
select Print Test Page to start the test.

● Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.

● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500.

Paper path test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button.

Individual component diagnostics 211

 Paper path test from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Paper Path Test

3. Select the paper path test options for the test.

Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams
within the engine.

During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to
stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test
can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the
job-print time, the printer can recover in one of two ways.

Printer recovery (print/stop test)

● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before
the timer times out.

● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and
return it to a normal state.

Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops

● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the
fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause
might be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.

● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone
through the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then
the fuser it is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or
labels stuck to the fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the
fuser with the customer.

Print/stop test from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

212 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

Print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Print/Stop Test

3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.

Paper path sensors test

Learn about the paper path sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Paper path sensor test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Paper Path Sensors, and then press the OK button.

NOTE: Exiting the Paper Path Sensors menu and then reentering the test will clear the test values
from the previous test.

The menu list of sensors and switches for the Paper Path Sensors test varies depending on which
optional accessories are installed.

For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends
on the number of accessories installed.

Paper path sensor test from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

Paper path sensors test 213

 ● Paper Path Sensors

3. Touch Start to run the test.

NOTE: Exiting the Paper Path Sensors menu and then reentering the test will clear the test values
from the previous test.

The menu list of sensors and switches for the Paper Path Sensors test varies depending on which
optional accessories are installed.

For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends
on the number of accessories installed.

Table 4-27 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests

Sensor Abbreviation Description Part number

Tray 3 feed sensor SR21 Paper feed assembly RM2-5145-000CN

(optional accessory)

Registration sensor SR6 Registration assembly RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0018-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Fuser loop 1 sensor PS1 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Front media width sensor SR13 Registration assembly RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0018-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Rear media width sensor SR14 Registration assembly RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0018-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Fuser pressure release SR11 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

sensor
B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Fuser output sensor SR9 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Developer alienation SR4 Main drive assembly B5L25-67902

sensor

Output bin full sensor SR10 Paper delivery assembly RM2-0092-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0016-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

214 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Manual sensors test
Learn about the manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Manual sensor test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.

6. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).

● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.

● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the
sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).

Manual test from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Manual Sensor Test

3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).

● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.

● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the
sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper
feeder installed.

For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on
the number of accessories installed.

Manual sensors test 215

 Table 4-28 Manual sensor diagnostic tests

Sensor Abbreviation Description Part number

Front door opening/closing SW4 Switch PCA assembly RM2-7133-000CN

sensor

Right door opening/closing SW3 Switch button assembly WC2-5806-000CN

sensor

Tray 3 feed sensor SR21 Paper feed assembly RM2-5145-000CN

(optional accessory)

Registration sensor SR6 Registration assembly RM2-0093-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0018-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Fuser loop 1 sensor PS1 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Front media width sensor SR13 Paper pickup assembly RM2-6556-000CN

SR13N (M553n)

Rear media width sensor SR14 Paper pickup assembly RM2-6556-000CN

SR14N (M553n)

Fuser pressure release SR11 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

sensor
B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Fuser output sensor SR9 Fuser B5L35-67902 (110 V)

B5L36-67902 (220 V)

Output bin full sensor SR10 Paper delivery assembly RM2-0092-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0016-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Tray/bin manual sensors test

Learn about the tray/bin manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Tray/bin manual sensor test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

216 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Tray/bin Manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.

6. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).

● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.

● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the
sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).

Tray/bin manual test from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Tray/bin Manual Sensor Test

3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).

● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.

● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the
sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper
feeder installed.

For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on
the number of accessories installed.

Table 4-29 Tray/bin manual sensor diagnostic tests

Sensor Abbreviation Description Part number

Tray 2 paper sensor SR5 Switch button assembly WC2-5806-000CN

Tray 1 paper sensor SR8 Right door assembly RM2-0019-000CN

Cassette media out SR12 Paper pickup assembly RM2-6556-000CN

sensor

Tray 3-X media out sensor SR20 Paper pickup assembly RM2-5154-000CN
(optional accessories)

Tray 3-X cassette sensor SW21 Switch button assembly WC2-5806-000CN

(optional accessories)

Tray 3-X feed sensor SR21 Paper feeder assembly RM2-5145-000CN

(optional accessories)

Right door sensor (optional SW20 Right door assembly RM2-5146-000CN

accessories)

Tray/bin manual sensors test 217

 Table 4-29 Tray/bin manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued)

Sensor Abbreviation Description Part number

Output bin full sensor SR10 Paper delivery assembly RM2-0092-000CN (M553n)

RM2-0016-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Component test
Learn about the component test troubleshooting diagnostic.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.
NOTE: The front door or right side door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.
Some tests might require that the ITB and toner cartridges be removed. A control-panel display prompt
appears indicate removing some, or all of the cartridges, during certain tests.

Component test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Component Test, and then press the OK button.

6. Select a component, and then select Start to begin the test.

7. Select Stop to end the test

Component test from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Component Test

218 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Select the component test options for the test.

NOTE: The menu list of components for the Component Test varies depending on which optional
accessories are installed.

The table in this section describes the components available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper
feeder installed.

For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on
the number of accessories installed.

Table 4-30 Component test details

Component test Item tested Part number Comments

Drum motors M1/M2/M3 RM2-0078-000CN Activates the specified

motor.

Fuser drive assembly M4 RM2-0091-010CN (M553n) Activates the specified

motor.
RM2-0009-010CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Fuser pressure release M6 RK2-6027-000CN Activates the specified

motor motor.

Tray 2 pickup motor M5 RM2-0008-000CN Activates the specified

motor.
Pickup drive assembly

Tray 3 pickup motor M20 RM2-5145-000CN Activates the specified

(optional accessory) motor.
Paper feed assembly

Duplexer pickup motor M8 RM2-0006-000CN Activates the specified

(duplex models) motor.
Duplex drive assembly

Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL2 RM2-6556-000CN Activates the specified

solenoid.
Paper pickup assembly

Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL1 RM2-0090-000CN (M553n) Activates the specified

solenoid.
RM2-0022-000CN (M522,
M553dn, M553x, M577,
M578, E55040. E57540)

Tray 1 roller alienation

(part of secondary transfer
assembly)

Tray 3-X pickup solenoid Not applicable RM2-5154-000CN Activates the specified
(optional accessories) solenoid.
Paper pickup assembly

Duplex switchback SL3 RM2-0006-000CN Activates the specified

solenoid (duplex models) solenoid.
Duplex drive assembly

Feed roller clutch CL1 RM2-0010-000CN Activates the specified

clutch.
Lifter drive assembly

Laser Scanner motor M7 RM2-6545-010CN Activates the specified

motor.
Laser/scanner assembly

Component test 219

 Diagrams
View diagrams for the printer.

Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer components.

Diagrams: Block diagrams

View block diagrams for the printer.

Sensors and switches

View document feeder, printer, and paper feeder sensor and switch diagrams.

Sensors and switches (printer base)

Figure 4-27 Sensors and switches (printer base)
SR10

SR9

PS1

SE1

SR13 (SR13N)
SR14 (SR14N)

SR6 (SR6N)

SR8

SR12

SW5

Item Description Item Description

SR6 Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor SR13N Media width (front, simplex

(duplex models) models)

SR6N Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor SR14 Media width (rear, duplex

(simplex models) models)

SR8 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) SR14N Media width (rear, simplex

media-out sensor models)

SR9 Fuser delivery sensor PS1 Loop sensor

SR10 Output bin media-full SE1 Media sensor

sensor

220 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Item Description Item Description

SR12 Tray 2 (cassette) media-out SW5 Tray 2 (cassette) detection

sensor switch

SR13 Media width (front, duplex

models)

Sensors and switches (550-sheet paper feeder)

Figure 4-28 Sensors and switches (550-sheet paper feeder)

SR21

SR20

SW21

Item Description

SR20 Tray 3/4/5(cassette) media-out sensor

SR21 Paper feeder media feed sensor

SW21 Tray 3/4/5(cassette) detection switch

Sensors and switches (document feeder)

Figure 4-29 Sensors and switches (document feeder)

3
4 2 1

Item Description

1 Length sensor

2 Jam cover sensor

3 Paper present sensor

4 Deskew sensor

5 Paper path sensor

Sensors and switches 221

 Cross section diagrams
View printer and paper feeder cross section diagrams.

Cross-sectional view of the printer

Figure 4-30 Cross-sectional view of the printer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Item Description Item Description

1 Photosensitive drum 13 ITB drive roller

2 Toner collection unit (TCU) 14 Registration density

sensor

3 Intermediate transfer belt 14 Media sensor

(ITB)

4 Primary transfer (T1) roller 16 Registration roller

5 Output roller 17 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

pickup roller

6 Duplex switchback roller 18 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

(duplex models) separation roller

7 Duplex flapper (duplex 19 Duplex re-pickup roller

models) (duplex models)

8 Fuser film 20 Tray 2 feed roller

9 Pressure roller 21 Tray 2 separation roller

222 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Item Description Item Description

10 Fuser 22 Tray 2 pickup roller

11 Duplex feed roller (duplex 23 Tray 2

models)

12 Secondary transfer (T2) 24 Laser/scanner assembly

roller

Cross-sectional view of the 550-sheet paper feeder

Figure 4-31 Cross-sectional view of the 550-sheet paper feeder
1 2 3 4 5

Item Description

1 Tray 3/4/5

2 Tray 3/4/5 pickup roller

3 Tray 3/4/5 feed roller

4 Tray 3/4/5 feed roller

5 Tray 3/4/5 separation roller

Cross section diagrams 223

 Cross-sectional view of the document feeder
Figure 4-32 Document feeder paper path

Item Description Item Description

1 Input tray 7 Front-side scan module

location

NOTE: This scan module

(document feeder glass) is
located in the scanner
base and is not pictured.

2 Pre-pick roller 8 Back-side scan module

3 Pick roller 9 ADF pick success

transmitter

4 ADF pick success receiver 10 Separator roller

5 Deskew drive roller 11 Exit drive roller

6 Prescan drive roller 12 Lift plate

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations

View printed circuit assembly (PCA) diagrams.

224 Chapter 4 Solve problems

DC controller PCA connections
Figure 4-33 DC controller PCA connections
J116 J114 J109

J124 J111

J118 J115
J128
J121
J120

J131

J122

J141
J143

J140

J103

J108

J123 J130

J125
J106
J105
J126

J129 J127 J101 J102 J132

Item Description Item Description

J101 Low-voltage power supply J122 Tray 2 (cassette) pickup

assembly (LVPS) clutch (CL1)

24V interlock switch Tray 1 (multipurpose tray

pickup solenoid (SL2)

Tray 2 (cassette) detection

switch (SW5)

Environmental sensor

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

media-out sensor (SR8)

J102 LVPS J123 Upper cartridge guide

switch

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 225

 Item Description Item Description

J103 Scanner motor (M7) J124 Media sensor (SE1)

Memory chip, toner

cartridges

Paper feeder

J105 LVPS J125 High-voltage power supply

D (HVPSD)

J106 Formatter J126 Y/M laser assembly

J108 Empty J127 C/K laser assembly

J109 High-voltage power supply J128 Fuser power supply (FPS)

T (HVPST)

J111 Drum motor 1 (M1) J129 Y/M/C/K toner level sensor

Drum motor 2 (M2)

J114 Fuser motor (M4) J130 Drum motor 3 (M3)

Primary transfer (T1) roller Developer home position

alienation solenoid sensor

Drum home position

sensor 1

Drum home position

sensor 2

Drum home position

sensor 3

J115 Right door switch J131 Output bin media-full

sensor (SR10)
Power supply switch
High-voltage power supply
Fuser pressure release T (HVPST)
sensor

Pre-exposure LED 3 - 4

J116 Fuser J132 Developer alienation

(disengagement) motor
(M6)

J118 Duplex re-pickup clutch J140 Empty

(CL2; duplex models only)

Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

(SR6, duplex; SR6N,
simplex)

Media width sensor, front

(SR13, duplex; SR13N
simplex)

Media width sensor, rear

(SR14, duplex; SR14N
simplex)

226 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Item Description Item Description

J120 Registration density J141 Empty

sensor, front

Registration density
sensor, rear

J121 Tray 2 (cassette) media-out J143 Empty

sensor

Formatter PCA connections

Figure 4-34 Formatter PCA connections (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

J16 J25 J29

J2

J20
J24 J7
J12
J97
J17 J18 J38

J1

J41
J9
J98

J6 J57 J23

Item Description Item Description

J1 Slim DIMM J23 Not used

J2 Control panel (touchscreen J24 Not used

models)

J6 Formatter Power Cable J25 Wireless cable

J7 Network LAN J29 IOD

J9 AA module power cable J38 USB-device

J12 HIP/AA USB J42 USB-host

J16 Control panel power cable J57 BASH

J17 DC controller (flat cable) J97 Embedded MultiMedia

Card (eMMC)

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 227

 Item Description Item Description

J18 Hard-disk drive (optional J98 Trusted Platform Module

HDD)
NOTE: The TPM is factory
installed for the M554,
M555, and M578 printers
and is not field replaceable.
It is optional for all other
models.

J20 Walkup USB

Figure 4-35 Formatter PCA connections (M577/M578/E57540)

J29
J3 J16 J25
J20

J15 J30

J12

J24
J22

J7

J51

J98
J17 J1
J18

J41

J21

J23 J57
J6 J97 J38

Item Description Item Description

J1 DIMM J23 Not used

J3 Dedicated NFC (not used) J24 Not used

J6 Formatter power cable J25 Wireless cable

J7 Network LAN J29 Island of Data (IOD)

J12 HIP J30 Control panel HDMI

J15 Fax J38 USB-device

J16 Control panel sideband J41 USB-host

cable

228 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Item Description Item Description

J17 DC controller (flat cable) J51 BASH

J18 Hard-disk drive J57 Debug

J20 Walkup USB J97 Embedded MultiMedia

Card (eMMC)

J21 Accessible Architecture J98 Trusted Platform Module

(AA)
NOTE: The TPM is factory
installed for the M554,
M555, and M578 printers
and is not field replaceable.
It is optional for all other
models.

J22 Scanner HDMI

550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors

Figure 4-36 550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors

J1904 J1901
J1903

J1908
J1902 J1907

Item Description Item Description

J1901 DC controller PCA for J1904 Tray 3/4/5 (cassette)

paper feeder media-out sensor (SR20)

Feed senor (SR21)

J1902 Tray 3/4/5 (cassette) J1907 Paper feeder

pickup clutch (CL20)

Right door switch

Tray 3/4/5 (cassette)

detection switch (SW21)

J1903 Feed motor (M20) J1908 Empty

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 229

 Scanner control board PCA connectors
Figure 4-37 Scanner control board PCA connectors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Item Description Item Description

1 Stapler power 7 Document feeder motors

(feed and deskew)

2 Scan control board power 8 Document feeder sensors

(24V) (prescan, media present,
and top hatch)

3 PAM to SCAM 9 Document feeder

communication (HDMI) ultrasonic sensor receiver
and deskew sensor

4 Image scanner sensors 10 Document feeder letter/

(paper feeder open and legal input tray sensor
image scanner media
length) and cave LED

5 Image scanner (S1) FFC 11 Document feeder

(scanner data and image ultrasonic sensor
scanner motor) transmitter

6 Document feeder (S2) FFC

(scanner data)

Diagrams: External plug and port locations

View printer external plugs and ports diagrams.

230 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 External plug and port locations
Figure 4-38 External plug and port locations

Item Description

1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

2 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

3 USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port

might be covered)

NOTE: For Walkup USB printing, use the USB port near
the control panel.

Diagrams: Major component locations

View printer major component locations diagrams.

Diagrams: Major component locations 231

 Major components (printer base)
Figure 4-39 Major components (printer base 1 of 2)

1
2

8 7

Item Description Item Description

1 Intermediate transfer belt 5 Fuser drive assembly

(ITB)

2 Fuser 6 Pickup drive assembly

3 Secondary transfer (T2) 7 Lifter drive assembly

roller assembly

4 Formatter case assembly 8 Laser/scanner assembly

232 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-40 Major components (printer base 2 of 2)

Item Description Item Description

1 Main drive assembly 4 Registration density

sensor assembly

2 Registration assembly 5 Cassette pickup assembly

3 Delivery assembly

Diagrams: Major component locations 233

 Printed circuit assemblies (printer base)
Figure 4-41 Printed circuit assemblies (printer base)
㻌
1

5 4

Item Description Item Description

1 DC controller 4 High-voltage power supply

D (HVPSD)

2 Low-voltage power supply 5 Fuser power supply (FPS)

234 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Item Description Item Description

3 High-voltage power supply Not shown Formatter

T (HVPST)
NOTE: Located to the
right of the DC controller.

Diagrams: General timing chart

View the printer timing chart diagram.

Diagrams: General timing chart 235

236
Print command

Operation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

1 Cassette pickup clutch

2 TOP sensor

3 Fuser delivery sensor

4 Fuser motor

Chapter 4 Solve problems

5 Scanner motor
Figure 4-42 Timing chart

6 TOP signal

7 Drum motor 1

View the printer circuit diagram.

Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
8 Drum motor 2

9 Drum motor 3

10 Pickup motor

11 Primary charging bias (Y)

12 Primary charging bias (M)

13 Primary charging bias (C)

14 Primary charging bias (K)

15 Developing bias (Y/M/C)

16 Developing bias (K)

17 Primary transfer bias (Y/M/C)

18 Primary transfer bias (K)

19 Secondary transfer bias

 6 5 4 3 2 1

J50L J50D
FSR-BAIS

6
6
H2
J24
+3.3VA Sub 2 1 HEATER SUB HEATER_SUB

4
1
5

2
IOT_IN HEATER M HEATER_M

J135I
3
H1

2
4

1
Main 2 1

SGND HEATER C COMMON

2
3
3
J6002
J23

1
IOT_OUT COMMON

1
N.C. N.C.

4
2

J140
2
HVT_DATA2

1
J2607DH N.C.

1
N.C.
MD1 TH1 25 25

5
SGND HVT_CLK2

1
3
1
MD0 N.C. 24 24 +24VB

4
2 1

4
HVT_LD2

2
1

J134F
2
2
SGND 23 23 +24VB

J50LA
25

J50DA

3
3
TH_MAIN SGND

3
2

J2502

1
D

3
S2500
TH_MAIN 22 22
FLASH PGND

2
FT4

2
2
+3.3VC

4
3
J2607L J2607D
24VC 24VC +24VC

8
21 21

3
TCK PGND

1
1
T1_123IFB

5
4

J109
J90D

J141
SGND SGND

7
20 20

2
+3.3VCS

4
1

J2601
J6007
T1_4IFB
HVT-T PCA

5
SWO

4
LOOP_SNS LOOP_SNS SGND

1
6
19 19 SGND 1

5
2

SGND

6
SWDIO

J133I
J90DH

3
24VB 24VB

2
5
18 18 FULL_SNS

6
3
DUPM_I1B

7
SWCLK

J131

J78

2
TH_SUB_F TH_SUB_F

3
4
17 17

7
2
DUPM_I0B
SGND

1
FSR_TYP100 FSR_TYP100 FAN2_VM

4
3
16 16
3

J143
1

SR10
DUPM_I1A

J128
+3.3VC
FSR_CUR2 FSR_CUR2 FAN2_LK
1

2
15 15
2

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
J6006

DUPM_I0A FM2

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
RLD1
3 2 1

T2_VFB 1 FSR_CUR1 FSR_CUR1 2 PGND

1
9
14 14
1

DUPM_PHB

9
1 FSRD_MAIN
T2_IFB SGND
3

8
J2606DH 13 13
DUPM_PHA

8
2 TH3 FSRTH_MAIN
+24VB TH_SUB_R
4

7
SGND 12 12

1
1 2

2
DUPM_DWN

7
3 FSRTH_SUB_R
PGND +3.3VC
5

6
TH_SUB_R 11 11 T1HP

2
1
3
DUPSL

6
J15
4 SR5 FSRTH_SUB_F
HVT_DATA1 I2C_SCL
6

5
10 10 SGND SGND

2
3

FAN3D

2
J2606L J2606D

5
J2504
5 +3.3VA
HVT_LD1 FSR_SNS
7

4
9 9 +3.3VCS

1
2

FAN3LK SCN TH

J125
4
J6008

6 /ZEROX
HVT_CLK1 I2C_SDA
8

3
+3.3VC 8 8 SCNTH

S2401
6
1

T1HP

3
7 SGND
T2P_PWM PAPOUT_SNS
9

8
Fuser power supply PCA

2
I2C_SCL 7 7

5
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
/TCULED

J2602

17
2
J116
8 FSRD_SUB

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
T2P_CLK 9

1
FSR_SNS N.C. 6 6

4
PRE_EXP1

1
9 FSR_CUR2

9
T2N_PWM 10 5 5 FAN3_VM

3
I2C_SDA

3
10 PRE_EXP2
FSR_CUR1

8
T2N_CLK 11 4 4 FAN3_LK

2
PAPOUT_SNS

J2505

2
11 FAN4LK
FSR_CURRMS

FM3

3 2 1
T2N_LIMIT 12 3 3 PGND 7

1
WP TP1

1
12 FAN4D
/RLD2

1
6

HV_PWM1 13 1 2 2 2
13 TP TCUSNS
SCN_TH TB6001
5

HV_PWM2 14 1 1
14 PAPOUT_SNS TB1 TB2

3
FAN2D

1
TH2
4

HV_PWM3 15 TB6002
SGND

2
15

2
J2605
FAN2LK

2
3

HV_PWM4

SR9
16 +24VA

8
+3.3VCS
1

16

HVT-D PCA
PGND

3
J41
2

RS_CLK 17

J77
+24VA

7
2

17 +24VC
C

24VC
24VB
TH_SUB_F
SGND
1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

PGND
J6003

6
3

/VDO21 1 J2604 J2603

21 3 2 1 2 1 PGND

5
Fuser PCA
4

VDO21 2

M
DRM12FR

M1
20

4
5

LD2CTRL2 3 VC5VOFF
1

19 CST_PAPER /DRM1ACC

3
3

1
6
J102

LD2CTRL0 4 PWRSAVE
2

J121
18 SGND /DRM1DEC

2
2

2
7

LD2CTRL1 5 INL_CURRMS
3

SR12
17 +3.3VCS DRM1FG FSR_Neutral

1
1

3
8
2

/VDO22 6 PRO_PWR

J22
4
J600

16 +24VA FSR_Hot
9
1

VDO22 7 PGND 1 +5VA

8

9
5

+24VA

J2506
J71L
J42

15 9
/LD2PWM 8 FAN4_LK 2 +3.3VA
7
6

J71D

J126
PGND

J201
14 8
/BD2I 9 FAN4_VM 3 +3.3VA
6
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
7

J71DH

1st
PGND

2
13 7
3.3VD 10 PRE_EXP2 4 +3.3VA
5
9
8

1
DRM12FR

21
21
12 6
M

TB110
M2

SGND 11 PRE_EXP1 5 SGND

4
8
9

+3.3VC(LED) /DRM2ACC AC_Neutral

1
11 5

S401
/VDO12_O 12 +24VB 6 SGND
3
7

TONER_SNS1
/DRM2DEC

2
10 J72L 4 AC_Hot IL101
VDO12_O 13 TCU_SNS 7 SGND
2
6

J72D LED1_C

3
DRM2FG

1
3
9 3
16 15 14 13 12 11 10

LD1CTRL2 14 SGND 8 AC_DET

J111

1
5

J72DH +3.3VC(LED) TB111

2st
2
4
8 2

Relay PCA
LD1CTRL1 15 TCU_LED 9 +3.3VC
4

TONER_SNS2

1
3
5
7 1 +24VB
8

LD1CTRL0 /ZEROX
1

16
3

LED2_C
J44

6
6 +24VB
7

/VDO11_O TCU_SNS DOUBLE_ON

2

17

3
2

+3.3VC(LED)

7
5 J73L PGND PGND
6
3

VDO11_O 24VRMT
3

18 SGND

2
1

TONER_SNS3

J1803
16 15 14 13 12 11 10

J73D

8
J601

3
J603

PGND FAN1_LK

1
5
2

/LD1PWM TCU_LED
4

ITB toner
19

1
LED3_C FM1
M

full sensor

9
M4

J73DH

Toner level sensor

3 2 1

3st
FSRMFR FAN1D FAN1_VM

2
4
9
1

I2C_SCL
5
1

20 +3.3VC(LED)

collection box

Y/M laser driver

2

1
J105

/FSMACC FAM1LK

3
3
8

I2C_SDA
6
2

21 TONER_SNS4
1 /FSMDEC FEEDM_DWN
2
7

7
3

LED4_C

3
PGND

12 11 10
SGND FSMFG FEEDM_PHA

1
1 J74L

J129
1
6

8
4

J54L
19

2
J74D FAN4_LK

3
6
/VDO42 +24VAFU3 FEEDM_PHB

1
2

J1801
2
5

9
5

FM4

3 2 1

18 J57L
1
J74DH FAN4_VM

2
5

4st
VDO42 T1SL FEEDM_I0A

2
3
3
4
6

B
2

J54D
J54DH
17 FEEDM BOUT2
4

PRE_EXP2
1
1
J45

1
4
LD4CTRL2 +3.3VCS FEEDM_I1A

3
J57D

4
3
7

SL
J604

FEEDM BOUT1
SL1

16
3

+24VB
2
2

3
LD4CTRL1 5 SGND FEEDM_I0B
2
8
M

15 FEEDM AOUT2 M5
2

PRE_EXP1
3

2
2

LD4CTRL0 6 DRMHP1 FEEDM_I1B

LED3
1

2st

1
9

3
Low-voltage power supply PCA

FEEDM AOUT1

J202
J602

14
1

J37L

+24VB
4

J47 J47L
J84

1
1

/VDO41 7 +3.3VCS
Figure 4-43 General circuit diagram (base printer 1 of 2)

2
J47D

4
2

13

4
1
J37D
J37DH
SR1

VDO41 8 SGND
J47LH PGND

3
1

19
19
12 TB107

3
4

2
/LD4PWM 9 DRMHP2
J101

PGND

M
11

2
2
3

TB106
1st

M7
LED4
3

3.3VD 10 +3.3VCS
+24VB
1
J12

1
J38L

10 TB105

1
1
2

4
2

Pre-exposure LED

J127
SGND 11 SGND
+24VAFU1 +24VA
2

1
SR2

9
1

TB104
J38D
J38DH
1

/VDO31 12 DRMHP3
/SCN-ACC
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

2
J114

8 J91 J31L
VDO31 13 J31D /SCN-DEC +5VB

2
3

TB501

3
7

2
1
J13

LD3CTRL2 14 J55L J39 J31DH PGND +5VB

1
2

1st
6

1
TB502

2
SR3

LD3CTRL1 15

2
VIN

1
1
1
1

+5VB

5
1

CL
LD3CTRL0 16 TB503

1
VSS1

J55DH
CL1

2
2

J58D
6
2

4 J92 SGND
J99M

/VDO32 J32L
SW4

17 J32D VIN TB504

2

1
7
3

2
J780

1
VDO32 1 2 SGND
18

J115
VSS2 LED_V

1
J32DH

C/K laser driver

1
TB505

2st
2

1
2
CSTCL
1

/LD3PWM 19 1 2

2
VIN /SW_LED SGND

SW5
DEVM BOUT2

9
1

2
J44D
1
4

J122
TB506
1

+24VAFU3
J46

VSS3 POWER_SW
13 12 11 10

DEVM BOUT1
2
SW3
3

J93
J99F

SGND
2

J33L
J26

VIN SGND

1
J33D
M

2
9

DEVM AOUT2
M6

2
2

CST_SNS

1
3

6
13 12 11 10
DOOR_SNS

2
Memory TAG
J33DH VSS4

1
8

DEVM AOUT1

3st
1
1

/HUMOUT

2
1
4

5
9

J1202
J132

OP_TMG FSRPRS

3
7

+24VA HUMOUT
2

4
8

1
OP_CLK SGND

4
6
SR11

J800
Environment
sensor
+24VB
8

DSR_DR SGND J94

3
1

J34L

3
7

2
J79
J43

J34D OP_CMD +3.3VCS 6 5 4 3 2 1

2
5

+24VB

2
7

DSR_SR TEMP_SNS

1
2

J18

2
6

3
J34DH +24VA PRE_EXP4 J1811

1
4

PGND

4st

RD sensor (rear)
3
1
6

SGND MP_PAPER

1
2
3

Formatter

1
5

4
1
3

J44L
PGND +24VB
4st
LED1

PGND
1

2 1

J44LH
2
5

J35L

RDS_R_LED SGND

2
4

4
SR8

5
2
2

+3.3VB PRE_EXP3
M

DRM3FR
M3

1
4

RDS_R_GAIN +3.3VB2S

3
5

6
3
1

OP_STS +24VB SW1 A

J82
1

/DRM3ACC
3
3

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

+24VA MPSL
J35D
6

J103
J35LH

6
2
7

7
/DRM3DEC
2

DSF_DR
7

+24VAFU3

5
1
J58L 6

J1201
7
DRM3FG

2
1

DSF_SR
8

4
5

9
1
2

SL
+3.3VCS

J0D
LED2

1
SL2
SGND
3st

1
9

J58LH

3
4
Pre-exposure LED

2
J36L

J55D
1
3

RDS_F_LED SGND
2
J86

2
3
J0DA
2

J36D
J36DH

DEVHP
RDS_F_GAIN

RD sensor (front)
1
2
11 10

SR4
J130

12 11 10
J120
1

DC controller PCA

Diagrams: General circuit diagrams

237
238
6 5 4 3 2 1

Control panel Control panel

(4 line panel) (STP panel)
D

HDMI cable NFC PCA WL PCA Memory PCA

SB-S cable SB-D cable
<Duplex model> J1813 J1815 J1816 J1829S J1822
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5
WU-USB cable HIP USB cable

Chapter 4 Solve problems

Shield
nOFF_On
D-
D+
GND
GND
VBUS
VBUS
IOD_nPD
SDA
GND
SCL
3.3V

CP_WAKE/nPD
GND
+3.3V Unswitched
FPO
FPI
FPCK
nFPCS
GND
+5V Switched
CP_WAKE/nPD
GND
+3.3V Unswitched
FPO
FPI
FPCK
nFPCS
GND
+5V Switched
+5V Unswitched
+5V NFC Switched
I2C SDA
I2C SCL
GND
I2C interrupt
NFC detect
+3V NFC Switched
SPACE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
J1812S J1812D J1821S J1820

Formatter
40 J1804E

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CLEI

/TOP
CLEO

SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND

VDO42
VDO32
VDO22
VDO12
VDO41
VDO31
VDO21
VDO11
+3.3VA

/VDO42
/VDO32
/VDO22
/VDO12
/VDO41
/VDO31
/VDO21
/VDO11
/BD2_O
/VCRST

WAKE_VC

ENG_TYPE
ENG_TYPE

WAKE_ENG

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
40 J106E
Figure 4-44 General circuit diagram (base printer 2 of 2)

DC controller PCA HVT-T PCA

J124N J118N J124 J118 J2503 J59

5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 1 2 3

+5VC
+5VC

SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND

+24VA
+24VA
RM_CL

+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS

I2C_SCL
I2C_SCL

I2C_SDA
I2C_SDA

TOP_SNS
TOP_SNS
+24VAFU3

PAP_WIDTH_F
PAP_WIDTH_F

PAP_WIDTH_R
PAP_WIDTH_R
+24VB
DUP_SL

J67D
DUPM AOUT1
DUPM AOUT2
DUPM BOUT1
DUPM BOUT2

J67DH
1 2

4 3 2 1 SL
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1

J20 J21 J16 J48 SL3

J67L
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2
M
J20N J21N J16N
SR13 SR14 SR6 M8
2 1

J30
SR13N SR14N SR6N

SGND
SSSCLK
SGND
SSSCLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
CL <Duplex model> A
J3N J4N J3 J4
CL2

Media sensor Media sensor

<Simplex model> <Duplex model>

 6 5 4 3 2 1

SR20 SR21

J2044 J2046
1 2 3 1 2 3

J20L

PATH_S
SGND
+3.3V_PATH

PA_S
SGND
+3.3V_PA
J20LA
J2041L 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J2042L 7
J2041D 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J2042D
J2041DH J2042DH
C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PA_S
SGND
+3.3V_PA
PATH_S
SGND
+3.3V_PATH
OPTMG
OPCLK
OPCMD
+24VA
PGND
+3.3VB
OPSTS
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1904 J1901

Paper feeder controller PCA

J1903 J1902 J1908 J1907

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

AOUT1
AOUT2
BOUT1
BOUT2
7 OPTMG
6 OPCLK
5 OPCMD
4 +24VA
3 PGND
2 +3.3VB
1 OPSTS

+24VF
OPF_CL
DOOR_SW
SGND
SGND
CST_SW
4 3 2 1
2 1 2 1 2 1
J2003
J2021D J2022 J2023
Figure 4-45 General circuit diagram (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

J21LA
2 1 2 1

M J2021DH
7
SW20 SW21
M20 1 2
J2021L J21L

J2024 2 1

CL

CL20

Diagrams: General circuit diagrams

239
 Internal test and information pages
Learn about printer test and information pages.

NOTE: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later firmware
installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for HP Color
LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet Enterprise
MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Configuration and Jetdirect page

Print and find printer information on configuration and HP embedded Jetdirect information pages.

NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In
addition to the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless
pages print.

Print the configuration page from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Reports,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

240 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-46 Configuration page

HP LaserJet M

1 4
5

6
2

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

Item Description Item Description

1 Device information 5 Event log

2 Installed personalities and 6 Security

options

3 HP Web services 7 Paper trays and options

4 Memory

Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is
especially helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages.

Table 4-31 Important information on the configuration pages

Type of information Specific information Configuration page

Firmware Bundle Version Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Internal test and information pages 241

 Table 4-31 Important information on the configuration pages (continued)

Type of information Specific information Configuration page

Firmware Revision Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Firmware Datecode Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Accessories and internal storage Optional installed formatter devices and Main configuration page (Installed
accessories information Personalities and Options)
All optional devices that are installed on
the printer should be listed on the main
configuration page.

Separate pages print for the optional

paper handling devices and the fax
accessory. These pages list more-
detailed information for those devices.

Memory Total RAM information Main configuration page (Memory)

Tray and bin information Size and type by tray (including installed Main configuration page (Paper Trays
optional paper feeders) information and Options)

Engine cycles, service ID, and cartridge Engine information Main configuration page (Device
information Information)

Event-log information Error information Main configuration page (Event Log)

The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following
information:

242 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-47 HP embedded Jetdirect page

HP LaserJet M

1 4

5
2

6
3

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

Item Description

1 General Information indicates the printer status,

model number, hardware firmware version, port select,
port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing
identification, and manufactured date.

2 Security Settings information

3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received,

unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing
errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable
packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address

5 IPv4 information

6 IPv6 information

Internal test and information pages 243

 Reports menu
Learn about the control-panel Reports menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be available).

Table 4-32 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Cancel Shows a map of the entire
control panel system and
View the selected values for each
setting.
Print

Configuration/Status Pages Current Settings Page Cancel Shows a summary of the

current settings for the
View printer. This might be helpful
if you plan to make changes
Print and need a record of the
present configuration.

Configuration/Status Pages Configuration Page Cancel Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

Print

Configuration/Status Pages How to Connect Page Cancel Shows the network

information typically needed
View to connect the printer to a
network.
Print

Configuration/Status Pages Supplies Status Page Cancel Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
Print and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different than the
approximations provided.

Configuration/Status Pages Usage Page Cancel Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex or
Print duplex, and reports the page
count.

244 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-32 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages File Directory Page Cancel Shows the file name and
folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Print

Configuration/Status Pages Web Services Status Page Cancel Shows the detected Web
Services for the printer.
View

Print

Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Cancel Contains a list of the faxes
that have been sent from or
Fax models only View received by this printer.

Print

Fax Reports Billing Codes Report Cancel Provides a list of billing codes
that have been used for
Fax models only View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
Print were billed to each code.

Fax Reports Blocked Fax List Cancel A list of phone numbers that
are blocked from sending
Fax models only View faxes to this printer.

Print

Fax Reports Speed Dial List Cancel Shows the speed dials that
have been set up for this
Fax models only View printer.

Print

Fax Reports Fax Call Report Cancel A detailed report of the last
fax operation, either sent or
Fax models only View received.

Print

Other Pages PCL Font List Cancel Prints the available PCL fonts.

Print

Other Pages PS Font List Cancel Prints the available PS fonts.

Print

Settings menu
Learn about the control-panel Settings menu.

NOTE: You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web
Server for more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.

TIP: If prompted, enter the EWS personal identification number (PIN) from a sticker on the printer
(typically located inside the front door or on a toner cartridge tray).

Settings menu 245

 General menu
Review the following information about the General menu in the Settings menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Settings, and then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to General, and then press the OK
button.

Table 4-33 General menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time

Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

Date/Time Date/Time Format Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format
Settings that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date/Time Date Select the date from

Settings a pop-up calendar.

Date/Time Date/Time Time Select the time from a

Settings pop-up keypad.

Date/Time Date/Time Time Zone Select the time zone.

Settings

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Select an event For the selected Use to configure
events displays. from the list to event, change the the printer to
edit it time and days automatically wake
settings as desired. up or go to sleep
at specific times
Done on specific days.
Using this feature
Select the trash can saves energy.
icon to delete the
event NOTE: You must
configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Event Type Wake Select whether to
add or edit a Wake
Sleep event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Time Set the wake or
sleep event time
parameters.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or
week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

246 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-33 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Energy Settings Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number
Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Auto Off After Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Sleep Auto Off mode.
Use the arrow
Select one of buttons on the
these items: control panel
to increase or
● HP Auto Off/ decrease the
Auto On number of minutes.
(Wake on
most events)

● Shut down
(Wake on
power button
only)

Display Settings Display Brightness A sliding bar Use to specify the

displays with the intensity of the
indicator set in LCD control panel
the middle. Use display.
the arrow keys to
select the desired
brightness and
then select Done.

Display Settings Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a
languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Display Settings Language Settings Keyboard Layout Each language has Select the default
a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change it, that matches the
select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.

Display Settings Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display
or hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

General menu 247

 Table 4-33 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Display Settings Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

Display Settings Clearable Display during job* Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Display until cleared that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.

Display Settings Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Enable Device Enabled Enables the printer

USB to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive

248 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-33 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because
no memory is
used to store the
most recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs out
of paper and the
job is being printed
on both sides,
some pages can
be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated
to store the
last few pages
printed. This might
cause overall
performance to
suffer.

Auto Recovery Enabled The printer

attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available.

General menu 249

 Table 4-33 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Enable AutoSend Disable* Browse to the HP

Embedded Web
Enable Server AutoSend
configuration page
for advanced
set up and
the HP online
Privacy Statement
Information.

Use the Enable

AutoSend menu
to enable or
disable the
AutoSend feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
services such as
proactive cartridge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Job On* Enable this feature

if you want to
Off prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.

250 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-33 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Reset Factory Cancel Touch Reset to

Settings reset current user-
Reset specified default
settings to the
factory default
settings.

Print menu
Review the following information about the Print menu in the Settings menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Settings, and then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK
button.

Table 4-34 Print menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Enable Print from Enabled Enables the printer

USB Drive to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.

Managed Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Jobs allows you list
Date* the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Managed Stored Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs Jobs temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Managed Stored Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Jobs Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Print menu 251

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Managed Stored Standard Stored Off Configure global

Jobs Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Standard

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
1 week amount of time
jobs can be stored
4 weeks on the printer.

Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy
job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Default Print Paper Selection Select from a list of Configures the

Options sizes that the printer default paper size
supports. used for print jobs.

Default Print Default Custom X Dimension Range: 2.52-12.60 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 12.60 inches the user selects
Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Default Print Default Custom Y Dimension Range: 5-18 inches

Options Paper Size
Default = 18 inches

Default Print Default Custom Use Inches Enabled*

Options Paper Size
Disabled

Default Print Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

Options whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one or
both sides.

Default Print Quality Level Normal* Use to select the

Options level of desired
Enhanced print quality.

Fine Lines

Default Print Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

Options (recommended)* shadows that
can appear along
Edge-to-Edge output the edges of
copies when the
original document
is printed close to
the edges.

252 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* This option is for

Postscript Pages users who are
Settings On generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
On option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.

PCL and Courier Font Regular Select which

Postscript version of the
Settings Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

PCL and Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

Postscript printable area of
Settings Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on
a single line of A4
paper.

PCL and Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

Postscript to select whether
Settings Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

PCL and Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

Postscript PDF error page is
Settings Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Print menu 253

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and Personality Auto* Configures the

Postscript default print
Settings PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL and PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font
Postscript source for the
Settings Disk resident* user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

PCL and PCL Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
Postscript number for the
Settings Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.

PCL and PCL Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
Postscript option and the Font
Settings Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).

254 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL
Postscript print-command
Settings Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user soft
-default vertical
form length.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait Select the

Postscript orientation that is
Settings Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
Postscript symbol sets. several available
Settings symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

Print menu 255

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Media Source Standard* Use to select
Postscript Mapping and maintain input
Settings Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer HP
LaserJet models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on HP
LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights Select the tonal
range to adjust.
Midtones

Shadows

Print Quality Adjust Color Cyan Use the arrow keys to

adjust the sliding bar
Magenta for each color.

Yellow

Black

Print Quality Image Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

Registration adjusted
Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Depends upon the

number of trays
installed

256 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Registration Horizontal Shift alignment to
center the image
Front-side on the page from
Vertical Shift top to bottom
and from left to
Back-side right. You can also
Horizontal Shift align the image on
the front with the
Back-side image printed on
Vertical Shift the back.

The direction that

is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through
the printer is
referred to as
X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.

The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as
Y. Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.

Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for
each tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides
in the X and
Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print menu 257

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Print Test Page Use the Print Test
Registration Page option to
print a page to
test the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X
and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.

Print Quality Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page

Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Auto Sense All Other Trays Sense first page
Behavior
Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from a list of

types paper types

Reset Paper Types

Print Quality Optimize Normal Paper Standard Set to Smooth

when printing on
Smooth smooth paper of
normal weight.

Print Quality Optimize Heavy paper Standard Set to Smooth

when printing on
Smooth smooth, heavy
media types.

Print Quality Optimize Envelope control Normal Set to Reduced

Temp if envelopes
Reduced Temp are sticking due
to moisture in the
envelop adhesive.

Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal Set the mode to

Alternate if marks
Alternate appear on the back
side of the paper
when printing from
Tray 1. This sets the
printer to initiate
a clean sequence
every time a job
finishes when the
printer is set for
Any Size and Any
Type for Tray 1.

Print Quality Optimize Background Normal Set to Alternate

when a
Alternate background occurs
all over the page.

258 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Normal Set to Alternate

Control 1 to improve
Alternate 1 uniformity on any
paper type.
Alternate 2

Alternate 3

Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off Set to On if printing

with media that
On contains a high
calcium carbonate
content. Engine
print speed is
slowed so that
less paper dust is
produced.

Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off Set to On to try

and improve print
On quality.

Print Quality Optimize Tracking Control Off Improves color

stability by
On adjusting the bias
voltage. Make sure
this mode is set to
On.

Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal Set to Alternate

when color
Alternate misregistration
occurs.

Print Quality Optimize Transfer Control Normal Set to Alternate

to reduce primary
Alternate 1 transfer bias and
to resolve low
density or blotchy
images.

Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal Set to Alternate

if the printer
Alternate is installed in
a high-humidity
environment.

Print Quality Optimize Reset Optimize Reset Use Reset to reset

the menu defaults.

Print Quality Edge Control Off

Light

Normal*

Maximum

Print menu 259

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
When available jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

When available:
The printer pulls
from another tray
if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the specific
tray was indicated
for the job.

Manage Trays Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Prompt on mismatch appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Prompt on
mismatch: A
prompt displays
only if the size
or type do not
match or the tray is
empty.

260 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Manage Trays Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Allow: When this

option is selected
the user is
prompted to either
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray. This is the
factory default.

Do not allow: When

this option is
selected, the user
is not given the
option of selecting
a different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Print menu 261

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Alternative Disabled* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

Manage Trays Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Automatic: Choose
this option to
skip printing blank
sides during a two-
sided print job. The
printer can print
jobs faster when
blank sides are
skipped.

Always: Choose
this option to print
all sides of a two-
sided job, even
if one side is
blank. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

262 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-34 Print menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Override A4/ Yes* Prints on letter-size

Letter paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.

Manage Trays Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature
Behavior automatically* to identify the
desired behavior
Prompt for user when printing a
response document on a
paper size that the
printer does not
support.

Manage Trays Rotate Offset Automatic* Allows printing of

multiple copies
Off of a print
job in alternate
orientations. For
example, the first
copy outputs
in landscape
orientation, the
second outputs in
portrait orientation,
the third in
landscape, and so
on. This feature
works only with
Letter or A4-sized
paper and requires
the use of at
least two paper
trays. One tray
is loaded to feed
paper in the long-
edge orientation
and the other is
loaded to feed
paper in the short-
edge orientation.

Manage Supplies menu

Review the following information about the Manage Supplies menu in the Settings menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Settings, and then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Manage Supplies, and then press
the OK button.

Manage Supplies menu 263

 Table 4-35 Manage Supplies menu

First level Second level Values Description

Low Warning Thresholds Yellow Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated percentage
at which the printer notifies
Magenta Cartridge Default = 5% you when a toner cartridge is
very low.
Cyan Cartridge

Black Cartridge

Low Warning Threshold On Displays a message on

Message the control panel when a
Off cartridge is very low.

Very Low Behavior Color Cartridges Stop

Black Cartridge Continue

Drums 1-3 Prompt to continue

Drum 4

Transfer Kit

Fuser Kit

Restrict Color Use Enable color Use this feature to enable,

restrict, or disable color
Color if allowed* printing.

Disable color

Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the printer when

to switch between color
Mostly color pages and monochrome printing
modes for the best overall
Mostly black pages performance.

Auto: Uses the mode that

is appropriate for the first
page of the job. If necessary,
the printer switches modes
during the middle of a job and
then stays in that mode until
the job is finished.

Mostly color pages: The

printer uses color mode for all
jobs, even if the job contains
no color pages.

Mostly black pages: The

printer uses monochrome
mode until it detects a color
page. The printer switches
back to monochrome mode
when it detects a sequence of
several monochrome pages.

264 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-35 Manage Supplies menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Store Usage Data On supplies Store Usage Data provides

a way to suppress the toner
Not on supplies cartridges from storing most
of the information gathered
exclusively for the purpose
of understanding the usage
of the printer. Select the On
supplies setting to store the
data on the toner cartridge
memory chip. Select the
Not on supplies setting to
suppress the information
from being stored on the
memory chip.

Cartridge Protection Off* Select to permanently protect

cartridges so that they can be
Protect Cartridges used only in this product or
fleet of products.

Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP to allow

only genuine HP cartridges to
Authorized HP be used in this printer.

Networking menu
Review the following information about the Networking menu in the Settings menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Settings, and then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Networking, and then press the
OK button.

Table 4-36 Networking menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

Networking menu 265

 Table 4-36 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

266 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-36 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable
to obtain an IP
address from the
network during
a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration
(for example,
when manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).

NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might
interfere with a
managed network.

Auto IP: A link-

local IP address
169.254.x.x is set.

Legacy: The
address 192.0.0.192
is set, consistent
with older HP
Jetdirect printers.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Release Yes

No*

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Renew Yes

No*

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Ethernet IPV4 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

Networking menu 267

 Table 4-36 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Address Manual Settings Use this item
to enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6
Address address.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:
The stateful
Router auto-configuration
Unavailable* method to be used
by the print server
Always is determined by
a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

268 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-36 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy

provided list. server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Port Range: 1-65535 Enter the port

number used by
Default = 00080 the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

Ethernet TCP/IP Idle Timeout Range: 1-3600 The time period,

in seconds, after
Default = 0270 which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

Supplies menu
Review the following information about the Supplies menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to
Supplies, and then select OK.

Supplies menu 269

 Table 4-37 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary View a summary of the status of all

printer supplies.

Yellow Cartridge Status Select a supply from the list to see the
current status of the supply, the part
Magenta Cartridge Order HP Part number used to order a replacement,
the number of pages printed, and
Cyan Cartridge Pages Printed the approximate number of pages
remaining.
Drum 1 Approximate Pages Remaining

Drum 2

Drum 3

Drum 4

Black Cartridge

Toner Collection Unit Status Select a part from the list to see the
current status of the part and the part
Transfer Kit Order HP Part number used to order a replacement.

Fuser Kit

Trays menu
Review the following information about the Trays menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Trays,
and then select OK.

Table 4-38 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2-x

Tray 1 Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.
Tray 2-x

Support Tools menu

Learn about the control-panel Support Tools menu.

NOTE: The Support Tools sub-menu contains the options for maintaining the printer and
troubleshooting printer problems.

Maintenance menu
Learn about the control-panel Maintenance menu.

Backup/Restore menu
Learn about the control-panel Backup/Restore menu.

270 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the Backup/Restore menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-39 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values

Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time

Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Days Between Backups Enter the number of days

Back up Data Back up Now

Back up Data Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
Learn about the control-panel Calibration/Cleaning menu .

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-40 Calibration/Cleaning menu

First level Values Description

Cleaning Page Automatic Cleaning Interval Use this menu to configure

the settings for the product to
Off* automatically print a cleaning
page.
1000 pages
Select Off to disable
2000 pages automatic cleaning.

5000 pages Select a cleaning interval to

set the number of pages to be
10000 pages printed before an automatic
cleaning page is printed.
20000 pages
Touch Print to manually print a
cleaning page.

NOTE: Cleaning pages print

on the default paper size
configured for the printer.

Calibration/Cleaning menu 271

 Table 4-40 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)

First level Values Description

Quick Calibration Start The printer automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, the user
can calibrate the printer
immediately if the printer
experiences problems with
print quality. Use this
feature to perform a
partial calibration. Use this
calibration if color density or
tone seem incorrect.

Before calibrating, make sure

that the Ready indicator
displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress,
the calibration occurs when
that job is complete.

Full Calibration Start The printer automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, the user
can calibrate the printer
immediately if the printer
experiences problems with
print quality. Use this feature
to perform a full calibration,
which can take up to three
minutes. Use this calibration
if the color layers seem to be
shifted on the page.

Before calibrating, make sure

that the Ready indicator
displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress,
the calibration occurs when
that job is complete.

Power on Calibration No delay This feature controls the

timing of calibration when the
Delay 15 minutes printer wakes up or is turned
on.

Calibrate Scanner Done Touch Start to calibrate the

device scanner. Messages
MFP Start on the control panel display
will lead you through the
calibration process.

Reset Calibration Reset Use this feature to return

the product to the factory-
Cancel set default values for color
calibration.

Select Reset to reset the

color calibration. The printer
will restart with the factory-
set defaults.

Select Cancel to close the

menu without resetting the
color calibration.

272 Chapter 4 Solve problems

USB Firmware Upgrade menu
Learn about the control-panel USB Firmware Upgrade menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Service menu
Learn about the control-panel Service menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Service menu.

The Service menu is locked and requires a personal identification number (PIN) for access. This menu is
intended for use by authorized service personnel. See the Service menu section of this manual.

Troubleshooting menu
Review the following information about the Troubleshooting menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support
Tools, and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to Troubleshooting,
and then select OK.

Table 4-41 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reports Configuration/Status Settings Menu Map Select the desired

Pages report and then select
Current Settings Page
the print icon to
Configuration Page print the page.

How to Connect Page

Supplies Status Page

Usage Page

File Directory Page

Web Services Status

Page

Color Usage Job Log

Reports Configuration/Status Other Pages Demonstration Page Select the desired

Pages report and then select
RBG Samples
the print icon to
CMYK Samples print the page.

PCL Font List

PS Font List

Print Quality Pages PQ Troubleshooting Print Use to print pages that

Pages can help you resolve
problems with print
quality.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu 273

 Table 4-41 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Print Quality Pages Diagnostics Page Print Use to print a

diagnostics page. The
page includes color
swatches, diagnostic
information, and
calibration information.

Print Quality Pages Color Band Test Print Use to print a page
that helps you resolve
problems with print
quality.

Event Log Print Use to print a list of

the 50 most recent
Cancel events in the event
log. For each event,
the printed log shows
the error number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page Print Shows how many

pages were printed
from each tray.

Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Continue Use this diagnostic

Check test to print internal
pages or send an
external job to the
printer when the toner
cartridge is removed
or exchanged. Supply
errors are ignored
while the printer is in
this mode.

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Number of Copies Range: 1-500 Sets the default
number of copies for
Default = 1 a copy job. This default
applies when the Copy
or Quick Copy function
is initiated from the
printer Home screen.
The factory default
setting is 1.

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Paper Tray Select from a list of the Generates a test
available trays. page for testing paper
handling features. You
can define the path
that is used for the test
in order to test specific
paper paths.

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Output Sides 1-sided*

2-sided

Diagnostic Tests Print/Stop Test Stop Next Print Job*

Delay

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensor Test Select from a list of the Initiates a test of the
printer sensors. paper path sensors.

274 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-41 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Diagnostic Tests Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of Test the printer
available components. sensors and switches
for correct operation.
Reset Sensors Each sensor is
displayed on the
control panel screen,
along with its status.
Manually trip each
sensor and watch for
it to change on the
screen. Select the Stop
button to abort the test.

Diagnostic Tests Component Test Select from a list of Use this item to
available components. exercise individual
parts independently to
Repeat isolate noise, leaking,
or other issues. To start
the test, select one of
the components. The
test will run the number
of times specified by
the Repeat option.
The user might be
prompted to remove
parts from the printer
during the test. Select
the Stop button to
abort the test.

Generate Debug Data Start

Retrieve Diagnostics Send to email Create files that

Data contain information
about the printer that
can help identify the
cause of problems.

Printer resets
Learn about the printer resets.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Restore factory-set defaults from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Settings,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Restore Factory Settings, and then press the OK button.

4. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
Select the Reset button to complete the process.

Printer resets 275

 Restore factory-set defaults from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the following menus:

● General Settings

● Reset Factory Settings

3. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Touch
the Reset button to complete the process.

Restore the Service ID

When replacing the formatter, the Service ID date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the
original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to
calculate the Service ID.

Calculate the service ID

For the calculation below, the placed-in-service date is 17OCT2002.

1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. If the printer was first used in 2002, calculate
YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 19. YY = 12.

2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.

● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 and add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

3. In this example the Service ID is 12287.

Convert the Service ID to an actual date

Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the
following formula to convert the Service ID into the actual date the printer was placed-in-service. For the
example below, use the Service ID previously calculated (12287).

1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.

2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.

3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.

a. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.

b. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10,
which represents October.

c. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. The complete date is 17-October-2002.

NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a SFP control panel

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

276 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.

5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an MFP control panel

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-48 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions

Learn about the printer Format Disk and Partial Clean functions.

Active and repository firmware locations

The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating
System and the printer/peripheral firmware files.

There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:

● The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.

● The Repository, the recovery location.

If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies
over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 277

 If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both
locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user must
upload the firmware to the printer in order for it to function again.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) are completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action.

Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware
repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be
reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable
state.

Characteristics of a Partial Clean

● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.

● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore
any customer-defined settings.

● For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function
for this printer.

CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Partial Clean to
retain customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance
menu.

Reasons for performing Partial Clean

● The printer continually boots up in an error state.

NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.

● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.

● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.

● The printer default settings are not properly working.

Execute a Partial Clean from a non-touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

278 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-49 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.

CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.

Characteristics of a Format Disk

● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.

NOTE: Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files

● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore
any customer-defined settings.

● After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 279

 ● After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be reloaded.

CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution
in the printer service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the
printer is unusable.

HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Format Disk to retain
customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.

Reasons for performing Format Disk

● The printer continually boots up in an error state.

NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.

● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.

● Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.

Execute a Format Disk from a non-touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-50 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.

280 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Press the OK button again.

NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems

If the printer is not powering on correctly, use the following steps to begin troubleshooting the problem.

1. Verify that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it. Plug the printer directly into a known operating wall
receptacle (make sure that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the
printer).

NOTE: Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is using.

2. Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.

3. To eliminate a thermal switch issue, unplug the power cord and leave it unplugged for over 20
minutes. Re-attach the power cord, and then turn the power on again.

4. During normal operation, a cooling fan or fans begin to spin briefly after the printer power is turned
on. Place a hand over the cover vent or vents to feel air passing out of the printer. Lean close to
the printer to hear the fan or fans operating. Look for illuminated lights on the control panel and
formatter LEDs.

NOTE: Operational fans, motors, and control-panel lights indicate the following:

● AC power is present at the printer.

● The power supply is providing either or both 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc voltages.

● The DC controller microprocessor is functioning.

5. If the printer powers on, but the control panel is blank, make sure that the control-panel display wire
harness or harnesses and flat flexible cable or cables (FFCs) are connected.

NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in Sleep mode or Sleep
delay. Opening a door or pressing a control-panel button should cause the printer to wake up from
Sleep mode or Sleep delay.

● The control panel home button LED is illuminated

● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds

If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the following:

a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.

b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning by printing a test page. Does the test page print
correctly?

Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?

c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning. If it is not, turn the printer off and
reseat the control-panel assembly cable connections at the control-panel assembly and the
formatter.

Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems 281

 d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the
printer still freezes while in Sleep mode or Sleep delay, elevate the case.

e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-panel assembly.

6. If normal start-up noises are not heard, turn the printer off, and then remove any installed
accessories (for example, envelope feeders, paper feeders, or output accessories).

7. Turn the printer on, and then listen for start-up noises. If normal start-up noises are heard, the
problem might be with an accessory.

8. Perform an engine test. The engine test procedure varies by printer, so refer to the printer Service
Manual to get instructions.

9. If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally. Replace the formatter.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model
of printer it is installed in and is not designed to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a
used formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges
information change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the
repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer
where a used formatter is installed.

For more information, see the following topic (c06360930):

● HP internal link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter

● HP external partner link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after
replacing the formatter

To access the HP partner link, you must first log in to the HP Partner First Portal and then connect
to WISE.

NOTE: If the engine test page does not print, turn the printer off, reconnect the formatter power
connector, remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC), and then try the engine test again. If
the page prints, the problem might be the eMMC.

10. If after replacing the formatter or eMMC normal start-up noises are still not heard, replace the DC
controller.

11. If the print engine appears to be correctly operating (the engine test page successfully printed) and
the control panel is still blank, replace the power supply.

Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer

If the printer powers up normally and the control panel displays correctly, but the printer appears
unresponsive to print jobs, use the following steps to troubleshoot the issue.

282 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, Sleep mode on or Sleep delay on status. If an
error message displays, resolve the error. Resolve any supply issues.

2. For network connection errors, verify that the network port is active and that the cables are
securely seated.

a. Check the network cable connections between the printer and the computer or network port.
Make sure that the connections are secure.

b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if possible.

3. Check the network LEDs (callout 1) to see if they indicate any issues.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Network LED location varies by printer.

Table 4-42 Network LEDs

LED light pattern Description

Solid green light and flashing yellow light indicates a

successful network connection.

No lights on indicates a faulty network connection.

Disconnect and reconnect the cable to the port. In the
Network Settings Menu, verify the link settings and make
sure that the port is enabled.

4. Use one of the following options to print a configuration page. If the printer is connected to a
network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search
for HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color
LaserJet Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Print the configuration page from a SFP control panel

Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer 283

 a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to
Reports, and then press the OK button.

b. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

c. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

d. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from an MFP control panel

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

b. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

c. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

d. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

5. Check to see if there is a newer version of the firmware available. If there is, update the firmware.

6. Verify that the correct print driver for this printer is installed. Check the program to make sure that
the print driver for this printer is used. The print driver can be downloaded from support.hp.com.

7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,
the problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not print),
complete these steps:

a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software installed.

b. If the printer is connected to the network, connect the printer directly to a host computer with
a USB cable. Redirect the printer to the correct port, or reinstall the software (make sure to
select the new connection type).

NOTE: The host USB port may disabled from the factory. If so, this port needs to be activated
first before connecting the printer to the USB port.

For more information about troubleshooting an unresponsive printer and about troubleshooting
connectivity issues, see the "Performance and connectivity troubleshooting" section of the Service
manual.

284 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Engine diagnostics
Learn about internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise,
assembly, and timing issues.

Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.

When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.

NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or
both simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.

Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location varies depending on the
printer model). An engine test page prints. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so
make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.

Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)

● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.

● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.

Figure 4-51 Engine test button

Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or rear door is open.

Engine diagnostics 285

 To operate the printer with the doors open, the interlock switch levers must be depressed to simulate a
closed-cover position.

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in) strip,
and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock

1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in)
strip, and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

Figure 4-52 Defeat the front door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in)
strip, and insert the strip into the slots for the front door and right door logic switches.

286 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-53 Defeat the right door interlock (right side)

Figure 4-54 Defeat the right door interlock (left side)

Defeating interlocks 287

 Control panel troubleshooting
If the control panel is not responding normally or has display issues, use the following procedures to
troubleshoot the issues.

Control panel system diagnostics (MFP)

Learn about MFP printer firmware control panel troubleshooting.

Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and display using the printer
firmware system diagnostics.

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540)

Learn about touchscreen diagnostic mode.

Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control-panel hardware and embedded firmware. These
tests are useful for checking control-panel functionality independent of the printer control-panel system
diagnostics. To test the control panel using the system diagnostics, see Open the control panel system
diagnostic tests on page 296.

1. M553x, M555, E55040: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 4-55 Diagnostic-tests access button

2. M553x, M555, E55040: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button cycles
through the available diagnostics.

NOTE: A pen, pencil, or other small blunt object is needed to press the button.

TIP: When pressed, the button illuminates green.

288 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-56 Press the diagnostics-access button

3. M577, M578, and E57540: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control
panel.

Figure 4-57 Diagnostic-tests access button

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540) 289
 4. M577, M578, and E57540: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button
cycles through the available diagnostics.

Figure 4-58 Press the diagnostics-access button

5. A yellow screen appears (after the first press of the button) indicating that the control-panel
firmware is version A (a magenta screen indicates version B firmware).

NOTE: If a different color appears on the screen, escalate the problem using the HP support
process.

TIP: After 4 seconds of inactivity, the diagnostic mode times out and is exited.

Figure 4-59 Control-panel version A yellow screen

6. Touch the screen to cycle the screen through the following:

NOTE: Depending on where the control panel was manufactured, a magenta, a green, and a blue
screen might appear before the white screen. Touch the screen to cycle past these screens.

● Five brightness levels of a white screen.

290 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● A final black screen.

TIP: When the final black screen displays, press the Home button to cycle through the
diagnostic screens again.

7. Pressing the diagnostic-tests button with the black screen displayed, exits the diagnostic mode.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540)
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts (M553x, M555, M577, M578, and E57540) 291
 Figure 4-60 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the control panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

292 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-61 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

No control panel sound 293

 Figure 4-62 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

294 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-63 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
Unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Review the following information when the HIP is not functioning, but the control panel is functional.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) 295
 Figure 4-64 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Open the control panel system diagnostic tests

Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control panel.

Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.

1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.

2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-65 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

296 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 4-66 Pre-boot menu

Table 4-43 Pre-boot menu button descriptions

Button Description

Use this button to see more information about a selected

item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Open the control panel system diagnostic tests 297

 Table 4-43 Pre-boot menu button descriptions (continued)

Button Description

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press the OK button to select
it.

Figure 4-67 Access the administration menu

5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select
it.

NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.

298 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-68 Access the diagnostics menu

Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-69 Open the screen test

The blue vertical gradient screen appears.

Screen test 299

 Figure 4-70 Blue vertical gradient screen

3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens.

NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.

Table 4-44 Touchscreen test screens

Screen Description

Green vertical gradient

Red vertical gradient

Blue horizontal gradient

300 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-44 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Green horizontal gradient

Red horizontal gradient

Blue with black horizontal interlaced

Green with black horizontal interlaced

Red with black horizontal interlaced

Blue with black vertical interlaced

Screen test 301

 Table 4-44 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Green with black vertical interlaced

Red with black vertical interlaced

Black with white center

White with black center

Checkerboard

Multicolor stripes

302 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-44 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Blue green grid meshing

Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-71 Open the touch test

3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.

Figure 4-72 Touch the white grid

A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.

NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.

Touch test 303

 Figure 4-73 Verify the mark

SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-74 Open the softkey test

304 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 3. When prompted, touch the Home button.

Figure 4-75 Touch the Home button

If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.

NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.

Figure 4-76 Successful test

Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

Backlight test 305

 2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full
brightness.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

Figure 4-77 Open the backlight test

Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

306 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-78 Open the sound test

Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:

NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not the printer.

● Panel ID

● Hardware (version)

● Firmware (version)

● KB Hw (version)

● KB Firm (version)

● LCD Vendor

● Touch Controller Version

Version 307
 Figure 4-79 Open the version information

308 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Control panel messages document (CPMD)
Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here to access the current CPMD for this printer.

How to search for printer documentation

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is available on the HP portals.

For HP internal access to WISE, go to WISE.

For HP channel partners access WISE, see Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
on page 316 or Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) on page 315.

WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and HP internal users. The level of detail available
depends on your access credentials. To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.

To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control Panel
Message Document in WISE.

TIP: The Product Detail Page (PDP) is available from the WISE home page. Enter, and then select a
product name or number in the Go to a Product Detail Page area (callout 1), or select the …or select your
product from a list item (callout 2) on the WISE home page.

Many types of printer documentation and information are available on WISE. This section details
methods for finding error code descriptions and solutions.

TIP: To view a list of control panel message documents (CPMD) per printer, search for the following
topic in WISE: HP LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide, ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message
document (CPMD) list or click the link below.

● HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP PageWide, HP ScanJet - Control panel messages document (CPMD),

Service manual, and Service cost data list

Use one of the following methods to search for CPMD error code information.

● Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool on page 310

● Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function on page 311

● Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page on page 313

Control panel messages document (CPMD) 309

 Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
Use the WISE Error Code Lookup tool to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following
steps.

1. On the WISE home page, click the Error Code Lookup tool icon.

Figure 4-80 WISE Error Code Lookup tool icon

2. Enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Error Code Lookup dialog box.

Figure 4-81 WISE Error Code Lookup tool dialog box

3. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

310 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-82 WISE Error Code Lookup tool drop-down list

M606

4. Type the error code (for example, 13.b2.d2) in the Error Code Lookup keyword field, and then select
the search icon.

Figure 4-83 WISE Error Code Lookup tool search

5. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-84 WISE Search results

Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
Use the WISE search function to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Search dialog box.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 311

 Figure 4-85 WISE Search dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

Figure 4-86 WISE Search drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Search keyword field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-87 WISE Search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

312 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-88 WISE Search results

Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Use the WISE Product Detail Page (PDP) to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the
following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Go to a Product
Detail page dialog box.

TIP: To find a PDP from a list of products by product type, select the …or select your product from
a list item just below the dialog box.

Figure 4-89 WISE PDP dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 313

 Figure 4-90 WISE PDP drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Error Code Lookup field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-91 WISE PDP search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-92 WISE PDP search results

314 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) if you are an
HP Channel Partner.

IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal, to create a new user
before you can sign into the CDSP portal.

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-93 CSDP sign-in page

2. On the CSDP home page, click the Knowledge and Training item.

TIP: Use the Knowledge and Training item at the top of the CSDP home page (callout 1), or the
Knowledge and Training action icon (callout 2).

Figure 4-94 CSDP portal home page

1

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) 315

 3. Select HP Technical Documentation on the Knowledge and Training page to open the WISE portal
home page.

Figure 4-95 CSDP portal HP Knowledge and Training page

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-96 WISE portal home page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP Channel Partner.

NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to create an account. Follow
the setup directions using your HP Partner credentials.

View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-97 HP Partner Portal sign-in page

316 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. On the HP Partner Portal home page, click the Services & Support item.

Figure 4-98 HP Partner Portal home page

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

Figure 4-99 HP Partner Portal Service & Support page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 317

 4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

Figure 4-100 HP Partner Portal Technical Support (WISE)page

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-101 WISE portal home page

Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview

This section provides information on error codes and searching for information.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

318 Chapter 4 Solve problems

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 4-45 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

Error codes (types and structure) 319

 Table 4-45 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

320 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Solve paper handling problems
Review the following information to solve paper handling problems.

Clear paper jams (SFP)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.

Figures in this section are representational only. The actual printer being serviced might look slightly
different depending on the model and installed accessories.

Jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations (SFP).

Figure 4-102 Paper jam locations (SFP)

11

22

33
66

55
44

Item Location

1 Output bin

2 Right door and fuser area

3 Tray 1

4 Lower-right door

5 Optional 550-sheet trays

6 Tray 2

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

Solve paper handling problems 321

 Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam

by gently pulling the paper straight out. Touch
the OK button to clear the message.

322 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. . If the paper remains stuck, or if no jammed
paper is visible in Tray 1, remove any remaining
paper in the tray, and then close Tray 1 and open
the right door.

3. . If jammed paper is present, gently pull it out.

4. . Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) 323

 Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . Lift the latch on the right door to release it.

2. . Open the right door.

324 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. . Gently pull out any jammed paper from the pick
up area.

4. . Pull the tray completely out of the printer by

pulling and lifting it up slightly.

5. . Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of

paper. Verify that the tray is not overfilled and
that the paper guides are adjusted correctly.

Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) 325

 6. . Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside
the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.

7. . Reinsert and close the tray.

8. . Close the right door.

326 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the optional
550-sheet paper feeders. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.

1. . Open the lower-right door.

2. . Gently pull out any jammed paper.

3. . Pull the tray completely out of the printer by

pulling and lifting it up slightly.

Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5) 327
 4. . Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of
paper. Verify that the tray is not overfilled and
that the paper guides are adjusted correctly.

5. . Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside

the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.

6. . Close the lower-right door.

328 Chapter 4 Solve problems

7. . Reinsert and close the tray.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . Lift the latch on the right door to release it.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B) 329
 2. . Open the right door.

3. . Gently pull out any jammed paper from the pick

up area.

4. . Close the transfer assembly.

330 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. . Push down on the green levers to release the
jam-access cover.

6. . Gently pull out any jammed paper. If the paper

tears, make sure to remove all remnants.

7. . Close the jam-access cover, and then lower the

transfer assembly.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B) 331
 8. . If paper is visible entering the bottom of the
fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the foam on the

transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print
quality.

9. . If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,

gently pull the paper out to remove it.

10. . Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where

it would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
lift up slightly, and then pull straight out to
remove the fuser.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the

printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.

332 Chapter 4 Solve problems

11. . Open the jam-access door. If paper is jammed
inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to
remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.

CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has

2
cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they
have cooled. 1

12. . Close the jam-access door, and push the fuser

completely into the printer until it clicks into
place.

13. . Check for jammed paper in the duplex path

inside the right door, and remove any jammed
paper.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B) 333
 14. . Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)

Use the following procedure to clear jams in the output bin. When a jam occurs, the control panel
displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the

leading edge and remove it.

Change jam recovery (non-touchscreen)

Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a non-touchscreen control panel
(FutureSmart 4 firmware or later).

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Settings,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Jam Recovery, and then press the OK button.

334 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to an option, and then press the OK button to select it.

● Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This
is the default setting.

● Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with
Jam Recovery set to Off.

● On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the
last few pages printed.

Clear paper jams (MFP)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.

Figures in this section are representational only. The actual printer being serviced might look slightly
different depending on the model and installed accessories.

Jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations (MFP).

Figure 4-103 Paper jam locations (MFP)

1

5
2

3
4

Item Location

1 Document feeder

2 Right door and fuser area

3 Tray 1

4 Tray 2

5 Output bin

Clear paper jams (MFP) 335

 Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

Clear paper jams in the document feeder (31.13.yz)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the document
feeder.

When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.

336 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Remove any jammed paper.

Clear paper jams in the document feeder (31.13.yz) 337

 3. Lift the document-feeder input tray.

4. Remove any jammed paper.

338 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 5. Lower the document-feeder input tray.

6. Close the document feeder cover.

NOTE: Verify that the latch on the top of the document-feeder cover is completely closed. Misfeed
or no-pick errors might occur if the document-feeder cover is not completely closed.

NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document feeder input tray are adjusted tightly
against the document. Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents.

NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) 339

 1. . If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam
by gently pulling the paper straight out. Touch
the OK button to clear the message.

2. . If the paper remains stuck, or if no jammed

paper is visible in Tray 1, remove any remaining
paper in the tray, and then close Tray 1 and open
the right door.

3. . If jammed paper is present, gently pull it out.

340 Chapter 4 Solve problems

4. . Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . Lift the latch on the right door to release it.

Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) 341

 2. . Open the right door.

3. . Gently pull out any jammed paper from the pick

up area.

4. . Close the transfer assembly.

342 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. . Push down on the green levers to release the
jam-access cover.

6. . Gently pull out any jammed paper. If the paper

tears, make sure to remove all remnants.

7. . Close the jam-access cover, and then lower the

transfer assembly.

Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) 343

 8. . Pull the tray completely out of the printer by
pulling and lifting it up slightly.

9. . Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of

paper. Verify that the tray is not overfilled and
that the paper guides are adjusted correctly.

10. . Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside

the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.

344 Chapter 4 Solve problems

11. . Reinsert and close the tray.

12. . Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the optional
550-sheet paper feeders. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.

Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5) 345
 1. . Open the lower-right door.

2. . Gently pull out any jammed paper.

3. . Pull the tray completely out of the printer by

pulling and lifting it up slightly.

346 Chapter 4 Solve problems

4. . Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of
paper. Verify that the tray is not overfilled and
that the paper guides are adjusted correctly.

5. . Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside

the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.

6. . Close the lower-right door.

Clear paper jams in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5) 347
 7. . Reinsert and close the tray.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . Lift the latch on the right door to release it.

348 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. . Open the right door.

3. . Gently pull out any jammed paper from the pick

up area.

4. . Close the transfer assembly.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B) 349
 5. . Push down on the green levers to release the
jam-access cover.

6. . Gently pull out any jammed paper. If the paper

tears, make sure to remove all remnants.

7. . Close the jam-access cover, and then lower the

transfer assembly.

350 Chapter 4 Solve problems

8. . If paper is visible entering the bottom of the
fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the foam on the

transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print
quality.

9. . If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,

gently pull the paper out to remove it.

10. . Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where

it would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
lift up slightly, and then pull straight out to
remove the fuser.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the

printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.

Clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area (13.B) 351
 11. . Open the jam-access door. If paper is jammed
inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to
remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.

CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has

2
cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they
have cooled. 1

12. . Close the jam-access door, and push the fuser

completely into the printer until it clicks into
place.

13. . Check for jammed paper in the duplex path

inside the right door, and remove any jammed
paper.

352 Chapter 4 Solve problems

14. . Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)

Use the following procedure to clear jams in the output bin. When a jam occurs, the control panel
displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. . If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the

leading edge and remove it.

Change jam recovery (touchscreen)

Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the General menu, and then open the Jam recovery menu.

3. Select one of the following options:

● Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This
is the default setting.

Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) 353

 ● Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with
Jam Recovery set to Off.

● On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the
last few pages printed.

Printer feeds incorrect page size

Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Table 4-46 Printer feeds incorrect page size

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray.

The correct size paper is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer
or printer driver. driver are correct, because the software program settings
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel settings.

The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the printer From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the
control panel. tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray. Print a configuration page to determine the paper size for
which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Table 4-47 Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Cause Solution

A driver for a different printer is in use. Use a driver for this printer.

The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

354 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)
Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly.

Table 4-48 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly

Cause Solution

The duplex job is trying to use unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead. letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page
leading into the printer. For Tray 2-X, load the paper printed
side up with the top of the page toward the right of the printer.

The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing.

Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Table 4-49 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type
printer control panel. for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a
specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies
an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the
weight range.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify
that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the
optional trays.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
printer.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Output is curled or wrinkled

Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled.

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models) 355

 Table 4-50 Output is curled or wrinkled

Cause Solution

Paper does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
printer. Non-recycled, 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper is optimal for office
use.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type
printer control panel. for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a
specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies
an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the
weight range.

Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in
good condition.

The printer is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.

The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.

Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh,
moisture. unopened package. Store paper in a plastic bag to protect it
from humidity.

Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over,
and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the
problem persists, replace the paper.

The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or Configure the software for the paper (see the software
selected in the software. documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.

The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper.

The printer does not pick up paper

If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page,
which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the
possibility of a mispick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.

1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.

3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.

4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

5. Check the printer control panel to see if the printer is waiting for an acknowledgment to the feed
the paper manually prompt. Load paper, and continue.

6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened
with warm water.

356 Chapter 4 Solve problems

The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.

1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan
the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

6. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

7. The tray pick and/or feed rollers might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth
dampened with warm water.

The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP)
Learn about MFP document feeder paper handling problems.

Review the following information when the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of
paper.

● Check to see if there are areas on the page that might have had staples removed. This can cause
jams and/or mispicks.

● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes that must be
removed.

● Check that all rollers are in place and correctly installed.

● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.

● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to
center the stack.

● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that
the paper stack is straight, and the guides are against the paper stack.

● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of
pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray and remove pages from the
output bin.

● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.

● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free
cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.

● Use the control panel menus to check the status of the document-feeder kit and replace it if
necessary.

The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper 357

 Paper does not feed automatically
Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Table 4-51 Paper does not feed automatically

Cause Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK
button.

The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the
paper.

358 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Image-quality troubleshooting
Learn about image-quality troubleshooting.

Use the information in this topic to troubleshoot and resolve image-quality (what you see on the final
printed page) problems including copy-quality, print-quality, and color problems (color printers only).

Various printer hardware problems can cause image-quality defects. This topic is a guide to the steps
used to isolate the specific areas of the printer that are causing image-quality defects on the printed
page, and to provide solutions to resolve those image-quality defects.

Image-quality problems are defined as:

● Print-quality (PQ) problems: PQ problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an
MFP printer (single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects
appear on pages that are printed by the print engine and not fed through an integrated scanner
assembly (ISA).

● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: CQ problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly
(ISA) portion of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document
feeder or flatbed glass.

If the print defect is already known to be a PQ or CQ problem, skip to the appropriate troubleshooting
topic listed below. Otherwise, follow the steps in the next section below to get started troubleshooting
image-quality problems.

● Print-quality (PQ) problems: See Print-quality troubleshooting on page 360.

● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: See Copy-quality troubleshooting on page 382.

Get started troubleshooting image-quality problems

Print a demonstration page to identify the defect as a PQ (print engine ) or CQ (ISA) problem.

NOTE: If the image defect appears on the printed demonstration page, the issue is a print-quality (PQ)
problem (associated with the print engine and not the document feeder or flatbed glass) and not a CQ
problem.

Make sure that the demonstration page is printed on plain paper.

Enterprise printers

1. Select Reports > Other pages.

2. Select Demonstration Page.

Pro printers

1. At the printer, scroll to or select Setup.

2. Go to Reports, and then select Demonstration Page.

Does the demonstration page show any image-quality defects?

● Yes: If defects appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is PQ related. See Print-quality
troubleshooting on page 360.

● No: If defects does not appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is CQ related. See
Copy-quality troubleshooting on page 382.

Image-quality troubleshooting 359

 Print-quality troubleshooting
Learn about the print-quality troubleshooting.

NOTE: Print-quality (PQ) problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an MFP
printer (single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on
pages that are printed by the print engine and not feed through an integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

Repetitive image defect ruler

Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler.

When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution is to identify if it is a
repetitive defect (does the print quality defect appear multiple times on the printed page?). If this is
the case, use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality
problems. For more information, see Using a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.

Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems.
Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical
defects and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect.

CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth. If dirt
is difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water.

NOTE: The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developer roller cannot be cleaned
because they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge or imaging drum. If one of these
assemblies is causing the defect, replace the toner cartridge.

The primary fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller cannot be cleaned because they are internal
assemblies in the fuser. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the fuse
TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to transfer the measurements
in the table below to a transparency or the edge of a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with
the associated defective assembly.

Table 4-52 Repetitive defects

Assembly Distance between defects

Primary charging roller 27 mm (1.06 in)

Developer roller 32 mm (1.26 in)

Registration roller 42 mm (1.65 in)

Secondary transfer roller 50.0 mm (1.97 in)

Fuser film 58 mm (2.28 in)

Pressure roller 69 mm (2.83 in)

Photosensitive drum 75 mm (2.95 in)

360 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Print-quality troubleshooting pages
Learn about the available print-quality troubleshooting pages.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.
NOTE: To get further assistance in print quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/
colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or
http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp and select
PQ Troubleshooting Tools.

TIP: Form more information about print-quality troubleshooting, go to HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP

PageWide - Image Quality Troubleshooting Guide (IQTG) on the HP WISE service portal.

Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages

Learn how to print the print-quality troubleshooting pages.

Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print Quality Pages, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print PQ Troubleshooting Page, and then press the OK button.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Print icon (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then
press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Print Quality Pages

● Print PQ Troubleshooting Page

3. Touch the Print, button to print the pages.

Print-quality troubleshooting pages 361

 Figure 4-104 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure page

Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure

Page 1

Figure 4-105 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page

Yellow

Green

362 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-106 Yellow comparison page

Green

Yellow

Yellow cannot be easily seen unless combined with cyan, so half of each page is yellow and the other
half is an amplified version of yellow print problems (green half). Compare the yellow on page one with
the corresponding green on page two for defects. Also check the cyan page for defects.

Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages 363

 Figure 4-107 Black print-quality troubleshooting page

Item Description

1. Grids The grids are in inches and millimeters. They are labeled
with letters and numbers so that defects can be
described by position and by distance between repeats.

2. Color plane registration (CPR) bars After printing, the box with no extra color in each area
on each page shows how far off the CPR of that color
is. Each page has two process direction areas and three
scan direction areas that are labeled x and y and 1–11. The
page should be fed by the long edge. Each square from
the center equals 42 microns.

3. Color ramp patches Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the
image drum or offset in the fuser.

NOTE: To get further assistance in print quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/

colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or
http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp and select
PQ Troubleshooting Tools.

Print the print-quality assessment page

Learn how to print the print-quality assessment page.

Print the print-quality assessment page from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

364 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print Quality Pages, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostics page, and then press the OK button.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Print icon (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then
press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the print-quality assessment page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Print Quality Pages

● Diagnostics Page

3. Touch the Print, button to print the pages.

Print the print-quality assessment page 365

 Figure 4-108 Print-quality assessment page

Diagnostics Page
Page 1

1 3

5 6

7 8

4 4

Item Description

1 Calibration information

2 Parameters

3 Color density

4 Color plane registration

5 Primary colors

6 Secondary colors

7 Temperature values (21A)

8 Humidity values (21B)

366 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Calibrate the printer
Learn how to calibrate the printer.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality. Follow these steps to resolve print-quality
problems such as misaligned color, colored shadows, blurry graphics, or other print-quality issues.

Calibrate the printer from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Full Calibration, and then press the OK button.

A Calibrating message displays on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few
minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the calibration process has finished.

5. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.

Calibrate the printer from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Full Calibration

3. Touch the Start, button.

A Calibrating message displays on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few
minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the calibration process has finished.

4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.

Calibrate the printer

Learn how to calibrate the printer.

Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality. Follow these steps to resolve print-quality
problems such as misaligned color, colored shadows, blurry graphics, or other print-quality issues.

Calibrate the printer from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

Calibrate the printer 367

 3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Full Calibration, and then press the OK button.

A Calibrating message displays on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few
minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the calibration process has finished.

5. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.

Calibrate the printer from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Full Calibration

3. Touch the Start, button.

A Calibrating message displays on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few
minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the calibration process has finished.

4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.

Use manual print modes

Learn about manual print modes..

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Try using manual print modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page,
which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the
possibility of a mis-pick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.

Select a manual print mode from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and
then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print Quality, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Adjust Paper Types or Optimize, and then press the OK button.

NOTE: The Adjust Paper Types and Optimize submenus vary by printer model.

368 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Select a manual print mode from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Print

● Print Quality

● Adjust Paper Types or Optimize

NOTE: The Adjust Paper Types and Optimize submenus vary by printer model.

Table 4-53 Optimize submenu

Optimize item Values Comments

Normal Paper Standard Set to Smooth when printing on

smooth paper of normal weight.
Smooth

Heavy paper Standard Set to Smooth when printing on

smooth, heavy media types.
Smooth

Envelope control Normal Set to Reduced Temp if envelopes

are sticking due to moisture in the
Reduced Temp envelop adhesive.

Tray 1 Normal Set the mode to Alternate if marks

appear on the back side of the
Alternate paper when printing from Tray 1. This
sets the printer to initiate a clean
sequence every time a job finishes
when the printer is set for Any Size
and Any Type for Tray 1.

Background Normal Set to Alternate when a background

occurs all over the page.
Alternate

Uniformity Control Normal Set to Alternate 1 to improve

uniformity on any paper type.
Alternate 1

Alternate 2

Alternate 3

Cac03 Off Set to On if printing with media that

contains a high calcium carbonate
On content. Engine print speed is slowed
so that less paper dust is produced.

Best Normal Off Set to On to try and improve print

quality.
On

Tracking Control Off Improves color stability by adjusting

the bias voltage. Make sure this
On mode is set to On.

Registration Normal Set to Alternate when color

misregistration occurs.
Alternate

Use manual print modes 369

 Table 4-53 Optimize submenu (continued)

Optimize item Values Comments

Transfer Control Normal Set to Alternate to reduce primary

transfer bias and to resolve low
Alternate density or blotchy images.

Moisture Control Normal Set to Alternate if the printer

is installed in a high-humidity
Alternate environment.

Reset Optimize Reset Use Reset to reset the menu

defaults.

Print from a different software program

Try printing from a different software program.

If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.

Check the paper-type setting for the print job

Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have
smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing
toner.

Check the paper type setting on the control panel

Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.

1. Open and close the paper tray.

2. Follow the control panel prompts to confirm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.

3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specifications.

4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.

a. Open the following menus:

i. Settings

ii. Copy/Print

iii. Print quality

iv. Adjust paper type

b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.

c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.

5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.

NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.

370 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.

NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.

5. Expand the list of Type is: options.

6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.

7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK
button to print the job.

Check the paper type setting (macOS)

Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.

4. Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.

5. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.

6. Click the Print button.

Check toner-cartridge status

Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the
status of other replaceable maintenance parts.

IMPORTANT: The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later
firmware installed. For printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M577 - Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.

Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page

The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.

2. Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.

Check the paper type setting (Windows) 371

 Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.

1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges
and, if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.

Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life.
The supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached
the very low threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer
acceptable. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance
parts, the supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.

2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.

A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information
on identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

Print a cleaning page

Learn how to print a cleaning page.

Print a cleaning page from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Print a cleaning page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

372 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

Check paper and the printing environment

Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.

Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications

Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specifications.

● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.

● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,
voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.

● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.

● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.

● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in
Inkjet printers.

● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.

Step two: Check the environment

The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-
feeding issues. Try the following solutions:

● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning
vents.

● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specifications.

● Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.

● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.

● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air flow on all
sides, including the top.

● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave
residue inside the printer.

Step three: Set the individual tray alignment

Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when
printing from specific trays.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

2. Select the following menus:

a. Copy/Print or Print

Check paper and the printing environment 373

 b. Print Quality

c. Image Registration

3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.

4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.

5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.

6. Select Done to save the new settings.

Try a different print driver

Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have
unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.

Download a different print driver from the HP support Web site: www.hp.com/
support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554
or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp.

Troubleshoot image defects

Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.

Table 4-54 Image defects table quick reference

Defect Defect Defect

Table 4-62 Light print on page 380 Table 4-60 Gray background or dark print Table 4-57 Blank page - No print on page
on page 379 377

374 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-54 Image defects table quick reference (continued)

Defect Defect Defect

Table 4-56 Black page on page 377 Table 4-55 Banding defects on page 376 Table 4-64 Streak defects on page 381

Table 4-59 Fixing/fuser defects on page Table 4-61 Image placement defects on Table 4-58 Color plane registrations
378 page 379 defects (color models only) on page 378

Table 4-63 Output defects on page 380

Troubleshoot image defects 375

 Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps
as a starting point for solving image defect issues.

1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely
with continued printing.

2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has
passed the rated life), replace the cartridge.

3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray.
Try using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.

4. Make sure the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.

5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See the printer
support page at support.hp.com for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.

NOTE: The term "fusing" refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper.

The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer with the short edge
first.

Table 4-55 Banding defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Dark or light lines which repeat down 1. Reprint the document.

the length of the page, and are wide-
pitch and/or impulse bands. They might 2. Try printing from another tray.
be sharp or soft in nature. The defect
displays only in areas of fill, not in text or 3. Replace the cartridge.
sections with no printed content.
4. Use a different paper type.

5. Enterprise models only: From the

Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print
mode that is designed for a slightly
heavier media than what you are
using. This slows the print speed
and might improve the print quality.

6. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

376 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-56 Black page

Sample Description Possible solutions

The entire printed page is black. 1. Visually inspect the cartridge to

check for damage.

2. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

3. Replace the cartridge.

4. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-57 Blank page - No print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The page is completely blank and 1. Make sure that the cartridges are
contains no printed content. genuine HP cartridges.

2. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

3. Print with a different cartridge.

4. Check the paper type in the paper

tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter paper type.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 377

 Table 4-58 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)

Sample Description Possible solutions

One or more color plane(s) is not 1. Reprint the document.

aligned with the other color planes. This
registration error will typically occur with 2. From the printer control panel,
yellow. calibrate the printer.

3. If a cartridge has reached a Very

Low state, or the printed output
is severely faded, replace the
cartridge.

4. From the printer control panel use

the Restore Calibration feature
to reset the printer's calibration
settings to the factory defaults.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-59 Fixing/fuser defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Slight shadows or offsets of the image 1. Reprint the document.

are repeated down the page. The
repeated image might fade with each 2. Check the paper type in the paper
recurrence. tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter paper type.

3. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Toner rubs off along either edge of the 1. Reprint the document.
page. This defect is more common at the
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light 2. Check the paper type in the paper
media types, but can occur anywhere on tray and adjust the printer settings
the page. to match. If necessary, select a
heavier paper type.

3. Enterprise models only: From the

printer control panel, go to the
Edge-to-Edge menu and then select
Normal. Reprint the document.

4. Enterprise models only: From the

printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint
the document.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

378 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-60 Gray background or dark print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The image or text is darker than 1. Make sure that the paper in the
expected and/or the background is gray. trays has not already been run
through the printer.

2. Use a different paper type.

3. Reprint the document.

4. Mono models only: From the Home

screen on the printer control panel,
go to the Adjust Toner Density
menu, and then adjust the toner
density to a lower level.

5. Make sure that the printer is

within the supported operating
temperature and humidity range.

6. Replace the cartridge.

7. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-61 Image placement defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

The image is not centered, or is skewed 1. Reprint the document.

on the page. The defect occurs when the
paper is not positioned properly as it is 2. Remove the paper and then reload
pulled from the tray and moves through the tray. Make sure that all the
the paper path. paper edges are even on all sides.

3. Make sure that the top of the paper

stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overfill the tray.

4. Make sure that the paper guides

are adjusted to the correct size
for the paper. Do not adjust the
paper guides tightly against the
paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the
tray.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 379

 Table 4-62 Light print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The printed content is light or faded on 1. Reprint the document.

the entire page.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. Mono models only: Make sure that

the EconoMode setting is disabled,
both at the printer control panel
and in the print driver.

4. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

5. Print a Supplies Status Page and

check the life and usage of the
cartridge.

6. Replace the cartridge.

7. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-63 Output defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Printed pages have curled edges. The 1. Reprint the document.

curled edge can be along the short or
long side of the paper. Two types of curl 2. Positive curl: From the printer
are possible: control panel, select a heavier
paper type. The heavier paper type
● Positive curl: The paper curls creates a higher temperature for
toward the printed side. The defect printing.
occurs in dry environments or
when printing high-coverage pages. Negative curl: From the printer
control panel, select a lighter paper
● Negative curl: The paper curls type. The lighter paper type creates
away from the printed side. The a lower temperature for printing.
defect occurs in high-humidity Try storing the paper in a dry
environments or when printing low- environment prior to use, or use
coverage pages. freshly opened paper.

3. Print in duplex mode.

4. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

380 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-63 Output defects (continued)

Sample Description Possible solutions

The paper does not stack well in the 1. Reprint the document.
output tray. The stack might be uneven,
skewed, or the pages might be pushed 2. Extend the output bin extension.
out of the tray and onto the floor. Any of
the following conditions can cause this 3. If the defect is caused by
defect: extreme paper curl, refer to the
troubleshooting steps for "Output
● Extreme paper curl curl."

● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or 4. Use a different paper type.

deformed
5. Use freshly opened paper.
● The paper is a non-standard paper
type, such as envelopes 6. Remove the paper from the output
tray before the tray gets too full.
● The output tray is too full
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.

Table 4-64 Streak defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Light vertical streaks that usually span 1. Reprint the document.

the length of the page. The defect
displays only in areas of fill, not in text 2. Remove the cartridge, and then
or sections with no printed content. shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

NOTE: Both light and dark vertical

streaks can occur when the printing
environment is outside the specified
range for temperature or humidity. Refer
to your printer's environmental
specifications for allowable temperature
and humidity levels.

Dark vertical lines which occur down the 1. Reprint the document.
length of the page. The defect might
occur anywhere on the page, in areas of 2. Remove the cartridge, and then
fill or in sections with no printed content. shake it to redistribute the toner.
On color models, these lines or streaks Reinsert the toner cartridges into
will also be visible on the ITB cleaning the printer and close the cover. For
page. a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. Print a cleaning page.

4. Check the toner level in the

cartridge.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 381

 Copy-quality troubleshooting
Learn about copy-quality troubleshooting.

NOTE: Copy-quality (CQ) problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly (ISA) portion
of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document feeder or flatbed
glass.

Identify the location and type of the CQ problem

Resolving CQ problems involves isolating the defect to the document feeder or flatbed glass.
Comparing printed output between the document feeder and the flatbed glass might determine the
ISA location that is causing the CQ defect.

NOTE: If a CQ defect appears on printed output from both the document feeder and the flatbed
glass, carefully inspect the original source for a print-quality (PQ) problem.

Document feeder isolation test

1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.

2. Place the source page in the document feeder, and then make a copy.

3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the document feeder.

4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a
problem in the document feeder.

Flatbed isolation test

1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.

2. Place the source page on the flatbed glass, and then make a copy.

3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the flatbed.

4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a
problem in the flatbed.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.

View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.

1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.

382 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. Open the scanner lid.

3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly
on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the printer.

NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).

4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 383

 5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks

Learn about vertical lines, bands, or streaks copy-quality problems.

Vertical lines or streaks appear on copies and/or scans in the same direction that the paper feeds when
copying and/or scanning from the document feeder. Lines or streaks might be visible on the front and/or
the back side of the page. Copies and/or scans from the flatbed glass look normal. Printouts also look
normal.

The line or streak might be black or in color, and can also be present on fax or digital send output (for
example, when using Scan to folder or Scan to email features.

NOTE: HP has determined that 99% of all lines and streaks on copies made by feeding the original
documents through the document feeder are caused by debris on the document feeder glass strip.
Even small specks can cause the light reflected off the original to be distorted, resulting in a line, streak,
or smudge on copies or scans made from the document feeder.

Even if the document feeder glass strip and/or flatbed glass has been wiped clean, the defect might
persist. Persistent vertical lines, bands, or streaks when copying from the document feeder might mean
that the debris causing the print quality are not readily visible and cannot be removed with a quick
cleaning.

Use the procedures below to resolve persistent lines, bands, or streak copy-quality (CQ) problems.

Locate debris and thoroughly clean the document feeder glass

1. Place a blank sheet of paper in the document feeder and mark an X in the lower right corner as
shown.

Figure 4-109 Load the document feeder

2. Press the Start button to make a copy of the blank page.

3. Place the copied paper face-up on the flatbed glass with the X located as shown.

NOTE: Make sure the upper left corner of the copy is aligned with the upper left corner of the
flatbed glass.

384 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-110 Place the copy on the flatbed

4. Follow the line or streak on the paper to the area on the document feeder glass that is causing the
CQ problem.

Figure 4-111 Identify the CQ defect location

5. Use a fingernail to loosen any stubborn debris.

WARNING! Use only a fingernail. Other objects can scratch the document feeder glass.

Clean this specific area again (with a lint-free cloth dampened with water), and then dry the glass
with a soft, lint-free cloth.

Figure 4-112 Clean the glass

6. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 385

 Clean the duplexer scanner glass (model specific)

NOTE: Not all MFP printers use a background selector for duplex printing.

If a Side 2 Background Selector cannot be located for the printer (it might not include one) skip this
procedure.

1. Release the latch and open the document feeder jam-access door.

Figure 4-113 Open the jam-access door

2. Unlock the Side 2 Background Selector by pressing and holding both green tabs inward towards
each other.

Figure 4-114 Release the Side 2 Background Selector

3. While holding the green tabs, pull out and remove the Side 2 Background Selector.

386 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-115 Remove the Side 2 Background Selector

4. Rotate the top to reveal the white and black backside reflector (circled in blue).

NOTE: If the white and black areas do not come clean, wipe the surface thoroughly with a damp
cloth again. Dry the area with a soft, dry cloth to prevent spotting.

Figure 4-116 Locate the backside reflector

5. With the background selector removed from the document feeder, clean the inside of the scan
module.

6. In the back area from where the background selector was removed, locate the Side 2 Scan Module
glass found under the top area.

NOTE: The glass surface of the Side 2 Scan module sits horizontally flat and might not be easily
viewable.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 387

 7. Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water and apply pressure upwards behind the rollers to
clean the Side 2 Scan Module Glass, making sure to that the entire width of the glass is cleaned
from left to right.

NOTE: If needed, lens cleaner or non-abrasive glass cleaner can be applied to the cloth before
cleaning the glass. Spray only onto the cloth and not directly onto the glass or device. Do not spray
water or glass cleaner on the glass as it can seep under it and possibly damage the printer. Do not
use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on the glass; these can
damage it and/or leave residue on the glass resulting in degraded copy/scan quality.

8. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the Side 2 Background Selector.

9. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.

Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality

Learn about printer settings to improve scan or copy quality.

Optimize printer settings to potentially improve scan or copy quality.

IMPORTANT: The printer settings described in this section are firmware dependent and might not be
available for a specific printer (for example, color adjustment settings do not apply to mono printers).

Image Adjustment settings

NOTE: Settings > Print (SFP) or Copy/Print (MFP) > Image Adjustment > Background Cleanup.

Use the sliders to perform a Background Cleanup, adjust the image Darkness as well as changing the
Sharpness and Contrast.

Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy (for example, adjusting the Darkness and
Sharpness. Use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to
remove a light background color.

● Darkness: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.

● Contrast: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

● Background Cleanup: Adjust this setting if copying a faint image is a problem.

● Sharpness: Adjust this setting to clarify or soften the image. Increasing the sharpness might make
text appear crisper, but decreasing it would make photographs appear smoother.

Optimize Text/Picture settings

NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Optimize Text/Picture.

Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.

Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content.

● Mixed: Use to optimize the setting for text and for pictures.

● Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures are on the original.

388 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● Printed picture: Use to optimize line drawing and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or
pages from a book. If you see bands of irregular intensity on copies, try selecting Printed picture to
improve quality.

● Photographs: Use to optimize photographic prints.

Color/Black settings

NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Color/Black.

Use to enable or disable color scanning.(some highlighters will not auto detect as color).

● Automatically detect color or black: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an
image of the page in 1-bit black if other settings allow. If the other settings don't allow (File Type, for
example), the image is in grayscale.

● Automatically detect color or gray: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an
image of the page in grayscale. Select this option for the best image quality for non-color pages.

● Color: Scans the documents in color.

● Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size.

● Black/Gray: Scans or prints documents in grayscale.

Light or faint copies (color models)

Learn how to resolve light or faint copy-quality problems.

Are you attempting to copy or scan highlighted text?

NOTE: When digitally sending or copying highlighted images or text objects, the image might appear
lighter than expected or does not show up at all with certain brands/types of highlighter pens.

Highlighters come in bright, often fluorescent colors. Fluorescent highlighter inks tend to reflect more
light than that which is absorbed by the paper source. This reflection might cause the image to not show
up as well as non-fluorescent colors depending upon the scanner/MFP being used.

The most common color for highlighters is yellow, but many other colors are also found such as pink,
blue, green, orange, and purples. Yellow is often the preferred color to use when making a photocopy as it
tends to not produce as much of a shadow on copies or scans.

There are different color and ink properties depending upon the brand of highlighters used. Due to these
differences, scanning of the images might vary greatly from not being seen at all to changing colors (for
example, orange highlighter might appear brown in the copy or scan or yellow highlighter might appear
green).

Automatic color detect

HP has a feature in all FutureSmart (LaserJet Enterprise Series only) printers which automatically
detects color on each page. Depending upon the amount of color information on a page, the scanner
might determine the page to be black and white due to a very, very small amount of color which might
be considered background artifacts. This helps to reduce the file size of sent files as well as toner usage
on a copied page. You might see small highlighted marks on pages print out in black and white or even
disappear.

Light or faint copies (color models) 389

 The black and white effect is due to the printer not seeing enough color on the page, in which case the
whole image is rendered as a black and white page. The highlighted mark disappearing might be due to
the marker characteristics not being detected by the scanner.

Does the printer have the latest firmware version installed?

No or I don't know.

A Firmware enhancement has been introduced for certain LaserJets to help with the reproduction of
highlighted images.

NOTE: Some Multifunction Printers (MFPs) using FutureSmart firmware v3.5.3 or later have improved
color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters when scanning or copying.

Use the following steps to identify the installed firmware version, and then upgrade the firmware if
needed.

1. Print a configuration page (from the printer control panel).

2. On the printed configuration page look in the section marked Device Information, and then identify
the Firmware Datecode and Firmware Revision.

This is the current version of firmware installed on this printer.

3. In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553

or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040 or
www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp.

a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

b. Select the driver language and operating system.

c. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.

4. Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.

a. Select your country/region.

b. Select Drivers & Downloads.

c. Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.

TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on
identifying the printer name and number.

d. Select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

e. Select the driver language and operating system.

390 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 f. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.

5. Perform a firmware upgrade. See the Firmware upgrades topic in the product service manual.

6. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

Yes

These procedures help provide settings which affect the way highlighters are scanned or copied. A
firmware enhancement is available for certain printers that helps with the reproduction of highlighted
images.

● Enable Firmware Enhancement

1. From the Home screen, select the desired scanning application (for example, Copy, E-Mail, Save
to Network Folder).

2. Select More Options > Optimize Text/Picture > Text button (not slider). This enables the improved
color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters.

TIP: Administrators can set Text as the default setting on the device.

● Alternative Settings

See Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality on page 388 for more information.

Light or faint copies (color models) 391

 Performance and connectivity troubleshooting
Learn about performance and connectivity troubleshooting.

Solve fax or email problems

Learn about solving fax and email problems.

Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current
information is available in WISE. Search using model number then use "fax troubleshooting" as the
search term.

For HP Channel partners, open the HP Partner First Portal located at https://partner.hp.com, and then do
the following:

1. Select the Services & Support tab, and then select Technical Support.

2. Select Technical Documentation.

3. You will be taken to the WISE portal.

For HP service personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engines (WISE) sites:

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

392 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Solve performance problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve performance problems.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick
up a page, which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases
the possibility of a mis-pick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 75-80gsm (20lb) plain
paper.

Factors affecting print performance

Review the following information about factors affecting print performance.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Table 4-65 Solve performance problems

Problem Cause Solution

Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank Check the original document to see if
pages. content is present on all of the pages.

Pages print but are totally blank. The printer might be malfunctioning. To check the printer, print a
Configuration page.

Pages print but are totally blank. Make sure that the printer is not feeding Make sure that the paper meets HP
multiple pages (especially if very thin specifications for this printer.
paper is used).
For a complete list of specific HP-
brand paper that this printer supports,
go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM552
or www.hp.com/support/colorljM553 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554
or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040
or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP
or http://www.hp.com/support/
colorljM578mfp or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljE57540mfp.

Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow the print Print on a different type of paper.
job.
NOTE: Some software programs
process print jobs slowly.

Pages print very slowly. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing might require a slower
print speed to ensure the best print
NOTE: Some software programs quality.
process print jobs slowly.

Pages print very slowly. Large batches, narrow paper, and Print in smaller batches, on a different
special paper such as gloss, type of paper, or on a different size of
NOTE: Some software programs transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough paper.
process print jobs slowly. Paper can slow the print job.

Pages did not print. The printer might not be pulling paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly. correctly.

Pages did not print. The paper is jamming in the printer. Clear the jam.

Solve performance problems 393

 Table 4-65 Solve performance problems (continued)

Problem Cause Solution

Pages did not print. The USB cable might be defective or ● Disconnect the USB cable at both
incorrectly connected. ends and reconnect it.

● Try printing a job that has printed in

the past.

● Try using a different USB cable.

Pages did not print. Other devices are running on the host The printer might not share a USB port.
computer. If an external hard drive or network
switchbox is connected to the same port
as the printer, the other device might be
interfering with the printer. To connect
and use the printer, disconnect the other
device or use two USB ports on the host
computer.

Pages did not print. The print job might not have arrived at Check the printer status queue. Also, the
the printer. Printing message should appear on the
control panel display.

Print speeds
Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed depends on different engine-
process speeds or operational pauses between printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors
that determine the print speed of the printer include the following:

● Page formatting time

The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints. Complex pages take more
time to format, resulting in reduced print speed. However, most jobs print at full engine speed.

● Media size

Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard Letter- or A4–size
media. A reduce print speed is used when printing on narrow media to prevent the edges of the
fuser from overheating.

● Media mode

Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print quality on that media.
For example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for example, envelopes or photos) require a
reduced print speed. To maximize the print speed for special media types, make sure that the
correct media type in the print driver is selected.

● Printer temperature

To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a specific internal
temperature (thermal slow down). The starting temperature of the printer, ambient environment
temperature, and the print job size effect the number of pages that can be printed before the printer
reduces the print speed. Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and then
pausing for an amount of time before printing continues.

● Other print speed reduction factors

Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced print speeds include:

394 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 – Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120 seconds

The printer does not print

If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

1. Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.

● If the control panel does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer off and then on again.

● If the control panel indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job again.

2. If the control panel indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job
again.

3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected to a network, check the
following items:

● Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If the network is active,
the light is green.

● Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect to the network.

● Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.

4. Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs
from the print queue.

5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and
open the Ports tab.

● If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the
Ports tab matches the one on the printer configuration page.

● If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network, make sure the box is
checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

6. If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking communication with the
printer. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.

7. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.

The printer prints slowly

If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.

1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this printer. For a list of
specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/colorljM552 or www.hp.com/support/
colorljM553 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM554 or http://www.hp/support/colorljE55040
or www.hp.com/support/colorljM577MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM578mfp or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE57540mfp.

The printer does not print 395

 2. When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the printer prints
more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct
for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.

3. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.

Solve connectivity problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity problems.

Solve USB connection problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.

● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.

● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.

Solve wired network problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network problems.

Introduction
Learn about solving wired network problems.

Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication problem. These problems
include the following issues:

● The periodic loss of ability to communicate with the printer

● The printer cannot be found during driver installation

● A periodic failure to print

Check the items in this topic to verify that the printer is communicating with the network. Before
beginning, print a configuration page from the printer control panel and locate the printer IP address
that is listed on this page.

NOTE: To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges
installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more
information, go to hp.com/plus).

Poor physical connection

Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection.

1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

2. Verify that cable connections are secure.

3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity
light and the green link-status light are lit.

4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

396 Chapter 4 Solve problems

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer
Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer.

1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer
is selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer configuration page.

NOTE: To print a configuration page using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine
original HP toner cartridges installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP
Plus account (for more information, go to hp.com/plus).

2. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to
this printer, even if its IP address changes.

3. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the
IP address.

4. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with the printer.

1. Test network communication by pinging the network.

a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.

● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.

● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.

b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.

c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the printer, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these
settings, you must also change them for your network.

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly.

1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.

2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer 397
 1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

NOTE: To print a configuration page using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine
original HP toner cartridges installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP
Plus account (for more information, go to hp.com/plus).

2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

Solve fax or email problems

Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current
information is available in WISE or HP Channel Services Network (CSN). Search using model number
then use "fax troubleshooting" as the search term.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

398 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5 Removal and replacement

When servicing the printer, several items must be considered to ensure a successful repair and to avoid
damage to the printer or personal injury. Learn about these considerations and find detailed instructions
for removing and replacing printer parts.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Removal and replacement 399

 2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

400 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 5-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Supplies and accessories

Learn about the supplies and accessories that are available for the printer.

To order cartridges, visit http://www.hp.com (some portions of the HP Web site are available in English
only). Ordering cartridges online is not supported in all countries/regions. However, many countries/
regions have information about ordering by telephone, locating a local store, and printing a shopping list.
In addition, go to hp.com/supplies to obtain information about purchasing HP products in your country/
region.

Use only the replacement cartridges that have the same cartridge number as the cartridge that is being
replaced. Find the cartridge number in the following places:

● On the label of the cartridge that is being replaced.

● On a sticker inside the printer. Open the cartridge door to locate the sticker.

● Open the printer software (HP Printer Assistant), and then click Shop > Shop For Supplies Online.

● Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS), and then click Tools > Supply Status (under the Product
Information item).

Table 5-2 Supplies part numbers

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Black Original CF360-67901 CF360A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Order parts, accessories, and supplies 401

 Table 5-2 Supplies part numbers (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge HP 508X High Yield Black CF360-67902 CF360X

Original LaserJet Toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Cyan Original CF361-67901 CF361A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Cyan CF361-67902 CF361X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Yellow Original CF362-67901 CF362A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Yellow CF362-67902 CF362X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Magenta Original CF363-67901 CF363A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Magenta CF363-67902 CF363X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge (E55040/ SVC Cartridge LJ Black W9060–67901

E57540) Managed Toner

Toner cartridge (E55040/ SVC Cartridge LJ Cyan W9061–67901

E57540) Managed Toner

Toner cartridge (E55040/ SVC Cartridge LJ Yellow W9062–67901

E57540) Managed Toner

Toner cartridge (E55040/ SVC Cartridge LJ Magenta W9063–67901

E57540) Managed Toner

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212A Black 7ZU81-67905

M578) LaserJet Toner

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212X Black 7ZU81-67909

M578) LaserJet Toner (High Yield)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212A Cyan 7ZU81-67906

M578) LaserJet Toner

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212X Cyan 7ZU81-67910

M578) LaserJet Toner (High Yield)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212A Yellow 7ZU81-67907

M578) LaserJet Toner

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212X Yellow 7ZU81-67911

M578) LaserJet Toner (High Yield)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212A Magenta 7ZU81-67908

M578) LaserJet Toner

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ SVC Cartridge-212X Magenta 7ZU81-67912

M578) LaserJet Toner (High Yield)

HP toner-collection unit B5L37-67901 B5L37A

HP Staple Cartridge Pack Q7432A

(stapler models)

402 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Table 5-2 Supplies part numbers (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

HP LaserJet 200 ADF Roller W5U23–67901 B5L52A

Replacement Kit (MFP)

Fuser kit (110V) B5L35-67902 B5L35A

Fuser kit (220V) B5L36-67902 B5L36A

Table 5-3 Accessories (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040)

Description Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder Optional 550-sheet B5L34-67901 B5L34A

paper feeder (included
NOTE: The M552 model accepts with the x model)
one 550-sheet paper feeder. The
M553 and E55040 models accept up
to three 550-sheet paper feeders.

Fixed tray guide kit Fixed tray guide kit for 5851-7708
cassette trays.

HP secure 500 GB high-performance Optional hard drive B5L29-67903 B5L29A

hard disk drive

NOTE: Not supported for the

M552dn.

Printer stand and storage Optional stand with B5L51-67901 B5L51A

storage to support the
printer

Recommended when
using multiple optional
paper feeders.

1GB DDR3 Slim DIMM (SFP) Optional DIMM for 5851-6422 G6W84A
expanding the memory
NOTE: M553/M554/M555/E55040
only.

HP internal USB ports Two optional USB ports B5L28-67902 B5L28A

for connecting third-
party devices

HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Automatically encrypts F5S62-61001 F5S62A

all data that passes
through the printer

Table 5-4 Accessories (M577, M578, and E57540)

Description Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder Optional 550-sheet B5L34-67901 B5L34A

paper feeder (included
NOTE: The printer accepts up to with the x model)
three 550-sheet paper feeders.

Fixed tray guide kit Fixed tray guide kit for 5851-7708
cassette trays.

Supplies and accessories 403

 Table 5-4 Accessories (M577, M578, and E57540) (continued)

Description Description Part number (service) Product number

HP secure 500 GB high-performance Optional hard drive B5L29-67903 B5L29A

hard disk drive

NOTE: Not supported for the

M552dn.

Printer stand and storage Optional stand with B5L51-67901 B5L51A

storage to support the
printer

Recommended when
using multiple optional
paper feeders.

1GB DDR3 x32 144-Pin 800MHz Optional DIMM for E5K48-67902 E5K48A
SODIMM (MFP) expanding the memory

HP internal USB ports Two optional USB ports B5L28-67902 B5L28A

for connecting third-
party devices

HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Automatically encrypts F5S62-61001 F5S62A

all data that passes
through the printer

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit Language-specific, A7W12A

for Simplified Chinese & Traditional adhesive overlay for
Chinese the physical keyboard

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit for Language-specific, A7W14A

Swedish adhesive overlay for
the physical keyboard

HP Smartcard NIPRNet Solution for Nonsecure Internet CC543B

US Government Protocol (IP)
Router Network
NOTE: Requires installing the HP for transmitting non-
Internal USB ports accessory classified information
(B5L28A).

HP Smartcard NIPRNet Solution for Secret Internet Protocol F8B30A

US Government (IP) Router Network for
transmitting classified
NOTE: Requires installing the HP information
Internal USB ports accessory
(B5L28A).

HP Foreign Interface Harness Optional port for B5L31-67902 B5L31A

connecting third-party
devices

HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Optional fax accessory B5L53-67901 B5L53A

Accessory 600 for the dn model

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server USB wireless print J8031A

server accessory

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Wi-Fi direct accessory J8030A

Accessory for “touch” printing from
mobile devices

404 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Customer self-repair parts
Learn about printer customer self-repair parts.

Customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.

NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benefits can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-
support and www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.

Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-

authorized service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number,
serial number (found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.

● Parts listed as A: Easy

● Parts listed as B: Difficult and/or require tools

● Parts listed as Mandatory: Customer installed self-replacement parts (unless the customer is willing
to pay for HP service personnel to perform the repair). For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot
support is not provided under the HP printer warranty.

● Parts listed as Optional: HP service personnel installed self-replacement parts by customer request
for no additional charge during the printer warranty period.

Table 5-5 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts

Kit name Description CSR level Part number

Control panel kit (M553x/M555/ Control panel A RK2-6064-000CN

E55040

Control panel kit (MFP) Control panel A B5L47-67018

Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller A RM2-6575-000CN

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ITB B RM2-6576-000CN

Tray 2-5 roller kit Rollers for Tray 2 and the optional A RM2-6577-000CN
550-sheet paper feeders

ADF roller replacement Kit Replacement feed rollers for the A W5U23-67901
document feeder

Fuser kit (110V) Fuser (110V) A B5L35-67902

Fuser kit (220V) Fuser (220V) A B5L36-67902

embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) eMMC module A 5851-6436

kit (SFP)

320GB encrypted hard disk drive kit Replacement hard disk drive A 5851-6712
(MFP)

White backing kit (MFP) White backing for the document A 5851-7740
feeder

Retention clips for the document

feeder white backing

Retention clip kit (MFP) Retention clips for the document A 5851-6573
feeder white backing

Keyboard kit (flow models) Keyboard A B5L47-67019 (US)

B5L47-67020 (UK)

Customer self-repair parts 405

 Table 5-5 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts (continued)

Kit name Description CSR level Part number

Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6019
ES: UK Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6020

ES: US Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6021

DA: UK Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) Keyboard overlay A 5851-6022

(flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) (flow Keyboard overlay A 5851-6023

models)

Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) Keyboard overlay A 5851-6024

(flow models)

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

406 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

HP service and support 407

 Assembly locations
Learn about major printer assembly locations.

Printer front view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)
Identify the parts on the front of the printer (SFP).

Figure 5-1 Printer front view (SFP)

2 11
1 3

4
10
5
9
6

8 13 12
7

Number Description

1 Standard output bin

2 4-line LCD control panel with keypad (n and dn models only)

3 Hardware integration pocket for connecting accessory and third-party devices (dn and x models only)

4 Easy-access USB port

5 Right door (access to the fuser and for clearing jams)

6 Tray 1

7 Model name

8 Tray 2

9 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

10 On/off button

11 Control panel with color touchscreen display (M553x/M555/E55040)

12 Lower-right door for the 550-sheet paper feeder (access for clearing jams)

13 550-sheet paper feeder, Tray 3 (included with the x model, optional for the other models)

NOTE: The M552 model accepts one 550-sheet paper feeder. All other models accept up to three 550-
sheet paper feeders.

408 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models)
Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).

Figure 5-2 Printer rear view (SFP)

1
5
2

4
3

Number Description

1 Toner-collection-unit door

2 Formatter (contains the interface ports)

3 Power connection

4 Serial number and product number label

5 Formatter cover

Printer front view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (MFP).

Printer back view (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040 models) 409
 Figure 5-3 Printer front view (MFP)
1 2

15
14 3
13 4
12 5
6
11
7
10

9 8

Number Description

1 Document-feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Document-feeder input tray

3 Document-feeder output bin

4 Control panel with color touchscreen display

5 Convenience stapler (c/f/z models only)

6 Right door (access to the fuser and for clearing jams)

7 Tray 1

8 On/off button

9 Model name

10 Tray 2

11 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

12 Standard output bin

13 Physical keyboard (c/z models only)

14 Easy-access USB port (on the side of the control panel)

15 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).

410 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Figure 5-4 Printer rear view (MFP)

1
6
5 2
4

Number Description

1 Toner-collection-unit door

2 Formatter (contains the interface ports)

3 Power connection

4 Serial number and product number label

5 Slot for a cable-type security lock (on the rear cover of the printer)

6 Formatter cover

Printer back view (M577, M578, and E57540 models) 411

 Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts are parts that a customer replaces without assistance from a field
technician. These parts can be replaced without the use of any tools.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-6 Part information

Part number Part description

CF360-67901 Standard-capacity replacement black toner cartridge with instruction

guide
CF360-67902
High-capacity replacement black toner cartridge with instruction guide

NOTE: M552/M553/M577 Enterprise and managed only.

CF361-67901 Standard-capacity replacement cyan cartridge with instruction guide

CF361-67902 High-capacity replacement cyan toner cartridge with instruction guide

NOTE: M552/M553/M577 Enterprise and managed only.

CF362-67901 Standard-capacity replacement yellow toner cartridge with instruction

guide
CF362-67902
High-capacity replacement yellow toner cartridge with instruction guide

NOTE: M552/M553/M577 Enterprise and managed only.

CF363-67901

CF363-67902 NOTE: M552/M553/M577 Enterprise and managed only.

W9060–67901 SVC Cartridge LJ Black Managed Toner

NOTE: E55040 and E57540 only.

W9061–67901 SVC Cartridge LJ Cyan Managed Toner

NOTE: E55040 and E57540 only.

412 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Table 5-6 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

W9062–67901 SVC Cartridge LJ Yellow Managed Toner

NOTE: E55040 and E57540 only.

W9063–67901 SVC Cartridge LJ Magenta Managed Toner

NOTE: E55040 and E57540 only.

7ZU81-67905 SVC Cartridge-212A Black LaserJet Toner

7ZU81-67909 SVC Cartridge-212X Black LaserJet Toner

NOTE: M554/M555/M578 only.

7ZU81-67906 SVC Cartridge-212A Cyan LaserJet Toner

7ZU81-67910 SVC Cartridge-212X Cyan LaserJet Toner

NOTE: M554/M555/M578 only.

7ZU81-67907 SVC Cartridge-212A Yellow LaserJet Toner

7ZU81-67911 SVC Cartridge-212X Yellow LaserJet Toner

NOTE: M554/M555/M578 only.

7ZU81-67908 SVC Cartridge-212A Magenta LaserJet Toner

7ZU81-67912 SVC Cartridge-212X Magenta LaserJet Toner

NOTE: M554/M555/M578 only.

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 4 (FS4) or later firmware installed. For
printers with FS3 firmware installed, go to the HP WISE web site and search for HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise M552, M553 - Control-panel menus (c04574398) or HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M577 -
Control-panel menus (c04796059) for more information.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Support Tools menu.

2. Open the following menus:

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges 413

 ● Troubleshooting

● Print Quality Pages

● Color Band Test

3. Select the Print or OK button to print the pages.

Remove the toner cartridges

Follow these steps to replace a toner cartridge.

1. . Open the front door. Figure 5-5 Open the front door

2. . Grasp the handle of the used toner cartridge Figure 5-6 Remove the toner cartridge
and pull out to remove it.

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack a toner cartridge.

414 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. . Remove the new toner cartridge from its Figure 5-7 Unpack the toner cartridge
protective shell by tearing off the plastic strip
and opening the package. Save all packaging
for recycling the used toner cartridge.
2

2. . Pack the used toner cartridge into the box Figure 5-8 Recycle the used cartridge
that the new cartridge came in, or use a large
cardboard box and fill it with several cartridges
that you need to recycle. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about recycling.
1
In the U.S., a pre-paid shipping label is included
in the box. In other countries/regions, go to
www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-paid shipping
label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the
box, and return the used cartridge to HP for 3
recycling.
2

Install the toner cartridges

Follow these steps to replace a toner cartridge.

Install the toner cartridges 415

 1. . Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it Figure 5-9 Rock the toner cartridge
5-6 times.

2. . Remove the protective shield from the toner Figure 5-10 Remove the protective shield
cartridge.

416 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. . Support the toner cartridge underneath with Figure 5-11 Install the toner cartridge
one hand while holding the cartridge handle
with the other. Align the toner cartridge with
its slot on the shelf, and then insert the toner
cartridge into the product.

CAUTION: Avoid touching the green imaging

drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can
cause print defects.

4. . Close the front door. Figure 5-12 Close the front door

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit (TCU).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) 417

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-7 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L37-67901 Toner collection unit (TCU) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

418 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-13 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-14 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 419

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-15 Remove the TCU

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

420 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the TCU

Follow these steps to install the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the TCU.

Figure 5-16 Verify that the toner collection hatch cover is closed

Install the TCU 421

 2. Position the TCU with the hinges in the slots provided in the printer (callout 1), and then rotate the
TCU up and into the closed position.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically opens when the TCU is closed.

Figure 5-17 Install the TCU

3. Close the front door.

Figure 5-18 Close the front door

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models)

Learn about removing and replacing the staple cartridge.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

422 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-8 Part information

Part number Part description

Q7432A HP staple cartridge pack

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the stapler to staple two pages together.

Remove the staple cartridge

Follow these steps to remove the staple cartridge.

Remove the staple cartridge 423

 1. Open the stapler door.

Figure 5-19 Open the stapler door

2. Pull the staple cartridge straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-20 Remove the staple cartridge

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

424 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the staple cartridge

Follow these steps to install the staple cartridge.

1. Push the staple cartridge straight out of the printer to install it.

Figure 5-21 Install the staple cartridge

Install the staple cartridge 425

 2. Close the stapler door.

Figure 5-22 Close the stapler door

Removal and replacement: Fuser

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser.

View a video to remove and replace a fuser (M553)

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-9 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L35-67902 Fuser (110V) with instruction guide

B5L36-67902 Fuser (220V) with instruction guide

Required tools
No special tools are required to install this part.

426 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the fuser.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Open the right door.

CAUTION: The fuser is very hot. After turning the printer power off, allow the fuser to cool for at
least 30 minutes before removing it.

Figure 5-23 Open the right door

2. Grasp the two fuser handles, and then squeeze the two blue triggers on the handles to release the
fuser.

Figure 5-24 Release the fuser

Remove the fuser 427

 3. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-25 Remove the fuser

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

428 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Install the fuser
Follow these steps to install the fuser.

1. Align the fuser with the opening in the printer.

Figure 5-26 Align the fuser with the opening

2. Slide the fuser into the printer, push in to install it, and then make sure that it is fully seated.

TIP: When the fuser is fully seated, the two blue triggers on the handles make an audible click.

Figure 5-27 Install the fuser

Install the fuser 429

 3. Close the right door.

Figure 5-28 Close the right door

4. Reset the supplies counter

Follow these steps to reset the supplies counter.

The procedures in this section are for printers with FutureSmart 3 (FS3) firmware installed only)

■ Turn the printer power on, and then do one of the following:

Reset the fuser counter from a touchscreen control panel

a. From the Home screen on the control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

b. Open the following menus:

● Manage Supplies

● Reset Supplies

● New Fuser Kit

c. Select the Yes item to reset the fuser counter.

Reset the fuser counter from an SFP control panel

a. From the Home screen on the control panel, use the down arrow button to scroll to
Administration, and then press the OK button.

b. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Manage Supplies, and then press the OK button.

c. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Reset Supplies, and then press the OK button.

d. Use the down arrow button to scroll to New Fuser Kit, and then press the OK button.

e. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Yes, and then press the OK button to reset the fuser
counter.

Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) (M552/M553/M554/M555/

E55040)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the SFP hard-disk drive (HDD).

430 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive
simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable
or inoperable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-10 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L29-67903 HP secure 500 GB high-performance hard disk drive (HDD)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 431

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-29 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-30 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

432 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter.

Figure 5-31 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-32 Remove the HDD

3. Using the screwdriver provided with the replacement HDD, remove two screws (callout 1). Save
these screws. They will be installed on the replacement HDD.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 433

 Figure 5-33 Remove two screws

4. Lift the bracket (callout 1) up and off of the HDD. Save this bracket. It will be installed on the
replacement HDD.

Figure 5-34 Remove the bracket

5. Grasp the PCA card (callout 1) attached to the end of the HDD and pull it away from the HDD to
remove it. Save this PCA. It will be installed on the replacement HDD.

Figure 5-35 Remove the PCA

434 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Install the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to install the hard-disk drive (HDD).

Unpack the replacement assembly 435

 1. Align the slots (callout 1) on the PCA with the connectors (callout 2) on the replacement HDD.

Figure 5-36 Align the PCA

2. Press the PCA onto the HDD connectors. Make sure that the PCA is fully seated on the connectors.

Figure 5-37 Install the PCA

3. Align the tabs (callout 1) on the bracket with the holes (callout 2) in the back side of the HDD.

Figure 5-38 Align the tabs on the bracket

436 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Install the bracket on the HDD.

NOTE: If the bracket is difficult to install, make sure that the holes in the HDD are correctly aligned
with the tabs on the bracket.

Figure 5-39 Install the bracket

5. Install two screws (callout 1).

CAUTION: Tighten the screws just enough to secure the HDD to the bracket. Do not over-tighten.

Figure 5-40 Install two screws

Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) 437

 6. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-41 Install the holder

7. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Figure 5-42 Release the HDD

5. Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

438 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-43 Install the cover

6. Reinstall the product firmware

Follow these steps to reinstall the product firmware.

1. Go to www.hp.com/go/futuresmart.

2. Select the Upgrade now button.

3. Use the drop-down lists to find the HP Enterprise or HP Managed printer model.

4. Select the Link to Firmware download page.

5. Select Firmware from the list of software and drivers.

CAUTION: Downgrading from FutureSmart 4 to FutureSmart 3 will result in a loss of custom

settings. Before upgrading to FutureSmart 4, go to the FutureSmart Navigation Compass to review
the display differences and any feature modifications.

6. Select Download next to the desired firmware version.

7. For installation instructions, go to one of the following support sites:

● One HP printer: Update firmware using a USB flash drive or the Embedded Web Server (EWS)

● Multiple HP printers at one time: Updated firmware using Web Jetadmin

NOTE: To view installation instructions, go to http://www.hp.com/go/futuresmart. Select Upgrade

now, and then select How to perform a firmware update.

Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the MFP hard-disk drive (HDD).

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Reinstall the product firmware 439

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive
simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable
or inoperable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-11 Part information

Part number

5851-6712 500GB secure hard disk drive (HDD) assembly

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

440 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-44 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-45 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 441

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter.

Figure 5-46 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-47 Remove the HDD

3. Using the screwdriver provided with the replacement HDD, remove two screws (callout 1). Save
these screws. They will be installed on the replacement HDD.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

442 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-48 Remove two screws

4. Lift the bracket (callout 1) up and off of the HDD. Save this bracket. It will be installed on the
replacement HDD.

Figure 5-49 Remove the bracket

5. Grasp the PCA card (callout 1) attached to the end of the HDD and pull it away from the HDD to
remove it. Save this PCA. It will be installed on the replacement HDD.

Figure 5-50 Remove the PCA

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 443

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Install the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to install the hard-disk drive (HDD).

444 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Align the slots (callout 1) on the PCA with the connectors (callout 2) on the replacement HDD.

Figure 5-51 Align the PCA

2. Press the PCA onto the HDD connectors. Make sure that the PCA is fully seated on the connectors.

Figure 5-52 Install the PCA

3. Align the tabs (callout 1) on the bracket with the holes (callout 2) in the back side of the HDD.

Figure 5-53 Align the tabs on the bracket

Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) 445

 4. Install the bracket on the HDD.

NOTE: If the bracket is difficult to install, make sure that the holes in the HDD are correctly aligned
with the tabs on the bracket.

Figure 5-54 Install the bracket

5. Install two screws (callout 1).

CAUTION: Tighten the screws just enough to secure the HDD to the bracket. Do not over-tighten.

Figure 5-55 Install two screws

446 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-56 Install the holder

7. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Figure 5-57 Release the HDD

5. Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Install the formatter cover 447

 Figure 5-58 Install the cover

6. Reinstall the product firmware

Follow these steps to reinstall the product firmware.

1. Go to www.hp.com/go/futuresmart.

2. Select the Upgrade now button.

3. Use the drop-down lists to find the HP Enterprise or HP Managed printer model.

4. Select the Link to Firmware download page.

5. Select Firmware from the list of software and drivers.

CAUTION: Downgrading from FutureSmart 4 to FutureSmart 3 will result in a loss of custom

settings. Before upgrading to FutureSmart 4, go to the FutureSmart Navigation Compass to review
the display differences and any feature modifications.

6. Select Download next to the desired firmware version.

7. For installation instructions, go to one of the following support sites:

● One HP printer: Update firmware using a USB flash drive or the Embedded Web Server (EWS)

● Multiple HP printers at one time: Updated firmware using Web Jetadmin

NOTE: To view installation instructions, go to http://www.hp.com/go/futuresmart. Select Upgrade

now, and then select How to perform a firmware update.

Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (M522/M553/

M554/M555/E55040)
Learn about removing and replacing the dual in-line memory module (DIMM).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

448 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-12 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-6422 1GB DDR3 Slim DIMM

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 449

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-59 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-60 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

450 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-61 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-62 Remove the HDD

Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) 451

 1. Locate the DIMM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-63 Locate the DIMM

2. Pull the DIMM straight off of the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-64 Remove the DIMM

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

452 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the DIMM

Follow these steps to install the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

Install the DIMM 453

 1. The DIMM connector (callout 1) is keyed, and can only be installed in one direction in the formatter
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-65 The DIMM connector

2. Align the connector on the DIMM with the connector on the formatter, and then push the DIMM onto
the formatter to install it.

Figure 5-66 Install the DIMM

454 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Verify that the DIMM is fully seated in the connector.

Figure 5-67 Verify the installation

Install the HDD

Follow these steps to install the HD).

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-68 Install the holder

2. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Install the HDD 455

 Figure 5-69 Release the HDD

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-70 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

456 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-71 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-72 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (M577/M578/

E57540)
Learn about removing and replacing the dual in-line memory module (DIMM).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (M577/M578/E57540) 457
 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-13 Part information

Part number Part description

E5K48-67902 1GB Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) with instruction guide (MFP)

5851-6581 2 GB Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) with instruction guide (MFP)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

458 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-73 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-74 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 459

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-75 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-76 Remove the HDD

Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

460 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the DIMM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-77 Locate the DIMM

2. Do the following:

a. Release two locking arms (callout 1).

Figure 5-78 Release the DIMM

b. Pull the DIMM down and away from the holder to remove it.

Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) 461

 Figure 5-79 Remove the DIMM

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

462 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the DIMM

Follow these steps to install the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Insert the top edge of the DIMM (callout 1) in the holder (callout 2).

NOTE: The DIMM is keyed and can only be inserted in the holder one way.

Figure 5-80 Insert the DIMM

Install the DIMM 463

 2. Make sure that the DIMM is fully installed in the holder (callout 1), and then rotate the bottom edge
of the DIMM toward the holder (callout 2).

Figure 5-81 Install the DIMM

3. Make sure that the DIMM snaps into the locking arms (callout 1).

Figure 5-82 Snap the DIMM into place

Install the HDD

Follow these steps to install the HD).

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

464 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-83 Install the holder

2. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Figure 5-84 Release the HDD

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Install the formatter cover 465

 Figure 5-85 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-86 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

466 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-87 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) (M522/M553/

M554/M555/E55040)
Learn about removing and replacing the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-14 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-6436 4 GB embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040) 467

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-88 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-89 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)

Follow these steps to remove the eMMC.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

468 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Locate the eMMC component on the formatter, and then pull it straight off of the formatter to remove
it.

Figure 5-90 Remove the eMMC

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 469

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the eMMC

Follow these steps to install the eMMC.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Align the connector on the replacement eMMC (callout 1) with the connector on the formatter
(callout 2), and then push the eMMC onto the formatter to install it.

NOTE: The eMMC can only be installed in one direction on the formatter

Figure 5-91 Install the eMMC

470 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Push down on the eMMC to make sure that it is fully seated in the connector.

Figure 5-92 Verify the installation

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-93 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Install the formatter cover 471

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-94 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-95 Loosen the thumbscrews

Reinstall the product firmware

Follow these steps to reinstall the product firmware.

1. Go to www.hp.com/go/futuresmart.

2. Select the Upgrade now button.

3. Use the drop-down lists to find the HP Enterprise or HP Managed printer model.

4. Select the Link to Firmware download page.

5. Select Firmware from the list of software and drivers.

CAUTION: Downgrading from FutureSmart 4 to FutureSmart 3 will result in a loss of custom

settings. Before upgrading to FutureSmart 4, go to the FutureSmart Navigation Compass to review
the display differences and any feature modifications.

472 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Select Download next to the desired firmware version.

7. For installation instructions, go to one of the following support sites:

● One HP printer: Update firmware using a USB flash drive or the Embedded Web Server (EWS)

● Multiple HP printers at one time: Updated firmware using Web Jetadmin

NOTE: To view installation instructions, go to http://www.hp.com/go/futuresmart. Select Upgrade

now, and then select How to perform a firmware update.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer roller.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-15 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6575-000CN Secondary transfer roller with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller 473

 Remove the secondary transfer roller
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer roller.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-96 Open the right door

2. Push in on the blue lever (callout 1) to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then
lower the assembly (callout 2) to the service position.

Figure 5-97 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

474 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slightly lift the left end of the roller shaft (callout 1; near the gear) to release the transfer roller clip.

Figure 5-98 Release the secondary transfer roller clip

4. Slide the right end roller collar (callout 1) to the left to remove the transfer roller.

Figure 5-99 Remove the secondary transfer roller

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 475

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the secondary transfer roller

Follow these steps to install the secondary transfer roller.

1. Insert the right end (white plastic) of the replacement roller into the holder (callout 1), and then push
down on the left end (blue plastic clip; callout 2) until the roller snaps into place.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that both ends of the roller assembly are fully seated in the holders.

Figure 5-100 Install the secondary transfer roller

476 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Close the right door.

Figure 5-101 Close the right door

Removal and replacement: Universal Serial Bus (USB) cover (M522/M553/M554/

M555/E55040)
Learn about removing and replacing the USB port cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-16 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-0214-000CN USB cover

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Universal Serial Bus (USB) cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040) 477
 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-102 Locate the USB cover

478 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-103 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 479

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the USB cover

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

1. Push the cover into the USB port to install it.

Figure 5-104 Install the cover

2. Make sure that the USB cover (callout 1) is fully seated after installing it.

Figure 5-105 Check the installation

480 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M522/M553/
M554/M555/E55040)
Learn about removing and replacing the hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-17 Part information

Part number Part description

RC5-1812-000CN HIP cover

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.

Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040) 481
 1. Locate the HIP cover.

Figure 5-106 Locate the HIP cover

2. Before proceeding, take note of the mounting feet (callout 1) and tabs (callout 2) on the HIP cover.

Figure 5-107 Note the mounting feet and tabs

1 2

482 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.

Figure 5-108 Release the cover

4. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-109 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 483

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.

1. Position the HIP cover mounting feed in the slots (callout 1) provided in the top cover, and then
rotate it down to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the cover snap into place.

Figure 5-110 Install the cover

484 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Make sure that the HIP cover is fully seated after installing it.

Figure 5-111 Check the installation

Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M577/M578/

E57540)
Learn about removing and replacing the hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-18 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-40021 HIP cover

Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover (M577/M578/E57540) 485
 Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.

1. Locate the HIP cover.

Figure 5-112 Locate the HIP cover

486 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.

Figure 5-113 Release the cover

3. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-114 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 487

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.

1. Position the tabs (callout 1) on the HIP cover in the slots (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-115 Position the cover

488 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Rotate the cover down.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the cover snap into place.

Figure 5-116 Install the cover

3. Make sure that the HIP cover is fully seated after installing it.

Figure 5-117 Check the installation

Removal and replacement: Control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the control panel.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

Removal and replacement: Control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 489

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-19 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-6064-000CN HDMI cble for the 4.3 on control panel (M553x/E55040)

K0Q15-67904 Kit - control panel 4.3 inch CLJ M555

Required tools
● Reversible small, flat-blade screwdriver and #2 Phillips screwdriver (included with the control panel)

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel. For more information, see the control
panel checks section of the printer troubleshooting manual.

1. Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

490 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-118 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-119 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 491

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-120 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-121 Remove two screws

492 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-122 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-123 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 493

 Figure 5-124 Disconnect two connectors

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

494 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Install the control-panel assembly
Follow these steps to install the control-panel assembly.

NOTE: The figures in this procedure show the M553x printer. The M555 control panel uses a flat cable
to connect to the formatter. However, installing the control panel is similar to the following procedure.

1. Place the control panel on the printer as shown.

Figure 5-125 Place the control panel on the product

2. Connect one USB cable (callout 1), and one connector (callout 2).

NOTE: M555 only: Connect one flat cable (not shown).

TIP: Take note of the location of the two mounting tabs (callout 3) on the control-panel assembly.

Figure 5-126 Connect two connectors

Install the control-panel assembly 495

 3. Turn the control panel over, and then position the front edge tabs (callout 1) in the slots in the top
cover.

Figure 5-127 Turn the control panel over

4. Rotate the control-panel base down onto the printer.

Figure 5-128 Rotate the control-panel base down

5. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to install two screws (callout 1).

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

496 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-129 Install two screws

6. Position the screw cover mounting feet into the slots in the top cover (callout 1), and then rotate the
cover down (callout 2) to install it.

NOTE: Press down on the cover firmly to make sure that the tabs on the cover (callout 3) snap into
place.

Figure 5-130 Install the cover

Removal and replacement: Control panel (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the control panel (MFP).

View a video on how to replace the control panel

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Removal and replacement: Control panel (M577/M578/E57540) 497

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-20 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-67018 Control panel and reversible screwdriver with instruction guide

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel. For more information, see the control
panel checks section of the printer troubleshooting manual.

1. Remove the control-panel cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel cover (MFP).

1. Open the document feeder (callout 1).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops (callout 2).

Figure 5-131 Open the document feeder

498 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Beginning at the right side of the control-panel cover, carefully release five tabs along the top edge
of the cover.

NOTE: The thin, black plastic cover will separate from the white plastic control-panel base.

Figure 5-132 Release five tabs

3. Continue to lift the top edge of the cover away from the printer, and then remove the cover.

Figure 5-133 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel (MFP).

1. Flow models: Open the latch (callout 1) to release the keyboard flat cable.

CAUTION: The latch must be opened to release the cable.

Remove the control panel (MFP) 499

 Figure 5-134 Disconnect the keyboard flat cable (flow models)

2. Disconnect one HDMI cable (callout 1) and one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-135 Disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB cable (callout 1) from the holder.

Flow models: Release four tabs (callout 2), and then remove the near-field communication (NFC)
printed circuit board.

500 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-136 Disconnect connectors

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

TIP: The screwdriver (supplied with the kit) has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the
handle, and then reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-137 Remove three screws

Remove the control panel (MFP) 501

 5. Lift the front of the control panel off of the printer (callout 1), and then slide it towards the front of
the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-138 Remove the control panel

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

502 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Install the control panel (MFP)
Follow these steps to install the control panel (MFP).

1. Flow models: Open the latch (callout 1) to release the keyboard flat cable.

CAUTION: The latch must be opened to release the cable.

Figure 5-139 Disconnect the keyboard flat cable (flow models)

2. Flow models: Make sure to feed the keyboard flat cable (callout 1) through the opening (callout 2) in
the control-panel base when installing the control panel.

Figure 5-140 Feed the keyboard flat cable through opening

Install the control panel (MFP) 503

 3. Locate the four hooks on the printer and matching slots in the control-panel base (callout 1). The
hooks fit into the slots (callout 2) when the assembly is installed.

NOTE: Make sure that the grounding clip (callout 3) is on top of the assembly base when it is
installed.

Figure 5-141 Locate hooks and grounding clip

4. Position the rear edge of the control panel in the printer (callout 1), and then lower the front edge
down (callout 2) to install it.

NOTE: If the control panel is difficult to install, make sure that the hooks, slots, and grounding clip
are correctly engaged. See the previous step.

Figure 5-142 Install the control panel

504 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Install three screws (callout 1), making sure that the grounding clip is correctly installed (callout 2).

NOTE: The screwdriver (supplied with the kit) has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of
the handle and then reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-143 Install three screws

Install the control panel (MFP) 505

 6. Connect one HDMI cable (callout 1), and one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-144 Connect connectors

1
2

7. Install the USB cable (callout 1) in the holder.

NOTE: NFC models only: Install the near-field communication (NFC) printed circuit board under the
four tabs (callout 2).

506 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-145 Install USB and NFC

2
1

8. Flow models: Position the keyboard flat cable in the connector, and then close the latch (callout 1).

NOTE: Slightly tug on the cable to make sure that it is fully captured in the connector.

Figure 5-146 Connect the keyboard flat cable

Install the control panel (MFP) 507

 5. Install the control-panel cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to install the control-panel cover (MFP).

1. Position the control-panel cover on the printer.

Figure 5-147 Install the cover

2. Beginning at the left side of the control-panel cover, carefully push down along the top edge of the
cover to engage five tabs.

Figure 5-148 Engage five tabs

3. Close the document feeder.

NOTE: Adjust the control panel to the desired angle.

508 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-149 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow models)

Learn about removing and replacing the keyboard.

Introduction

View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-21 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-67019 US English Keyboard Kit

B5L47-67020 UK English Keyboard Kit

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) 509

 Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the control-panel cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel cover (MFP).

1. Open the document feeder (callout 1).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops (callout 2).

Figure 5-150 Open the document feeder

2. Beginning at the right side of the control-panel cover, carefully release five tabs along the top edge
of the cover.

NOTE: The thin, black plastic cover will separate from the white plastic control-panel base.

510 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-151 Release five tabs

3. Continue to lift the top edge of the cover away from the printer, and then remove the cover.

Figure 5-152 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard.

1. Open the latch (callout 1) to release the keyboard flat cable.

CAUTION: The latch must be opened to release the cable.

Remove the keyboard (MFP) 511

 Figure 5-153 Disconnect the keyboard flat cable

2. Slide the keyboard tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-154 Slide the keyboard out

512 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Push up on the keyboard tray to release two tabs on the bottom of the tray, and then slide the tray
toward the front of the printer to disengage the tabs.

Figure 5-155 Release two tabs

4. Slide the keyboard (callout 1) all of the way out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-156 Remove the keyboard

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 513

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the control panel (MFP)

Follow these steps to install the keyboard.

1. Position the flat cable (callout 1) on the keyboard into the keyboard slot (callout 2).

Figure 5-157 Install the flat cable through the slot

2
1

514 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Slide the keyboard tray into the slot.

NOTE: Only slide the tray halfway into the opening. This makes connecting the cable in the next
step easier.

Figure 5-158 Slide the keyboard into the slot

3. If the flat cable (callout 1) is not in the opening (callout 2) in the control panel base, carefully reach in
and thread the flat cable through the opening.

Figure 5-159 Check the flat cable

4. Position the keyboard flat cable in the connector, and then close the connector latch.

IMPORTANT: Slightly tug on the cable to make sure that it is fully captured in the connector.

NOTE: When the connector latch is closed and the cable is correctly installed, the white line on
the cable is parallel to the connector latch.

Install the control panel (MFP) 515

 Figure 5-160 Install the keyboard

Install the control-panel cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to install the control-panel cover (MFP).

1. Position the control-panel cover on the printer.

Figure 5-161 Install the cover

516 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Beginning at the left side of the control-panel cover, carefully push down along the top edge of the
cover to engage five tabs.

Figure 5-162 Engage five tabs

3. Close the document feeder.

NOTE: Adjust the control panel to the desired angle.

Figure 5-163 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: White backing (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Removal and replacement: White backing (M577/M578/E57540) 517

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-22 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7740 White backing kit with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the white backing (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the white backing.

518 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the document feeder.

Figure 5-164 Open the document feeder

2. Remove the white backing.

Figure 5-165 Remove the white backing

3. One or more of the retention clips (callout 1) that fit in the openings (callout 2) in the document
feeder might remain attached to the white backing when it is removed. If this happens, remove the
clip from the white backing.

NOTE: If none of the retention clips remain attached to the white backing, skip the remaining sub-
steps in this removal procedure.

Remove the white backing (MFP) 519

 Figure 5-166 Check the retention clips

4. If a spring comes off of a retention clip, make sure that it is correctly repositioned on the clip.

NOTE: If any of the retention clips or springs are damaged, replace them with the clips supplied in
the kit.

Figure 5-167 Check the retention clip spring

520 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 5. Install the clip (callout 1) in the opening (callout 2) in the document feeder.

Figure 5-168 Install the retention clip

6. Press the clip to make sure it is securely installed.

Figure 5-169 Press the retention clip

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 521

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the white backing (MFP)

Follow these steps to install the white backing.

1. Open the document feeder, and then place the replacement white backing on the flatbed scanner
glass, as shown.

NOTE: Place the corner of the backing that does not have a hook-and-loop fastener in the upper-
left corner of the scanner glass.

522 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-170 Install the white backing

2. Close the document feeder.

Figure 5-171 Close the document feeder

Install the white backing (MFP) 523

 3. Open the document feeder and make sure that the white backing is securely attached.

Figure 5-172 Check the white backing

4. Close the document feeder.

Figure 5-173 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: Retention clips (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing retention clips.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

524 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-23 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-6573 Retention clips kit with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the retention clips (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the white backing retention clips.

Remove the retention clips (MFP) 525

 1. Open the document feeder.

Figure 5-174 Open the document feeder

2. Remove the white backing.

Figure 5-175 Remove the white backing

3. If any of the retention clips (callout 1) remain attached to the white backing remove them. Check to
see if any clips remain attached to the document feeder (callout 2).

NOTE: If none of the retention clips remain attached to the white backing, proceed to the next
step.

526 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-176 Check the retention clips

4. Remove any damaged retention clips from the document feeder.

TIP: Use the edge of a coin to loosen the clip.

Figure 5-177 Loosen damaged clips

Remove the retention clips (MFP) 527

 5. Remove the retention clip (callout 1).

Figure 5-178 Remove the retention clip

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

528 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the retention clips (MFP)

Follow these steps to install the white backing retention clips.

1. If a spring comes off of a retention clip, make sure that it is correctly repositioned on the clip.

Figure 5-179 Check the retention clip spring

2. Install the clip (callout 1) in the opening (callout 2) in the document feeder. Repeat this step until all of
the retention clips are installed.

Figure 5-180 Install the retention clip

Install the retention clips (MFP) 529

 3. Press the clip to make sure it is securely installed. Repeat this step until all of the retention clips are
secure.

Figure 5-181 Press the retention clip

4. Place the white backing, on the flatbed scanner glass as shown.

NOTE: Place the corner of the backing that does not have a hook-and-loop fastener in the upper-
left corner of the scanner glass.

Figure 5-182 Install the white backing

530 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Close the document feeder.

Figure 5-183 Close the document feeder

6. Open the document feeder and make sure that the white backing is securely attached.

Figure 5-184 Check the white backing

Install the retention clips (MFP) 531

 7. Close the document feeder.

Figure 5-185 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-24 Part information

Part number Part description

W5U23-67901 ADF maintenance kit with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

532 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document-feeder jam access door.

Figure 5-186 Open the document-feeder jam access door

Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly 533

 2. Release the blue locking arm.

Figure 5-187 Release the blue locking arm

3. Slide the pickup and feed roller assembly to the left (callout 1), and then pull it away from the
document feeder (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-188 Remove the roller assembly

Remove the separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the separation roller.

534 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Rotate the top edge of the separation roller cover away from the printer to release it.

Figure 5-189 Release the separation roller cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-190 Remove the cover

Remove the separation roller 535

 3. Slide the separation roller to the left, and then lift it up and away from the document feeder to
remove it.

Figure 5-191 Remove the roller

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

536 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the separation roller

Follow these steps to install the separation roller.

1. Lower the separation roller into the document feeder, and then slide it to the right to install it.

Figure 5-192 Install the roller

2. Position the bottom edge of the separation roller cover on the printer.

Figure 5-193 Position the separation roller cover

Install the separation roller 537

 3. Rotate the cover down to close it.

Figure 5-194 Close the separation roller cover

4. The roller might seem loose until the cover is snapped closed. The cover helps hold the roller in
place.

Figure 5-195 Snap the cover closed

Install the pickup and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to install the pickup and feed roller assembly.

538 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Position the pickup and feed roller assembly in the document feeder (callout 1), and then slide the
assembly to the right (callout 2) to install it.

Figure 5-196 Install the roller assembly

2. Close the blue locking arm.

Figure 5-197 close the blue locking arm

Install the pickup and feed roller assembly 539

 3. Close the document-feeder jam access door.

Figure 5-198 Close the document-feeder jam access door

540 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts are parts that a customer replaces without assistance from a field
technician. These parts might require the use of tools.

Removal and replacement: Fixed tray guide kit

Learn about removing and replacing the fixed tray guide kit.

NOTE: The procedure in this section shows Tray 2 in the figures. However, this procedure is also
correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-25 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7708 Fixed tray guide kit with instruction guide

NOTE: The kit includes four length guide locks, four width guide locks,
and eight screws. Only one kit is required per printer.

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories 541

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-199 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-200 Remove the tray

Install the fixed tray guide

Learn about installing the fixed tray guide.

1. Identify the kit components.

● Callout 1: Width guide lock

542 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● Callout 2: Length guide lock

● Callout 3: Screws (self tapping)

Figure 5-201 Identify kit components

X4 X4 X8
1 2 3
2. Adjust the sliding tray paper width guide to the A4/8.5 setting.

Figure 5-202 Adjust the tray paper width guide

A4/8.5

Install the fixed tray guide 543

 3. Install the width guide lock over the width guide in the tray.

Figure 5-203 Install the width guide lock

4. Install one screw to secure the lock in place.

CAUTION: Do not use a power screwdriver to install the screw.

NOTE: Verify that the tray paper width guide is set to the A4/8.5 setting.

Figure 5-204 Install one screw

8.5 A4

544 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Adjust the sliding tray paper length guide to the A4/11 setting.

Figure 5-205 Adjust the tray paper length guide

A4/11

6. To install the length guide lock on the length guide in the tray, do the following:

a. Position the hooked end of the lock under the rear edge of the length guide (as shown).

Figure 5-206 Install the length guide lock (1 of 2)

b. Rotate the lock down and onto the length guide.

Install the fixed tray guide 545

 Figure 5-207 Install the length guide lock (2 of 2)

7. Verify that the lock is correctly installed on the length guide. The lock mounting screw hole must
align with the hole in the guide.

IMPORTANT: If the hole in the lock and the guide are not aligned, remove the lock and reinstall it.

Figure 5-208 Check length guide installation

8. Install one screw to secure the lock in place.

CAUTION: Do not use a power screwdriver to install the screw.

NOTE: Reinstall the tray.

546 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-209 Install one screw

Removal and replacement: Tray 2-X paper pickup roller and separation roller
assemblies
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: The procedure in this section shows Tray 2 in the figures. However, this procedure is also
correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-26 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6577-000CN Kit-Tray 2-X roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2-X paper pickup roller and separation roller assemblies 547
 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-210 Pull the tray out

548 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-211 Remove the tray

3. Open the right door.

Figure 5-212 Open the right door

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 549

 4. Carefully raise the transfer roller assembly up and into the printer.

Figure 5-213 Raise the transfer roller assembly

5. Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-214 Lower the paper guide

550 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 5-215 Locate the tray pickup roller

7. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the latch (callout 1), and then open the right door (callout 2).

Figure 5-216 Open the Tray 3, 4, or 5 right door

2 1

Remove the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 551

 8. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Release the green handle (callout 1), and then lower the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-217 Lower the Tray 3, 4, or 5 paper guide

9. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Locate the tray pickup roller assembly.

Figure 5-218 Locate the Tray 3, 4, or 5 pickup roller assembly

10. Slide the assembly to the left to compress the spring loaded shaft (callout 1), and then rotate the
right end of the assembly down and away from the printer (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to access the roller through the tray cavity, while viewing it through the right
door opening.

552 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-219 Slide the assembly to the left

2
1

11. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 5-220 Remove the roller assembly

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller

Learn about removing the Tray 2-X separation roller.

Remove the Tray 2-X separation roller 553

 1. Locate the tray separation roller.

Figure 5-221 Locate the roller assembly

2. Push up on the blue label to release the roller assembly.

Figure 5-222 Push up on the blue label

554 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the roller assembly straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-223 Remove the roller assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 555

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the Tray 2-X separation roller

Learn about installing the Tray 2-X separation roller.

1. Slide the roller assembly straight into the tray to install it.

Figure 5-224 Install the roller assembly

2. Make sure that the roller assembly is fully seated.

Figure 5-225 Fully seat the roller assembly

556 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Verify that the roller assembly is correctly installed—it should be firmly attached to the tray.

Figure 5-226 Check the installation

Install the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about installing the Tray 2-X rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the mounting tab (callout 1) on the replacement roller assembly.

IMPORTANT: When correctly installed, a black-plastic protrusion in the printer fits into this tab to
hold the roller in the upright position.

Install the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 557

 Figure 5-227 Note the mounting tab

2. Position the roller assembly in the printer with the spring loaded shaft compressed (callout 1), and
then rotate the right end of the assembly up and into the printer (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to access the roller through the tray cavity, while viewing it through the right
door opening.

Figure 5-228 Position the roller assembly in the printer

1 2

558 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Carefully release the spring loaded shaft (callout 1) with the roller in place. The collar (callout 2) on
the assembly fits over the bushing (callout 3) in the printer.

Figure 5-229 Release the spring loaded shaft

4. Make sure that the roller assembly is correctly installed. It must not hang down into the tray cavity.
If the roller hangs down into the tray cavity, remove it, and then reinstall it.

CAUTION: If the roller assembly is not correctly installed, it will be damaged when the tray is
installed

Figure 5-230 Verify the roller installation

Install the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 559

 5. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Raise the paper guide.

Figure 5-231 Raise the Tray 3, 4, or 5 paper guide

6. Trays 3, 4, or 5 only: Close the right door.

Figure 5-232 Close the Tray 3, 4, or 5 right door

560 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Close the right door.

Figure 5-233 Close the right door

8. With the front of the tray slightly lifted, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the printer, and
then carefully slide the tray into the printer.

TIP: As the tray slides into the printer, lower the front of it.

Figure 5-234 Install the tray

Install the Tray 2-X paper pickup roller assembly 561

 9. Close the tray.

Figure 5-235 Close the tray

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

This document provides instructions about removing and replacing the intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
assembly.

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the Intermediate transfer belt.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

To order a replacement assembly, use the table below to identify the correct part number for your
printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 5-27 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6576-000CN Intermediate transfer belt assembly

B5L24-69001 Intermediate transfer belt assembly (refurbished)

Required tools
No special tools are required to install this assembly.

562 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the ITB.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-236 Open the right door

2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-237 Release the ITB drive coupling

Remove the ITB 563

 3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

Figure 5-238 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-239 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

564 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-240 Place the spring on the holder

6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-241 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Remove the ITB 565

 Figure 5-242 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

Figure 5-243 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

566 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-244 Remove the ITB

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Install the ITB

Follow these steps to install the ITB.

Unpack the replacement assembly 567

 1. Hold the ITB by the orange handles.

Figure 5-245 Handle the ITB by the edges

2. Align the ITB with the slots in the printer, and then carefully push it into the printer.

NOTE: Be careful. Do not dislodge the ITB retainer springs from the holders on the chassis. The
springs can interfere with installing the ITB.

Figure 5-246 Align the ITB with the slots in the product

3. Continue to carefully push the ITB into the printer until it the orange handles stop it.

Figure 5-247 Orange handles stop

568 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-248 Release one tab

5. Remove the orange handle. Repeat this step for the remaining orange handle.

TIP: HP recommends recycling the plastic handles.

Figure 5-249 Remove the orange handle

6. Continue to carefully push the ITB into the printer until it is fully installed.

Figure 5-250 Install the ITB

Install the ITB 569

 7. Remove the right-side ITB spring from the holder.

Figure 5-251 Remove the spring from the holder

8. Fasten the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) under the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-252 Fasten the rear-side ITB spring

9. Remove the left-side ITB spring from the holder.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-253 Remove the spring from the holder

570 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

10. Fasten the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) under the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-254 Fasten the front-side ITB spring

11. Push in the blue lever to engage the ITB drive coupling.

IMPORTANT: If the ITB drive coupling is not fully engaged, the right door will not properly close.

Figure 5-255 Engage the ITB drive coupling

12. Close the right door.

TIP: The right door should close easily if the ITB assembly is correctly installed.

Install the ITB 571

 Figure 5-256 Close the right door

572 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Document feeder / scanner
Learn about document feeder and scanner parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the document feeder (MFP).

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the document feeder.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-28 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-67906 Kit - ADF whole unit Enterprise

B5L47-67907 Kit - ADF whole unit Workflow

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip.

● Small flat-blade screwdriver.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to make a copy to make sure that it is properly functioning.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Document feeder / scanner 573

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-257 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-258 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

574 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-259 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-260 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-261 Slide the cover right

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 575

 4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-262 Remove the cover

3. Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-263 Release one tab

576 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-264 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-265 Remove the left upper cover

4. Remove the document feeder (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (MFP).

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

TIP: This is a self-tapping screw for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the screw counterclockwise
to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not
overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the screw hole.

Remove the document feeder (MFP) 577

 Figure 5-266 Remove one screw

2. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-267 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to release the grounding
cable, and then disconnect all of the connectors (callout 3) on the scanner control board.

TIP: There are eight wire-harness connectors, two flat cables, and one high-definition multimedia
interface (HDMI) cable connector.

Figure 5-268 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors

578 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1) from the formatter, and then release three black cables
through the opening (callout 2) in the formatter case.

Figure 5-269 Disconnect three connectors

5. Open the document feeder.

Figure 5-270 Open the document feeder

6. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops (callout 1), and then lift it off of the scanner until it stops
(callout 2).

Figure 5-271 Raise the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (MFP) 579

 7. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs on
the document feeder hinges.

Figure 5-272 Release two tabs

8. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.

NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the wire harnesses and the flat cable
through the opening in the scanner.

Figure 5-273 Remove the document feeder

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

580 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

6. Install the white backing (MFP)

Follow these steps to install the white backing (MFP).

IMPORTANT: When a replacement image scanner or document feeder is installed, make sure to
install a replacement white backing (supplied with the image scanner or document feeder).

1. Open the document feeder, and then place the replacement white backing on the flatbed scanner
glass, as shown.

NOTE: Place the corner of the backing that does not have a hook-and-loop fastener in the upper-
left corner of the scanner glass.

If any of the retention clips or springs on the document feeder are damaged, replace them with
the clips supplied in white backing kit (part number 5851-7740).

Install the white backing (MFP) 581

 Figure 5-274 Install the white backing

2. Close the document feeder.

Figure 5-275 Close the document feeder

3. Open the document feeder and make sure that the white backing is securely attached.

Figure 5-276 Check the white backing

7. Reset the firmware counter

Follow these steps to reset the firmware counter.

582 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. From the Home screen on the control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button.

2. Scroll to and touch the Service button.

3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for this printer: 11057715.

5. Scroll to and touch the Cycle Counts Item.

6. Reset the following items:

● Document Feeder Kit Interval; set to zero

● ADF Count; set to zero

Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the scanner control board (SCB).

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the scanner control board.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-29 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-67903 Scanner control board kit with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required for this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (M577/M578/E57540) 583

 Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-277 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-278 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

584 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-279 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-280 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 585

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-281 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-282 Remove the cover

3. Remove the scanner control board (SCB)

Follow these steps to Remove the scanner control board (SCB).

1. Disconnect all of the connectors (callout 1) from the SCB.

TIP: There are eight wire-harness connectors, two flat cables, and one high-definition multimedia
interface (HDMI) cable connector.

586 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-283 Disconnect all of the connectors

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1) from the formatter, and then release three black cables
through the opening (callout 2) in the formatter case.

Figure 5-284 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-285 Remove two screws

Remove the scanner control board (SCB) 587

 4. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2) , and then lower the SCB (callout 3) .

Figure 5-286 Slide the SCB out

5. Rotate the SCB up and out of the printer. Make sure that the heat sink (callout 1) on the SCB does
not get caught on the edge of the sheet metal (callout 2).

Figure 5-287 Remove the SCB

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

588 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the image scanner.

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the image scanner.

Mean time to repair: 35 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-30 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-67904 Image scanner whole unit assembly

Removal and replacement: Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) 589

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver.

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page, and then make a copy using the flatbed glass to make sure that it is properly
functioning.

Print a configuration page, and then make a copy using the document feeder to make sure that it is
properly functioning.

1. Remove the control-panel cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel cover (MFP).

1. Open the document feeder (callout 1).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops (callout 2).

Figure 5-288 Open the document feeder

2. Beginning at the right side of the control-panel cover, carefully release five tabs along the top edge
of the cover.

NOTE: The thin, black plastic cover will separate from the white plastic control-panel base.

590 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-289 Release five tabs

3. Continue to lift the top edge of the cover away from the printer, and then remove the cover.

Figure 5-290 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (flow models)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (flow models).

1. Open the latch (callout 1) to release the keyboard flat cable.

CAUTION: The latch must be opened to release the cable.

Remove the keyboard (flow models) 591

 Figure 5-291 Disconnect the keyboard flat cable

2. Slide the keyboard tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-292 Slide the keyboard out

3. Push up on the keyboard tray to release two tabs on the bottom of the tray, and then slide the tray
toward the front of the printer to disengage the tabs.

Figure 5-293 Release two tabs

592 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Slide the keyboard (callout 1) all of the way out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-294 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the control panel (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel (MFP).

1. Flow models: Open the latch (callout 1) to release the keyboard flat cable.

CAUTION: The latch must be opened to release the cable.

Figure 5-295 Disconnect the keyboard flat cable (flow models)

Remove the control panel (MFP) 593

 2. Disconnect one HDMI cable (callout 1) and one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-296 Disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB cable (callout 1) from the holder.

Flow models: Release four tabs (callout 2), and then remove the near-field communication (NFC)
printed circuit board.

Figure 5-297 Disconnect connectors

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

TIP: The screwdriver (supplied with the kit) has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the
handle, and then reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

594 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-298 Remove three screws

5. Lift the front of the control panel off of the printer (callout 1), and then slide it towards the front of
the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-299 Remove the control panel

4. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 595

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-300 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-301 Loosen the thumbscrews

5. Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

596 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-302 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-303 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-304 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 597

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-305 Remove the fax PCA

6. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-306 Remove two screws

598 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-307 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-308 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-309 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 599

 7. Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-310 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-311 Slide the cover back

600 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-312 Remove the left upper cover

8. Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-313 Remove one screw

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 601
 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-314 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-315 Rotate the cover

9. Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

602 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-316 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-317 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 603

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-318 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-319 Remove the cover

10. Remove the document feeder (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (MFP).

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

TIP: This is a self-tapping screw for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the screw counterclockwise
to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not
overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the screw hole.

604 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-320 Remove one screw

2. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-321 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to release the grounding
cable, and then disconnect all of the connectors (callout 3) on the scanner control board.

TIP: There are eight wire-harness connectors, two flat cables, and one high-definition multimedia
interface (HDMI) cable connector.

Figure 5-322 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors

Remove the document feeder (MFP) 605

 4. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1) from the formatter, and then release three black cables
through the opening (callout 2) in the formatter case.

Figure 5-323 Disconnect three connectors

5. Open the document feeder.

Figure 5-324 Open the document feeder

6. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops (callout 1), and then lift it off of the scanner until it stops
(callout 2).

Figure 5-325 Raise the document feeder

606 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs on
the document feeder hinges.

Figure 5-326 Release two tabs

8. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.

NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the wire harnesses and the flat cable
through the opening in the scanner.

Figure 5-327 Remove the document feeder

11. Remove the scanner control board (SCB) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the scanner control board (SCB) (MFP).

Remove the scanner control board (SCB) (MFP) 607

 1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-328 Remove two screws

2. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2) , and then lower the SCB (callout 3) .

Figure 5-329 Slide the SCB out

3. Rotate the SCB up and out of the printer. Make sure that the heat sink (callout 1) on the SCB does
not get caught on the edge of the sheet metal (callout 2).

Figure 5-330 Remove the SCB

608 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

12. Remove the image scanner assembly (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the image scanner assembly (MFP).

1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-331 Disconnect cables and connectors

2. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-332 Remove one screw

Remove the image scanner assembly (MFP) 609

 3. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-333 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-334 Remove one screw

5. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-335 Release the image scanner

610 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Lift the image scanner straight up to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Replacement image scanner kit: Make sure to install the keyboard cover (non-
flow models) supplied with the image scanner.

Figure 5-336 Remove the image scanner

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 611

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

612 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: External panels, covers, and doors
(base printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the printer external panels, covers, and doors.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2

Learn about removing and replacing Tray 2.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-31 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0007-020CN Tray 2

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Removal and replacement: External panels, covers, and doors (base printer) 613
 Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-337 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

614 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-338 Remove the tray

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 615

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler cover assembly (M577/M578/E57540 stapler

models)
Learn about removing and replacing the stapler cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-32 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-60121 Stapler cover assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

616 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-339 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-340 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 617

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-341 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-342 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

618 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right front upper cover (M577/M578/E57540 non-

stapler models)
Learn about removing and replacing the right front upper cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-33 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-40024 Right front upper cover

Removal and replacement: Right front upper cover (M577/M578/E57540 non-stapler models) 619
 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-343 Remove one screw

620 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-344 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-345 Rotate the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 621

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear upper cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-34 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3385-000CN Rear upper cover

622 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-346 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 623

 Figure 5-347 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-348 Remove two screws

624 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-349 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-350 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-351 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 625

 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the left upper cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

626 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-35 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3384-000CN Left upper cover

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-352 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 627

 Figure 5-353 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-354 Remove two screws

628 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-355 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-356 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-357 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 629

 Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-358 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-359 Slide the cover back

630 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-360 Remove the left upper cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 631

 Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (M577/M578/E57540)
Learn about removing and replacing the right upper cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-36 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3386-000CN Right upper cover

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

632 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-361 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-362 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 633

 Figure 5-363 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-364 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-365 Slide the cover right

634 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-366 Remove the cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-367 Remove one screw

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 635
 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-368 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-369 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

636 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-370 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-371 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 637

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-372 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-373 Remove the cover

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

638 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-374 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-375 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 639

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-376 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-377 Remove the cover

1
2

640 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 5. M577/M578z: Release two retainers on the bottom side of the cover.

Figure 5-378 Release two retainers

6. M577/M578z: On the top of the cover, release the wires (callout 1) from the guides (callout 2) in the
right upper cover.

NOTE: Set the wire harness aside for installation on the replacement right upper cover.

Figure 5-379 Remove the wire harness

1 2

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 641

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the top rear cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

642 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-37 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3383-000CN Top rear cover

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-380 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 643

 Figure 5-381 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-382 Remove two screws

644 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-383 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-384 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-385 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 645

 Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-386 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-387 Slide the cover back

646 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-388 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-389 Remove one screw

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 647
 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-390 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-391 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

648 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-392 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-393 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 649

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-394 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-395 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

650 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-396 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-397 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 651

 Figure 5-398 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-399 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

652 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-400 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-401 Release the image scanner

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 653

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-402 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-403 Remove two screws and one connector

654 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-404 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-405 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 655

 Figure 5-406 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-407 Remove five screws

656 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-408 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-409 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 657

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper feed cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feed cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-38 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3382-000CN Paper feed cover

658 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-410 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 659

 Figure 5-411 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-412 Remove two screws

660 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-413 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-414 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-415 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 661

 Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-416 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-417 Slide the cover back

662 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-418 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-419 Remove one screw

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 663
 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-420 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-421 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

664 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-422 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-423 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 665

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-424 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-425 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

666 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-426 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-427 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 667

 Figure 5-428 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-429 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

668 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-430 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-431 Release the image scanner

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 669

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-432 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-433 Remove two screws and one connector

670 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-434 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-435 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 671

 Figure 5-436 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-437 Remove five screws

672 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-438 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-439 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 673

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-440 Remove one screw

2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-441 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

674 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the top cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-39 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3381-000CN Top cover

Removal and replacement: Top cover (M577/M578/E57540) 675

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-442 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

676 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-443 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-444 Remove two screws

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 677

 2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-445 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-446 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-447 Remove the cover

678 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-448 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-449 Slide the cover back

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 679

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-450 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-451 Remove one screw

680 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-452 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-453 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 681

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-454 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-455 Release two tabs

682 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-456 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-457 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 683

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-458 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-459 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

684 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-460 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-461 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 685

 Figure 5-462 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-463 Release the image scanner

686 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-464 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-465 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models) 687

 2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-466 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-467 Remove two screws and one connector

688 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-468 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-469 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 689

 Figure 5-470 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-471 Remove five screws

690 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-472 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-473 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 691

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-474 Remove one screw

2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-475 Remove the cover

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

692 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-476 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-477 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 693

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-478 Remove the TCU

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

694 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-479 Remove one screw

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-480 Remove one screw

Remove the top cover (MFP) 695

 3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-481 Release one tab

4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-482 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

696 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door

Learn about removing and replacing the right door.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-40 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0019-010CN Right door

Removal and replacement: Right door 697

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the Right Door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Use the handle (callout 1) to open the right door.

Figure 5-483 Open the right door

698 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Rotate the secondary transfer assembly up and into the printer to move it out of the way.

Figure 5-484 Rotate the secondary transfer assembly up

3. At the right- and left-side of the door, use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the door retainer
straps (callout 1), and then pull them through the slot in the door.

Figure 5-485 Release the door retainer straps

Remove the Right Door 699

 4. Locate a slot (callout 1) near the gear side of the door, push the blade of a small screwdriver into
the slot (callout 2) to release one tab, and then rotate the end of the screwdriver down (callout 3)
release the connector cover (callout 4).

Figure 5-486 Release the connector cover

2 3

5. Remove the connector cover.

Reinstallation tip: When the cover is correctly installed it is flat against the door. If the cover is
incorrectly installed the right door might not properly close.

Figure 5-487 Remove the cover

700 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-488 Disconnect two connectors

7. Remove two screws (callout 1) to release the door arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The door arm is spring loaded. Keep a firm grip on it while removing the screws, and
then carefully move it up and into the printer.

Figure 5-489 Remove two screws

2
1

Remove the Right Door 701

 8. Slide the door toward the front of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then lift it up (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-490 Remove the door

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

702 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn about removing and replacing the front door.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-41 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L25-67901 Front door

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Front door 703

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-491 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-492 Remove the tray

Remove the front door

Follow these steps to remove the front door.

704 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-493 Open the front door

2. At the right- and left-side of the door, release two tabs (callout 1), and then release the door retainer
straps (callout 2).

TIP: Use a pair of needle nose pliers to easily release the tabs.

Figure 5-494 Release the door retainer straps

2 1

Remove the front door 705

 3. Carefully push down on the door to lower it until the keyed hinge pin (callout 1) is aligned with the
slot in the flange, and then slide the door to the right (callout 2) to release the left and right hinge
pins (callout 1 and callout 3).

CAUTION: The keyed hinge pin (callout 1) is fragile, and can easily be broken off.

Make sure that it is correctly aligned with the slot in the flange before attempting to remove the
front door from the printer.

Figure 5-495 Slide the door to the right

1
3

4. Pull the door toward you to release the inner door (callout 1), and then remove the front door.

CAUTION: Hold the inner door (callout 1) in place before releasing it. The inner door is spring
loaded will abruptly close and be damaged if it is not held down.

706 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-496 Remove the door

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 707

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter cover

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-42 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0084-000CN Formatter cover

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

708 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-497 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-498 Loosen the thumbscrews

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 709

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-43 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0085-000CN Rear cover

710 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-499 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 711

 Figure 5-500 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-501 Remove four screws

712 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-502 Remove the cover

1
2

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 713

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-44 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0085-000CN Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

714 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-503 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-504 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 715

 Figure 5-505 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-506 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-507 Slide the cover right

716 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-508 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-509 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 717

 2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-510 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

718 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-45 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-0179-000CN Left cover

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: Left cover 719

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-511 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-512 Open the TCU

720 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-513 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-514 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 721

 Figure 5-515 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-516 Remove four screws

722 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-517 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-518 Remove two screws

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 723

 2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-519 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-520 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-521 Remove the cover

724 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-522 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-523 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 725

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-524 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-525 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-526 Remove the cover

726 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper cover (M553/M555/E55040)

Learn about removing and replacing the upper cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Unpack the replacement assembly 727

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-46 Part information

Part number Part description

RL2-0097-000CN Upper cover (M533x)

RL2-0098-000CN Upper cover (M533x and E55040dw)

RL2-0120-000CN Upper cover (M555 and E55040dn)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

728 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-527 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-528 Remove the cover

Remove the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.

Remove the HIP cover 729

 1. Locate the HIP cover.

Figure 5-529 Locate the HIP cover

2. Before proceeding, take note of the mounting feet (callout 1) and tabs (callout 2) on the HIP cover.

Figure 5-530 Note the mounting feet and tabs

1 2

730 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.

Figure 5-531 Release the cover

4. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-532 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 731

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-533 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-534 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

732 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-535 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-536 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 733

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-537 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-538 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

734 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-539 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-540 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 735

 Figure 5-541 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-542 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

736 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-543 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-544 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 737

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-545 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-546 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

738 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-547 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-548 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-549 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 739

 Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-550 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-551 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

740 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-552 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-553 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 741

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output bin

Learn about removing and replacing the output bin.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-47 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0044-000CN Output bin

742 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-554 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 743

 Figure 5-555 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-556 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

744 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-557 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-558 Locate the USB cover

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 745

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-559 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-560 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

746 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-561 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-562 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 747

 Figure 5-563 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-564 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

748 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-565 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-566 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 749

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-567 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-568 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

750 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-569 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-570 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 751

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-571 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-572 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

752 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-573 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-574 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 753

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-575 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-576 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-577 Remove the cover

754 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-578 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-579 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 755

 Figure 5-580 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-581 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

756 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-582 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-583 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-584 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 757

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-585 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-586 Release two tabs

758 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-587 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-588 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 759

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-589 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-590 Release the back edge of the cover

760 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-591 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-592 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 761

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-593 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-594 Remove one screw

762 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-595 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-596 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 763

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-597 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-598 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

764 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-599 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-600 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 765

 Figure 5-601 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-602 Remove one screw and connector

766 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-603 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-604 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 767

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-605 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-606 Release two tabs

768 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-607 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-608 Remove one screw

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 769

 2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-609 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-610 Remove one screw

770 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-611 Remove one screw

3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-612 Release one tab

Remove the top cover (MFP) 771

 4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-613 Remove the cover

Remove the output bin

Follow these steps to remove the output bin.

1. Slightly slide and lift the cover to release it.

Figure 5-614 Release the cover

772 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-615 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 773

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover (M522/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

Learn about removing and replacing the right rear cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-48 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-0178-000CN Right rear cover

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

774 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-616 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-617 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 775

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-618 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-619 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

776 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-620 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-621 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 777

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-622 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-623 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

778 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-624 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-625 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 779

 Figure 5-626 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-627 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

780 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-628 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-629 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 781

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-630 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-631 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

782 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-632 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-633 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-634 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 783

 Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-635 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-636 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

784 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-637 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-638 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Remove the right rear cover 785

 Figure 5-639 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-640 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

786 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the right rear cover.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-49 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-0178-000CN Right rear cover

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover (M577/M578/E57540) 787

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-641 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

788 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-642 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-643 Remove two screws

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 789

 2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-644 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-645 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-646 Remove the cover

790 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-647 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-648 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 791
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-649 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-650 Remove one screw

792 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-651 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-652 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 793

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-653 Remove the cover

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-654 Remove two screws and one connector

794 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-655 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-656 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 795

 Figure 5-657 Remove the cover

1
2

5. M577/M578z: Release two retainers on the bottom side of the cover.

Figure 5-658 Release two retainers

6. M577/M578z: On the top of the cover, release the wires (callout 1) from the guides (callout 2) in the
right upper cover.

NOTE: Set the wire harness aside for installation on the replacement right upper cover.

796 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-659 Remove the wire harness

1 2

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-660 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 797

 2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-661 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-662 Release the cover

798 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-663 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 799

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel (M552dn/M553n/dn/M554)

Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-50 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7180-000CN Control panel (M552dn and M553n/dn)

RM2-6582-000CN Control panel (M554)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

800 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the USB cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-664 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-665 Remove the cover

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 801

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-666 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-667 Open the TCU

802 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-668 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-669 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 803

 Figure 5-670 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-671 Remove four screws

804 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-672 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-673 Remove one screw

Remove the left cover 805

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-674 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-675 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

806 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-676 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-677 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 807

 Figure 5-678 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-679 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M552dn/M553n/dn/M554 printers only.

The figures in this procedure show the M552/M553 printer. The M554 control panel looks slightly
different than shown below. However, removing the control panel is similar to the following procedure.

808 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-680 Remove one screw

2. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Rotate the near field communication (NFC) PCA
holder up (callout 2), and then slide it to the right (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 5-681 Remove the PCA holder

1
3

Remove the control panel 809

 3. M552/M553: Remove one cable from the guide.

Figure 5-682 Remove one cable

4. M552/M553: Remove four screws (callout 1), and then turn the control panel over (callout 2).

NOTE: M554: Remove any screws fastening the assembly to the printer chassis, and then turn the
control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-683 Remove four screws

5. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M554: Disconnect one flat cable, and then remove the control panel.

810 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-684 Remove the control panel

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 811

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

812 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base
printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the base printer internal parts and assemblies.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 rollers.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-51 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L24-67905 Multipurpose/tray 1 pick-up roller and separation assembly

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup roller.

■ Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller.

Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer) 813
 a. Open Tray 1.

Figure 5-685 Open Tray 1

b. Pull on the center of the cover to open it.

Figure 5-686 Open the roller cover

814 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

c. Pull the cover straight off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-687 Remove the cover

d. Release two tabs (callout 1) between the roller collar and roller, and then rotate the top of the
roller (callout 2) out and away from the printer.

TIP: Pushing down on the top of the roller might make it easier to release the tabs.

Figure 5-688 Release two tabs

2
1

Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller 815

 e. Remove the roller.

Figure 5-689 Remove the roller

Remove the Tray 1 separation roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 separation roller.

■ Remove the Tray 1 separation roller.

a. Carefully flex the right- and left-side tray retainers to release them.

TIP: Raise the tray to the halfway closed position to make it is easier to release the retainers.

Figure 5-690 Release the tray retainers

816 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

b. Carefully raise Tray 1 up into the printer.

Figure 5-691 Raise Tray 1 up

c. Firmly grasp the corners of the separation roller cover, and then rotate it down and away from
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-692 Open the roller cover

d. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the end of the roller out and away from the holder
(callout 2).

TIP: It might be necessary to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to complete this step.

Remove the Tray 1 separation roller 817

 Figure 5-693 Release one tab

e. Slide the roller out of the holder to remove it.

Figure 5-694 Remove the roller

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

818 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer roller.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-52 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0090-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M553n)

RM2-0022-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M552/M553dn/x/M554/M555?M577/

M578/E55040/E57540)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly 819

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the secondary transfer assembly

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-695 Open the right door

2. Release the blue arm, and then let the secondary transfer assembly rotate down to the half-way
open position.

NOTE: The assembly should stop at the halfway down point—the pin will stop at the notch in the
slot in the blue arm.

820 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-696 Release the secondary transfer roller assembly

3. Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm—as shown in the figure—to start to disengage it from
the pin.

Figure 5-697 Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm

Remove the secondary transfer assembly 821

 4. Continue to flex the blue arm until it disengages from the pin.

Figure 5-698 Disengage the blue arm and pin

5. Slide the assembly toward the front of the printer to release it (callout 1), and then rotate it down and
away from the printer to remove it (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the assembly hinge pins fit
into the holes provided in the printer.

Figure 5-699 Remove the secondary transfer roller assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

822 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M553x/E55040)

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary near field communication (NFC) PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-53 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L24-60002 NFC PCA

Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M553x/E55040) 823
 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-700 Locate the USB cover

824 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-701 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/E55040 printers only.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-702 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/E55040) 825

 Figure 5-703 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-704 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

826 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-705 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-706 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/E55040) 827

 Figure 5-707 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-708 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

828 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-709 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-710 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 829

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-711 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-712 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

830 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-713 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-714 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 831

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-715 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-716 Remove one screw

832 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-717 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-718 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 833

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-719 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-720 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

834 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-721 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-722 Remove the cover

Remove the NFC PCA

Follow these steps to remove the NFC PCA.

Remove the NFC PCA 835

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the NFC PCA
(callout 3).

Figure 5-723 Remove the NFC PCA

2
1

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

836 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M577z)

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary near field communication (NFC) PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-54 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L24-60001 NFC PCA

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the NFC

Follow these steps to remove the NFC.

1. Open the document feeder (callout 1).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops (callout 2).

Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (M577z) 837
 Figure 5-724 Open the document feeder

2. Beginning at the right side of the control-panel cover, carefully release five tabs along the top edge
of the cover.

NOTE: The thin, black plastic cover will separate from the white plastic control-panel base.

Figure 5-725 Release five tabs

838 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Continue to lift the top edge of the cover away from the printer, and then remove the cover.

Figure 5-726 Remove the cover

4. Locate the NFC.

Figure 5-727 Locate the NFC

Remove the NFC 839

 5. Release four tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-728 Release four tabs

6. Lift the NFC PCA up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-729 Disconnect one connector

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

840 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Wireless PCA (M553x/M555/M577z/M578/E55040dw)

Learn about removing and replacing the wireless PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-55 Part information

Part number Part description

1150-7968 Wireless PCA (M553/M577)

0960-3659 Wireless PCA/BLE (M555/M578)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

Removal and replacement: Wireless PCA (M553x/M555/M577z/M578/E55040dw) 841

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-730 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-731 Loosen the thumbscrews

842 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-732 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-733 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 843

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-734 Remove the TCU

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

844 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-735 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-736 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 845

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-737 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-738 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

846 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-739 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-740 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 847

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-741 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-742 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

848 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-743 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-744 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 849

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-745 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-746 Remove one screw

850 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-747 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-748 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 851

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-749 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-750 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

852 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-751 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-752 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 853

 Figure 5-753 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-754 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-755 Slide the cover right

854 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-756 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-757 Release one tab

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 855

 2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-758 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-759 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

856 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-760 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-761 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-762 Rotate the cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 857
 Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-763 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-764 Release two tabs

858 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-765 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-766 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 859

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-767 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-768 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

860 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-769 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-770 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 861

 Figure 5-771 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-772 Release the image scanner

862 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-773 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-774 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models) 863

 2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-775 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-776 Remove two screws and one connector

864 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-777 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-778 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 865

 Figure 5-779 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-780 Remove five screws

866 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-781 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-782 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 867

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-783 Remove one screw

2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-784 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

868 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-785 Remove one screw

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-786 Remove one screw

Remove the top cover (MFP) 869

 3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-787 Release one tab

4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-788 Remove the cover

Remove the output bin

Follow these steps to remove the output bin.

870 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Slightly slide and lift the cover to release it.

Figure 5-789 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-790 Remove the cover

Remove the wireless PCA

Follow these steps to remove the wireless PCA.

Remove the wireless PCA 871

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the wireless PCA
(callout 3).

Figure 5-791 Remove the wireless PCA

1
3

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

872 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Switch (SW4) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the switch (SW4) PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-56 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7133-000CN Switch (SW4) PCASwitch (SW4) PCA

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Removal and replacement: Switch (SW4) PCA 873

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-792 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-793 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

874 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-794 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-795 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 875

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-796 Remove the TCU

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

876 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-797 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-798 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 877

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-799 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-800 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

878 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-801 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-802 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 879

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-803 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-804 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

880 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-805 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-806 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 881

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-807 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-808 Remove one screw

882 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-809 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-810 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 883

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-811 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-812 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

884 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-813 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-814 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 885

 Figure 5-815 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-816 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-817 Slide the cover right

886 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-818 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-819 Release one tab

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 887

 2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-820 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-821 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

888 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-822 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-823 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-824 Rotate the cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 889
 Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-825 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-826 Release two tabs

890 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-827 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-828 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 891

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-829 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-830 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

892 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-831 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-832 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 893

 Figure 5-833 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-834 Release the image scanner

894 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-835 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-836 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models) 895

 2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-837 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-838 Remove two screws and one connector

896 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-839 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-840 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 897

 Figure 5-841 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-842 Remove five screws

898 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-843 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-844 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 899

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-845 Remove one screw

2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-846 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

900 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-847 Remove one screw

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-848 Remove one screw

Remove the top cover (MFP) 901

 3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-849 Release one tab

4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-850 Remove the cover

Remove the switch (SW4) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the switch (SW4) PCA.

1. Do the following:

a. If the front and right doors are not already open, open them now.

b. Remove one screw (callout 1).

902 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 c. At the upper left corner (callout 2) of the upper cover, carefully pry the cover to the right to
release it.

d. At the lower left edge (callout 3) of the upper cover, carefully pry the cover to the right to
remove it

NOTE: Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release and remove the cover.

Figure 5-851 Remove the upper cover

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The switch (SW4) PCA cover consists of a left and right cover.

a. Release the right-side door strap (callout 1; squeeze two tabs to release the strap from the
holder on the door).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the left side of the cover (callout 3).

Remove the switch (SW4) PCA 903

 Figure 5-852 Remove the switch left-side cover

3. Do the following:

CAUTION: The door interlocks behind the switch right-side cover are not captive and can be easily
dislodged when handling the cover.

a. Carefully separate the switch right-side cover from the printer chassis.

NOTE: The cover is still attached to the chassis by a strap. Do not attempt to completely
remove the cover.

b. Release the white strap (callout 1) from the lower door interlock (behind the switch right-side
cover).

904 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-853 Release the white strap

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the switch (SW4) PC board assembly switch (callout 1).

Figure 5-854 Remove the switch

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 905

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models)

Learn about removing and replacing the stapler unit.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-57 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-60102 Stapler unit

906 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the convenience stapler to staple two pages together.

Remove the staple cartridge

Follow these steps to remove the staple cartridge.

1. Open the stapler door.

Figure 5-855 Open the stapler door

Remove the staple cartridge 907

 2. Pull the staple cartridge straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-856 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-857 Remove one screw

908 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-858 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-859 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 909

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-860 Remove the cover

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-861 Disconnect connector and remove screws

910 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-862 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 911

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the DC controller (DCC).

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the DC controller.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive
simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable
or inoperable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-58 Part information

Part number Part description

RM3-7450-000CN DC controller (M552, M553, E55040)

RM3-7451-000CN DC controller (M577, E57540)

RM3-8465-000CN DC controller (M554, M555)

RM3-8468-000CN DC controller (M578)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Make sure that all of the connectors on the DC controller are fully seated.

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

912 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-863 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-864 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the formatter cover 913

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-865 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-866 Remove the cover

1
2

3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

914 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-867 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-868 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 915

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-869 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-870 Remove the cover

4. Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

916 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-871 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-872 Remove the cover

5. Remove the DC controller

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.

1. Disconnect 18 connectors on the DC controller. The flat cables will be disconnected in the next
step.

The following connectors are empty:

Remove the DC controller 917

 ● J140, J141, and J143

Reinstallation tip: For DCC replacement installation: Refer to the installation guide included in the
box with a replacement DC controller. Because of manufacturing changes, there is an additional
connector that must be connected or terminated depending on printer model.

Figure 5-873 Disconnect 18 connectors

2. Disconnect five flat cables.

IMPORTANT: One of the flat-cable connectors (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector
that uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release
the flat cable.

Figure 5-874 Disconnect the flat cables

918 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller (callout 2).

Figure 5-875 Remove the DC controller

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 919

 Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the delivery assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-59 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0092-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M553n)

RM2-0016-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M552dn, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555,

E55040dw, E55040dn, M577, M578, E57540)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

920 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-876 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-877 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 921

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-878 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-879 Open the TCU

922 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-880 Remove the TCU

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 923

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-881 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-882 Remove the cover

Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Open the right door.

CAUTION: The fuser is very hot. After turning the printer power off, allow the fuser to cool for at
least 30 minutes before removing it.

924 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-883 Open the right door

2. Grasp the two fuser handles, and then squeeze the two blue triggers on the handles to release the
fuser.

Figure 5-884 Release the fuser

3. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-885 Remove the fuser

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

Remove the ITB 925

 1. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-886 Release the ITB drive coupling

2. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

Figure 5-887 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

3. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

926 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-888 Release the front-side ITB spring

4. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Figure 5-889 Place the spring on the holder

Remove the ITB 927

 5. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-890 Release the rear-side ITB spring

6. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Figure 5-891 Place the spring on the holder

7. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

928 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-892 Grasp the ITB handles

8. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the grey-plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

Figure 5-893 Remove the ITB

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 929

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-894 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-895 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

930 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-896 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-897 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 931

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-898 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-899 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

932 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-900 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-901 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 933

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-902 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-903 Remove one screw

934 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-904 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-905 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 935

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-906 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-907 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

936 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-908 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-909 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M552dn/M553n/dn/M554 printers only.

The figures in this procedure show the M552/M553 printer. The M554 control panel looks slightly
different than shown below. However, removing the control panel is similar to the following procedure.

Remove the control panel 937

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-910 Remove one screw

2. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Rotate the near field communication (NFC) PCA
holder up (callout 2), and then slide it to the right (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 5-911 Remove the PCA holder

1
3

938 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. M552/M553: Remove one cable from the guide.

Figure 5-912 Remove one cable

4. M552/M553: Remove four screws (callout 1), and then turn the control panel over (callout 2).

NOTE: M554: Remove any screws fastening the assembly to the printer chassis, and then turn the
control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-913 Remove four screws

5. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M554: Disconnect one flat cable, and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel 939

 Figure 5-914 Remove the control panel

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-915 Remove two screws

940 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-916 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-917 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-918 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 941

 Remove the left upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-919 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-920 Slide the cover back

942 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-921 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-922 Remove one screw

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 943
 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-923 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-924 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

944 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-925 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-926 Release two tabs

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 945

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-927 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-928 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

946 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-929 Remove one screw

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-930 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 947

 Figure 5-931 Remove one screw

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-932 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

948 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-933 Disconnect connectors

6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-934 Release the image scanner

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 949

 7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-935 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-936 Disconnect connector and remove screws

950 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-937 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-938 Remove two screws and one connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 951

 2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-939 Remove one screw and connector

3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-940 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

952 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-941 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-942 Remove five screws

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 953

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-943 Release two tabs

3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-944 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

954 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-945 Remove one screw

2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-946 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top cover (MFP) 955

 1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-947 Remove one screw

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-948 Remove one screw

956 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-949 Release one tab

4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-950 Remove the cover

Remove the top bracket (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top bracket.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top bracket (MFP) 957

 1. At the top of the printer, remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-951 Remove three screws

2. At the top of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-952 Remove two screws

958 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Lift the top bracket up to remove it.

Figure 5-953 Remove the bracket

Remove the output bin

Follow these steps to remove the output bin.

1. Slightly slide and lift the cover to release it.

Figure 5-954 Release the cover

Remove the output bin 959

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-955 Remove the cover

Remove the delivery assembly

Follow these steps to remove the delivery assembly.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

NOTE: These two screws are the self-tapping type.

Figure 5-956 Remove two screws

960 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. (M553x/M555/E55040): At the top-front-right corner of the printer, disconnect one connector
(callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the near field communication (NFC)
PCA and holder by sliding them to the right (callout 3).

Figure 5-957 Remove the NFC

3
2

3. Release two retainers (callout 1), remove the USB cable (callout 2) from the retainers, and then
disconnect one connector (callout 3).

Figure 5-958 Release two retainers and disconnect one connector

Remove the delivery assembly 961

 4. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-959 Remove four screws

5. Remove the delivery assembly.

CAUTION: The solenoid plunger and arm (callout 1) located on the right side of the assembly are
not captive.

962 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-960 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 963

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the SFP formatter.

Watch a video about formatter installation

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or re-purposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable.

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors.

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.

For more information, see HP LaserJet Enterprise, HP LaserJet Managed, HP PageWide Enterprise, HP
PageWide Managed - 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive
simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable
or inoperable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-60 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L23-67903 Formatter assembly M552dn

B5L23-67904 Formatter assembly M552dn China/India

964 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-60 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

B5L24-67909 Formatter assembly M553n, M553dn, M553dh

B5L24-67908 Formatter assembly M553n, M553dn, M553dh China/India

B5L26-67901 Formatter assembly M553x/E55040

B5L26-67902 Formatter assembly M553x/E55040 China/India

7ZU81-67903 Formatter assembly M554dn

7ZU81-67904 Formatter assembly M554dn China/India

7ZU78-67903 Formatter assembly M555dn

7ZU78-67904 Formatter assembly M555dn China/India

7ZU79-67903 Formatter assembly M555x

7ZU79-67904 Formatter assembly M555x China/India

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 965

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-961 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-962 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

966 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-963 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-964 Remove the HDD

3. Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)

Follow these steps to remove the eMMC.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) 967

 ■ Locate the eMMC component on the formatter, and then pull it straight off of the formatter to remove
it.

Figure 5-965 Remove the eMMC

4. Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Locate the DIMM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-966 Locate the DIMM

968 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Pull the DIMM straight off of the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-967 Remove the DIMM

5. Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: Removing the TPM is only necessary for formatter or TPM accessory replacement.

1. Locate the TPM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-968 Locate the TPM

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) 969

 2. Pull the TPM straight off of the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-969 Remove the TPM

6. Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

970 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-970 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-971 Remove four screws

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 971

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (M577/M578/E57540)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the MFP formatter.

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the formatter.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

972 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or re-purposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable.

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors.

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.

For more information, see HP LaserJet Enterprise, HP LaserJet Managed, HP PageWide Enterprise, HP
PageWide Managed - 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and hard-disk drive simultaneously during a
single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-61 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L46-67909 Formatter assembly M577, E57540

B5L46-67911 Formatter assembly M577, E57540 China/India

7ZU85-67903 Formatter assembly M578

7ZU85-67904 Formatter assembly M578 China/India

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (M577/M578/E57540) 973

 Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-972 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-973 Loosen the thumbscrews

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

974 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-974 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-975 Remove the HDD

3. Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 975

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-976 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-977 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-978 Release one latch

976 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-979 Remove the fax PCA

4. Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Locate the DIMM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-980 Locate the DIMM

2. Do the following:

a. Release two locking arms (callout 1).

Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) 977

 Figure 5-981 Release the DIMM

b. Pull the DIMM down and away from the holder to remove it.

Figure 5-982 Remove the DIMM

5. Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

978 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-983 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-984 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (MFP) 979

 3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-985 Remove the formatter

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

980 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the formatter case assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-62 Part information

Part number Part description

Not orderable Formatter case assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly 981

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-986 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-987 Open the TCU

982 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-988 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-989 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 983

 Figure 5-990 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

984 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-991 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-992 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 985

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-993 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-994 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

986 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-995 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-996 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-997 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 987

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-998 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

988 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-999 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1000 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1001 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 989

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1002 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1003 Remove the cover

1
2

990 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1004 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1005 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 991

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1006 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1007 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

992 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1008 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1009 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 993

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1010 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1011 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1012 Remove the cover

994 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1013 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1014 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 995

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1015 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1016 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

996 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1017 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1018 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 997

 Figure 5-1019 Remove the formatter case

Removal and replacement: Fuser power supply (FPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser power supply.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-63 Part information

Part number Part description

RM3-7159-000CN Fuser power supply (110V)

RM3-7160-000CN Fuser power supply (220V)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

998 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1020 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1021 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 999

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1022 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1023 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1000 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1024 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1025 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1001

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1026 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1027 Remove two screws

1002 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1028 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1029 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1030 Remove the cover

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1003

 Remove the rear cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1031 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1032 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1004 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1033 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1034 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1035 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 1005

 Remove the fuser power supply
Follow these steps to remove the fuser power supply.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1036 Remove the LVPS cover

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1037 Disconnect one connector

1006 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Pass the wire harness through the opening in the chassis.

Figure 5-1038 Pass the wire harness through the opening

4. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1039 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the fuser power supply 1007

 5. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fuser power supply (callout 2).

Figure 5-1040 Remove the fuser power supply

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1008 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the Low-voltage power supply.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-64 LVPS part numbers

Part number Part description

RM3-7157-000CN Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) (110V)

RM3-7158-000CN Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) (220V)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1009

 1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1041 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1042 Open the TCU

1010 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1043 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1044 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1011

 Figure 5-1045 Loosen the thumbscrews

3. Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1012 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1046 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1047 Remove four screws

4. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) (MFP) 1013

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter.

Figure 5-1048 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1049 Remove the HDD

5. Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1014 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1050 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1051 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1052 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1015

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1053 Remove the fax PCA

6. Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1016 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1054 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1055 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1056 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1017

 7. Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1057 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1058 Remove the cover

1
2

1018 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

8. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1059 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1060 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1019

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1061 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1062 Remove the cover

9. Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1020 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1063 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1064 Remove the cover

10. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1021

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1065 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1066 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1067 Remove the cover

1022 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

11. Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1068 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1069 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1023

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1070 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1071 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1024 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1072 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1073 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1025

 Figure 5-1074 Remove the formatter case

12. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1075 Disconnect one wire harness

1026 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1076 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1077 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1078 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1027

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1079 Remove the LVPS

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1028 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)
Learn about removing and replacing the high-voltage power supply D.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-65 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7122-000CN High-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) 1029

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1080 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1081 Open the TCU

1030 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1082 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1083 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1031

 Figure 5-1084 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1032 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1085 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1086 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1033

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1087 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1088 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1034 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1089 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1090 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1091 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1035

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1092 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1036 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1093 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1094 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1095 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1037

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1096 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1097 Remove the cover

1
2

1038 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1098 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1099 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1039

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1100 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1101 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1040 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1102 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1103 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1041

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1104 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1105 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1106 Remove the cover

1042 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1107 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1108 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1043

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1109 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1110 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1044 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1111 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1112 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1045

 Figure 5-1113 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1114 Disconnect one wire harness

1046 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1115 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1116 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1117 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1047

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1118 Remove the LVPS

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-1119 Disconnect one flat cable

1048 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-1120 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-1121 Remove the HVPSD

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1049

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor 1 (M1)

Learn about removing and replacing drum motor 1.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-66 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0078-000CN Drum motor 1 (M1)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

1050 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1122 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1051

 Figure 5-1123 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1124 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1052 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1125 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1126 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1053

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1127 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1128 Remove four screws

1054 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1129 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1130 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1055

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1131 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1132 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1133 Release one latch

1056 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1134 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1057

 Figure 5-1135 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1136 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1137 Remove the formatter

1058 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1138 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1139 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1059

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1140 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1141 Release the right edge

1060 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1142 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1143 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1061

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1144 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1145 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1062 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1146 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1147 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1148 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 1063

 Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1149 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1150 Remove the bracket

1064 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1151 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1152 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

Remove the formatter case 1065

 5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1153 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1154 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

1066 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1155 Remove the formatter case

Remove drum motor 1 (M1)

Follow these steps to remove drum motor 1.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1156 Remove the motor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove drum motor 1 (M1) 1067

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan (FM1)

Learn about removing and replacing power supply fan.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-67 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-2416-000CN Power supply fan (FM1)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

1068 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1157 Locate the USB cover

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 1069

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1158 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1159 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1070 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1160 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1161 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1071

 Figure 5-1162 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1163 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

1072 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1164 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-1165 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1073

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1166 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1167 Open the TCU

1074 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1168 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1169 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1075

 Figure 5-1170 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1171 Remove four screws

1076 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1172 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1173 Remove two screws

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1077

 2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1174 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1175 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1176 Remove the cover

1078 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1177 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1178 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1079

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1179 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1180 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1181 Remove the cover

1080 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1182 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1183 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1081

 Figure 5-1184 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1185 Remove the cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1082 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1186 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1187 Release two tabs

3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1188 Rotate the cover

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1083
 Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1189 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1190 Release two tabs

1084 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1191 Release the back edge of the cover

4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1192 Remove the cover

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1085

 Figure 5-1193 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1194 Remove one screw and connector

1086 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1195 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1196 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

Remove the right rear cover 1087

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1197 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1198 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1088 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1199 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1089

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1200 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1201 Release the HDD

1090 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1202 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1203 Locate the fax PCA

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1091

 2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1204 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1205 Release one latch

4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1206 Remove the fax PCA

1092 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1207 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1093

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1208 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1209 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1094 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1210 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1211 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1212 Remove the LVPS cover

Remove the formatter case 1095

 4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1213 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1214 Remove six screws

1096 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1215 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1216 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1097

 1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1217 Disconnect one wire harness

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1218 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1219 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

1098 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1220 Remove three screws

5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1221 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

Remove the power supply fan (FM1) 1099

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1222 Remove one screw

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-1223 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1224 Remove the fan

1100 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developing disengagement motor (M6)

Learn about removing and replacing developing disengagement motor.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1101

 Table 5-68 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-6027-000CN Developing disengagement motor (M6)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1225 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

1102 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1226 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1227 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1103

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1228 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1229 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

1104 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1230 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1231 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1105

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1232 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1233 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1106 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1234 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1235 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1236 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1107

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1237 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1108 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1238 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1239 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1240 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1109

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1241 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1242 Remove the cover

1
2

1110 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1243 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1244 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1111

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1245 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1246 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1112 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1247 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1248 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1113

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1249 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1250 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1251 Remove the cover

1114 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1252 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1253 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1115

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1254 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1255 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1116 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1256 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1257 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1117

 Figure 5-1258 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1259 Disconnect one wire harness

1118 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1260 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1261 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1262 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1119

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1263 Remove the LVPS

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-1264 Disconnect one flat cable

1120 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-1265 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-1266 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the developing disengagement motor (M6)

Follow these steps to remove the developing disengagement motor.

Remove the developing disengagement motor (M6) 1121

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1267 Remove the motor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1122 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-69 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly 1123

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1268 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1269 Open the TCU

1124 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1270 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1271 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1125

 Figure 5-1272 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1126 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1273 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1274 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1127

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1275 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1276 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1128 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1277 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1278 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1279 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1129

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1280 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1130 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1281 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1282 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1283 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1131

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1284 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1285 Remove the cover

1
2

1132 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1286 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1287 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1133

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1288 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1289 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1134 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1290 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1291 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1135

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1292 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1293 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1294 Remove the cover

1136 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1295 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1296 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1137

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1297 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1298 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1138 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1299 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1300 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1139

 Figure 5-1301 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1302 Disconnect one wire harness

1140 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1303 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1304 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1305 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1141

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1306 Remove the LVPS

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-1307 Disconnect one flat cable

1142 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-1308 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-1309 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

Remove the auto close assembly 1143

 ■ Disconnect four connectors (callout 1/2), remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the auto
close assembly (callout 4).

Figure 5-1310 Remove the auto close assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1144 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-70 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0010-000CN Lifter drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly 1145

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1311 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1312 Open the TCU

1146 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1313 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1314 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1147

 Figure 5-1315 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1148 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1316 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1317 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1149

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1318 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1319 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1150 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1320 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1321 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1322 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1151

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1323 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1152 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1324 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1325 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1326 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1153

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1327 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1328 Remove the cover

1
2

1154 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1329 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1330 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1155

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1331 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1332 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1156 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1333 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1334 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1157

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1335 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1336 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1337 Remove the cover

1158 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1338 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1339 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1159

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1340 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1341 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1160 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1342 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1343 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1161

 Figure 5-1344 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1345 Disconnect one wire harness

1162 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1346 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1347 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1348 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1163

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1349 Remove the LVPS

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-1350 Disconnect one flat cable

1164 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-1351 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-1352 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

Remove the auto close assembly 1165

 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1353 Disconnect two connectors

2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-1354 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

1166 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1355 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1167

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Laser/scanner assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser/scanner assembly.

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the Laser/scanner assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-71 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6545-000CN Laser/scanner assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Make sure that all of the connectors on the HVPSD are fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1168 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1356 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1169

 Figure 5-1357 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1358 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the toner cartridges

Follow these steps to replace a toner cartridge.

1170 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. . Open the front door. Figure 5-1359 Open the front door

2. . Grasp the handle of the used toner cartridge Figure 5-1360 Remove the toner cartridge
and pull out to remove it.

3. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1171

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1361 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1362 Loosen the thumbscrews

4. Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

1172 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1363 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1364 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1173

 5. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1365 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1366 Remove the HDD

6. Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1174 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1367 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1368 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1369 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1175

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1370 Remove the fax PCA

7. Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1176 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1371 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1372 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1373 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1177

 8. Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1374 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1375 Remove the cover

1
2

1178 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

9. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1376 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1377 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1179

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1378 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1379 Remove the cover

10. Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1180 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1380 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1381 Remove the cover

11. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1181

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1382 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1383 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1384 Remove the cover

1182 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

12. Remove the formatter case
Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1385 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1386 Remove the bracket

Remove the formatter case 1183

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1387 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-1388 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

1184 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1389 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1390 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Remove the formatter case 1185

 Figure 5-1391 Remove the formatter case

13. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-1392 Disconnect one wire harness

1186 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-1393 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-1394 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1395 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1187

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1396 Remove the LVPS

14. Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-1397 Disconnect one flat cable

1188 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-1398 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-1399 Remove the HVPSD

15. Remove the laser/scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser/scanner assembly.

Remove the laser/scanner assembly 1189

 1. Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 1).

Figure 5-1400 Release one wire harness

2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then pull down on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1401 Release two tabs

3. Remove the guide.

Figure 5-1402 Remove the guide

1190 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1).

Figure 5-1403 Disconnect two flat cables

5. At the rear of the printer, disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1404 Disconnect two connectors

6. At the rear of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1405 Remove one screw and the plate

Remove the laser/scanner assembly 1191

 7. At the rear of the printer, push down on the spring (callout 1), and then lift it up (callout 2) to release it
from the tab on the chassis.

Figure 5-1406 Release the spring

8. Remove the spring.

Figure 5-1407 Remove the spring

9. At the rear of the printer, release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 1).

Figure 5-1408 Release the wire harness

1192 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 10. Grasp the assembly by the edges, and then pull the laser/scanner assembly straight out of the
printer to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damaging the glass cleaners, make sure that the front door is open before
removing the laser/scanner assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Replacement LVPS installation: Handle the replacement laser/scanner

assembly by the edges. Do not touch the two glass windows. Skin oils on the windows can cause
image quality problems.

Figure 5-1409 Remove the laser/scanner assembly

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1193

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Delivery fan (FM3)

Learn about removing and replacing the delivery fan.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-72 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-2728-000CN Delivery fan (FM3)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1194 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1410 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1411 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1195

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1412 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1413 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

1196 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1414 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1415 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1197

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1416 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-1417 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

1198 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1418 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1419 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove Tray 2 1199

 Figure 5-1420 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1421 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

1200 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1422 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1423 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1201

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1424 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1425 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

1202 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1426 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1427 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1203

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1428 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1429 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1204 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1430 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1431 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1432 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1205

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1433 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1206 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1434 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1435 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1436 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1207

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1437 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1438 Remove the cover

1
2

1208 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1439 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1440 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1209

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1441 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1442 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1210 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1443 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1444 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1211

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1445 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1446 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1447 Remove the left upper cover

1212 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1448 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1449 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1213
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1450 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1451 Remove one screw

1214 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1452 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1453 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1215

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1454 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1455 Remove one screw

1216 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1456 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1457 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1217

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1458 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1459 Disconnect connectors

1218 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1460 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1461 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1219

 Figure 5-1462 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1463 Remove one screw and connector

1220 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1464 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1465 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1221

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1466 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1467 Release two tabs

1222 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1468 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1469 Remove one screw

Remove the left cover 1223

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1470 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1471 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1224 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1472 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1473 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1225

 Figure 5-1474 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1475 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1476 Disconnect one connector

1226 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1477 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1478 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Remove the formatter case 1227

 Figure 5-1479 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1480 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1481 Release the formatter case

1228 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1482 Remove the formatter case

Remove the delivery fan (FM3)

Follow these steps to remove the delivery fan.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1483 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: This screw does not secure the fan to the chassis. However it is necessary to remove it so
that the corner of the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) can be moved out of the way to remove
the fan.

Remove the delivery fan (FM3) 1229

 Figure 5-1484 Remove one screw

3. Slide the fan up to release it.

Figure 5-1485 Release the fan

4. Slightly flex the corner of the HVPST out of the way (callout 1), and then remove the fan.

CAUTION: Do not over flex the HVPST and damage it.

Reinstallation tip: Look at the arrows embossed on the fan or the holder. When a replacement fan
is installed, make sure that the embossed arrows face the correct direction.

1230 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1486 Remove the fan

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1231

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Learn about removing and replacing the high-voltage power supply T.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-73 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7123-000CN High-voltage power supply T (HVPST) M552, M553dn/x, M554, M555,

M577, M578, E55040, E57540)

RM2-7134-000CN High-voltage power supply T (HVPST) (M553n)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1232 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1487 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1488 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1233

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1489 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1490 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

1234 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1491 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1492 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1235

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1493 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-1494 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

1236 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1495 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1496 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove Tray 2 1237

 Figure 5-1497 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1498 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

1238 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1499 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1500 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1239

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1501 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1502 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

1240 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1503 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1504 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1241

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1505 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1506 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1242 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1507 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1508 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1509 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1243

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1510 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1244 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1511 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1512 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1513 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1245

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1514 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1515 Remove the cover

1
2

1246 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1516 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1517 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1247

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1518 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1519 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1248 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1520 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1521 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1249

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1522 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1523 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1524 Remove the left upper cover

1250 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1525 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1526 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1251
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1527 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1528 Remove one screw

1252 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1529 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1530 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1253

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1531 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1532 Remove one screw

1254 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1533 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1534 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1255

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1535 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1536 Disconnect connectors

1256 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1537 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1538 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1257

 Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1540 Remove one screw and connector

1258 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1541 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1542 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1259

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1543 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1544 Release two tabs

1260 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1545 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1546 Remove one screw

Remove the left cover 1261

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1547 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1548 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1262 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1549 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1550 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1263

 Figure 5-1551 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1552 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1553 Disconnect one connector

1264 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1554 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1555 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Remove the formatter case 1265

 Figure 5-1556 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1557 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1558 Release the formatter case

1266 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1559 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1560 Release the cover

Remove the right rear cover 1267

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1561 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

1268 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1562 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-1563 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1269

 1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-1564 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1565 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

1270 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1566 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-1567 Remove the HVPST

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1271

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor 2 (M2)

Learn about removing and replacing drum motor 2.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-74 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0078-000CN Drum motor 2 (M2)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

1272 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1568 Locate the USB cover

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 1273

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1569 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1570 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1274 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1571 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1572 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1275

 Figure 5-1573 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1574 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

1276 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1575 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-1576 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

Remove Tray 2 1277

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1577 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-1578 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1278 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1579 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1580 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1279

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1581 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1582 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1280 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1583 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1281

 Figure 5-1584 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1585 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1282 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1586 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1587 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1283

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1588 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1589 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1590 Release one latch

1284 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1591 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1285

 Figure 5-1592 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1593 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1594 Remove the formatter

1286 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1595 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1596 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1287

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1597 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1598 Release the right edge

1288 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1599 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1600 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1289

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1601 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1602 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1290 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1603 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1604 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1605 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1291

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1606 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1607 Release two tabs

1292 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1608 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1609 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1293

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1610 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1611 Release the back edge of the cover

1294 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1612 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1613 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1295

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1614 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1615 Remove one screw

1296 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1616 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1617 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1297

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1618 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1619 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1298 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1620 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1621 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1299

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1622 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1623 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1300 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1624 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1625 Release two tabs

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1301

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1626 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1627 Remove one screw

1302 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1628 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1629 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1303

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1630 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1631 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

1304 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1632 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1633 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1634 Disconnect one connector

Remove the formatter case 1305

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1635 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1636 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

1306 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1637 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1638 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1639 Release the formatter case

Remove the formatter case 1307

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1640 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1641 Release the cover

1308 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1642 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket 1309

 Figure 5-1643 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-1644 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1310 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-1645 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1646 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1311

 Figure 5-1647 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-1648 Remove the HVPST

Remove drum motor 2 (M2)

Follow these steps to remove drum motor 2.

1312 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1649 Remove the motor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1313

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor 3 (M3)

Learn about removing and replacing drum motor 3.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-75 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0078-000CN Drum motor 3 (M3)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1314 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1650 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1651 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1315

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1652 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1653 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

1316 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1654 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1655 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1317

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1656 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-1657 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

1318 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1658 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1659 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove Tray 2 1319

 Figure 5-1660 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1661 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

1320 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1662 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1663 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1321

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1664 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1665 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

1322 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1666 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1667 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1323

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1668 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1669 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1324 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1670 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1671 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1672 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1325

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1673 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1326 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1674 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1675 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1676 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1327

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1677 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1678 Remove the cover

1
2

1328 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1679 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1680 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1329

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1681 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1682 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1330 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1683 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1684 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1331

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1685 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1686 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1687 Remove the left upper cover

1332 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1688 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1689 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1333
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1690 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1691 Remove one screw

1334 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1692 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1693 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1335

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1694 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1695 Remove one screw

1336 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1696 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1697 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1337

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1698 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1699 Disconnect connectors

1338 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1700 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1701 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1339

 Figure 5-1702 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1703 Remove one screw and connector

1340 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1704 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1705 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1341

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1706 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1707 Release two tabs

1342 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1708 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1709 Remove one screw

Remove the left cover 1343

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1710 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1711 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1344 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1712 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1713 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1345

 Figure 5-1714 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1715 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1716 Disconnect one connector

1346 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1717 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1718 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Remove the formatter case 1347

 Figure 5-1719 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1720 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1721 Release the formatter case

1348 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1722 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1723 Release the cover

Remove the right rear cover 1349

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1724 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

1350 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1725 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-1726 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1351

 1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-1727 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1728 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

1352 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1729 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-1730 Remove the HVPST

Remove drum motor 3 (M3)

Follow these steps to remove drum motor 3.

Remove drum motor 3 (M3) 1353

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1731 Remove the motor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1354 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser motor 3 (M4)

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser motor.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-76 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0077-000CN Fuser motor 3 (M4)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Removal and replacement: Fuser motor 3 (M4) 1355

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1732 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1733 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1356 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1734 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1735 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1357

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1736 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1737 Remove two screws

1358 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1738 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-1739 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1359

 Figure 5-1740 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1741 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

1360 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1742 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1743 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1361

 Figure 5-1744 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1745 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1362 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1746 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1747 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1363

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1748 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1749 Remove four screws

1364 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1750 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1751 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1365

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1752 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1753 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1754 Release one latch

1366 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1755 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1367

 Figure 5-1756 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1757 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1758 Remove the formatter

1368 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1759 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1760 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1369

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1761 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1762 Release the right edge

1370 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1763 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1764 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1371

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1765 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1766 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1372 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1767 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1768 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1769 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1373

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1770 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1771 Release two tabs

1374 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1772 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1773 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1375

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1774 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1775 Release the back edge of the cover

1376 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1776 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1777 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1377

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1778 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1779 Remove one screw

1378 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1780 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1781 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1379

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1782 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1783 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1380 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1784 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1785 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1381

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1786 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1787 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1382 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1788 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1789 Release two tabs

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1383

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1790 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1791 Remove one screw

1384 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1792 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1793 Remove the cover

Remove the upper cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1385

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1794 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1795 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

1386 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1796 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1797 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1798 Disconnect one connector

Remove the formatter case 1387

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1799 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1800 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

1388 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1801 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1802 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1803 Release the formatter case

Remove the formatter case 1389

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1804 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1805 Release the cover

1390 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1806 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket 1391

 Figure 5-1807 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-1808 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1392 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-1809 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1810 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1393

 Figure 5-1811 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-1812 Remove the HVPST

Remove fuser motor (M4)

Follow these steps to remove the fuser motor.

1394 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1813 Remove the motor

2
1

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1395

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor printed circuit assembly (PCA)

Learn about removing and replacing the environmental sensor PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-77 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7154-000CN Environmental sensor PCA

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

1396 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1814 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1397

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1815 Remove four screws

Remove the rear cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1816 Remove four screws

1398 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1817 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1818 Remove two screws

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1399

 2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1819 Release the right edge

3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1820 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1821 Remove the cover

1400 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1822 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1823 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1401

 Remove the environmental sensor PCA
Follow these steps to remove the environmental sensor PCA.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1824 Remove the LVPS cover

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1825 Disconnect one connector

1402 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the environmental sensor PCA out of the holder to remove it.

Figure 5-1826 Remove the sensor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1403

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-78 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0091-010CN Fuser drive assembly (M553n)

RM2-0009-000CN Fuser drive assembly (M552, M553dn/x, M554, M555, M577, M578, E
55040, E57540)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1404 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1827 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1828 Remove the cover

Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Open the right door.

CAUTION: The fuser is very hot. After turning the printer power off, allow the fuser to cool for at
least 30 minutes before removing it.

Remove the fuser 1405

 Figure 5-1829 Open the right door

2. Grasp the two fuser handles, and then squeeze the two blue triggers on the handles to release the
fuser.

Figure 5-1830 Release the fuser

3. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1831 Remove the fuser

1406 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1832 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1833 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1407

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1834 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-1835 Remove two screws

1408 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1836 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-1837 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1409

 Figure 5-1838 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1839 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

1410 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1840 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1841 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1411

 Figure 5-1842 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1843 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1412 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1844 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-1845 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1413

 ● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-1846 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1847 Remove four screws

1414 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1848 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1849 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1415

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1850 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1851 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1852 Release one latch

1416 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1853 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1417

 Figure 5-1854 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1855 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1856 Remove the formatter

1418 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1857 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1858 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1419

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1859 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1860 Release the right edge

1420 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1861 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1862 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1421

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1863 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1864 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1422 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1865 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1866 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1867 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1423

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1868 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1869 Release two tabs

1424 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1870 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1871 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1425

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1872 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1873 Release the back edge of the cover

1426 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1874 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1875 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1427

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1876 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1877 Remove one screw

1428 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1878 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1879 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1429

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1880 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1881 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1430 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1882 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1883 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1431

 Figure 5-1884 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1885 Remove one screw and connector

1432 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1886 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1887 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1433

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1888 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1889 Release two tabs

1434 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-1890 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1891 Remove one screw

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 1435

 2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1892 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-1893 Remove one screw

1436 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1894 Remove one screw

3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1895 Release one tab

Remove the top cover (MFP) 1437

 4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-1896 Remove the cover

Remove the top bracket (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top bracket.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1897 Remove three screws

1438 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. At the top of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1898 Remove two screws

3. Lift the top bracket up to remove it.

Figure 5-1899 Remove the bracket

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1439

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1900 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1901 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1902 Remove the cover

1440 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1903 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1904 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1441

 Figure 5-1905 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1906 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-1907 Disconnect one connector

1442 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-1908 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-1909 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Remove the formatter case 1443

 Figure 5-1910 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1911 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-1912 Release the formatter case

1444 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-1913 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-1914 Release the cover

Remove the right rear cover 1445

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1915 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

1446 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1916 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-1917 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1447

 1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-1918 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1919 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

1448 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1920 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-1921 Remove the HVPST

Remove the fuser drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide up and
away from the chassis to move it out of the way (callout 3).

CAUTION: One wire harnesses in the guide is still attached to the fuser motor. Do not attempt to
completely remove the guide.

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1449

 Figure 5-1922 Move the guide out of the way

2 1
3

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1923 Disconnect one connector

1450 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1924 Remove one screw

4. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide down to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide
away from the chassis to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-1925 Remove the guide

1
2

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1451

 5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1926 Remove three screws

6. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: Two gears on the back side of the assembly are not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

Figure 5-1927 Remove the assembly

1452 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Optional step: Two gears (callout 1) on the back side of the assembly are not captive. If the gears
are dislodged, install them as shown.

Figure 5-1928 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1453

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex drive assembly and motor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex drive assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-79 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0006-000CN Duplex drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Open the right door.

CAUTION: The fuser is very hot. After turning the printer power off, allow the fuser to cool for at
least 30 minutes before removing it.

1454 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1929 Open the right door

2. Grasp the two fuser handles, and then squeeze the two blue triggers on the handles to release the
fuser.

Figure 5-1930 Release the fuser

3. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1931 Remove the fuser

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

Remove the ITB 1455

 1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-1932 Open the right door

2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-1933 Release the ITB drive coupling

3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

1456 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1934 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-1935 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Remove the ITB 1457

 Figure 5-1936 Place the spring on the holder

6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-1937 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

1458 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1938 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

Figure 5-1939 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

Remove the ITB 1459

 Figure 5-1940 Remove the ITB

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1941 Locate the USB cover

1460 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1942 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-1943 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1461

 Figure 5-1944 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1945 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1462 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1946 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-1947 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1463

 Figure 5-1948 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-1949 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1464 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-1950 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-1951 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1465

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-1952 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-1953 Open the TCU

1466 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-1954 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-1955 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1467

 Figure 5-1956 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1468 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1957 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-1958 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1469

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-1959 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1960 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1470 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-1961 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-1962 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-1963 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1471

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1964 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1472 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1965 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1966 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-1967 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1473

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1968 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-1969 Remove the cover

1
2

1474 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-1970 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1971 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1475

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1972 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-1973 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1476 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1974 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1975 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1477

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-1976 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1977 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-1978 Remove the left upper cover

1478 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1979 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1980 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1479
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-1981 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1982 Remove one screw

1480 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1983 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-1984 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1481

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1985 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1986 Remove one screw

1482 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1987 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-1988 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1483

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-1989 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1990 Disconnect connectors

1484 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-1991 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1992 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models) 1485

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1993 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1994 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1486 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1995 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-1996 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1487

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-1997 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-1998 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1488 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1999 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2000 Release two tabs

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1489

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-2001 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2002 Remove one screw

1490 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2003 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-2004 Remove one screw

Remove the top cover (MFP) 1491

 2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2005 Remove one screw

3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2006 Release one tab

1492 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-2007 Remove the cover

Remove the top bracket (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top bracket.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2008 Remove three screws

Remove the top bracket (MFP) 1493

 2. At the top of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2009 Remove two screws

3. Lift the top bracket up to remove it.

Figure 5-2010 Remove the bracket

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1494 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2011 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2012 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2013 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 1495

 Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2014 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2015 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

1496 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2016 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2017 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M552dn/M553n/dn/M554 printers only.

The figures in this procedure show the M552/M553 printer. The M554 control panel looks slightly
different than shown below. However, removing the control panel is similar to the following procedure.

Remove the control panel 1497

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2018 Remove one screw

2. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Rotate the near field communication (NFC) PCA
holder up (callout 2), and then slide it to the right (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 5-2019 Remove the PCA holder

1
3

1498 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. M552/M553: Remove one cable from the guide.

Figure 5-2020 Remove one cable

4. M552/M553: Remove four screws (callout 1), and then turn the control panel over (callout 2).

NOTE: M554: Remove any screws fastening the assembly to the printer chassis, and then turn the
control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-2021 Remove four screws

5. M552/M553: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M554: Disconnect one flat cable, and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel 1499

 Figure 5-2022 Remove the control panel

Remove the output bin

Follow these steps to remove the output bin.

1. Slightly slide and lift the cover to release it.

Figure 5-2023 Release the cover

1500 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2024 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2025 Disconnect one connector

Remove the formatter case 1501

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2026 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2027 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

1502 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2028 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2029 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2030 Release the formatter case

Remove the formatter case 1503

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2031 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-2032 Release the cover

1504 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2033 Remove the cover

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket 1505

 Figure 5-2034 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2035 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1506 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-2036 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2037 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1507

 Figure 5-2038 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-2039 Remove the HVPST

Remove the fuser drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide up and
away from the chassis to move it out of the way (callout 3).

CAUTION: One wire harnesses in the guide is still attached to the fuser motor. Do not attempt to
completely remove the guide.

1508 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2040 Move the guide out of the way

2 1
3

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2041 Disconnect one connector

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1509

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2042 Remove one screw

4. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide down to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide
away from the chassis to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-2043 Remove the guide

1
2

1510 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2044 Remove three screws

6. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: Two gears on the back side of the assembly are not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

Figure 5-2045 Remove the assembly

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1511

 7. Optional step: Two gears (callout 1) on the back side of the assembly are not captive. If the gears
are dislodged, install them as shown.

Figure 5-2046 Remove the assembly

Remove the delivery assembly

Follow these steps to remove the delivery assembly.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

NOTE: These two screws are the self-tapping type.

Figure 5-2047 Remove two screws

1512 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. (M553x/M555/E55040): At the top-front-right corner of the printer, disconnect one connector
(callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the near field communication (NFC)
PCA and holder by sliding them to the right (callout 3).

Figure 5-2048 Remove the NFC

3
2

3. Release two retainers (callout 1), remove the USB cable (callout 2) from the retainers, and then
disconnect one connector (callout 3).

Figure 5-2049 Release two retainers and disconnect one connector

Remove the delivery assembly 1513

 4. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2050 Remove four screws

5. Remove the delivery assembly.

CAUTION: The solenoid plunger and arm (callout 1) located on the right side of the assembly are
not captive.

1514 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2051 Remove the assembly

Remove duplex drive assembly and motor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex drive assembly and motor.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2052 Remove two screws

2. Remove the duplex drive assembly.

NOTE: Feed two wire harnesses through the opening in the chassis as the assembly is removed.

Remove duplex drive assembly and motor 1515

 Figure 5-2053 Remove the duplex drive assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1516 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Learn about removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-80 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0008-000CN Pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) 1517
 1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-2054 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-2055 Open the TCU

1518 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-2056 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2057 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1519

 Figure 5-2058 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2059 Locate the USB cover

1520 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2060 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-2061 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1521

 Figure 5-2062 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2063 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1522 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2064 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-2065 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1523

 Figure 5-2066 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-2067 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

1524 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-2068 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-2069 Remove four screws

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1525

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2070 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2071 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1526 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2072 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2073 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2074 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1527

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2075 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1528 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2076 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2077 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-2078 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1529

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2079 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-2080 Remove the cover

1
2

1530 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-2081 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2082 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1531

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2083 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2084 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1532 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2085 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2086 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1533

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2087 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2088 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2089 Remove the left upper cover

1534 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2090 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2091 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1535
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2092 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2093 Remove one screw

1536 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2094 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2095 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1537

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2096 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2097 Remove one screw

1538 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2098 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-2099 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1539

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-2100 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2101 Disconnect connectors

1540 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2102 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-2103 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1541

 Figure 5-2104 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-2105 Remove one screw and connector

1542 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2106 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-2107 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1543

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2108 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2109 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2110 Remove the cover

1544 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2111 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2112 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1545

 Figure 5-2113 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2114 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

1546 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2115 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2116 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

Remove the formatter case 1547

 1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2117 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2118 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2119 Remove the LVPS cover

1548 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-2120 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2121 Remove six screws

Remove the formatter case 1549

 6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2122 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2123 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1550 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-2124 Disconnect one wire harness

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-2125 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2126 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1551

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2127 Remove three screws

5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2128 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

1552 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2129 Remove one screw

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-2130 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2131 Remove the fan

Remove the power supply fan (FM1) 1553

 Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)
Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-2132 Disconnect one flat cable

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-2133 Remove three screws

1554 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-2134 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2135 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the auto close assembly 1555

 2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2136 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

Figure 5-2137 Remove the assembly

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1556 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Figure 5-2138 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2139 Remove the plate

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly and motor.

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) 1557

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then move the guide (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-2140 Move the guide out of the way

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2141 Remove three screws

3. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: One gear on the back side of the assembly is not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

1558 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2142 Remove the assembly

4. If the gear (callout 1) was not removed with the assembly in the previous step, remove it now.

Figure 5-2143 Remove the gear if installed

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1559

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the registration assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-81 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-0093-000CN Registration assembly (M553n)

RM2-0018-000CN Registration assembly (M552, M553dn/x, M554, M555, M577, M578,

E55040, E57540)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

1560 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the secondary transfer assembly

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2144 Open the right door

2. Release the blue arm, and then let the secondary transfer assembly rotate down to the half-way
open position.

NOTE: The assembly should stop at the halfway down point—the pin will stop at the notch in the
slot in the blue arm.

Remove the secondary transfer assembly 1561

 Figure 5-2145 Release the secondary transfer roller assembly

3. Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm—as shown in the figure—to start to disengage it from
the pin.

Figure 5-2146 Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm

1562 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Continue to flex the blue arm until it disengages from the pin.

Figure 5-2147 Disengage the blue arm and pin

5. Slide the assembly toward the front of the printer to release it (callout 1), and then rotate it down and
away from the printer to remove it (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the assembly hinge pins fit
into the holes provided in the printer.

Figure 5-2148 Remove the secondary transfer roller assembly

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

Remove the ITB 1563

 1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2149 Open the right door

2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-2150 Release the ITB drive coupling

3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

1564 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2151 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-2152 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Remove the ITB 1565

 Figure 5-2153 Place the spring on the holder

6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-2154 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

1566 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2155 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

Figure 5-2156 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

Remove the ITB 1567

 Figure 5-2157 Remove the ITB

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2158 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

1568 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2159 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-2160 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1569

 Figure 5-2161 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-2162 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1570 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2163 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2164 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 1571

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2165 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2166 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1572 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-2167 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-2168 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1573

 3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2169 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-2170 Remove two screws

1574 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-2171 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-2172 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1575

 Figure 5-2173 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1576 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2174 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-2175 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1577

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2176 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2177 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1578 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2178 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2179 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2180 Release one latch

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1579

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2181 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

1580 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2182 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2183 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-2184 Remove the formatter

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1581

 Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2185 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-2186 Remove the cover

1
2

1582 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-2187 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2188 Release the right edge

Remove the rear upper cover (MFP) 1583

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2189 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2190 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1584 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2191 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2192 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1585

 1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2193 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2194 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2195 Remove the left upper cover

1586 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2196 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2197 Release two tabs

Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models) 1587
 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2198 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2199 Remove one screw

1588 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2200 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2201 Release the back edge of the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1589

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2202 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2203 Remove one screw

1590 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2204 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-2205 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1591

 4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-2206 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2207 Disconnect connectors

1592 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2208 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-2209 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1593

 Figure 5-2210 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-2211 Remove one screw and connector

1594 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2212 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-2213 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1595

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2214 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2215 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2216 Remove the cover

1596 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2217 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2218 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1597

 Figure 5-2219 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2220 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

1598 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2221 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2222 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

Remove the formatter case 1599

 1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2223 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2224 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2225 Remove the LVPS cover

1600 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-2226 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2227 Remove six screws

Remove the formatter case 1601

 6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2228 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2229 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1602 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-2230 Disconnect one wire harness

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-2231 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2232 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1603

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2233 Remove three screws

5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2234 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

1604 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2235 Remove one screw

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-2236 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2237 Remove the fan

Remove the power supply fan (FM1) 1605

 Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)
Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-2238 Disconnect one flat cable

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-2239 Remove three screws

1606 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-2240 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2241 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the auto close assembly 1607

 2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2242 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

Figure 5-2243 Remove the assembly

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1608 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Figure 5-2244 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2245 Remove the plate

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly and motor.

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) 1609

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then move the guide (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-2246 Move the guide out of the way

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2247 Remove three screws

3. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: One gear on the back side of the assembly is not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

1610 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2248 Remove the assembly

4. If the gear (callout 1) was not removed with the assembly in the previous step, remove it now.

Figure 5-2249 Remove the gear if installed

Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

Remove the registration assembly 1611

 1. At the right side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2250 Release one tab

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2251 Remove the cover

1612 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then push down on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2252 Release the guide

4. Move the guide out of the way.

Figure 5-2253 Move the guide out of the way

Remove the registration assembly 1613

 5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2254 Remove three screws

6. Before proceeding, locate the sheet metal portion (callout 1) of the assembly. When handling the
assembly, use the sheet metal as handles.

Figure 5-2255 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

1614 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Before proceeding, take note of the sheet-metal tabs (callout 1) on the back of the assembly that
fasten it to the chassis (the figure shows the assembly removed so the tabs can be viewed).

Figure 5-2256 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

8. Grasp the sheet-metal handles (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the assembly away from the
chassis (callout 2) to release the top tabs.

Figure 5-2257 Rotate the top of the assembly away from the chassis

2 1
1 2

9. Pull up on the assembly to release the bottom tabs.

CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the printer by a wire harness. Do not attempt to
completely remove the assembly.

Remove the registration assembly 1615

 Figure 5-2258 Release the bottom tabs

10. Turn the registration assembly over to access the back side, disconnect three connectors (callout
1), and then remove the assembly.

Figure 5-2259 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1616 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-82 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-6556-000CN Paper pickup assembly (includes the Tray 2 paper pickup roller
assembly)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly 1617

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the secondary transfer assembly

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2260 Open the right door

2. Release the blue arm, and then let the secondary transfer assembly rotate down to the half-way
open position.

NOTE: The assembly should stop at the halfway down point—the pin will stop at the notch in the
slot in the blue arm.

1618 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2261 Release the secondary transfer roller assembly

3. Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm—as shown in the figure—to start to disengage it from
the pin.

Figure 5-2262 Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm

Remove the secondary transfer assembly 1619

 4. Continue to flex the blue arm until it disengages from the pin.

Figure 5-2263 Disengage the blue arm and pin

5. Slide the assembly toward the front of the printer to release it (callout 1), and then rotate it down and
away from the printer to remove it (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the assembly hinge pins fit
into the holes provided in the printer.

Figure 5-2264 Remove the secondary transfer roller assembly

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1620 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2265 Open the right door

2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-2266 Release the ITB drive coupling

3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

Remove the ITB 1621

 Figure 5-2267 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-2268 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

1622 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2269 Place the spring on the holder

6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-2270 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Remove the ITB 1623

 Figure 5-2271 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

Figure 5-2272 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

1624 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2273 Remove the ITB

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2274 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove Tray 2 1625

 Figure 5-2275 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-2276 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

1626 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2277 Open the TCU

3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-2278 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 1627

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2279 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2280 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1628 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2281 Locate the USB cover

2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2282 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1629

 1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-2283 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-2284 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

1630 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2285 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Figure 5-2286 Remove two screws

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1631

 5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-2287 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

Figure 5-2288 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

1632 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2289 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1633

 Figure 5-2290 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-2291 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1634 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2292 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2293 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1635

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2294 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2295 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2296 Release one latch

1636 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2297 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1637

 Figure 5-2298 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2299 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-2300 Remove the formatter

1638 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2301 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-2302 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1639

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-2303 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2304 Release the right edge

1640 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2305 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2306 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1641

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2307 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2308 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1642 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2309 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2310 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2311 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1643

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2312 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2313 Release two tabs

1644 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2314 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2315 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1645

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2316 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2317 Release the back edge of the cover

1646 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2318 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2319 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1647

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2320 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-2321 Remove one screw

1648 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-2322 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2323 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1649

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2324 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-2325 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1650 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2326 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-2327 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1651

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2328 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-2329 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1652 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2330 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2331 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2332 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 1653

 Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2333 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2334 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

1654 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2335 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2336 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Remove the right rear cover 1655

 Figure 5-2337 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2338 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1656 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2339 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2340 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2341 Remove the LVPS cover

Remove the formatter case 1657

 4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-2342 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2343 Remove six screws

1658 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2344 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2345 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1659

 1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-2346 Disconnect one wire harness

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-2347 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2348 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

1660 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2349 Remove three screws

5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2350 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

Remove the power supply fan (FM1) 1661

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2351 Remove one screw

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-2352 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2353 Remove the fan

1662 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)
Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-2354 Disconnect one flat cable

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-2355 Remove three screws

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) 1663

 3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-2356 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2357 Disconnect two connectors

1664 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2358 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

Figure 5-2359 Remove the assembly

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket 1665

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Figure 5-2360 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2361 Remove the plate

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly and motor.

1666 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then move the guide (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-2362 Move the guide out of the way

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2363 Remove three screws

3. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: One gear on the back side of the assembly is not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) 1667

 Figure 5-2364 Remove the assembly

4. If the gear (callout 1) was not removed with the assembly in the previous step, remove it now.

Figure 5-2365 Remove the gear if installed

Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1668 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the right side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2366 Release one tab

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2367 Remove the cover

Remove the registration assembly 1669

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then push down on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2368 Release the guide

4. Move the guide out of the way.

Figure 5-2369 Move the guide out of the way

1670 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2370 Remove three screws

6. Before proceeding, locate the sheet metal portion (callout 1) of the assembly. When handling the
assembly, use the sheet metal as handles.

Figure 5-2371 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

Remove the registration assembly 1671

 7. Before proceeding, take note of the sheet-metal tabs (callout 1) on the back of the assembly that
fasten it to the chassis (the figure shows the assembly removed so the tabs can be viewed).

Figure 5-2372 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

8. Grasp the sheet-metal handles (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the assembly away from the
chassis (callout 2) to release the top tabs.

Figure 5-2373 Rotate the top of the assembly away from the chassis

2 1
1 2

9. Pull up on the assembly to release the bottom tabs.

CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the printer by a wire harness. Do not attempt to
completely remove the assembly.

1672 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2374 Release the bottom tabs

10. Turn the registration assembly over to access the back side, disconnect three connectors (callout
1), and then remove the assembly.

Figure 5-2375 Remove the assembly

Remove the paper pickup assembly

Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.

Remove the paper pickup assembly 1673

 1. At the right side of the printer, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2376 Remove four screws

2. Slightly separate the left end of the assembly from the chassis to release it.

Figure 5-2377 Release the left end of the assembly

1674 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Slide the assembly to the left (callout 1), and then continue to rotate the left end of it out and away
from the chassis (callout 2).

Figure 5-2378 Slide the assembly to the left

2 1

4. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the printer by a wire harness. Do not attempt to
completely remove the assembly.

Figure 5-2379 Remove the assembly

Remove the paper pickup assembly 1675

 5. Turn the paper pickup assembly over to access the back side, release one connector (callout 1),
release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2), and then release it from the retainer (callout 3).

Figure 5-2380 Disconnect one connector

6. On the paper pickup assembly, slide the tray pickup roller assembly to the left to compress the
spring loaded shaft (callout 1), and then rotate the right end of the roller assembly up and away from
the pickup assembly (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2381 Remove the tray pickup roller assembly

1676 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Locate the feed bushing (callout 1).

Figure 5-2382 Locate the feed bushing

8. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release one tab on the bushing (callout 1), and then rotate the
bushing clockwise (callout 2).

Figure 5-2383 Release one tab and rotate the bushing

Remove the paper pickup assembly 1677

 9. Lift the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

Figure 5-2384 Remove the bushing

10. At the end of the paper pickup assembly, slide the shaft with the gear on the end (callout 1) slightly
out of the assembly.

NOTE: Try not to remove the grease from the gear when handling the shaft and gear.

Figure 5-2385 Slide the shaft out

11. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the gear (callout 2) off of the shaft.

NOTE: Try not to remove the grease from the gear when handling the shaft and gear.

TIP: Set the gear aside for installation on the replacement paper pickup assembly.

1678 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2386 Remove the gear

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1679

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Density-detect assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the density-detect assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-83 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7160-000CN Density-detect assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the secondary transfer assembly

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.

1680 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2387 Open the right door

2. Release the blue arm, and then let the secondary transfer assembly rotate down to the half-way
open position.

NOTE: The assembly should stop at the halfway down point—the pin will stop at the notch in the
slot in the blue arm.

Figure 5-2388 Release the secondary transfer roller assembly

Remove the secondary transfer assembly 1681

 3. Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm—as shown in the figure—to start to disengage it from
the pin.

Figure 5-2389 Carefully flex the top portion of the blue arm

4. Continue to flex the blue arm until it disengages from the pin.

Figure 5-2390 Disengage the blue arm and pin

5. Slide the assembly toward the front of the printer to release it (callout 1), and then rotate it down and
away from the printer to remove it (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the assembly hinge pins fit
into the holes provided in the printer.

1682 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2391 Remove the secondary transfer roller assembly

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2392 Open the right door

Remove the ITB 1683

 2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-2393 Release the ITB drive coupling

3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

Figure 5-2394 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

1684 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2395 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Figure 5-2396 Place the spring on the holder

Remove the ITB 1685

 6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-2397 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Figure 5-2398 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

1686 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2399 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

Figure 5-2400 Remove the ITB

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

Remove Tray 2 1687

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2401 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2402 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1688 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-2403 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-2404 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1689

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-2405 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2406 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1690 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2407 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2408 Locate the USB cover

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 1691

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2409 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-2410 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1692 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2411 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2412 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1693

 Figure 5-2413 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-2414 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

1694 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2415 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-2416 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1695

 ● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Figure 5-2417 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-2418 Remove four screws

1696 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2419 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2420 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 1697

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2421 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2422 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2423 Release one latch

1698 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2424 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1699

 Figure 5-2425 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2426 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-2427 Remove the formatter

1700 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2428 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-2429 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1701

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-2430 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2431 Release the right edge

1702 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2432 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2433 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1703

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2434 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2435 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1704 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2436 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2437 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2438 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1705

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2439 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2440 Release two tabs

1706 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2441 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2442 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1707

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2443 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2444 Release the back edge of the cover

1708 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2445 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2446 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1709

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2447 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-2448 Remove one screw

1710 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-2449 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2450 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1711

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2451 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-2452 Remove the ISA

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1712 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2453 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-2454 Remove one screw and connector

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1713

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2455 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-2456 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1714 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2457 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2458 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2459 Remove the cover

Remove the left cover 1715

 Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2460 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2461 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

1716 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2462 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2463 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Remove the right rear cover 1717

 Figure 5-2464 Release the cover

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2465 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1718 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2466 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2467 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2468 Remove the LVPS cover

Remove the formatter case 1719

 4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Figure 5-2469 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2470 Remove six screws

1720 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2471 Release the formatter case

7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2472 Remove the formatter case

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1721

 1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-2473 Disconnect one wire harness

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-2474 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2475 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

1722 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2476 Remove three screws

5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2477 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

Remove the power supply fan (FM1) 1723

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2478 Remove one screw

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-2479 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2480 Remove the fan

1724 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)
Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-2481 Disconnect one flat cable

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-2482 Remove three screws

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) 1725

 3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-2483 Remove the HVPSD

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2484 Disconnect two connectors

1726 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2485 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

Figure 5-2486 Remove the assembly

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket 1727

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

Figure 5-2487 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2488 Remove the plate

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly and motor.

1728 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then move the guide (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-2489 Move the guide out of the way

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2490 Remove three screws

3. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: One gear on the back side of the assembly is not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

Remove the pickup drive assembly and motor (M5) 1729

 Figure 5-2491 Remove the assembly

4. If the gear (callout 1) was not removed with the assembly in the previous step, remove it now.

Figure 5-2492 Remove the gear if installed

Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1730 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the right side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2493 Release one tab

2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2494 Remove the cover

Remove the registration assembly 1731

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then push down on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2495 Release the guide

4. Move the guide out of the way.

Figure 5-2496 Move the guide out of the way

1732 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2497 Remove three screws

6. Before proceeding, locate the sheet metal portion (callout 1) of the assembly. When handling the
assembly, use the sheet metal as handles.

Figure 5-2498 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

Remove the registration assembly 1733

 7. Before proceeding, take note of the sheet-metal tabs (callout 1) on the back of the assembly that
fasten it to the chassis (the figure shows the assembly removed so the tabs can be viewed).

Figure 5-2499 Locate the sheet metal potion of the assembly

8. Grasp the sheet-metal handles (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the assembly away from the
chassis (callout 2) to release the top tabs.

Figure 5-2500 Rotate the top of the assembly away from the chassis

2 1
1 2

9. Pull up on the assembly to release the bottom tabs.

CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the printer by a wire harness. Do not attempt to
completely remove the assembly.

1734 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2501 Release the bottom tabs

10. Turn the registration assembly over to access the back side, disconnect three connectors (callout
1), and then remove the assembly.

Figure 5-2502 Remove the assembly

Remove the paper density-detect assembly

Follow these steps to remove the density-detect assembly.

Remove the paper density-detect assembly 1735

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2503 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-2504 Remove the cover

1736 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-2505 Remove the cover

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the density-detect assembly (callout 2)..

Figure 5-2506 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1737

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the main drive assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-84 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L25-67902 Main-drive assembly with instruction guide

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

1738 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the USB cover (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Locate the USB cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2507 Locate the USB cover

Remove the USB cover (SFP) 1739

 2. Pull the cover off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2508 Remove the cover

Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Open the right door.

CAUTION: The fuser is very hot. After turning the printer power off, allow the fuser to cool for at
least 30 minutes before removing it.

Figure 5-2509 Open the right door

1740 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Grasp the two fuser handles, and then squeeze the two blue triggers on the handles to release the
fuser.

Figure 5-2510 Release the fuser

3. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2511 Remove the fuser

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

Remove the ITB 1741

 1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-2512 Open the right door

2. Pull the blue lever to release the ITB drive coupling.

Figure 5-2513 Release the ITB drive coupling

3. Push in on the blue arm to release the secondary transfer roller assembly, and then completely
lower the assembly.

NOTE: Press the blue arm on the secondary transfer roller assembly a second time to release the
roller assembly when it stops at the halfway open position.

1742 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2514 Lower the secondary transfer roller assembly

4. Release the left-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

Figure 5-2515 Release the front-side ITB spring

5. Place the left-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

NOTE: For late production M552/M553/E55040/E57540 printers and all M554/M555/M578

printers, this ITB spring is not installed.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

Remove the ITB 1743

 Figure 5-2516 Place the spring on the holder

6. Release the right-side ITB spring (callout 1) from the tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-2517 Release the rear-side ITB spring

7. Place the right-side ITB spring on the holder to keep it out of the way.

TIP: The holder is colored blue to help locate it.

1744 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2518 Place the spring on the holder

8. Grasp the two blue handles on the ITB.

CAUTION: If the ITB is removed to access other assemblies in the printer, use care. The ITB is a
sensitive assembly. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the
ITB in a safe and protected location.

Figure 5-2519 Grasp the ITB handles

9. Pull the ITB out of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.

Remove the ITB 1745

 Figure 5-2520 Remove the ITB

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

NOTE: This procedure is for the M553x/M555/E55040 printers only.

M555 models: Removing the control panel is similar to the procedure below. For the M555, a flat cable
connects the control panel to the formatter.

1. Tilt the control panel up.

Figure 5-2521 Tilt the control panel up

2. Use the small flat-blade screwdriver supplied in this kit to release the control-panel screws cover
tabs.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

1746 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2522 Release the control-panel screws cover tabs

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2523 Remove the cover

4. Use the small Phillips screwdriver supplied in this kit to remove two screws (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Store the screws in a secure place where they cannot fall down into the printer.

TIP: The screwdriver has a reversible shaft. Simply pull the shaft out of the handle, and then
reinstall it with the desired end facing out.

Remove the control panel (M553x/M555/E55040) 1747

 Figure 5-2524 Remove two screws

5. Rotate the control-panel base toward the front of the printer.

Figure 5-2525 Rotate the control-panel base up

6. Slightly slide the control-panel base toward the rear of the printer (callout 1) to release it, and then
turn the control panel over (callout 2) to access the bottom side.

CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove
the control panel.

1748 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2526 Turn the control panel over

7. Disconnect one USB cable (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and then remove the control panel.

NOTE: M555 only: Disconnect one flat cable (not shown), and then remove the control panel.

Figure 5-2527 Disconnect two connectors

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

Remove Tray 2 1749

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2528 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2529 Remove the tray

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP printer, However, the procedure is correct for MFP printers.

1750 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-2530 Open the front door

2. Open the TCU.

NOTE: The toner collection hatch cover automatically closes when the TCU is opened.

Figure 5-2531 Open the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1751

 3. Pull the TCU away from the printer at an angle to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not open the toner collection hatch cover when handling the TCU. If toner gets on
clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.

Figure 5-2532 Remove the TCU

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2533 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1752 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2534 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter (SFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J2 (callout 1; this is the touchscreen connector for the M553x and
E55040 printers)

● All models: J9 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J18 (this connector is empty unless the optional hard-disk drive is installed)

● M553n/dn and M552dn: J25 (this is the wireless connector for the M553x and E55040 models)

● All models: J57

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (SFP) 1753

 Figure 5-2535 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter..

Figure 5-2536 Remove four screws

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1754 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2537 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2538 Remove the HDD

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1755

 1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2539 Locate the fax PCA

2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2540 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2541 Release one latch

1756 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2542 Remove the fax PCA

Remove the formatter (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter (MFP).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

The following connectors are empty:

● All models: J1 (this connector is empty unless the optional DIMM is installed)

● All models: J3

● M577dn: J15 (this is the fax connector for the M577f/z/c models)

● All models: J21 (this connector is empty unless the optional internal USB ports component is
installed)

● All models: J23

● All models: J24

● All models: J51

● All models: J57

● All models: J97

● All models: J98 (this connector is empty unless the optional trusted platform module (TPM) is
installed)

IMPORTANT: The flat-cable connector (callout 1) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that
uses a hinged retainer to secure the flat cable. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the
flat cable.

Remove the formatter (MFP) 1757

 Figure 5-2543 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2544 Remove four screws

3. Remove the formatter.

Figure 5-2545 Remove the formatter

1758 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the rear cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2546 Remove four screws

2. Slightly slide the cover to the right (callout 1), rotate the bottom of the cover away from the printer
(callout 2), and then pull the top of the cover away from the printer (callout 3) to remove the cover.

Figure 5-2547 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the rear cover (SFP) 1759

 Remove the rear upper cover (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

TIP: These two screws are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling them, rotate the
screws counterclockwise to align them with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn
them clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the
screw holes.

Figure 5-2548 Remove two screws

2. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to release the right edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2549 Release the right edge

1760 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Pull the right edge of the cover (callout 1) away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the right
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2550 Slide the cover right

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2551 Remove the cover

Remove the rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the rear cover (MFP) 1761

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2552 Remove four screws

2. Slide the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2553 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1762 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. At the left side of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2554 Release one tab

2. Slide the left upper cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2555 Slide the cover back

3. Rotate the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2556 Remove the left upper cover

Remove the left upper cover (MFP) 1763

 Remove the right front upper cover (MFP non-stapler models)
Follow these steps to remove the right front upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for non-stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2557 Remove one screw

2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2558 Release two tabs

1764 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the front of the cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 5-2559 Rotate the cover

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for stapler models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2560 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler cover (MFP stapler models) 1765

 2. Release two tabs at the front edge of the cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-2561 Release two tabs

3. Release the back edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2562 Release the back edge of the cover

1766 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2563 Remove the cover

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

NOTE: The ISA includes the document feeder, image scanner, scanner control board (SCB), control
panel, keyboard (flow models) and NFC PCA (not all models).

1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2564 Remove one screw

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1767

 2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2565 Remove two screws

3. At the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

NOTE: The M577z is shown in the figure below. The procedure is correct for all MFP models.

Figure 5-2566 Remove one screw

1768 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1) on the formatter, and then pass the wire harnesses and
cables through the top opening in the formatter case (callout 2).

Figure 5-2567 Disconnect cables and connectors

5. Disconnect two connectors on the scanner control board (callout 1).

MFP stapler models: Disconnect one connector for the stapler on the scanner control board
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2568 Disconnect connectors

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) (MFP) 1769

 6. Slide the image scanner toward the back of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2569 Release the image scanner

7. Lift the ISA straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-2570 Remove the ISA

Remove the stapler unit (MFP stapler models)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: This step is for stapler models only.

1770 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-2571 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slide the stapler unit up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2572 Remove the stapler unit

1
2

Remove the right upper cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the right side of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Remove the right upper cover (MFP) 1771

 Figure 5-2573 Remove two screws and one connector

2. At the back of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

M577/M578z: Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is smaller than the screws removed in the previous step. When
reinstalling the right upper cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct position.

Figure 5-2574 Remove one screw and connector

1772 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the printer.

Figure 5-2575 Slide the cover

4. Lift the cover away from the printer to remove it.

M577/M578z: Release the cables (callout 1) through the slot (callout 2) in the printer.

Figure 5-2576 Remove the cover

1
2

Remove the top rear cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top rear cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

Remove the top rear cover (MFP) 1773

 1. At the top of the printer, remove five screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2577 Remove five screws

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the front edge of the cover.

Figure 5-2578 Release two tabs

1774 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the top rear cover.

Figure 5-2579 Remove the cover

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2580 Remove one screw

Remove the paper feed cover (MFP) 1775

 2. Lift the cover up to remove it.

Figure 5-2581 Remove the cover

Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Reinstallation tip: This screw is longer and a different type of screw than the screw removed in the
next step. When reinstalling the top cover, make sure that this screw is installed in the correct
position.

Figure 5-2582 Remove one screw

1776 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2583 Remove one screw

3. At the front of the printer, release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-2584 Release one tab

Remove the top cover (MFP) 1777

 4. At the top of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1) next to the output bin, and then remove the top
cover.

Figure 5-2585 Remove the cover

Remove the top bracket (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top bracket.

NOTE: This procedure is for MFP models only.

1. At the top of the printer, remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2586 Remove three screws

1778 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. At the top of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2587 Remove two screws

3. Lift the top bracket up to remove it.

Figure 5-2588 Remove the bracket

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 1779

 1. At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2589 Remove one screw

2. Release one tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover away from the printer (callout 2), and
then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-2590 Release the cover

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2591 Remove the cover

1780 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the upper cover (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the upper cover.

NOTE: This procedure is for SFP models only.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2592 Remove three screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slightly separate the corner of
the cover from the chassis.

NOTE: This is a self-tapping plastic-thread screw. Make sure that this screw is used in this location
when it is reinstalled.

Figure 5-2593 Remove one screw and release one tab

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up on the cover to release it.

IMPORTANT: M554 models: Disconnect the control-panel flat cable at the formatter.

NOTE: If the cover does not release, check for addition tabs by locating the triangles embossed in
the cover at tab locations.

Remove the upper cover (SFP) 1781

 Figure 5-2594 Release the cover

4. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2595 Remove the cover

Remove the formatter case

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.

1. MFP only: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness (callout 2) through
two openings in the formatter case (callout 3).

Figure 5-2596 Disconnect one connector

1782 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release two tabs (callout 1) on the black plastic bracket. Hold the tabs in the released position, and
then slide the bracket (callout 2) to the right to remove it from the formatter case.

Figure 5-2597 Remove the bracket

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) cover to the right
to remove it.

Figure 5-2598 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Pass two wire harnesses and one flat cable (callout 1) through the opening in the formatter case,
and then release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 2).

CAUTION: The flat cable might be attached to the formatter case with double-sided tape. Make
sure that this tape is released, so that the flat cable is not damaged when the formatter case is
removed.

Remove the formatter case 1783

 Figure 5-2599 Release wire harnesses and flat cable

5. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2600 Remove six screws

6. Rotate the bottom of the formatter case away from the printer (callout 1), and then pull it down
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2601 Release the formatter case

1784 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Pass the wire harnesses through the opening in the formatter case to remove it.

IMPORTANT: If the formatter case is removed so that it can be replaced, make sure to transfer the
memory PCA (island of data) and plastic bracket (callout 1) to the replacement case.

Figure 5-2602 Remove the formatter case

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a SFP model. However, the procedure is correct for an MFP.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover toward the rear of the printer (callout 2) to
release it.

TIP: If the right door is closed, open it now.

Figure 5-2603 Release the cover

Remove the right rear cover 1785

 2. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-2604 Remove the cover

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

1. Disconnect one wire harness (callout 1), and then pass the wire harness through the opening
(callout 2) in the chassis.

Figure 5-2605 Disconnect one wire harness

1786 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect three connectors on the DC controller (callout 1), and then disconnect four connectors
(callout 2) on the LVPS.

Figure 5-2606 Disconnect seven connectors

3. Pass the wire harnesses from the DC controller to the LVPS through the opening in the chassis
(callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2607 Pass the wire harnesses through the opening

4. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2608 Remove three screws

Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1787

 5. Rotate the top of the LVPS away from the printer (callout 1), and then slide it up and out (callout 2) of
the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2609 Remove the LVPS

Remove the power supply fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2610 Remove one screw

1788 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer on the top of the fan bracket.

Figure 5-2611 Release the wire harnesses

3. Lift the fan up (callout 1), and then slide it out of the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2612 Remove the fan

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD).

Remove the high-voltage power supply D (HVPSD) 1789

 1. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1) on the DC controller.

Figure 5-2613 Disconnect one flat cable

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove one self tapping screw (callout 2) on the HVPSD.

Figure 5-2614 Remove three screws

3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the HVPSD (callout 2).

Figure 5-2615 Remove the HVPSD

1790 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the auto close assembly
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2616 Disconnect two connectors

2. Disconnect two flat cables (callout 1), and then release them from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2617 Disconnect two flat cables

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

NOTE: Release one wire harness from the retainer (callout 4) as the assembly is removed.

Remove the auto close assembly 1791

 Figure 5-2618 Remove the assembly

Remove the DC controller (DCC) and sheet-metal bracket

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller and sheet-metal bracket together.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1).

Empty DCC connectors

● J140

● J141

● J143

1792 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2619 Remove two screws

2. Lift up on the DC controller and sheet-metal plate to remove it.

Figure 5-2620 Remove the plate

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply T.

NOTE: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the high-voltage power supply T (HVPST) 1793

 1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then disconnect one flat cable (callout 2).

Figure 5-2621 Disconnect five connectors and one flat cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2622 Remove one screw

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then separate the HVPST from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the HVPST. It is still connected to the printer by
ground wire harness.

1794 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2623 Release the HVPST

4. Release one ground wire connector (callout 1), and then remove the HVPST.

Figure 5-2624 Remove the HVPST

Remove the fuser drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide up and
away from the chassis to move it out of the way (callout 3).

CAUTION: One wire harnesses in the guide is still attached to the fuser motor. Do not attempt to
completely remove the guide.

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1795

 Figure 5-2625 Move the guide out of the way

2 1
3

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2626 Disconnect one connector

1796 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2627 Remove one screw

4. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the guide down to release it (callout 2), and then rotate the guide
away from the chassis to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-2628 Remove the guide

1
2

Remove the fuser drive assembly 1797

 5. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2629 Remove three screws

6. Remove the assembly.

CAUTION: Two gears on the back side of the assembly are not captive. Handle the assembly
carefully.

Figure 5-2630 Remove the assembly

1798 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Optional step: Two gears (callout 1) on the back side of the assembly are not captive. If the gears
are dislodged, install them as shown.

Figure 5-2631 Remove the assembly

Remove the main-drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the main-drive assembly.

IMPORTANT: If the toner cartridges have not already been removed prior to servicing the product,
remove them now.

The toner cartridges are sensitive to strong light. Set them aside and cover them with paper to protect
them.

1. At the rear side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2632 Remove one screw

Remove the main-drive assembly 1799

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), push down on the cover (callout 2), and then rotate the cover away
(callout 3) from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2633 Remove the cover

1
2

3. Release the wire harnesses from the guides (callout 1).

Figure 5-2634 Release the wire harnesses

1800 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. At the top of the printer, disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2635 Disconnect two connectors

5. Release the wire harnesses (callout 1) from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2636 Release the wire harnesses

Remove the main-drive assembly 1801

 6. At the left side of the printer, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire
harnesses from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2637 Disconnect one connector

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then push up on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2638 Release the guide

1802 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

8. Remove the guide.

Figure 5-2639 Remove the guide

9. Release one wire harness (callout 1) from the retainer.

Figure 5-2640 Release one wire harness

Remove the main-drive assembly 1803

 10. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then pull down on the guide (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2641 Release the guide

11. Remove the guide.

Figure 5-2642 Remove the guide

1804 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 12. Remove seven screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2643 Remove seven screws

13. Carefully remove the main-drive assembly.

Figure 5-2644 Remove the main-drive assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1805

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the main-drive assembly

Follow these steps to install the main-drive assembly.

CAUTION: When handling the drive assembly, take care not to wipe any of the grease off of the gears
on the back side of the assembly.

1. Check the main drive cam alignment.

The cams on the back side of the assembly must be correctly aligned before the replacement
assembly is installed.

1806 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

a. Locate the 4 gears and cams (callouts 1-4) on the back side of the assembly.

Figure 5-2645 Main drive gear and cam locations

1 2 3 4

b. Verify the alignment of the holes in the 4 gears with the holes in the assembly chassis as
shown.

TIP: Rotate the shaft under the gears to change the alignment if necessary.

Install the main-drive assembly 1807

 Figure 5-2646 Main drive gear and cam locations

1 2

1 2 3 4

3 4

2. Before proceeding, make sure that the blue ITB drive handle is in the locked (callout 1; pushed in)
position on the replacement main-drive assembly.

NOTE: If the drive handle is in the unlocked (callout 2; pulled out) position it will be difficult to install
assembly.

1808 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2647 Check the blue ITB drive handle

3. With the front door closed, carefully position the replacement main-drive assembly on the printer.

CAUTION: When handling the assembly, take care not to wipe any of the grease off of the gears
on the back side of the assembly.

TIP: Place the bottom of the assembly on the printer first, and then rotate the top of the assembly
onto the printer.

Make sure that the entire assembly fits flush up against the chassis.

Figure 5-2648 Install the main-drive assembly

Install the main-drive assembly 1809

 4. Install seven screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2649 Install seven screws

5. To verify that the assembly is correctly fastened to the chassis, open and close the front door while
observing the cartridge drive gears (callout 1). The gears must freely move in and out when the door
is opened and closed.

NOTE: If the gears do not move freely, remove the assembly, reposition it on the chassis, and then
verify that the gears move freely.

Figure 5-2650 Verify that the assembly is correctly fastened to the chassis

1810 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Position the guide on the assembly, push up to install it, and then make sure that the two tabs
(callout 1) snap into place

Figure 5-2651 Install the guide

7. Install one wire harness (callout 1) on the retainer.

Figure 5-2652 Install one wire harness

Install the main-drive assembly 1811

 8. Position the guide on the assembly, push up to install it, and then make sure that the two tabs
(callout 1) snap into place.

Figure 5-2653 Install the guide

9. At the left side of the printer, connect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire
harnesses from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2654 Connect one connector

1812 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

10. At the top of the printer, install the wire harnesses (callout 1) in the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 5-2655 Install the wire harnesses

11. Connect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-2656 Connect two connectors

Install the main-drive assembly 1813

 12. Install the wire harnesses in the guides (callout 1).

Figure 5-2657 Install the wire harnesses

13. At the rear side of the printer do the following:

a. Position the right edge of the cover on the printer.

b. Rotate the left edge of the cover toward (callout 1) the printer to install it.

c. Push up on the cover (callout 2) to engage it.

d. Make sure that one tab (callout 3) snaps into place.

Figure 5-2658 Install the cover

1814 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

14. Install one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-2659 Install one screw

Install the main-drive assembly 1815

 Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder
Learn how to remove and replace the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5

Learn about removing and replacing Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-85 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5150-020CN Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1816 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2660 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2661 Remove the tray

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1817

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

1818 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-86 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2662 Release three tabs

Remove the rear cover 1819

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2663 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1820 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the right door (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-87 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5146-000CN Right door (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Right door (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1821

 1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2664 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2665 Remove the cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1822 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2666 Open the door

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2667 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Remove the right door 1823

 Figure 5-2668 Remove the hinge bracket

4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2669 Release the hinge bracket

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1824 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door hinge bracket (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the right door hinge bracket (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-88 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1781-000CN Right door hinge bracket (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Removal and replacement: Right door hinge bracket (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1825
 Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2670 Release three tabs

1826 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2671 Remove the cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2672 Open the door

Remove the right door 1827

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2673 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Figure 5-2674 Remove the hinge bracket

1828 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2675 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the right door hinge bracket

Follow these steps to remove the right door hinge bracket.

■ Separate the right door hinge bracket form the door to remove it.

Figure 5-2676 Remove the hinge bracket

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the right door hinge bracket 1829

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right-lower cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the right-lower cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-89 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1793-000CN Right-lower cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

1830 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2677 Release three tabs

Remove the rear cover 1831

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2678 Remove the cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2679 Open the door

1832 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2680 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Figure 5-2681 Remove the hinge bracket

Remove the right door 1833

 4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2682 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the right-lower cover

Follow these steps to remove the right-lower cover.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the three mounting tabs on the back side of the
cover.

Figure 5-2683 Cover mounting tabs

2. Partially open the tray, slightly flex the end of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and
then slide it towards the front of the accessory (callout 2) to release it.

CAUTION: The three mounting tabs on the back side of the cover are easily damaged. Do not over
flex the end of the cover when it is released. Push in on the middle tab to protect it when removing
the cover.

1834 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2684 Release the cover

3. Remove the right-lower cover.

Figure 5-2685 Remove the cover

Remove the right-door link

Follow these steps to remove the right-door link.

Remove the right-door link 1835

 ■ Rotate the door link to align the keyed end of the link to pass through the keyed potion of the
right-lower cover to remove it.

Figure 5-2686 Remove the right-door link

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1836 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right-door link (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the right-door link (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-90 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1778-000CN Right-door link (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Right-door link (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1837

 1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2687 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2688 Remove the cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1838 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2689 Open the door

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2690 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Remove the right door 1839

 Figure 5-2691 Remove the hinge bracket

4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2692 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the right-lower cover

Follow these steps to remove the right-lower cover.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the three mounting tabs on the back side of the
cover.

Figure 5-2693 Cover mounting tabs

1840 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Partially open the tray, slightly flex the end of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and
then slide it towards the front of the accessory (callout 2) to release it.

CAUTION: The three mounting tabs on the back side of the cover are easily damaged. Do not over
flex the end of the cover when it is released. Push in on the middle tab to protect it when removing
the cover.

Figure 5-2694 Release the cover

3. Remove the right-lower cover.

Figure 5-2695 Remove the cover

Remove the right-door link

Follow these steps to remove the right-door link.

Remove the right-door link 1841

 ■ Rotate the door link to align the keyed end of the link to pass through the keyed potion of the
right-lower cover to remove it.

Figure 5-2696 Remove the right-door link

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1842 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the left cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-91 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1791-000CN Left cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Removal and replacement: Left cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1843

 1. Partially pull the tray out of the accessory, and then release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2697 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2698 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1844 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: OP drawer holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the drawer holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-92 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-0445-000CN OP drawer holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Removal and replacement: OP drawer holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1845

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2699 Release three tabs

1846 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2700 Remove the cover

Remove the OP drawer holder

Follow these steps to remove the OP drawer holder.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2701 Disconnect one connector

Remove the OP drawer holder 1847

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the OP drawer holder as
shown (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 5-2702 Remove the drawer holder

2 1

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1848 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-93 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1849
 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2703 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2704 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

1850 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-94 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 1851

 1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2705 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2706 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1852 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the auto close assembly

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J903), and then release the wire harness from the retainer
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2707 Disconnect one connector

Remove the auto close assembly 1853

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2708 Remove two screws

3. Lift up on the assembly to release it.

Figure 5-2709 Release the assembly

4. Remove the auto close assembly.

Figure 5-2710 Remove the assembly

1854 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Switch button (SW12) (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the switch button (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1855

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-95 Part information

Part number Part description

WC2-5806-000CN Switch button (SW12) (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2711 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

1856 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2712 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-96 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1857

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2713 Release three tabs

1858 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2714 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1859

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the switch button (SW12)

Follow these steps to remove the switch button.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2715 Disconnect one connector

2. Squeeze two tabs to release them, and then push the switch through the opening in the chassis
into the tray cavity.

Figure 5-2716 Squeeze two tabs

1860 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the switch button (SW12).

Figure 5-2717 Remove the switch button (SW12)

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1861

 Removal and replacement: Drawer connector holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the drawer connector holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-97 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1741-000CN Drawer connector holder (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

1862 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-98 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 1863

 1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2718 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2719 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1864 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the drawer connector holder

Follow these steps to remove the drawer connector holder.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J901).

Figure 5-2720 Disconnect one connector

Remove the drawer connector holder 1865

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the drawer connector holder as shown (callout 2) to
release it.

Figure 5-2721 Release one tab

3. Remove the drawer connector holder.

Figure 5-2722 Remove the tray connector

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1866 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper-feeder drive PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper-feeder drive PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-99 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7139-000CN Paper-feeder drive PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Removal and replacement: Paper-feeder drive PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1867
 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-100 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1868 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2723 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2724 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the rear cover 1869

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the paper-feeder drive PCA

Follow these steps to remove the paper-feeder drive PCA.

1. Disconnect 5 connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: The J908 connector is empty.

1870 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2725 Disconnect all of the connectors

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the paper-feeder drive PCA (callout 2).

Figure 5-2726 Remove the PCA

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1871

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper-feed assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper-feed assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-101 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5145-000CN Paper-feed assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

1872 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2727 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove the tray 1873

 Figure 5-2728 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-102 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

1874 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2729 Release three tabs

Remove the rear cover 1875

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2730 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1876 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2731 Open the door

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2732 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Remove the right door 1877

 Figure 5-2733 Remove the hinge bracket

4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2734 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the drawer connector holder

Follow these steps to remove the drawer connector holder.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J901).

Figure 5-2735 Disconnect one connector

1878 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the drawer connector holder as shown (callout 2) to
release it.

Figure 5-2736 Release one tab

3. Remove the drawer connector holder.

Figure 5-2737 Remove the tray connector

Remove the paper feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed assembly.

Remove the paper feed assembly 1879

 1. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2738 Remove six screws

2. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2739 Remove the sheet-metal plate

1880 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Release the green jam handle (callout 1), and then rotate the paper feed guide down (callout 2) and
out of the way.

Figure 5-2740 Release the paper feed guide

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout 3).

Figure 5-2741 Remove the cover

3
1 2

Remove the paper feed assembly 1881

 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2742 Disconnect one connector

6. Remove two springs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2743 Remove two springs

1882 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2744 Remove three screws

8. Slightly raise the tray end of the assembly, and then release two alignment pins (callout 1).

Figure 5-2745 Release two alignment pins

Remove the paper feed assembly 1883

 9. Release one tab on the gear (callout 1), slide the assembly away (callout 2) from the lifter drive
assembly to release the shaft from the gear, and then remove the paper feed assembly.

Figure 5-2746 Remove the paper feed assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1884 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-103 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5154-000CN Paper pickup assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

NOTE: The tray pickup and separation roller assembly is included with
the paper pickup assembly.

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1885
 Remove the tray
Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2747 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2748 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

1886 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-104 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 1887

 1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2749 Release three tabs

2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2750 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1888 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the drawer connector holder

Follow these steps to remove the drawer connector holder.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J901).

Figure 5-2751 Disconnect one connector

Remove the drawer connector holder 1889

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the drawer connector holder as shown (callout 2) to
release it.

Figure 5-2752 Release one tab

3. Remove the drawer connector holder.

Figure 5-2753 Remove the tray connector

Remove the paper feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the paper feed assembly.

1890 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2754 Remove six screws

2. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2755 Remove the sheet-metal plate

Remove the paper feed assembly 1891

 3. Release the green jam handle (callout 1), and then rotate the paper feed guide down (callout 2) and
out of the way.

Figure 5-2756 Release the paper feed guide

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout 3).

Figure 5-2757 Remove the cover

3
1 2

1892 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2758 Disconnect one connector

6. Remove two springs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2759 Remove two springs

Remove the paper feed assembly 1893

 7. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2760 Remove three screws

8. Slightly raise the tray end of the assembly, and then release two alignment pins (callout 1).

Figure 5-2761 Release two alignment pins

1894 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 9. Release one tab on the gear (callout 1), slide the assembly away (callout 2) from the lifter drive
assembly to release the shaft from the gear, and then remove the paper feed assembly.

Figure 5-2762 Remove the paper feed assembly

Remove the paper pickup assembly

Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2763 Disconnect one connector

Remove the paper pickup assembly 1895

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2764 Remove three screws

3. Release one alignment pins (callout 1), and then lower the left end of the assembly (callout 2)—the
end near the tray cavity.

Figure 5-2765 Lower the end of the assembly

1896 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Slide the paper pickup assembly to the left to release it from the drive gear on the lifter drive
assembly.

Figure 5-2766 Release the assembly from the drive gear

5. Remove the paper pickup assembly through the tray cavity.

Figure 5-2767 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1897

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feeder drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the feeder drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-105 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5148-000CN Feeder drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

1898 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2768 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Remove the tray 1899

 Figure 5-2769 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-106 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

1900 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2770 Release three tabs

Remove the rear cover 1901

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2771 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1902 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2772 Open the door

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2773 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

Remove the right door 1903

 Figure 5-2774 Remove the hinge bracket

4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2775 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the right-lower cover

Follow these steps to remove the right-lower cover.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the three mounting tabs on the back side of the
cover.

Figure 5-2776 Cover mounting tabs

1904 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Partially open the tray, slightly flex the end of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and
then slide it towards the front of the accessory (callout 2) to release it.

CAUTION: The three mounting tabs on the back side of the cover are easily damaged. Do not over
flex the end of the cover when it is released. Push in on the middle tab to protect it when removing
the cover.

Figure 5-2777 Release the cover

3. Remove the right-lower cover.

Figure 5-2778 Remove the cover

Remove the drawer connector holder

Follow these steps to remove the drawer connector holder.

Remove the drawer connector holder 1905

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J901).

Figure 5-2779 Disconnect one connector

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the drawer connector holder as shown (callout 2) to
release it.

Figure 5-2780 Release one tab

3. Remove the drawer connector holder.

Figure 5-2781 Remove the tray connector

1906 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the feeder drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the feeder drive assembly.

1. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2782 Remove six screws

2. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2783 Remove the sheet-metal plate

Remove the feeder drive assembly 1907

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2784 Remove two screws

4. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2785 Remove the sheet-metal plate

1908 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2786 Disconnect one connector

6. Remove one spring (callout 1).

Figure 5-2787 Remove one spring

Remove the feeder drive assembly 1909

 7. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2788 Remove two screws

8. Remove the feeder drive assembly.

CAUTION: If the assembly is being removed to access another part, take care not to wipe any of
the grease off of the gears.

Figure 5-2789 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1910 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1911
 Table 5-107 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5149-000CN Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the tray

Follow these steps to remove Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2790 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

1912 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2791 Remove the tray

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder).

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.

If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water
sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Table 5-108 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-1792-000CN Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (1x550-sheet paper feeder) 1913

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-2792 Release three tabs

1914 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and then lift it up to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-2793 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1915

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Open the door.

Figure 5-2794 Open the door

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the door-hinge bracket away from the chassis (callout 2)
to release it.

Figure 5-2795 Release the hinge bracket

3. Remove the door-hinge bracket from the chassis.

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the accessory by the door link. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

The door hinge bracket is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the door.

1916 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2796 Remove the hinge bracket

4. Release the door link from the slot in the door to remove the right door.

Figure 5-2797 Release the hinge bracket

Remove the right-lower cover

Follow these steps to remove the right-lower cover.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the three mounting tabs on the back side of the
cover.

Figure 5-2798 Cover mounting tabs

Remove the right-lower cover 1917

 2. Partially open the tray, slightly flex the end of the cover away from the accessory (callout 1), and
then slide it towards the front of the accessory (callout 2) to release it.

CAUTION: The three mounting tabs on the back side of the cover are easily damaged. Do not over
flex the end of the cover when it is released. Push in on the middle tab to protect it when removing
the cover.

Figure 5-2799 Release the cover

3. Remove the right-lower cover.

Figure 5-2800 Remove the cover

Remove the drawer connector holder

Follow these steps to remove the drawer connector holder.

1918 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J901).

Figure 5-2801 Disconnect one connector

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the drawer connector holder as shown (callout 2) to
release it.

Figure 5-2802 Release one tab

3. Remove the drawer connector holder.

Figure 5-2803 Remove the tray connector

Remove the drawer connector holder 1919

 Remove the feeder drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the feeder drive assembly.

1. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2804 Remove six screws

2. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2805 Remove the sheet-metal plate

1920 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2806 Remove two screws

4. Remove the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 5-2807 Remove the sheet-metal plate

Remove the feeder drive assembly 1921

 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2808 Disconnect one connector

6. Remove one spring (callout 1).

Figure 5-2809 Remove one spring

1922 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2810 Remove two screws

8. Remove the feeder drive assembly.

CAUTION: If the assembly is being removed to access another part, take care not to wipe any of
the grease off of the gears.

Figure 5-2811 Remove the assembly

Remove the lifter drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the lifter drive assembly.

Remove the lifter drive assembly 1923

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J904), and then release the wire harness from the retainer
(callout 2) and the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-2812 Disconnect one connector

1
3
2

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1; J902 and the switch button), and then release the wire
harness from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 5-2813 Remove the sheet-metal plate

1924 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-2814 Remove two screws

4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slightly pull the lifter drive assembly away from the chassis to
release one gear (callout 2).

Figure 5-2815 Release one tab

2 1

Remove the lifter drive assembly 1925

 5. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then rotate the assembly—as shown—away from the chassis
(callout 2) to release it.

Figure 5-2816 Release two tabs

6. To remove the lifter drive assembly, feed the wire harness thorough the opening (callout 1) in the
assembly.

Reinstallation tip: If a replacement assembly is installed, transfer the gear (callout 2) to the
replacement assembly.

Figure 5-2817 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1926 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1927

 Remove and replacement: Accessories
Learn how to remove and replace the accessories.

Removal and replacement: Fixed tray guide kit

Learn about removing and replacing the fixed tray guide kit.

NOTE: The procedure in this section shows Tray 2 in the figures. However, this procedure is also
correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-109 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7708 Fixed tray guide kit with instruction guide

NOTE: The kit includes four length guide locks, four width guide locks,
and eight screws. Only one kit is required per printer.

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove Tray 2
Learn about removing Tray 2.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

The figures in this section show Tray 2. However, this procedure is also correct for Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray
5. Always carefully read the instructions that accompany the figures.

1928 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 5-2818 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: For a replacement tray: If the tray has Fixed Tray Guides installed and are still required,
move hardware to new tray. If necessary, order new kit: 3GY25–67901 Kit - Fixed Tray Guide. Only one
kit required per engine.

Figure 5-2819 Remove the tray

Install the fixed tray guide

Learn about installing the fixed tray guide.

1. Identify the kit components.

● Callout 1: Width guide lock

Install the fixed tray guide 1929

 ● Callout 2: Length guide lock

● Callout 3: Screws (self tapping)

Figure 5-2820 Identify kit components

X4 X4 X8
1 2 3
2. Adjust the sliding tray paper width guide to the A4/8.5 setting.

Figure 5-2821 Adjust the tray paper width guide

A4/8.5

1930 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Install the width guide lock over the width guide in the tray.

Figure 5-2822 Install the width guide lock

4. Install one screw to secure the lock in place.

CAUTION: Do not use a power screwdriver to install the screw.

NOTE: Verify that the tray paper width guide is set to the A4/8.5 setting.

Figure 5-2823 Install one screw

8.5 A4

Install the fixed tray guide 1931

 5. Adjust the sliding tray paper length guide to the A4/11 setting.

Figure 5-2824 Adjust the tray paper length guide

A4/11

6. To install the length guide lock on the length guide in the tray, do the following:

a. Position the hooked end of the lock under the rear edge of the length guide (as shown).

Figure 5-2825 Install the length guide lock (1 of 2)

b. Rotate the lock down and onto the length guide.

1932 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2826 Install the length guide lock (2 of 2)

7. Verify that the lock is correctly installed on the length guide. The lock mounting screw hole must
align with the hole in the guide.

IMPORTANT: If the hole in the lock and the guide are not aligned, remove the lock and reinstall it.

Figure 5-2827 Check length guide installation

8. Install one screw to secure the lock in place.

CAUTION: Do not use a power screwdriver to install the screw.

NOTE: Reinstall the tray.

Install the fixed tray guide 1933

 Figure 5-2828 Install one screw

Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module (M552/M553)

Learn about removing and replacing the trusted platform module (TPM).

IMPORTANT: M554 and M555: The TPM is a factory installed component and not a service part. For
problems with the TPM, see the printer control-panel messages document (CPMD).

Click here to access the current CPMD for this printer.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-110 Part information

Part number Part description

F5S62-61001 Trusted platform module (TPM) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

1934 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2829 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2830 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the formatter cover 1935

 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2831 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2832 Remove the HDD

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: Removing the TPM is only necessary for formatter or TPM accessory replacement.

1936 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the TPM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2833 Locate the TPM

2. Pull the TPM straight off of the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-2834 Remove the TPM

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1937

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to install the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Align the connector on the TPM (callout 1) with the connector on the formatter (callout 2), and then
push the TPM onto the formatter to install it.

NOTE: The TPM can only be install in one direction on the formatter.

1938 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2835 Install the TPM

2
1

2. Verify that the TPM is fully seated in the connector.

Figure 5-2836 Verify that the TPM is fully seated

Install the HDD

Follow these steps to install the HD).

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

Install the HDD 1939

 1. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-2837 Install the holder

2. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Figure 5-2838 Release the HDD

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1940 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2839 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2840 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1941

 Figure 5-2841 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module (M577/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the trusted platform module (TPM).

IMPORTANT: M578: The TPM is a factory installed component and not a service part. For problems
with the TPM, see the printer control-panel messages document (CPMD).

Click here to access the current CPMD for this printer.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-111 Part information

Part number Part description

F5S62-61001 Trusted platform module (TPM) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1942 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2842 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2843 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

NOTE: This procedure is for HDD (or optionally installed HDD) models only.
An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

NOTE: If a HDD is not installed, skip this step.

Remove the formatter cover 1943

 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Hold the tabs in the released position, and then rotate the hard disk
drive (HDD) up (callout 2 ) to release the connector from the formatter

Figure 5-2844 Release the HDD

2. Slide the HDD away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-2845 Remove the HDD

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: Removing the TPM is only necessary for formatter or TPM accessory replacement.

1944 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the TPM component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2846 Locate the TPM

2. Pull the TPM straight off of the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-2847 Remove the TPM

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1945

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to install the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Align the connector on the TPM (callout 1) with the connector on the formatter (callout 2), and then
push the TPM onto the formatter to install it.

NOTE: The TPM can only be install in one direction on the formatter.

1946 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2848 Install the TPM

2. Verify that the TPM is fully seated in the connector.

Figure 5-2849 Verify that the TPM is fully seated

Install the HDD

Follow these steps to install the HD).

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

Install the HDD 1947

 1. Align the end of the bracket (callout 1) with the slot in the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the HDD
into the printer (callout 3) to engage the bracket with the chassis.

Figure 5-2850 Install the holder

2. Hold the HDD connector latch (callout 1) in the released position, and then rotate the HDD down and
into the connector on the formatter to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tab (callout 2) snaps into place, and that the HDD is securely installed.

Figure 5-2851 Release the HDD

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1948 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2852 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2853 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Remove the formatter cover 1949

 Figure 5-2854 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: Internal USB ports (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

Learn about removing and replacing the internal USB ports.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-112 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L28-67902 Internal USB ports

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1950 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2855 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2856 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

Remove the formatter cover 1951

 1. Locate the internal USB ports module on the formatter.

Figure 5-2857 Locate the USB ports module

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2858 Disconnect one connector

1952 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2859 Disconnect one connector

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2860 Disconnect one connector

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) 1953

 5. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the internal USB ports module (callout 2).

Figure 5-2861 Remove the module

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1954 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the internal USB ports module

Follow these steps to install the internal USB ports module.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Use the figure below to identify the correct internal USB ports components for the SFP model.

Figure 5-2862 Identify the USB ports components

2. Position the notches on the internal USB ports PCA over the clips on the PCA holder and press
down to attach the PCA to the holder. Make sure that the clips snap into place.

Figure 5-2863 Install the PCA in the holder

Install the internal USB ports module 1955

 3. Connect the cable harness to the PCA.

Figure 5-2864 Connect the cable harness

4. Press the internal USB ports module toward the formatter case until the clips snap into place.

Figure 5-2865 Install the module

1956 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Connect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2866 Connect one connector

6. Connect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2867 Connect one connector

Install the internal USB ports module 1957

 7. Connect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2868 Connect one connector

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2869 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1958 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2870 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2871 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: Internal USB ports (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the internal USB ports.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Internal USB ports (M577/M578/E57540) 1959

 Table 5-113 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L28-67902 Internal USB ports

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2872 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1960 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2873 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Locate the internal USB ports module on the formatter.

Figure 5-2874 Locate the USB ports module

Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) 1961

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2875 Disconnect one connector

3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the internal USB ports module (callout 2).

Figure 5-2876 Remove the module

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1962 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the internal USB ports module

Follow these steps to install the internal USB ports module.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

1. Use the figure below to identify the correct internal USB ports components for the SFP model.

Figure 5-2877 Identify the USB ports components

Install the internal USB ports module 1963

 2. Position the notches on the internal USB ports PCA over the clips on the PCA holder and press
down to attach the PCA to the holder. Make sure that the clips snap into place.

Figure 5-2878 Install the PCA in the holder

3. Connect the cable harness to the PCA.

Figure 5-2879 Connect the cable harness

1964 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Position the clips and locator pins on the internal USB ports module holder (callout 1) in the holes
(callout 2) in the formatter case.

Figure 5-2880 Connect one connector

5. Press the internal USB ports module toward the formatter case until the clips snap into place.

Figure 5-2881 Install the module

Install the internal USB ports module 1965

 6. Connect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-2882 Connect one connector

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2883 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1966 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2884 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2885 Loosen the thumbscrews

Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540)

Learn about removing and replacing the fax PCA.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540) 1967

 Table 5-114 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L53-67901 Analog FAX 600 kit

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

If possible, send and receive a fax from the printer.

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2886 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

1968 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-2887 Loosen the thumbscrews

Remove the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

1. Locate the fax PCA component on the formatter.

Figure 5-2888 Locate the fax PCA

Remove the fax PCA (fax models) 1969

 2. Release the connector latch (callout 1), and then pull the connector away from the formatter
(callout 2) to disconnect it.

Figure 5-2889 Disconnect one connector

3. Release one retainer (callout 1) by pressing the bracket arms together.

Figure 5-2890 Release one latch

4. Rotate the end of the fax PCA (callout 1) away from the formatter, and then slide the PCA left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-2891 Remove the fax PCA

1970 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install the fax PCA (fax models)

Follow these steps to install the fax PCA (fax models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: This procedure is for fax (or optionally installed fax) models only.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1971

 1. Position the tab and telephone port (callout 1) on the fax PCA in the slots (callout 2) in the formatter
case.

Figure 5-2892 Position the fax PCA

2. Slide the fax PCA to the right (callout 1) until the tab and telephone port described in the previous
step and seated in the formatter case. Position the retainer (callout 2) in the slot (callout 3) in the
formatter. Rotate the end of the fax PCA toward the formatter (callout 4) until the retainer snaps into
place.

Figure 5-2893 Install the fax PCA

1
3
4

1972 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Position the cable (callout 1) in the guide (callout 2), and then connect one connector (callout 3).

Figure 5-2894 Connect the connector

2 1

Install the formatter cover

Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.

■ Slide the cover onto the printer (callout 1) to install it.

NOTE: Make sure that the tabs on the formatter cover align with the slots provided in the printer
(callout 2). Tighten the two thumbscrews (callout 3).

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2895 Install the cover

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Install the formatter cover 1973

 1. Locate the formatter cover.

Figure 5-2896 Locate the formatter cover

2. Loosen the two thumbscrews (callout 1). Grasp the two thumbscrews, and then slide the cover away
from the printer (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: If needed, use the edge of a coin to turn the thumbscrews.

Figure 5-2897 Loosen the thumbscrews

1974 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1975
 6 Parts and diagrams

Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part number lists.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

1976 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

HP service and support 1977

 Order parts by authorized service providers
Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 6-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Supplies and accessories

Learn about the supplies and accessories that are available for the printer.

To order cartridges, visit http://www.hp.com (some portions of the HP Web site are available in English
only). Ordering cartridges online is not supported in all countries/regions. However, many countries/
regions have information about ordering by telephone, locating a local store, and printing a shopping list.
In addition, go to hp.com/supplies to obtain information about purchasing HP products in your country/
region.

Use only the replacement cartridges that have the same cartridge number as the cartridge that is being
replaced. Find the cartridge number in the following places:

● On the label of the cartridge that is being replaced.

● On a sticker inside the printer. Open the cartridge door to locate the sticker.

● Open the printer software (HP Printer Assistant), and then click Shop > Shop For Supplies Online.

● Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS), and then click Tools > Supply Status (under the Product
Information item).

Table 6-2 Supplies part numbers

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Black Original CF360-67901 CF360A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

1978 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-2 Supplies part numbers (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Black CF360-67902 CF360X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Cyan Original CF361-67901 CF361A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Cyan CF361-67902 CF361X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Yellow Original CF362-67901 CF362A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Yellow CF362-67902 CF362X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508A Magenta Original CF363-67901 CF363A

M577/E55040/E57540) LaserJet Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge (M552/M553/ HP 508X High Yield Magenta CF363-67902 CF363X

M577/E55040/E57540) Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge

Toner cartridge (E55040/ HP Cartridge LJ Black W9060–67901 W9060MC

E57540) Managed Toner
(~ 15,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (E55040/ HP Cartridge LJ Cyan W9061–67901 W9061MC

E57540) Managed Toner
(~ 12,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (E55040/ HP Cartridge LJ Yellow W9062–67901 W9062MC

E57540) Managed Toner
(~ 12,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (E55040/ HP Cartridge LJ Magenta W9063–67901 W9063MC

E57540) Managed Toner
(~ 12,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212A Black 7ZU81-67905 W2120A

M578) LaserJet Toner
(5,500 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212X High Yield 7ZU81-67909 W2120X

M578) Black LaserJet Toner
(13,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212A Cyan 7ZU81-67906 W2121A

M578) LaserJet Toner
(4,500 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212X High Yield 7ZU81-67910 W2121X

M578) Cyan LaserJet Toner
(10,000 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212A Yellow 7ZU81-67907 W2122A

M578) LaserJet Toner
(4,500 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212X High Yield 7ZU81-67911 W2122X

M578) Yellow LaserJet Toner
(10,000 pages)

Supplies and accessories 1979

 Table 6-2 Supplies part numbers (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212A Magenta 7ZU81-67908 W2123A

M578) LaserJet Toner
(4,500 pages)

Toner cartridge (M554/M555/ HP Cartridge-212X High Yield 7ZU81-67912 W2123AX

M578) Magenta LaserJet Toner
(10,000 pages)

HP toner-collection unit Replacement toner-collection B5L37-67901 B5L37A

unit with attached door.

HP Staple Cartridge Pack Replacement staple Q7432-67001 Q7432A

(stapler models only) cartridges. Contains two
staple cartridges of 1500
staples each.

HP LaserJet 200 ADF Roller Replacement feed rollers for W5U23–67901 B5L52A
Replacement Kit (M577/M578/ the document feeder.
E57540)

Fuser kit (110V) Fuser B5L35-67902 B5L35A

Fuser kit (220V) Fuser B5L36-67902 B5L36A

Table 6-3 Accessories (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder Optional 550-sheet B5L34-67901 B5L34A

paper feeder (included
NOTE: The M552 model accepts with the x model)
one 550-sheet paper feeder. The
M553 and E55040 models accept up
to three 550-sheet paper feeders.

Printer stand and storage Optional stand with B5L51-67901 B5L51A

storage to support the
printer

Recommended when
using multiple optional
paper feeders.

HP secure 500 GB high-performance Optional hard drive B5L29-67903 B5L29A

hard disk drive

NOTE: Not supported for the

M552dn.

1GB DDR3 Slim DIMM (SFP) Optional DIMM for 5851-6422 G6W84A
expanding the memory
NOTE: M553/M554/M555/E55040
only.

HP internal USB ports Two optional USB ports B5L28-67902 B5L28A

for connecting third-
party devices

1980 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-3 Accessories (M552, M553, M554, M555, and E55040) (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Automatically encrypts F5S62-61001 F5S62A

(M552/M553/E55040) all data that passes
through the product
NOTE: M554 and M555: The TPM is
a factory installed component and
not an accessory.

Table 6-4 Accessories (M577, M578, and E57540)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder Optional 550-sheet B5L34-67901 B5L34A

paper feeder (included
NOTE: The printer supports up to with the x model)
three 550-sheet paper feeders.

Fixed tray guide kit Fixed tray guide kit for 5851-7708
cassette trays

Printer stand and storage Optional stand with B5L51-67901 B5L51A

storage to support the
printer

Recommended when
using multiple optional
paper feeders.

HP secure 500 GB high-performance Optional hard drive B5L29-67903 B5L29A

hard disk drive

1GB DDR3 x32 144-Pin 800MHz Optional DIMM for E5K48-67902 E5K48A
SODIMM (MFP) expanding the memory

HP internal USB ports Two optional USB ports B5L28-67902 B5L28A

for connecting third-
party devices

HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Automatically encrypts F5S62-61001 F5S62A

(M577/E57540) all data that passes
through the product
NOTE: M578: The TPM is a factory
installed component and not an
accessory.

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit Language-specific, 5851-6002 A7W12A

for Simplified Chinese & Traditional adhesive overlay for
Chinese the physical keyboard

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit for Language-specific, A7W14-67901 A7W14A

Swedish adhesive overlay for
the physical keyboard

HP Smartcard NIPRNet Solution for Non-secure Internet CC543B

US Government Protocol (IP)
Router Network
NOTE: Requires installing the HP for transmitting non-
Internal USB ports accessory classified information
(B5L28A).

Supplies and accessories 1981

 Table 6-4 Accessories (M577, M578, and E57540) (continued)

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

HP Smartcard NIPRNet Solution for Secret Internet Protocol F8B30A

US Government (IP) Router Network for
transmitting classified
NOTE: Requires installing the HP information
Internal USB ports accessory
(B5L28A).

HP Foreign Interface Harness Optional port for B5L31-67902 B5L31A

connecting third-party
devices

HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Optional fax accessory B5L53-67901 B5L53A

Accessory 600 for the dn model

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server USB wireless print J8031A

server accessory

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Wi-Fi direct accessory J8030A

Accessory for “touch” printing from
mobile devices

Customer self-repair parts

Learn about printer customer self-repair parts.

Customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.

NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benefits can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-
support and www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.

Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-

authorized service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number,
serial number (found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.

● Parts listed as A: Easy

● Parts listed as B: Difficult and/or requires tools

Table 6-5 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts

Kit name Description CSR level Part number

Control panel kit (M553x/M555/ Control panel A RK2-6064-000CN

E55040dw/E55040dn)

Control panel kit (MFP) Control panel A B5L47-67018

Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller A RM2-6575-000CN

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ITB B RM2-6576-000CN

Tray 2-5 roller kit Rollers for Tray 2 and the optional A RM2-6577-000CN
550-sheet paper feeders

ADF roller replacement Kit Replacement feed rollers for the A W5U23-67901
document feeder

Fuser kit (110V) Fuser A B5L35-67902

Fuser kit (220V) Fuser A B5L36-67902

1982 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

 Table 6-5 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts (continued)

Kit name Description CSR level Part number

embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) eMMC module A 5851-6436

kit (SFP)

500 GB secure high-performance Replacement hard disk drive A 5851-6712

hard disk drive (MFP)

White backing kit A4 (MFP) White backing for the document A 5851-7740
feeder (with retention clips)

Retention clip kit (MFP) Retention clips for the document A 5851-6573
feeder white backing

Keyboard kit (flow models) Keyboard (US) A B5L47-67019

Keyboard kit (flow models) Keyboard (UK) A B5L47-67020

Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6019
ES: UK Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6020

ES: US Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, Keyboard overlay A 5851-6021

DA: UK Kybd) (flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) Keyboard overlay A 5851-6022

(flow models)

Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) (flow Keyboard overlay A 5851-6023

models)

Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) Keyboard overlay A 5851-6024

(flow models)

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

How to use parts lists and diagrams 1983

 Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
Parts diagram and part list for the document feeder and image scanner.

Figure 6-1 Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)

6 2

Table 6-6 Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 B5L47-67906 Kit - ADF whole unit Enterprise 1

1 B5L47-67907 Kit - ADF whole unit Workflow 1

2 B5L46-67904 Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) kit 1

3 B5L47-67018 Control panel (M577/M578/E57540) kit 1

4 B5L47-67019 Keyboard US (M577/M578/E57540 flow 1

models)

4 B5L47-67020 Keyboard UK (M577/M578/E57540 flow 1

models)

5 B5L46-40021 Cover, HIP (M577/M578/E57540) 1

6 B5L46-40026 Bezel, control panel with NFC icon (M577) 1

6 B5L46-40020 Bezel, control panel without NFC icon (M577/ 1

M578/E57540)

Not shown B5L47-67903 Scan control board (M577/M578/E57540) 1

1984 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-6 Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

Not shown B5L46-40002 Cover, keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow 1

models)

Not shown B5L46-40011 Cover, rear (image scanner; M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown B5L46-40028 Cover, USB (M577/M578/E57540) 1

Not shown B5L46-40024 Cover, right front upper (M577/M578/E57540) 1

Not shown B5L46-60121 Cover assembly, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 1

stapler models)

Not shown B5L46-60102 Stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models) 1

Not shown B5L46-60102 Hinge, left document feeder (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown COM39-60065 Hinge, right document feeder (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown B5L46-60121 Cable, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler 1

models)

Not shown 5851-5939 Cable, WU USB control panel (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown 5851-5938 Cable, HIP USB control panel (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown 5851-5936 Cable, HDMI control panel (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown 5851-5935 Cable, 18-pin control panel (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown B5L46-60114 Cable, HDMI PAB to SCAM (M577/M578/ 1

E57540)

Not shown 5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE, ES: UK 1
Kybd)

Not shown 5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES: US 1

Kybd)

Not shown 5851-6021 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA: UK 1

Kybd)

Not shown 5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 1

Not shown 5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES/PT) 1

Not shown 5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 1

Document feeder and image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) 1985

 Parts and diagrams: Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)
Parts diagram and parts list for the SFP printer covers.

1986 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Figure 6-2 Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)
M552dn, M553n, M552dn,
M553x, M555 M553dn, M554 M553dn, M553x
15
16
4
A04

A02

A02 A02

5
A03

13

A02 A02

10

12

14
A02

2
8
9

A02
11
A01
1

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040) 1987

 Table 6-7 Covers (M552/M553/M554/M555/E55040)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RC4-0178-000CN Cover, right rear 1

2 RC4-0179-000CN Cover, left 1

3 RC4-0183-000CN Handle, right 1

4 RC4-0213-000CN Cover, HIP (M552dn, M553dn, M553x/E55040) 1

5 RC4-0213-000CN Cover, USB 1

6 RL2-0096-000CN Cover, upper (M553n) 1

6 RL2-0097-000CN Cover, upper (M553x/E55040) 1

6 RL2-0098-000CN Cover, upper (M552dn, M553dn) 1

7 RM2-0019-000CN Door assembly, right 1

8 B5L24-67905 Roller, pickup, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) 1

9 B5L24-67905 Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller 1

kit)

10 B5L37-67901 Toner collection unit 1

11 B5L25-67901 Cover, front (M552, M553/E55040) 1

12 RM2-0044-000CN Output bin 1

13 RM2-0084-000CN Cover, formatter 1

14 RM2-0085-000CN Cover, rear 1

15 RM2-7180-000CN Control panel (M552dn, M553n, M553dn) 1

15 RM2-6582-000CN Control panel (M554) 1

16 K0Q15-67904 Kit - control panel 4.3 inch CLJ M555 1

Not shown RK2-6064-000CN HDMI cable for the 4.3 on control panel 1
(M553x/E55040)

Not shown RK3-1532-000CN Cable, control panel (M554) 1

Not shown RK3-1534-000CN Cable, control panel (M555) 1

1988 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540)
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540) 1989

 Figure 6-3 Covers (M577/M578/E57540)
A02
12
13
11
A03

10

15
14

A02

16

A02 A02

17
A02

4
8
9

A02
3
A01
1

1990 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-8 Covers (M577/M578/E57540)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RC4-0178-000CN Cover, right rear 1

2 RC4-0183-000CN Handle, right 1

3 B5L46-67906 Cover, front (MFP) 1

4 RC4-0179-000CN Cover, left 1

5 B5L37-67901 Toner collection unit 1

6 RM2-0044-000CN Output bin 1

7 RM2-0019-000CN Right door assembly 1

8 B5L24-67905 Roller, pickup, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) 1

9 B5L24-67905 Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller 1

kit)

10 RL2-0769-000CN Cover, top (M577/M578/E57540) 1

11 RL2-0770-000CN Cover, left upper (M577/M578/E57540) 1

12 RC4-3383-000CN Cover, top rear (M577/M578/E57540) 1

13 RL2-0771-000CN Cover, rear upper (M577/M578/E57540) 1

14 RL2-0772-000CN Cover, right upper (M577/M578/E57540) 1

15 RC4-3382-000CN Cover, paper feed (M577/M578/E57540) 1

16 RM2-0084-000CN Cover, formatter 1

17 RM2-0085-000CN Cover, rear 1

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M577/M578/E57540) 1991

 Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

1992 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Figure 6-4 Internal assemblies (1 of 5)
M552dn, M553dn, M555, M577z, M578z
A35

(J1829)
(J1821)

A33
A01
(J1801) (J38)
(J54)
(J37) (J2506) A23

5 1
A17 A31
A18 (FM4)
(J54)

A30
(SR11)
(J79) A22
A26
A06 A24

A24 A06 A24

A02 A24
4 A25
A16 2 (J1803)
(FM2)
A12 (J6006)
A23

A24
A07
A04
A21
A34
A05
3
(J71)
A28 (J31)
A04 A
A03 A21
A34
A05
3
A20 A23
A14 (J32) A04
A28 A21
A24 A03 (J72)
A34
A05
3
A11
A20 (J33)
A04
A28 A21
A03 (J73) A34
A32 A05
3
A20 (J34)
6
A27 (J74)
A03
A13
A20
A10 A08
A24 A29

A09 A
A24
A24 A15

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 5) 1993

 Table 6-9 Internal assemblies (1 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RK2-2418-000CN Fan, fuser (FM4) 1

2 RK2-6124-000CN Fan, cartridge (FM2) 1

3 RM2-0086-000CN Glass cleaner assembly, dust-proof 4

4 RM2-7130-000CN Waste toner detect PCA assembly 1

5 RM2-7156-000CN Connecting PCA assembly 1

6 RL2-0013-010CN Inner door 1

Not shown 1150-7968 Wireless PCA, embedded 1

Not shown B5L24-60002 Near field communication (NFC) PCA, 1

embedded (M553x/M555/E55040)

Not shown B5L24-60001 Near field communication (NFC) PCA, 1

embedded (M577z\E57540)

1994 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Figure 6-5 Internal assemblies (2 of 5)

M552dn, M553n, M553dn M553x/E55040

M553x/E55040
(J1812) A34 (J1812) A34
A25
(P2)

A23
(J115)
(J1815)
(J1813) (J1816) A28
(P2)
(P1)
(J35) A28
(J36)
(J79) A33 Z
(J780)
A29 To Internal components (3 of 5)

(J26) (P1)
M552dn,
M553dn, M553x,÷ A12
E55040 A
A24 A29

M553x/E55040 (P2)
A02 A29
1 A14 (P1)
A35

A29
A01 A32 A31
A03 A29
A21 (SW1)
(J99)
A29
A29

A A29
5
A18
A29
A20

A36

(J38)
A19
3
(J37)
3
A29 (J36) A07
3
A29 (J35) A27
4
A29 6 A17
A10 A29 A29 See Covers callout 7
2
A29 A22
A08
A15 A30
(SW4) A16
(J780)
A04

(SW3)
A26
A13 (J26)
A06
A29 A05

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 5) 1995

 Table 6-10 Internal assemblies (2 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RM2-6545-000CN Laser/scanner assembly 1

2 RM2-7133-000CN Switch PCA assembly (SW4) 1

3 RM2-7168-000CN Pre-exposure PCA assembly 3

4 RM2-7169-000CN Pre-exposure PCA assembly 1

5 RC4-0132-000CN Hinge, cover, front 1

6 RC4-0159-000CN Hinge, cover, front 1

1996 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5) 1997

 Figure 6-6 Internal assemblies (3 of 5)

A10
(J120)
12

11 8
A10

A11 5
9

M577
M577 A10
A13

(J118)
(J124)
A10 A14
A09
A08
A06

A10
10

A05
A10 A07

A01

(J121)

6
A A10

A04 4

A11
A12
3
1
A
A10
A03 A02

1998 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-11 Internal assemblies (3 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RM2-0007-000CN Cassette (Tray 2) 1

2 B5L35-67902 Fuser kit (110V) 1

2 B5L36-67902 Fuser kit (220V) 3

3 RM2-6576-000CN Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 1

3 B5L24-69001 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) (Refurbished) 1

4 RM2-0017-000CN Paper pickup assembly 1

5 RM2-6576-000CN Roller, secondary transfer (includes ITB) 1

6 RM2-6577-000CN Roller, paper pickup (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) 1

7 RM2-6577-000CN Roller, separation (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) 1

8 RM2-0090-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M553n) 1

8 RM2-0022-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M552, M553dn, 1

M553x, M554, M555, E55040, M577, M578,
E57540)

9 RM2-0092-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M553n) 1

9 RM2-0016-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M552, M553dn, 1

M553x, M554, M555, E55040, M577, M578,
E57540)

10 RM2-0093-000CN Registration assembly (M553n) 1

10 RM2-0018-000CN Registration assembly (M552, M553dn, 1

M553x, M554, M555, E55040, M577, M578,
E57540)

11 RM2-7160-000CN Density detect assembly 1

12 RC4-0830-000CN Arm, solenoid 1

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 5) 1999

 Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

2000 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Figure 6-7 Internal assemblies (4 of 5)

A18
9
(J1820)
(J1822)
A19 (J1804E)
11

A13
14 A01 13 (J106E)
A13
A13 A11
8 (J201)
(J126)
A03
A13 D
A13 3
B (J127)
C (J202)

A02
A22 A 4

A04 A A07 (J71)

(J47) (J122)
2 (J31) (J103)
A14 (J72) (J129)
(J33)
(J0) (J74)
(J800)
A09 6 (J73) (J34)
(FM3)
(J2505) (J32) (J82)
(J55)
(SW5) (J44)
A20 (J109) (J82) (J58)

A10
(J125) A15 A17
A13 A12
A13

D 5

A14
A13 1
A08
(FM1)
(J603)

A05
C A15

A16
B
(J604)

A21 (J116) (J45)

A13
(J50)
A13

(J6002) 12
7
(J600)

10
A13

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5) 2001

 Table 6-12 Internal assemblies (4 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RK2-2416-000CN Fan, power-supply (FM1) 1

2 RK2-2728-000CN Fan, delivery (FM3) 1

3 RK2-6101-000CN Cable, flexible flat 1

4 RK2-6103-000CN Cable, flexible flat 1

5 RM2-7122-000CN HVPS (D) PCA assembly 1

6 RM2-7134-000CN HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M553n) 1

6 RM2-7123-000CN HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M552, M553dn, 1

M553x, M554, M555, E55040, M577, M578,
E57540)

7 RM3-7157-000CN Low-voltage power supply (110V) 1

7 RM3-7158-000CN Low-voltage power supply (220V) 1

8 RM3-7450-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M552, M553, 1

M555, E55040)

8 RM3-7451-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M577, E57540) 1

8 RM3-8465-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) 1

8 RM3-8468-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) 1

9 RM2-7138-000CN Memory PCA assembly 1

10 RM3-7159-000CN Fuser power supply PCA (110) 1

10 RM3-7160-000CN Fuser power supply PCA (220V) 1

11 RK2-6111-000CN Cable, flexible flat 1

12 RM2-7154-000CN Environmental sensor PCA assembly 1

13 B5L23-67903 Formatter (M552) 1

13 B5L23-67904 Formatter (M552 India and China only) 1

13 B5L24-67909 Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh) 1

13 B5L24-67908 Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh India and 1

China only)

13 B5L26-67901 Formatter (M553x, E55040) 1

13 B5L26-67902 Formatter (M553x, E55040 India and China 1

only)

13 B5L46-67909 Formatter (M577, E57540) 1

13 B5L46-67911 Formatter (M577, E57540) 1

13 7ZU81-67904 Formatter (M554dn China/India) 1

13 7ZU81-67903 Formatter (M554dn) 1

13 7ZU78-67904 Formatter (M555dn China/India) 1

13 7ZU78-67903 Formatter (M555dn) 1

2002 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-12 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

13 7ZU79-67904 Formatter (M555x China/India) 1

13 7ZU79-67903 Formatter (M555x) 1

13 7ZU85-67904 Formatter (M578 China/India) 1

13 7ZU85-67903 Formatter (M578) 1

14 RC4-0152-000CN Formatter case 1

Not shown B5L53-67901 Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540 fax models) 1

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 5) 2003

 Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Figure 6-8 Internal assemblies (5 of 5)

A08

7
(M1)
(J41)
A07
(M2)
(J42)
A07
5
7
(M3)
(M6) (J43) A07
(J46)
7
A09
1

A04
M552dn/M553dn A13
M553x/E55040 M577
M577/E57540

(J2503)
A11 A08 A14
(J59)
(J48)

A08 2
A08
6
(M4)
(J2504) (J44) A08
(J57)
A08
A03 A08 A02
A12
A10
(J15) 10 A08
(SR5)

(M5)
(J45)

A08
3
13

A08
12 4
A08
(J0)

A08
11
9

2004 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-13 Internal assemblies (5 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping (M6) 1

2 RM2-0006-000CN Duplexing drive assembly (M7, CL2; duplex 1

models)

3 RM2-0008-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (M5) 1

4 RM2-0010-000CN Lifter drive assembly (CL1) 1

5 B5L25-67902 Main motor drive assembly 1

6 RM2-0077-000CN Motor assembly, fuser (M4) 1

7 RM2-0078-000CN Motor assembly, drum (M1, M2, M3) 3

8 RM2-0091-010CN Fuser drive assembly (M553n) 1

8 RM2-0009-010CN Fuser drive assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, 1

M554, M555, E55040, M577, M578, E57540)

9 RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly 1

10 RM2-7157-000CN Estrangement detect PCA assembly (SR5) 1

11 RC4-0445-000CN Holder, OP Drawer 1

12 VS1-7258-000CN Connector, drawer 1

13 RU8-0577-000CN Gear 18T 1

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 5) 2005

 Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder covers.

Figure 6-9 550-sheet paper feeder covers

See 550-sheet feeder

main body

Table 6-14 550-sheet paper feeder covers

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RC4-1791-000CN Cover, left (550-sheet feeder) 1

2 RC4-1792-000CN Cover, rear (550-sheet feeder) 1

3 RC4-1793-000CN Cover, right lower (550-sheet feeder) 1

4 RC4-1781-000CN Hinge, door, right (550-sheet feeder) 1

5 RC4-1778-000CN Link, door, right (550-sheet feeder) 1

6 RM2-5146-000CN Door assembly, right (550-sheet feeder) 1

2006 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder main body.

Figure 6-10 550-sheet paper feeder main body

A27 (J1904)

A29
(J1907) A39
(J21) (J2041)
(J1903) (J2042)

A20 11 (J2003)
12 A28
A22
A41
A09
A26 (J20) 9 A32
A40
(J1901)

A19
A21 A31
A37 A33
A18 A36 (J1902) 6
A23 (J2023) A10
4 A39
A34
A24 A38

7 A23 A39
(SW12)
(J2023)
5 A39
A39
(J2003) A16
A25
A39
A43 2 (J2042)

A39 A02
A34 A24

A13
A14 A35 A39
A42 A11 A39
A04
A12 A39
A39 A39 1
A39 (J2041)
A03
A15
A17 A30

10
A06 3

A05
8

A08

Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body 2007

 Table 6-15 550-sheet paper feeder main body

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RM2-5150-000CN Cassette (tray; 550-sheet feeder) 1

2 RM2-5145-000CN Paper feed assembly (550-sheet feeder) 1

3 RM2-6577-000CN Roller, pickup (550-sheet feeder; part of Tray 1

2-5 roller kit)

4 RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly (550-sheet feeder) 1

5 RM2-5148-000CN Feed drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) 1

6 RM2-5149-000CN Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) 1

7 WC2-5806-000CN Switch button (SW21; 550-sheet feeder) 1

8 RM2-5154-000CN Paper pickup assembly (550-sheet feeder) 1

9 RM2-7139-000CN Paper feed drive PCA assembly (550-sheet 1

feeder)

10 RM2-6577-000CN Roller, separation (550-sheet feeder; part of 1

Tray 2-5 roller kit)

11 RC4-0445-000CN Holder, OP drawer (550-sheet feeder) 1

12 RC4-1741-000CN Holder, drawer connector (550-sheet feeder) 1

2008 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Alphabetical parts list
Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Arm, solenoid RC4-0830-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Auto close assembly RM2-5147-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Auto close assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5147-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Bezel, control panel with NFC icon (M577) B5L46-40026 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Bezel, control panel without NFC icon (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-40020 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, 18-pin control panel (M577/M578/E57540) 5851-5935 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, HDMI PAB to SCAM (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-60114 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, HDMI control panel (M577/M578/E57540) 5851-5936 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, HIP USB control panel (M577/M578/E57540) 5851-5938 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, WU USB control panel (M577/M578/E57540) 5851-5939 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cable, control panel (M554) RK3-1532-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cable, control panel (M555) RK3-1534-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cable, flexible flat RK2-6101-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Cable, flexible flat RK2-6103-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Cable, flexible flat RK2-6111-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Cable, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models) B5L46-60121 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cassette (Tray 2) RM2-0007-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Cassette (tray; 550-sheet feeder) RM2-5150-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 2008

Alphabetical parts list 2009

 Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Connecting PCA assembly RM2-7156-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

Connector, drawer VS1-7258-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Control panel (M552dn, M553n, M553dn) RM2-7180-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Control panel (M554) RM2-6582-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Control panel (M577/M578/E57540) kit B5L47-67018 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover assembly, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models) B5L46-60121 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, HIP (M552dn, M553dn, M553x/E55040) RC4-0213-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, HIP (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-40021 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, USB RC4-0213-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, USB (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-40028 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, formatter RM2-0084-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, formatter RM2-0084-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, front (M552, M553/E55040) B5L25-67901 Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, front (MFP) B5L46-67906 Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) B5L46-40002 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, left RC4-0179-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, left RC4-0179-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, left (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1791-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 2006

Cover, left upper (M577/M578/E57540) RL2-0770-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, paper feed (M577/M578/E57540) RC4-3382-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

2010 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, rear RM2-0085-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, rear RM2-0085-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, rear (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1792-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 2006

Cover, rear (image scanner; M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-40011 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, rear upper (M577/M578/E57540) RL2-0771-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, right front upper (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-40024 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Cover, right lower (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1793-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

Cover, right rear RC4-0178-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, right rear RC4-0178-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, right upper (M577/M578/E57540) RL2-0772-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, top (M577/M578/E57540) RL2-0769-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, top rear (M577/M578/E57540) RC4-3383-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Cover, upper (M552dn, M553dn) RL2-0098-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, upper (M553n) RL2-0096-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Cover, upper (M553x/E55040) RL2-0097-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

DC controller PCA assembly (M552, M553, M555, E55040) RM3-7450-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) RM3-8465-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) RM3-8468-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

DC controller PCA assembly (M577, E57540) RM3-7451-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Density detect assembly RM2-7160-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Door assembly, right RM2-0019-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Alphabetical parts list 2011

 Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Door assembly, right (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5146-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

Duplexing drive assembly (M7, CL2; duplex models) RM2-0006-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on
page 2005

Environmental sensor PCA assembly RM2-7154-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Estrangement detect PCA assembly (SR5) RM2-7157-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Fan, cartridge (FM2) RK2-6124-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

Fan, delivery (FM3) RK2-2728-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Fan, fuser (FM4) RK2-2418-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

Fan, power-supply (FM1) RK2-2416-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540 fax models) B5L53-67901 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Feed drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5148-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Formatter (M552 India and China only) B5L23-67904 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M552) B5L23-67903 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh India and China only) B5L24-67908 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh) B5L24-67909 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M553x, E55040 India and China only) B5L26-67902 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

Formatter (M553x, E55040) B5L26-67901 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M554dn China/India) 7ZU81-67904 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M554dn) 7ZU81-67903 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M555dn) 7ZU78-67903 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M555x China/India) 7ZU79-67904 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M555x) 7ZU79-67903 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M577, E57540) B5L46-67909 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

2012 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Formatter (M577, E57540) B5L46-67911 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M578 China/India) 7ZU85-67904 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter (M578) 7ZU85-67903 Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Formatter case RC4-0152-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Fuser drive assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, RM2-0009-010CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 2005

Fuser drive assembly (M553n) RM2-0091-010CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Fuser kit (110V) B5L35-67902 Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Fuser kit (220V) B5L36-67902 Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Fuser power supply PCA (110) RM3-7159-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Fuser power supply PCA (220V) RM3-7160-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Gear 18T RU8-0577-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Glass cleaner assembly, dust-proof RM2-0086-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

HDMI cable for the 4.3 on control panel (M553x/E55040) RK2-6064-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

HVPS (D) PCA assembly RM2-7122-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, RM2-7123-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 2002

HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M553n) RM2-7134-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Handle, right RC4-0183-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Handle, right RC4-0183-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Hinge, cover, front RC4-0132-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Hinge, cover, front RC4-0159-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Hinge, door, right (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1781-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

Hinge, left document feeder (M577/M578/E57540) B5L46-60102 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Alphabetical parts list 2013

 Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Hinge, right document feeder (M577/M578/E57540) COM39-60065 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Holder, OP Drawer RC4-0445-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Holder, OP drawer (550-sheet feeder) RC4-0445-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 2008

Holder, drawer connector (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1741-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) kit B5L46-67904 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Inner door RL2-0013-010CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) RM2-6576-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) (Refurbished) B5L24-69001 Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Keyboard UK (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) B5L47-67020 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard US (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) B5L47-67019 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard overlay kit (ES/PT) 5851-6023 Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE, ES: UK Kybd) 5851-6019 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES: US Kybd) 5851-6020 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 5851-6024 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 5851-6022 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Kit - ADF whole unit Enterprise B5L47-67906 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Kit - ADF whole unit Workflow B5L47-67907 Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

Kit - control panel 4.3 inch CLJ M555 K0Q15-67904 Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

2014 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Laser/scanner assembly RM2-6545-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5149-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Lifter drive assembly (CL1) RM2-0010-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Link, door, right (550-sheet feeder) RC4-1778-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

Low-voltage power supply (110V) RM3-7157-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Low-voltage power supply (220V) RM3-7158-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Main motor drive assembly B5L25-67902 Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Memory PCA assembly RM2-7138-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Motor assembly, drum (M1, M2, M3) RM2-0078-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Motor assembly, fuser (M4) RM2-0077-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Motor, stepping (M6) RK2-6027-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Near field communication (NFC) PCA, embedded (M553x/M555/ B5L24-60002 Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on
E55040) page 1994

Near field communication (NFC) PCA, embedded (M577z\E57540) B5L24-60001 Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on
page 1994

Output bin RM2-0044-000CN Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Output bin RM2-0044-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Paper delivery assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, RM2-0016-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

Paper delivery assembly (M553n) RM2-0092-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Paper feed assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5145-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Paper feed drive PCA assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-7139-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Paper pickup assembly RM2-0017-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Paper pickup assembly (550-sheet feeder) RM2-5154-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Paper pickup drive assembly (M5) RM2-0008-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

Alphabetical parts list 2015

 Table 6-16 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Pre-exposure PCA assembly RM2-7168-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Pre-exposure PCA assembly RM2-7169-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Registration assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, RM2-0018-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

Registration assembly (M553n) RM2-0093-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Right door assembly RM2-0019-000CN Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Roller, paper pickup (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) RM2-6577-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
page 1999

Roller, pickup (550-sheet feeder; part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) RM2-6577-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Roller, pickup, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) B5L24-67905 Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on
page 1991

Roller, secondary transfer (includes ITB) RM2-6576-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Roller, separation (550-sheet feeder; part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) RM2-6577-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Roller, separation (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) RM2-6577-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
page 1999

Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) B5L24-67905 Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) B5L24-67905 Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on
page 1991

Secondary transfer assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, RM2-0022-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
M555, E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

Secondary transfer assembly (M553n) RM2-0090-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

Switch PCA assembly (SW4) RM2-7133-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

Switch button (SW21; 550-sheet feeder) WC2-5806-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

Toner collection unit B5L37-67901 Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

Toner collection unit B5L37-67901 Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

Waste toner detect PCA assembly RM2-7130-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

Wireless PCA, embedded 1150-7968 Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

2016 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Numerical parts list
Table 6-17 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

1150-7968 Wireless PCA, embedded Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

5851-5935 Cable, 18-pin control panel (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-5936 Cable, HDMI control panel (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-5938 Cable, HIP USB control panel (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-5939 Cable, WU USB control panel (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE, ES: UK Kybd) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES: US Kybd) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES/PT) Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

7ZU78-67903 Formatter (M555dn) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU79-67903 Formatter (M555x) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU79-67904 Formatter (M555x China/India) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU81-67903 Formatter (M554dn) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU81-67904 Formatter (M554dn China/India) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU85-67903 Formatter (M578) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

7ZU85-67904 Formatter (M578 China/India) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L23-67903 Formatter (M552) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Numerical parts list 2017

 Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

B5L23-67904 Formatter (M552 India and China only) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L24-60001 Near field communication (NFC) PCA, embedded (M577z\E57540) Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on
page 1994

B5L24-60002 Near field communication (NFC) PCA, embedded (M553x/M555/ Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on
E55040) page 1994

B5L24-67905 Roller, pickup, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on
page 1991

B5L24-67905 Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

B5L24-67905 Roller, separation, Tray 1 (part of Tray 1 roller kit) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on
page 1991

B5L24-67908 Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh India and China only) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

B5L24-67909 Formatter (M553n, M553dn, M553dh) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L24-69001 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) (Refurbished) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

B5L25-67901 Cover, front (M552, M553/E55040) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

B5L25-67902 Main motor drive assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

B5L26-67901 Formatter (M553x, E55040) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L26-67902 Formatter (M553x, E55040 India and China only) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

B5L35-67902 Fuser kit (110V) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

B5L36-67902 Fuser kit (220V) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

B5L37-67901 Toner collection unit Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

B5L37-67901 Toner collection unit Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

B5L46-40002 Cover, keyboard (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-40011 Cover, rear (image scanner; M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-40020 Bezel, control panel without NFC icon (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-40021 Cover, HIP (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

2018 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

B5L46-40024 Cover, right front upper (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-40026 Bezel, control panel with NFC icon (M577) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-40028 Cover, USB (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-60102 Hinge, left document feeder (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-60114 Cable, HDMI PAB to SCAM (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-60121 Cable, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-60121 Cover assembly, stapler (M577/M578/E57540 stapler models) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-67904 Image scanner (M577/M578/E57540) kit Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L46-67906 Cover, front (MFP) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

B5L46-67909 Formatter (M577, E57540) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L46-67911 Formatter (M577, E57540) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

B5L47-67018 Control panel (M577/M578/E57540) kit Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L47-67019 Keyboard US (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L47-67020 Keyboard UK (M577/M578/E57540 flow models) Document feeder and image

scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L47-67906 Kit - ADF whole unit Enterprise Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L47-67907 Kit - ADF whole unit Workflow Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

B5L53-67901 Fax PCA (M577/M578/E57540 fax models) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Numerical parts list 2019

 Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

COM39-60065 Hinge, right document feeder (M577/M578/E57540) Document feeder and image
scanner (M577/M578/E57540)
on page 1984

K0Q15-67904 Kit - control panel 4.3 inch CLJ M555 Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0132-000CN Hinge, cover, front Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RC4-0152-000CN Formatter case Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RC4-0159-000CN Hinge, cover, front Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RC4-0178-000CN Cover, right rear Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0178-000CN Cover, right rear Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RC4-0179-000CN Cover, left Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0179-000CN Cover, left Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RC4-0183-000CN Handle, right Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0183-000CN Handle, right Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RC4-0213-000CN Cover, HIP (M552dn, M553dn, M553x/E55040) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0213-000CN Cover, USB Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RC4-0445-000CN Holder, OP Drawer Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RC4-0445-000CN Holder, OP drawer (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 2008

RC4-0830-000CN Arm, solenoid Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RC4-1741-000CN Holder, drawer connector (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RC4-1778-000CN Link, door, right (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

RC4-1781-000CN Hinge, door, right (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

RC4-1791-000CN Cover, left (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 2006

RC4-1792-000CN Cover, rear (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 2006

RC4-1793-000CN Cover, right lower (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

2020 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RC4-3382-000CN Cover, paper feed (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RC4-3383-000CN Cover, top rear (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RK2-2416-000CN Fan, power-supply (FM1) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RK2-2418-000CN Fan, fuser (FM4) Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RK2-2728-000CN Fan, delivery (FM3) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping (M6) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RK2-6064-000CN HDMI cable for the 4.3 on control panel (M553x/E55040) Covers (M552/M553/M554/
M555/E55040) on page 1988

RK2-6101-000CN Cable, flexible flat Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RK2-6103-000CN Cable, flexible flat Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RK2-6111-000CN Cable, flexible flat Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RK2-6124-000CN Fan, cartridge (FM2) Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RK3-1532-000CN Cable, control panel (M554) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RK3-1534-000CN Cable, control panel (M555) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RL2-0013-010CN Inner door Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RL2-0096-000CN Cover, upper (M553n) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RL2-0097-000CN Cover, upper (M553x/E55040) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RL2-0098-000CN Cover, upper (M552dn, M553dn) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RL2-0769-000CN Cover, top (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RL2-0770-000CN Cover, left upper (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RL2-0771-000CN Cover, rear upper (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RL2-0772-000CN Cover, right upper (M577/M578/E57540) Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RM2-0006-000CN Duplexing drive assembly (M7, CL2; duplex models) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on
page 2005

Numerical parts list 2021

 Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RM2-0007-000CN Cassette (Tray 2) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-0008-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (M5) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-0009-010CN Fuser drive assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 2005

RM2-0010-000CN Lifter drive assembly (CL1) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-0016-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

RM2-0017-000CN Paper pickup assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-0018-000CN Registration assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

RM2-0019-000CN Door assembly, right Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM2-0019-000CN Right door assembly Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RM2-0022-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
M555, E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 1999

RM2-0044-000CN Output bin Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM2-0044-000CN Output bin Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RM2-0077-000CN Motor assembly, fuser (M4) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-0078-000CN Motor assembly, drum (M1, M2, M3) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-0084-000CN Cover, formatter Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM2-0084-000CN Cover, formatter Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RM2-0085-000CN Cover, rear Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM2-0085-000CN Cover, rear Covers (M577/M578/E57540) on

page 1991

RM2-0086-000CN Glass cleaner assembly, dust-proof Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RM2-0090-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (M553n) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-0091-010CN Fuser drive assembly (M553n) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-0092-000CN Paper delivery assembly (M553n) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

2022 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RM2-0093-000CN Registration assembly (M553n) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-5145-000CN Paper feed assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-5146-000CN Door assembly, right (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder covers
on page 2006

RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-5147-000CN Auto close assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-5148-000CN Feed drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-5149-000CN Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-5150-000CN Cassette (tray; 550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 2008

RM2-5154-000CN Paper pickup assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-6545-000CN Laser/scanner assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RM2-6576-000CN Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-6576-000CN Roller, secondary transfer (includes ITB) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-6577-000CN Roller, paper pickup (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
page 1999

RM2-6577-000CN Roller, pickup (550-sheet feeder; part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-6577-000CN Roller, separation (550-sheet feeder; part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-6577-000CN Roller, separation (part of Tray 2-5 roller kit) Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on
page 1999

RM2-6582-000CN Control panel (M554) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM2-7122-000CN HVPS (D) PCA assembly Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM2-7123-000CN HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M552, M553dn, M553x, M554, M555, Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
E55040, M577, M578, E57540) page 2002

RM2-7130-000CN Waste toner detect PCA assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RM2-7133-000CN Switch PCA assembly (SW4) Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RM2-7134-000CN HVPS (T) PCA assembly (M553n) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

Numerical parts list 2023

 Table 6-17 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RM2-7138-000CN Memory PCA assembly Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM2-7139-000CN Paper feed drive PCA assembly (550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

RM2-7154-000CN Environmental sensor PCA assembly Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM2-7156-000CN Connecting PCA assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 5) on

page 1994

RM2-7157-000CN Estrangement detect PCA assembly (SR5) Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

RM2-7160-000CN Density detect assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 5) on

page 1999

RM2-7168-000CN Pre-exposure PCA assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RM2-7169-000CN Pre-exposure PCA assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 5) on

page 1996

RM2-7180-000CN Control panel (M552dn, M553n, M553dn) Covers (M552/M553/M554/

M555/E55040) on page 1988

RM3-7157-000CN Low-voltage power supply (110V) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-7158-000CN Low-voltage power supply (220V) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-7159-000CN Fuser power supply PCA (110) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-7160-000CN Fuser power supply PCA (220V) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-7450-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M552, M553, M555, E55040) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on
page 2002

RM3-7451-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M577, E57540) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-8465-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RM3-8468-000CN DC controller PCA assembly (M554, M555) Internal assemblies (4 of 5) on

page 2002

RU8-0577-000CN Gear 18T Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

VS1-7258-000CN Connector, drawer Internal assemblies (5 of 5) on

page 2005

WC2-5806-000CN Switch button (SW21; 550-sheet feeder) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 2008

2024 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

A

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.

2025
 Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (M522/M553; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
Color LaserJet Enterprise M552n=B5L23A; M553n=B5L24A HP Inc.
M552 and M553 M553dn=B5L25A; M553x=B5L26A 11311 Chinden Blvd
Boise, ID 83714
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM 1GB Yes No Temporary storage for system There are no steps to clear this
operation and print buffer. data.
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear this
data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
None Yes No

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC 4GB Yes No JEDI and user data Firmware update
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walk-up USB print
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

2026 Appendix A
Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (M522/M553; 2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose
Frequency:) Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):

Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Wireless direct print.
Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP:
Specifications: 802.11 b/g

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: NFC; to support tap to print only
Specifications: NFC Tag Type 4 ISO 14443B Compliant

Author Information
Name: Title: Email: Business Unit:
Jose Luis Security Technical IPG
(Boise, ID – LaserJet MFP R&D) Market Engineer
208-333-4489
Date Prepared: 1/22/15

Certificate of Volatility 2027

 Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (M554/M555; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet M554dn=7ZU81A HP Inc
Enterprise M554 and M555 M555dn=7ZU78A; M555x= 7ZU79A 11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, ID 83714

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM 1GB Temporary storage for system When the printer is powered
operation and print buffer. off the memory is erased.
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No .
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore. data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB BIOS There are no steps to clear this
data.
Yes No
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
None Yes No

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC 4GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walkup USB print, firmware updates
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

2028 Appendix A
Figure A-4 Certificate of Volatility (M554/M555; 2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Wireless direct print (M555x only)
Frequency: 2.4Ghz, 5GHz Bandwidth:
2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in
2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
M555x only
Device Beaconing
Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth:
2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name: Title: Email: Business Unit:
Jose Luis Security Technical IPG
(Boise, ID – LaserJet MFP R&D) Market Engineer
208-333-4489
Date Prepared: 7/10/20

Certificate of Volatility 2029

 Figure A-5 Certificate of Volatility (M577; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet B5L46A=M577dn HP Inc.
Enterprise MFP M577 B5L47A= M577f 11311 Chinden Blvd
B5L48A= M577z Boise, ID 83714
B5L54A= M577c

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Operation system and Steps to clear memory:
print/scan buffer
DRAM 1792MB
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:

Yes No .
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for
backup/restore
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
4MB Yes No BIOS
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HDD 320GB Yes No OS and user data firmware update

Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walkup USB Print
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

2030 Appendix A
Figure A-6 Certificate of Volatility (M577; 2 of 2)

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: NFC
Purpose: To support Tap-to-Print only
Specifications: NFC Tag Type 4 ISO14443B Compliant

Author Information
Name: Title: Email: Business Unit:
Jose Luis Security Technical IPG
(Boise, ID – LaserJet MFP R&D) Market Engineer
208-333-4489
Date Prepared: 1/22/15

Certificate of Volatility 2031

 Figure A-7 Certificate of Volatility (M578; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet 7ZU85A=M578dn HP Inc
Enterprise MFP M578 7ZU86A=M578f 11311 Chinden Boulevard
7ZU87A=M578c Boise, ID 83714
7ZU88A=M578z

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM 1792MB Temporary storage for operation When the printer is powered
system and print/scan buffer. off the memory is erased.
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No .
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore. data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB BIOS There are no steps to clear this
data.
Yes No
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
None Yes No

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HDD 500GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walkup USB print, scan to USB, firmware updates
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

2032 Appendix A
Figure A-8 Certificate of Volatility (M578; 2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Wireless direct print (M578z only)
Frequency: 2.4Ghz, 5GHz Bandwidth:
2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in
2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
M578z only
Device Beaconing
Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth:
2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Purpose: WiFi
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz band Data rate:
802.11b: up to 11 Mbps
802.11a/g: up to 54 Mbps
802.11n: up to 300 Mbps
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (EIRP):
CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK for DSSS 2.4 GHz
64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK for OFDM 2400 – 2483.5 MHz: 19.8 dBm Max
5 GHz
5150 – 5350 MHz: 22.5 dBm max
5470 – 5725 MHz: 22.2 dBm max
Specifications: 802.11 a/b/g/n
3.3V +/- 10%
Purpose: BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Frequency: 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz band Data rate:
BT-LE: up to 2 Mbps
Modulation: Gaussian frequency shift modulation Effective Radiate Power (EIRP): BLE: 1.2 dBm max
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant
3.3V +/- 10%
Author Information
Name: Title: Email: Business Unit:
Jose Luis Security Technical IPG
(Boise, ID – LaserJet MFP R&D) Market Engineer
208-333-4489
Date Prepared: 7/10/20

Certificate of Volatility 2033

 Figure A-9 Certificate of Volatility (E55040dn; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Inc.
HP Color LaserJet Managed E55040dn =3GX99A 11311 Chinden Blvd
E55040dn Boise, ID 83714

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM Yes No Used for temporary storage When the printer is powered
1 GB during the process of jobs, off the memory is erased.
and for applications that are
running on the OS.

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear
for backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear
this data

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC 4GB Yes No Stores data, OS, 1. Power cycle the printer to
applications, digitally erase the customer data partition
signed firmware images, cryptographically.
2. Instigate a non-secure fast
persistent data, and erase from the EWS.
temporary data for
processing system
functions

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walk up USB Print
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

2034 Appendix A
Figure A-10 Certificate of Volatility (E55040dn; 2 of 2)
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit

Robert Mejia SystemEngineer [email protected] IPG

Date Prepared: 12/10/2019

Certificate of Volatility 2035

 Figure A-11 Certificate of Volatility (E55040dw; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Inc
HP Color LaserJet Managed E55040dw =3GX98A 11311 Chinden Blvd
E55040dw Boise, ID 83714

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM Yes No Used for temporary storage When the printer is powered
1 GB during the process of jobs, off the memory is erased.
and for applications that are
running on the OS.

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear
for backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear
this data

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC 4GB Yes No Stores data, OS, 1. Power cycle the printer to
applications, digitally erase the customer data partition
signed firmware images, cryptographically.
2. Instigate a non-secure fast
persistent data, and erase from the EWS.
temporary data for
processing system
functions

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Walk up USB Print
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

2036 Appendix A
Figure A-12 Certificate of Volatility (E55040dw; 2 of 2)
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Wireless direct print
Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications 802.11 b/g/n

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Casey Campbell Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 04/10/2018

Certificate of Volatility 2037

 Figure A-13 Certificate of Volatility (E57540c; 1 of 2)

2038 Appendix A
Figure A-14 Certificate of Volatility (E57540c; 2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Casey Campbell Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 04/10/2018

Certificate of Volatility 2039

 Figure A-15 Certificate of Volatility (E57540dn; 1 of 2)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Inc.
HP Color LaserJet Managed E57540dn = 3GY25A 11311 Chinden Blvd
MFP E57540dn
Boise, ID 83714

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM Yes No Used for temporary storage
1792MB
When the printer is powered
during the processing of OFF, the memory is erased.
jobs and for applications
running on the OS.

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32 KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear
for backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear
this data.

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No Stores customer data, 1.Erase and Unlock Encrypted
HDD 320GB OS, applications, Disk – This changes the
digitally signed firmware encryption keys rendering all
images, persistent data, data unreadable.
and temporary data used 2.Secure Storage Erase –
for processing and Erases temporary files and job
system functions data by overwriting
information one or three times.
3.Secure Disk Erase – Industry
standard ATA Secure Erase.
Overwrites all data on the
HDD.
4.Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

2040 Appendix A
Figure A-16 Certificate of Volatility (E57540dn; 2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Casey Campbell Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 4/10/2018

Certificate of Volatility 2041

 Glossary of terms

802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the
IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up
to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the
110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.

AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Functions include voltage
monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater
control signals are isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched
on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed
between series and parallel for temperature predictability).

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple
sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated
scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).

Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The
airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the
page through the nozzles that are placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and
eject zone.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking
mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

2042 Glossary of terms

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover
the entire page width.

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints
an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor
the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5%
coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has
complicated images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.

DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load current supplied to an
electrical assembly.

DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components.
the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based
on the print command and image data that the host computer sends the formatter.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and
securely to email, network folders, other printers, and fax services.

DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all
data within the printer, such as printing data and received fax data.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).

Glossary of terms 2043

 Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).

Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP
printers use toner cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP
chip, or modified chip, or non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side
and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.

EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while,
at the same time, not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as
intended.

EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic
devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation,
products are generally engineered to function in the presence of some amount of EMI.

eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a
simple storage controller.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates
the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation,
which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector
graphic image information.

ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.

Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

2044 Glossary of terms

Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A
ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for
example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).

FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-
party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer
configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel
functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet.
Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software
program, or a command line interface.

Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a
heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and
pressure to make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when
it comes out of a laser printer).

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A
gateway is used to connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.

Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors
are represented by a range of gray shades from white to black.

Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color
are produced by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number
of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller
number of dots.

Glossary of terms 2045

 HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original
source document. The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).

IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs,
media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP
also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing
solution.

ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer
(formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.

2046 Glossary of terms

LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the
printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module
(TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current
(DC) voltages to various printer components and assemblies.

MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for
example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by
the manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety
of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode;
it is not functional when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.

MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionalities in a single physical
body. For example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.

MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage
between 500 V and 5 kV).

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a
single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print
data, developing and coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration information,
communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND
(flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).

Glossary of terms 2047

 OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging
unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should
be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.

Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components
must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.

PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like
dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one
print job to the next.

PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back
from the printer through the I/O ports.

PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in
electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed
and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.

2048 Glossary of terms

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)
The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer
as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue
and particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is
idle.

Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it
can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors
and printing documents properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room
for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics: speed and print quality.
More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.

REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in conjunction with mirrors
to sense the presence or absence of paper in the paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and
calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the
resolution.

SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub
Scanner Assembly (SSA).

Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is
contained entirely within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead,
and then collected in a container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical
sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol and collects
it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air
flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the
aerosol filter inside the duplex module.

SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the
printer.

SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
inter-process communication mechanism.

Glossary of terms 2049

 SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP
is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to
the server.

SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller
alternative to a standard DIMM device).

SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA,
which includes the document feeder and the image scanner).

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics
of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for
pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used
in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be
fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens
protection of encrypted credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both
generated by and protected by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without losing its ownership from
the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents
the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel
error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.

NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if
the TPM is a replaceable service part.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

2050 Glossary of terms

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The
first part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the
control panel).

Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been
used by paper makers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other
government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic
documents. It is an XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-
independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables
(FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Glossary of terms 2051

 Index

Symbols/Numerics automatic cleaning page intervals memory chip 117

set up 47 presence detection 117
10/100/1000 functions
remove 414, 1170
theory of operations 89
B replacing 415
550-sheet paper feeder covers
toner level detection 117
parts 2006 backup error
unpack 414
550-sheet paper feeder main body 32.WX.YZ error 319
cartridges, toner part
parts 2007 reset error 319
numbers 401, 1978
550-sheet trays restore error 319
caution vii
jams 327, 345 Backup/Restore (Maintenance)
certificate of volatility 2025
jams MFP 335 menu
Channel partners
jams SFP 321 control-panel menu 270
WISE viii, 149, 399, 406, 1976
76.00.24 320 base printer
checklists
configuration 10
pre-troubleshooting 151
A information 6
circuit base printer,
specifications 13
accessories 401, 1978 diagrams 236
basic printer operation 80
formatter 37 circuit diagrams, block
bin, output
accessories, input high-voltage power
locating MFP 7, 409
tray 3-5 142 supplies 91
locating SFP 6, 408
accessories, toner part circuits
blank pages
numbers 401, 1978 fuser control 101
troubleshooting 393
accessories) high-voltage power supply 100
block diagram
remove and replace 1928 clean the paper path
high-voltage power supply 99
accessory maintenance 46
low-voltage power supply 96
dual inline memory module 37 cleaning
Bonjour
embedded Multi-Media page 46
identifying 178
Controller 37 page automatic 46
browser requirements
hard-disk drive 37 rollers 46
HP Embedded Web Server 178
HP Internal USB Ports 37 tray 1 rollers 48
HP Trusted Platform tray 2-X rollers and separation
C
Module 37 pad 54, 63
part numbers 37 cables cleaning mechanism
acoustic specifications 29 USB, troubleshooting 393 ITB 123
assemblies 550-sheet paper calibrate the printer cleaning page 270, 271
feeder print quality 367 automatic 46, 47
remove and replace 1816 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control maintenance 46
assemblies base printer, remove panel 270 print 47, 372
and replace 813 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control- cleaning, base printer 46
assembly locations 408 panel menu 271 clutches
authorized service providers, calibration, color DC controller 94
parts 401, 1978 theory 120, 124 pickup, feed, and delivery
auto on / auto off mode cartridge system, engine 128
setup and operation 83 life detection 117 theory of operation 91

2052 Index
cold rest control-panel menu) DC controller firmware error
reset 275 Service (Maintenance) 273 70.WX.YZ error 320
color self calibration USB Firmware Upgrade DC motors 91, 92
theory 120, 124 (Maintenance) 273 defeating
component diagnostics conventions used vii interlocks 285
solve problems 211 cooling defeating interlocks
component test areas and fans 91 solve problems 201, 285
solve problems 218 fans 93 definitions and terms
components copy settings glossary 2042
DC controller 91 HP Embedded Web detection
engine-control system 91 Server 178, 179, 182 ITB 122
intermediate transfer belt copy-quality problems determine problem source 151
(ITB) 120 light or faint copies 389 developing unit
pickup, feed, and delivery 125 modify printer settings to engagement and
components diagram improve scan or copy disengagement control 119
fuser control 101 quality 388 development
configuration vertical lines, bands, or image formation 112, 113
base printer 10 streaks 384 development process 107
printer 1 copy-quality troubleshooting 382 devices, input
configuration page CoV information 31
determine installed certificate of volatility 2025 diagnostics
firmware 155 covers component, solve
find information 240 remove and replace 613 problems 211
solve problems 240 covers MFP engine 285
configurations, M552, M553, M554, parts 1989 diagrams
M555, and E55040 printers 10 covers SFP solve problems 220
configurations, M577, M578, and parts 1986 use parts lists and
E57540 printers 11 covers, locating SFP 7, 409 diagrams 1983
connection CPMD 309 diagrams, block
NFC 89 cross section diagrams solve problems 220
wireless 89 550-sheet paper feeder 222 diagrams, cross section 222
connectivity and performance base printer 222 diagrams, external plug and port
troubleshooting 392 CSR parts locations 230
connector error part numbers 405, 1982 diagrams, general circuit base
65.WX.YZ error 320 customer self-repair (CSR) A parts printer 236
connector locations and accessories 412 diagrams, major component
external plug and port customer self-repair (CSR) B parts locations 231
diagrams 230 and accessories 541 diagrams, printed circuit assembly
printed circuit assembly customer self-repair parts connector locations 224
diagrams 224 part numbers 405, 1982 diagrams, sensors and
control functions switches 220
fuser control 101 D diagrams, timing chart 235
control panel 88 digital send settings
DC controller
locating MFP 7, 409 HP Embedded Web
clutches 94
locating SFP 6, 408 Server 178, 179, 183
components 91
solve problems 288 digital sending error (firmware)
fans 91, 93
control panel diagnostic 44.WX.YZ error 319
motors 91, 92
flowcharts (M856/E85055/ dimensions, MFP printers 27
sensors 95
M776) 291 dimensions, SFP printers 24
solenoids 94
control panel messages 309 disable cartridge check
switches 94
control panel, MFP system solve problems 209
theory of operation 91
diagnostics document feeder
DC controller communication error
solve problems 288 jams 336
55.WX.YZ error 320
control-panel menu paper-feeding problems
Maintenance 270 (MFP) 357

Index 2053
 remove and replace parts 573 engine laser/scanner system firmware install error
whole unit replacement 1984 laser/scanner failure 99.WX.YZ error 320
document feeder / scanner detection 106 hard disk error 320
theory of operations 73 laser/scanner safety 107 remote firmware upgrade
document feeder and scanner engine test error 320
information 2 solve problems 160, 285 firmware locations
specifications 3 engine-control system active and repository 277
document feeder error components 91 firmware upgrade
31.WX.YZ error 319 event log error (firmware) firmware version
doors 42.WX.YZ error 319 determine 155
remove and replace 613 exhaust fans 91 firmware upgrade)
drum cleaning 107 exploded parts views, use parts embedded web server 154
image formation 115 lists and diagrams 1983 USB flash drive, control
duplex unit Explorer, versions supported panel 154
motors 92 HP Embedded Web Server 178 USB flash drive, pre-boot
duplexer external panels menu 154
jams MFP 335 remove and replace 613 firmware, upgrade
jams SFP 321 external plug and port diagrams downloading 154
duplexer error locations 230 firmware, version determine
69.WX.YZ error 320 find information 155
duplexing reverse and duplex feed F firmware, version
control determining 154
factory settings
duplexing 136 flash memory
reset 275, 277
pickup, feed, and delivery theory of operations 90
failure detection
system, engine 136 flatbed
laser/scanner 105
duplexing unit scanning and image capture
low-voltage power supply 98
duplexing reverse and duplex (MFP) 78
motors 91, 92
feed control 136 flowcharts
faint copies
jam detection/prevention 136 troubleshooting 151, 152
copy-quality problems 389
reverse and duplex feed format disk
fan error
control 136 solve problems 277
58.WX.YZ error 320
formatter
fans
E locating MFP 8, 410
DC controller 91, 93
locating SFP 7, 409
electrical specifications 29 exhaust 91
formatter accessories 37
email problems intake 91
formatter control system 83
get help from WISE 392, 398 theory of operation 91
functions
Embedded Jetdirect error type/speed 93
low-voltage power supply 99
80.WX.YZ error 320 fax functions
functions and failure detection
Embedded Web Server (EWS) theory of operations 89
low-voltage power supply 96
assigning passwords 45 fax problems
fuser
features 178 get help from WISE 392, 398
jams 329, 348
features, security 41 fax settings
fuser bias
network connection 178 HP Embedded Web
high-voltage power supply 99,
engagement and disengagement Server 178, 179, 184
101
control Feed speed control
fuser circuits
developing unit 119 pickup, feed, and delivery
fuser control 101
engine system, engine 130
fuser control 101
diagnostics 285 firmware
circuits 101
test page 285 determine the installed
components diagram 101
engine error (LaserJet) version 155
control functions 101
46.WX.YZ error 319 theory of operations 90
fuser circuits 101
63.WX.YZ error 320 firmware communication error
fuser control functions 103
engine error (PageWide) 49.WX.YZ error 319
fuser heater protection 105
61.WX.YZ error 320
fuser identification 101, 105

2054 Index
 fuser life detection 101 home button is unresponsive 291, image formation primary transfer
fuser temperature control 101, 294 theory of operation 113
103 HP Embedded Web Server image formation secondary
fuser unit life detection 105 copy settings 178, 179, 182 transfer
heater protection 101 digital send settings 178, 179, theory of operation 113
temperature control 101 183 image formation separation
fuser control functions fax settings 178, 179, 184 theory of operation 114
fuser control 103 general configuration 178, 179, image quality
fuser error 181 check toner-cartridge
41.WX.YZ error 319 HP Web Services 178, 179, 187 status 371
laser scanner error 319 information pages 178-180 tray 1 rollers, clean 48
paper path error 319 network settings 178, 179, 188 tray 2-X rollers and separation
fuser error (LaserJet) other links list 178, 179, 182 pad, clean 54, 63
50.WX.YZ error 319 print settings 178, 179, 182 image-formation process
fuser heater protection scan settings 178, 179, 183 development process 107
fuser control 101, 105 security settings 41, 42, 178, drum cleaning 107
fuser identification 179, 186 fusing process 107
fuser control 101, 105 supplies 185 laser-beam exposure 107
fuser life detection troubleshooting tools 178, 179, primary charging 107
fuser control 101 185 primary transfer process 107
fuser temperature control HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) secondary transfer
fuser control 101, 103 features 178 process 107
fuser unit life detection features, security 41 separation process 107
fuser control 105 network connection 178 image-quality
fuser wrapping jam detection HP internal users troubleshooting 359
pickup, feed, and delivery WISE viii, 149, 399, 406, 1976 print-quality assessment page,
system, engine 139 HP Web Services print 364
fusing enabling 178, 179, 187 print-quality troubleshooting
image formation 114 HVPS (high-voltage power pages, print 361
fusing process 107 supplies) information
operations 91 document feeder and
G scanner 2
I input devices 31
general configuration
printer 1
HP Embedded Web I/O functions
printer base 6
Server 178, 179, 181 theory of operations 89
information pages
glossary image capture system
configuration page 240
terms and definitions 2042 scanning (MFP6 only) 78
HP Embedded Web
image defects, repetitive
H Server 178-180
ruler 360
Jetdirect page 240
image formation development
hard disk partition error initial rotation period 80, 81
theory of operation 112
98.WX.YZ error 320 input accessory error
image formation drum cleaning
hard disks 67.WX.YZ error 320
theory of operation 115
encrypted 45, 46 input devices
image formation fusing
hardware integration pocket (HIP) information 31
theory of operation 114
is not functioning 291, 295 remove and replace, 550-sheet
image formation ITB cleaning
high-voltage power supplies paper feeder 1816
theory of operation 115
(HVPS) input/output error
image formation laser-beam
operations 91 40.WX.YZ error 319
exposure
high-voltage power supply 99 input/output functions
theory of operation 112
circuit block diagram 99 theory of operations 89
image formation pre-exposure
circuits 100 installation
theory of operation 111
fuser bias 99, 101 printer 32
image formation primary charging
operation 99 installation, base printer 37
theory of operation 111

Index 2055
 installation, document feeder / J job parser error (firmware)
scanner 33 47.WX.YZ error 319
jam detection
installation, input devices 63 printer calibration error 319
tray 3-5 142, 146
intake fans 91
jam detection/prevention
interface ports K
duplexing unit 136
locating MFP 8, 410
pickup, feed, and delivery keyboard 88
locating SFP 7, 409
system, engine 137 keypad
interlocks
jam error (LaserJet) locating SFP 6, 408
defeating 285
13.WX.YZ error 319
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) L
jam error (PageWide)
components 120
13.WX.YZ error 319 laser scanner error (LaserJet)
operations 120
jams 51.WX.YZ error 319
internal assemblies (1 of 5),
550-sheet trays 327, 345 52.WX.YZ error 319
parts 1992
550-sheet trays MFP 335 laser-beam exposure 107
internal assemblies (2 of 5),
550-sheet trays SFP 321 image formation 112
parts 1995
auto-navigation 321, 336 laser/scanner
internal assemblies (3 of 5),
auto-navigation MFP 335 failure detection 105
parts 1997
auto-navigation SFP 321 operations 105
internal assemblies (4 of 5),
causes of 322, 336 safety 105
parts 2000
causes of MFP 335 laser/scanner failure detection
internal assemblies (5 of 5),
causes of SFP 321 engine laser/scanner
parts 2004
document feeder 336 system 106
internal assemblies 550-sheet
duplexer MFP 335 laser/scanner safety
paper feeder 1816
duplexer SFP 321 engine laser/scanner
internal assemblies base
fuser 329, 348 system 107
printer 813
fuser wrapping jam last rotation period 80, 81
internal diagnostics error
detection 139 latent image formation 107
90.WX.YZ error 320
locations (MFP) 335 life detection
video display error 320
locations (SFP) 321 toner cartridge 118
internal parts 550-sheet paper
locations MFP 335 light copies
feeder
locations SFP 321 copy-quality problems 389
remove and replace 1816
lower-right door 327, 345 lines, bands, streaks
internal parts base printer, remove
output bin 334, 353 copy-quality problems 384
and replace 813
output bin MFP 335 local area network (LAN)
internal test and information
output bin SFP 321 locating MFP 8, 410
pages
right door 329, 348 lock
solve problems 240
Tray 1 322, 339 formatter 45, 46
Internet Explorer, versions
Tray 1 MFP 335 low-voltage power supply 96
supported
Tray 1 SFP 321 circuit block diagram 96
HP Embedded Web Server 178
Tray 2 324, 341 failure detection 98
IP Security 45, 46
Tray 2 MFP 335 functions 99
IPsec 45, 46
Tray 2 SFP 321 functions and failure
ITB
tray 3-5 142, 146 detection 96
cleaning mechanism 123
Jetdirect page operation 96
detection 122
solve problems 240 over-current/over-voltage
primary-transfer roller
JetIntelligence protection 96, 98
engagement and
toner cartridge 43, 118 sleep mode operation 96
disengagement control 121
job accounting error (firmware) voltage descriptions 97
ITB (intermediate transfer belt)
48.WX.YZ error 319 lower-right door
operation 120
job management error jams 327, 345
ITB cleaning
(firmware) 319
image formation 115
job pipeline error
(firmware) 319

2056 Index
M Support Tools menu Netscape Navigator, versions
Maintenance menu supported
maintenance
Troubleshooting HP Embedded Web Server 178
clean the paper path 46
menu 273 network port
cleaning page 46
Trays menu 270 locating SFP 7, 409
printer 32
Troubleshooting menu 273 network settings
maintenance, base printer 37
menu, control panel HP Embedded Web
maintenance, document feeder /
Backup/Restore (Maintenance) Server 178, 179, 188
scanner 33
menu 270 networks, E55040
maintenance, input devices 63
Backup/Restore menu 270 supported 16
major component diagrams
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 270, networks, E57540
locations 231
271 supported 22
major component locations
Reports menu 244 networks, M552/M553
diagrams 231
Service (Maintenance) supported 13
manual print modes
menu 273 networks, M554/M555
print quality 368
Service menu 270 supported 14
manual sensor test
Settings menu 245 networks, M577
solve problems 215
Support Tools menu 270 supported 17
memory
USB Firmware Upgrade networks, M578
toner cartridge 117
(Maintenance) menu 273 supported 19
Memory Enhancement technology
USB Firmware Upgrade NFC connection 89
theory of operations 90
menu 270 no control panel sound 291, 293
Memory Enhancement technology
menus control panel, control panel note vii
(MEt) 83
Calibrate/Cleaning) 270 NVRAM
memory error
menus, control panel theory of operations 90
82.WX.YZ error 320
Calibrate/Cleaning 271
EMMC error 320
motor control O
hard disk error 320
tray 3-5 142, 144
memory functions on/off button
motor error (LaserJet)
theory of operations 90 locating MFP 7, 409
59.WX.YZ error 320
memory, E55040 locating SFP 6, 408
motors
included 16 operating-environment range
DC controller 91, 92
memory, E57540 printer 30
failure detection 91, 92
included 22 operation
pickup, feed, and delivery
memory, M552/M553 high-voltage power supply 99
system 125
included 13 low-voltage power supply 96
pickup, feed, and delivery
memory, M554/M555 Sleep delay 83
system, engine 128
included 14 Sleep mode 83
stepping 91, 92
memory, M577 operation sequence 80, 81
theory of operation 91
included 17 operations
movement of paper through
memory, M578 laser/scanner 105
printer
included 19 toner cartridge memory 117
See pickup, feed, and delivery orderable parts 401, 1978
menu
multiple feed prevention
General menu 246 other links list
Tray 3-5 145
Manage Supplies menu 263 HP Embedded Web
Networking menu 265 Server 178, 179, 182
N
Print menu 189, 251 output accessory error
Settings menu Near Field Communication error 66.WX.YZ error 320
Print menu 189, 251 81.WX.YZ error 320 output bin
General menu 246 Bluetooth error 320 clear jams 334, 353
Print menu 189, 251 external I/O card error 320 clear jams MFP 335
Manage Supplies internal EIO error 320 clear jams SFP 321
menu 263 wireless error 320 locating MFP 7, 409
Networking menu 265 locating SFP 6, 408
Supplies menu 269

Index 2057
 over-current/over-voltage paper movement pickup and feed functions, other
protection duplexing unit 136 tray 3-5 142
low-voltage power supply 96, operation 125 pickup, feed, and delivery
98 paper path components 125
OXPd/Web kit error printer 125 duplexing unit 136
45.WX.YZ error 319 paper path sensor test overview 125
solve problems 213 pickup, feed, and delivery system
P paper path test fuser wrapping jam
solve problems 211 detection 139
page error
paper pickup jam detection/prevention 137
21.WX.YZ error 319
tray 3-5 142 PJL (printer job language) 83, 87
pages
part numbers PML (printer management
blank 393
customer self-repair language) 83, 87
not printing 393
parts 405, 1982 ports
printing slowly 393
formatter accessories 37 locating MFP 8, 410
pages per minute, E55040 16
supplies 37 power
pages per minute, E57540 22
partial clean (disk) consumption 29
pages per minute, M552/M553 13
solve problems 277 power connection
pages per minute, M554/M555 14
parts 401, 1978 locating MFP 8, 410
pages per minute, M577 17
550-sheet paper feeder locating SFP 7, 409
pages per minute, M578 19
covers 2006 power management
panels, external
550-sheet paper feeder main E55040/E57540 86
remove and replace 613
body 2007 M552/M553/M554/M555/
paper
covers MFP 1989 M577 87
jams 322, 336
covers SFP 1986 M552/M553/M554/M555/M577/
jams MFP 335
document feeder and scanner M578/E55040/E57540 84
jams SFP 321
whole units 1984 M577/M578/E55040/
selecting 373
use parts lists and E57540 85
paper handling
diagrams 1983 theory of operation 84
solve problems 321
parts and diagrams, using 1983 power switch
paper handling error (LaserJet)
parts internal 550-sheet paper locating MFP 7, 409
56.WX.YZ error 320
feeder locating SFP 6, 408
paper jams
remove and replace 1816 pre-boot menu options 160
550-sheet trays 327, 345
parts internal base printer, remove pre-exposure
550-sheet trays MFP 335
and replace 813 image formation 111
550-sheet trays SFP 321
parts list and diagrams, how to pre-troubleshooting checklist 151
document feeder 336
use 1983 primary charging
duplexer MFP 335
parts, internal assemblies (1 of image formation 111
duplexer SFP 321
5) 1992 primary charging process 107
fuser 329, 348
parts, internal assemblies (2 of primary-transfer roller
locations (MFP 335
5) 1995 engagement and
locations (SFP) 321
parts, internal assemblies (3 of disengagement control
locations MFP 335
5) 1997 ITB 121
locations SFP 321
parts, internal assemblies (4 of print a cleaning page 47, 372
lower-right door 327, 345
5) 2000 print a print-quality assessment
output bin 334, 353
parts, internal assemblies (5 of page 364
output bin MFP 335
5) 2004 print a print-quality
output bin SFP 321
parts, order by authorized service troubleshooting pages 361
right door 329, 348
providers 401, 1978 print bar error (PageWide)
Tray 1 322, 339
parts, orderable 401, 1978 62.WX.YZ error 320
Tray 1 MFP 335
parts, ordering 401, 1978 print quality
Tray 1 SFP 321
performance and connectivity manual print modes 368
Tray 2 324, 341
troubleshooting 392 print settings
Tray 2 MFP 335
periods of the operation HP Embedded Web
Tray 2 SFP 321
sequence 80, 81 Server 178, 179, 182

2058 Index
print-quality assessment page R scanner
print 364 remove and replace parts 573
RAM
print-quality troubleshooting 360 scanner and document feeder
theory of operations 90
print-quality troubleshooting information 2
real-time clock error
pages specifications 3
11.WX.YZ error 319
print 361 scanner error
rear door
print/stop test 30.WX.YZ error 319
locating MFP 8, 410
solve problems 210, 212 scanner tests (MFP)
removal and replacement 399
printed circuit assembly diagrams solve problems 208
remove
connector locations 224 troubleshooting 208
toner cartridges 414, 1170
printer scanner, image
tray 1 pickup roller 49, 813
information, configuration, and whole unit replacement
remove and replace
specifications 1 part 1984
550-sheet paper feeder,
installation and scanner/document feeder
internal parts and
maintenance 32 theory of operations 73
assemblies 1816
operating-environment scanning
accessories 1928
range 30 image capture (MFP) 78
external panels, covers, and
resets 275 seal, toner cartridge
doors 613
space requirements 29 theory of operation 117
remove and replace parts
printer information, configuration, secondary transfer
document feeder /
and specifications image formation 113
scanner 573
document feeder and scanner secondary transfer
remove and replace, internal parts
specifications 3 processes 107
and assemblies base
document feeder and scanner security
printer 813
views 2 dynamic security 44, 119
repetitive image defect ruler 360
printer installation and Embedded Web Server
replacement parts
maintenance (EWS) 41
customer self-repair
base printer 37 encrypted hard disk 45, 46
parts 405, 1982
cleaning 46 HP Embedded Web Server
replacing
document feeder / (EWS) 41
toner cartridges 415
scanner 33 security error
Reports menu
input devices 63 33.WX.YZ error 319
control-panel menu 244
security 39 security settings
resets
printer job language (PJL) 83, 87 HP Embedded Web Server 41,
printer 275
printer management language 42, 178, 179, 186
reverse and duplex feed control
(PML) 83, 87 security, base printer 39
pickup, feed, and delivery
printer memory error sensor error
system, duplexing unit 136
20.WX.YZ error 319 54.WX.YZ error 320
revision history iii
printer resets 58.WX.YZ error 320
right door
solve problems 275 sensor test, manual
jams 329, 348
printer settings solve problems 215
roller, tray 1 pickup
copy-quality problems 388 sensor test, paper path
remove 49, 813
printer, base solve problems 213
rollers
configuration 10 sensor test, tray/bin manual
cleaning 46
information 6 solve problems 216
specifications 13 sensors
S
printing DC controller 95
period in operation safety pickup, feed, and delivery
sequence 80, 81 laser/scanner 105 system 125
troubleshooting 393 scan or copy quality improvement pickup, feed, and delivery
Process Cleaning Page 270, 271 copy-quality problems 388 system, engine 126
product number scan settings theory of operation 91
locating SFP 7, 409 HP Embedded Web sensors and switches diagrams
location MFP 8, 410 Server 178, 179, 183 550-sheet paper feeder 220
base printer 220

Index 2059
 document feeder 220 firmware, determine solving
separation version 155 direct-connect problems 396
image formation 114 format disk and partial clean space requirements
separation process 107 functions 277 printer 29
serial number image-quality specifications
locating MFP 8, 410 troubleshooting 359 base printer 13
locating SFP 7, 409 individual component document feeder and
Service (Maintenance) menu diagnostics 211 scanner 3
control-panel menu 273 internal test and information electrical and acoustic 29
service and support pages 240 printer 1
WISE viii, 149, 399, 406, 1976 LED diagnostics 203 specifications, document feeder
service ID major component locations and scanner
restore 275 diagrams 231 printer information,
Settings menu manual sensor test 215 configuration, and
control-panel menu 245 output is curled or specifications 3
sleep delay wrinkled 321, 355 standby period 80, 81
operation 83 paper does not feed stepping motors 91, 92
sleep mode automatically 321, 358 supplies 401, 1978
low-voltage power supply 96 paper does not feed from Tray HP Embedded Web
operation 83 2-X 321, 355 Server 185
sleep settings 83 paper handling 321 remove toner cartridges 414,
solenoids paper path sensor test 213 1170
DC controller 94 paper path test 211 replacing toner cartridges 415
pickup, feed, and delivery performance and connectivity toner cartridges 37
system 125 troubleshooting 392 unpack toner cartridges 414
pickup, feed, and delivery print-quality supplies error (LaserJet)
system, engine 128 troubleshooting 360 10.WX.YZ error 319
theory of operation 91 print/stop test 210, 212 supplies error (PageWide)
solve connectivity problems 396 printed circuit assembly 17.WX.YZ error 319
solve performance connector location Support Tools menu
problems 393 diagrams 224 control-panel menu 270
factors affecting print printer does not pick up switches
performance 393 paper 321 DC controller 94
print speeds 394 printer does not pick up paper pickup, feed, and delivery
printer does not print 395 or misfeeds 321 system 125
printer prints slowly 395 printer feeds incorrect page pickup, feed, and delivery
solve problems size 321, 354 system, engine 126
circuit diagrams 236 printer picks up multiple sheets theory of operation 91
component test 218 of paper 321 system error (LaserJet)
configuration page 240 printer pulls from incorrect 62.WX.YZ error 320
control panel 288 tray 321, 354 system requirements
control panel messages 309 printer resets 275 HP Embedded Web Server 178
copy-quality printer will not duplex or
troubleshooting 382 duplexes incorrectly 321, T
CPMD 309 355
terms and definitions
cross section diagrams 222 scanner tests (MFP) 208
glossary 2042
defeating interlocks 201, 285 sensors and switches
tests
diagrams 220 diagrams 220
disable cartridge check 285
diagrams, block 220 system diagnostics, MFP
engine 285
disable cartridge check 209 control panel 288
theory of operation 72
engine test 160, 285 timing chart diagrams 235
clutches 91
external plug and port location tray/bin manual sensor
DC controller 91
diagrams 230 test 216
firmware upgrade 154 troubleshooting tools 160

2060 Index
 engagement and NVRAM 90 Tray 1)
disengagement control, printer, base 80 pickup, feed, and delivery
developing unit 119 RAM 90 system, engine 130
fans 91 scanner / document feeder 73 Tray 2
image formation USB functions 89 jams 324, 341
development 112 USB hosts functions 89 jams MFP 335
image formation drum wireless functions 89 jams SFP 321
cleaning 115 timing chart, diagrams 235 pickup, feed, and delivery
image formation fusing 114 tip vii system, engine 130
image formation ITB toner Tray 2 lift operation
cleaning 115 image formation, use pickup, feed, and delivery
image formation laser-beam during 107 system, engine 130
exposure 112 toner cartridge Tray 2 media type detection
image formation pre- diagnostic test 285 pickup, feed, and delivery
exposure 111 JetIntelligence 43, 118 system, engine 130
image formation primary life detection 117, 118 Tray 2 multiple-feed prevention
charging 111 memory chip 117 pickup, feed, and delivery
image formation primary presence detection 117 system, engine 130
transfer 113 seal 117 Tray 2 paper pickup
image formation secondary toner level detection 117, 118 pickup, feed, and delivery
transfer 113 toner cartridges system, engine 130
image formation remove 414, 1170 Tray 2 paper presence detection
separation 114 replacing 415 pickup, feed, and delivery
ITB cleaning mechanism 123 supplies 37 system, engine 130
ITB unit detection 122 theory of operation 116 Tray 2 presence detection
JetIntelligence, toner unpack 414 pickup, feed, and delivery
cartridge 43, 118 toner cartridges, part system, engine 130
life detection, toner numbers 401, 1978 Tray 2 skew feed prevention
cartridge 118 toner level pickup, feed, and delivery
motors 91 toner cartridge 118 system, engine 130
primary-transfer roller toner-collection-unit door tray 2-X rollers and separation pad
engagement and locating MFP 8, 410 cleaning 54, 63
disengagement control, locating SFP 7, 409 tray 3-5
ITB 121 touchscreen blank, white, or dim input accessories 142
seal, toner cartridge 117 (no image) 291 motor control 142, 144
sensors 91 touchscreen control panel 88 paper pickup 142
solenoids 91 touchscreen has an unresponsive Tray 3-5
switches 91 zone 291, 292 electrical components 144
toner cartridges 116 transfer processes 107 multiple feed prevention 145
toner level, toner cartridge 118 transfer unit paper path 142
Tray 3-5 paper path 142 operation 120 tray lift operation 145
theory of operations tray tray presence detection 145
10/100/1000 functions 89 location assemblies, 550-sheet Tray 3-5 paper path
ADF / scanner 73 paper feeder 31 theory of operation 142
base printer 80 Tray 1 tray lift operation
document feeder / scanner 73 jams 322, 339 Tray 3-5 145
fax functions 89 jams MFP 335 tray motor error (LaserJet)
firmware 90 jams SFP 321 60.WX.YZ error 320
flash memory 90 Tray 1 paper pickup and feed tray presence detection
I/O functions 89 pickup, feed, and delivery Tray 3-5 145
input devices 142 system, engine 130 tray/bin manual sensor test
input/output functions 89 tray 1 pickup roller solve problems 216
Memory Enhancement remove 49, 813 trays
technology 90 tray 1 rollers locating MFP 7, 409
memory functions 90 cleaning 48 locating SFP 6, 408

Index 2061
 trays, E55040 CPMD 309 weight, MFP printers 27
capacity 16 determine the problem weight, SFP printers 24
included 16 source 151 wireless connection 89
trays, E57540 diagrams 220 wireless functions
capacity 22 diagrams, block 220 theory of operations 89
included 22 firmware upgrade 154 WISE
trays, M552/M553 HP Embedded Web email problems 392, 398
capacity 13 Server 178, 179, 185 fax problems 392, 398
included 13 image-quality HP internal users and Channel
trays, M554/M555 troubleshooting 359 partners viii, 149, 399, 406,
capacity 14 individual component 1976
included 14 diagnostics 211
trays, M577 performance and connectivity
capacity 17 troubleshooting 392
included 17 print-quality
trays, M578 troubleshooting 360
capacity 19 solve problems 160
included 19
troubleshooting U
blank pages 393
unpack
check toner-cartridge
toner cartridges 414
status 371
upgrade, product firmware 154
checklist 151
USB Firmware Upgrade
component test 218
(Maintenance) menu
control panel 288
control-panel menu 273
defeating interlocks 201, 285
USB functions
direct-connect problems 396
theory of operations 89
disable cartridge check 209
USB hosts functions
engine test 160, 285
theory of operations 89
flowchart 151, 152
USB port
format disk and partial clean
troubleshooting 393
functions 277
jams 322, 336 V
jams MFP 335
jams SFP 321 vertical lines, bands, or streaks
LED diagnostics 203 copy-quality problems 384
manual sensor test 215 views, document feeder and
network problems 396 scanner
pages not printing 393 printer information,
pages printing slowly 393 configuration, and
paper path sensor test 213 specifications 2
paper path test 211 voltage descriptions
print/stop test 210, 212 low-voltage power supply 97
printer resets 275
scanner tests (MFP) 208 W
system diagnostics, MFP waiting period 80, 81
control panel 288 warning vii
tray/bin manual sensor web browser requirements
test 216 HP Embedded Web Server 178
USB cables 393 Web-based Interactive Search
wired network 396 Engine (WISE)
troubleshooting tools HP internal users and Channel
control panel messages 309 partners viii, 149, 399, 406,
copy-quality 1976
troubleshooting 382

2062 Index